WO2025167872A1 - Communication method, communication apparatus and computer-readable storage medium - Google Patents
Communication method, communication apparatus and computer-readable storage mediumInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025167872A1 WO2025167872A1 PCT/CN2025/075715 CN2025075715W WO2025167872A1 WO 2025167872 A1 WO2025167872 A1 WO 2025167872A1 CN 2025075715 W CN2025075715 W CN 2025075715W WO 2025167872 A1 WO2025167872 A1 WO 2025167872A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- cell
- information
- new
- switched
- beams
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/08—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W16/00—Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
- H04W16/24—Cell structures
- H04W16/28—Cell structures using beam steering
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
- H04W24/02—Arrangements for optimising operational condition
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
- H04W24/08—Testing, supervising or monitoring using real traffic
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
- H04W24/10—Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
- H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
- H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
- H04W72/232—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal the control data signalling from the physical layer, e.g. DCI signalling
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/50—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
- H04W72/54—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria
- H04W72/542—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on quality criteria using measured or perceived quality
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method, a communication device, and a computer-readable storage medium.
- Beamforming is a signal processing technique that uses an antenna array to transmit and receive signals in a directionally controlled manner.
- signals are sent in a specific direction rather than omnidirectionally.
- This beam-based signal transmission method focuses signal power in a specific direction, increasing the likelihood of signal detection at the destination or improving signal reception quality.
- the terminal device performs beam measurement based on the configuration of the network device and sends a beam report to the network device.
- the beam report usually only includes beams with better quality.
- the role of this beam report is limited and cannot meet the needs of beam management or beam switching in more scenarios.
- the beam switching caused by network device control is not timely and needs further optimization.
- One of the technical objectives of the present application is to provide a communication method, a communication device and a computer-readable storage medium that can optimize existing beam reports, thereby further optimizing beam management or beam switching processes.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method comprising: sending first information, the first information comprising at least one of the following: information of a detected switching event, the switching event being used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information being used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched being the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched being the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information being used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell being the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group being the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
- the network device by reporting the information of the switching event to the network device, the network device can be informed of the switching event detected by the terminal device, thereby being able to know the channel changes of the terminal device.
- the network device can be informed of the deterioration of the channel quality of the terminal device based on the first information, thereby being able to perform beam management or beam switching in a timely manner.
- the network device can promptly know the beam and/or new beam with deteriorating quality in the current beam, so that the beam with deteriorating quality can be switched in a targeted manner.
- the first indication information includes at least one of the following: cell identification information of the cell to be switched, identification information of the reference signal RS resource configuration associated with the cell to be switched, identification information of the RS resource set associated with the cell to be switched, identification information of the RS resources associated with the cell to be switched, and identification information of the report configuration associated with the cell to be switched; and/or, the second indication information includes at least one of the following: cell identification information of the new cell, identification information of the RS resource configuration associated with the new cell, identification information of the RS resource set associated with the new cell, identification information of the RS resources associated with the new cell, and identification information of the report configuration associated with the new cell.
- the method also includes: receiving resource configuration information, the resource configuration information including at least one RS transmission parameter, the RS transmission parameter being at least one of RS resource configuration, RS resource set, and RS resource; wherein the at least one RS transmission parameter satisfies at least one of the following: the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more switching events; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the switching event associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each switching event includes the RS transmission parameter associated with the switching event; the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more beams; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the beam associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each beam includes the RS transmission parameter associated with the beam; the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more cells; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the cell associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each cell includes information about the RS transmission parameter associated with the cell; the first RS transmission parameter among the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with the current beam, and the second
- the method also includes: receiving report configuration information, the report configuration information including at least one report configuration; wherein the at least one report configuration satisfies at least one of the following: the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more switching events; each report configuration includes information about the switching event associated with the report configuration; the information about each switching event includes the report configuration associated with the switching event; the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more beams; each report configuration includes information about the beam associated with the report configuration; the information of each beam includes the report configuration associated with the beam; the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more cells; each report configuration includes information about the cell associated with the report configuration; the information of each cell includes information about the report configuration associated with the cell.
- the first information also includes at least one of the following: association indication information, the association indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following: the association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam, the association relationship between the cell to be switched and the new cell, the association relationship between the cell group to be switched and the new cell group; the new beam applicable to the first channel; the channel applicable to the new beam; the RS applicable to the new beam; the control resource set CORESET applicable to the new beam; the channel not applicable to the new beam; the RS not applicable to the new candidate beam; the CORESET not applicable to the new candidate beam; the probability information of applying the new beam; the probability information of switching to the new cell; the probability information of switching to the new cell group; the probability information of switching to the first target Probability information of the cell group; panel information corresponding to the beam to be switched; panel information corresponding to the new beam; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception; panel information corresponding to multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception;
- the transmission scheme is single transmission receiving point TRP transmission or multiple TRP transmission; wherein, the multiple TRP transmission includes at least one of the following: single frequency network SFN transmission, time division multiplexing TDM transmission, space division multiplexing SDM transmission, and frequency division multiplexing FDM transmission.
- the proposed unified TCI framework is a unified TCI activation or indication method for single TRP transmission or a unified TCI activation or indication method for multiple TRP transmission.
- the new beam includes a first beam, and the first beam satisfies at least one of the following: the first beam is not applicable to the first physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and/or the first physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, wherein the transmission time interval between the physical downlink control channel PDCCH that schedules the first PDSCH and the first PDSCH is less than or equal to the twenty-second threshold value, and the first PUSCH is a PUSCH indicated or activated by the downlink control information DCI format 0_0; the first beam is not applicable to the first RS, and the first RS does not apply a unified TCI state; the first beam is not applicable to the second RS, wherein the transmission time interval between the PDCCH that triggers the second RS and the second RS is less than or equal to the twenty-third threshold value; the first beam is not applicable to the first CORESET, and at least one SS in the search space SS associated with the first CORESET is a common search space CSS or a CSS other than type 3.
- the first information is transmitted to the current serving cell, and/or the cell to be switched, and/or the new cell.
- the method also includes: receiving a response to the first information, the response satisfying at least one of the following: the response is used to confirm or trigger at least one of beam switching, cell switching and cell group switching; the response includes indication information of the second target beam; the response includes indication information of the cell to which the second target beam belongs; the response includes indication information of the cell group to which the cell to which the second target beam belongs belongs; the channel to which the second target beam is applicable; the RS to which the second target beam is applicable; the CORESET to which the second target beam is applicable; the channel to which the second target beam is not applicable; the RS to which the second target beam is not applicable; the CORESET to which the second target beam is not applicable; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous downlink reception; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission; the second target beam applicable to the third channel; the type of unified TCI state; the unified TCI framework; the transmission scheme; the transmission scheme adopted
- the response to receiving the first information includes at least one of the following: receiving the response from the current serving cell; receiving the response from the cell to be switched; receiving the response from the new cell; or receiving the response from the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
- the method further includes: receiving third configuration information, where the third configuration information is used to reconfigure a physical cell identifier (PCI) list.
- PCI physical cell identifier
- an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method, the method comprising: receiving first information, the first information comprising at least one of the following: information of a detected switching event, the switching event being used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information being used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched being the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched being the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information being used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell being the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group being the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
- the first indication information includes at least one of the following: cell identification information of the cell to be switched, identification information of the reference signal (RS) resource configuration associated with the cell to be switched, identification information of the RS resource set associated with the cell to be switched, identification information of the RS resources associated with the cell to be switched, and identification information of the report configuration associated with the cell to be switched; and/or, the second indication information includes at least one of the following: cell identification information of the new cell, identification information of the RS resource configuration associated with the new cell, identification information of the RS resource set associated with the new cell, identification information of the RS resources associated with the new cell, and identification information of the report configuration associated with the new cell.
- RS reference signal
- the method also includes: sending resource configuration information, the resource configuration information includes at least one RS transmission parameter, the RS transmission parameter is at least one of RS resource configuration, RS resource set, and RS resource; wherein the at least one RS transmission parameter satisfies at least one of the following: the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more switching events; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the switching event associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each switching event includes the RS transmission parameter associated with the switching event; the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more beams; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the beam associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each beam includes the RS transmission parameter associated with the beam; the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more cells; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the cell associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each cell includes information about the RS transmission parameter associated with the cell; the first RS transmission parameter in the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with the current beam, and the second
- the method also includes: sending report configuration information, the report configuration information includes at least one report configuration; wherein the at least one report configuration satisfies at least one of the following: the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more switching events; each report configuration includes information about the switching event associated with the report configuration; the information about each switching event includes the report configuration associated with the switching event; the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more beams; each report configuration includes information about the beam associated with the report configuration; the information of each beam includes the report configuration associated with the beam; the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more cells; each report configuration includes information about the cell associated with the report configuration; the information of each cell includes information about the report configuration associated with the cell.
- the first information also includes at least one of the following: association indication information, the association indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following: the association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam, the association relationship between the cell to be switched and the new cell, the association relationship between the cell group to be switched and the new cell group; the new beam applicable to the first channel; the channel applicable to the new beam; the RS applicable to the new beam; the control resource set CORESET applicable to the new beam; the channel not applicable to the new beam; the RS not applicable to the new beam; the CORESET not applicable to the new beam; the probability information of applying the new beam; the probability information of switching to the new cell; the probability information of switching to the new cell group; the Panel information corresponding to the beam to be switched; panel information corresponding to the new beam; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception; panel information corresponding to multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous uplink transmission; indication information of
- the transmission scheme is single transmission receiving point TRP transmission or multiple TRP transmission; wherein, the multiple TRP transmission includes at least one of the following: single frequency network SFN transmission, time division multiplexing TDM transmission, space division multiplexing SDM transmission, and frequency division multiplexing FDM transmission.
- the proposed unified TCI framework is a unified TCI activation or indication method for single TRP transmission or a unified TCI activation or indication method for multiple TRP transmission.
- the new beam includes a first beam, and the first beam satisfies at least one of the following: the first beam is not applicable to the first physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and/or the first physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, wherein the transmission time interval between the physical downlink control channel PDCCH that schedules the first PDSCH and the first PDSCH is less than or equal to the twenty-second threshold value, and the first PUSCH is a PUSCH indicated or activated by the downlink control information DCI format 0_0; the first beam is not applicable to the first RS, and the first RS does not apply a unified TCI state; the first beam is not applicable to the second RS, wherein the transmission time interval between the PDCCH that triggers the second RS and the second RS is less than or equal to the twenty-third threshold value; the first beam is not applicable to the first CORESET, and at least one SS in the search space SS associated with the first CORESET is a common search space CSS or a CSS other than type 3.
- the first information is transmitted to the current serving cell, and/or the cell to be switched, and/or the new cell.
- the method also includes: sending a response to the first information, the response satisfying at least one of the following: the response is used to confirm or trigger at least one of beam switching, cell switching and cell group switching; indication information of the second target beam; indication information of the cell to which the second target beam belongs; indication information of the cell group to which the cell to which the second target beam belongs belongs; the channel to which the second target beam is applicable; the RS to which the second target beam is applicable; the CORESET to which the second target beam is applicable; the channel to which the second target beam is not applicable; the RS to which the second target beam is not applicable; the CORESET to which the second target beam is not applicable; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous downlink reception; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission; the second target beam applicable to the third channel; the type of unified TCI state; the unified TCI framework; the transmission scheme; the transmission scheme adopted by the fourth channel; the beam training method
- the response to sending the first information includes at least one of the following: sending the response in the current serving cell; sending the response in the cell to be switched; sending the response in the new cell; sending the response in the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
- the method further includes: sending third configuration information, where the third configuration information is used to reconfigure the physical cell identifier (PCI) list.
- PCI physical cell identifier
- an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, which includes: a sending module for sending first information, the first information including at least one of the following: information of a detected switching event, the switching event being used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information being used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched being the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched being the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information being used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell being the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group being the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
- a sending module for sending first information, the first information including at least one of the following: information of a detected switching event, the switching event being used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information being used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to
- an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, comprising: a receiving module for receiving first information, the first information comprising at least one of the following: information of a detected switching event, the switching event being used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information being used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched being the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched being the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information being used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell being the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group being the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
- an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium having a computer program stored thereon.
- the computer program is executed by a processor, the communication method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect is executed.
- an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device comprising a memory and a processor, wherein the memory stores a computer program that can be run on the processor, and the processor executes the steps of the communication method of the first aspect when running the computer program.
- an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, including a memory and a processor, wherein the memory stores a computer program that can be run on the processor, and when the processor runs the computer program, it executes the steps of the communication method provided in the second aspect.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a chip (or a communication device) on which a computer program is stored.
- the computer program is executed by the chip, the method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect is executed.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a chip module having a computer program stored thereon.
- the computer program is executed by the chip module, the method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect is executed.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program.
- the computer program runs on a computer, it enables the computer to execute the method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, comprising an apparatus for executing the method of the first aspect and an apparatus for executing the method provided by the second aspect.
- FIG1 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction in a first communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a second communication method in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG3 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a third communication method in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG4 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a fourth communication method in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG5 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a fifth communication method in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG7 is a schematic flow chart of a beam switching method in an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG8 is a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG11 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a communication device in an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication systems to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable include, but are not limited to, long-term evolution (LTE) systems, fifth-generation (5G) systems (such as new radio (NR) systems), and future evolution systems or multiple communication convergence systems.
- LTE long-term evolution
- 5G fifth-generation
- NR new radio
- the 5G system may be a non-standalone (NSA) 5G system or a standalone (SA) 5G system.
- SA standalone
- the solutions of the embodiments of the present application may also be applicable to future new communication systems, such as sixth-generation (6G) communication systems and seventh-generation (7G) communication systems.
- This application mainly relates to the communication between terminal devices (or simply referred to as terminals) and network devices.
- the terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application may refer to various forms of user equipment (User Equipment, abbreviated as UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station (Mobile Station, abbreviated as MS), remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal equipment (Terminal Equipment), wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device.
- UE User Equipment
- MS Mobile Station
- the terminal may also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), a handheld device with wireless communication function, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, a terminal in a future 5G network or a terminal in a future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN), etc., and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
- the terminal equipment may be an electronic device with a data wireless transmission function.
- the terminal device may also be a device with transceiver functions, such as a chip system, wherein the chip system may include a chip and may also include other discrete devices.
- the equipment providing base station functions in NR includes the next generation node base station (gNB) and the evolved node B (ng-eNB).
- the gNB and the terminal communicate using NR technology, and the ng-eNB and the terminal communicate using evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) technology.
- E-UTRA evolved universal terrestrial radio access
- Both gNB and ng-eNB can be connected to the 5G core network.
- the network devices in the embodiments of the present application also include devices that provide base station functions in future new communication systems.
- the network devices may also be devices that provide wireless communication functions for terminal devices, such as chip systems.
- chip systems may include chips and other discrete devices.
- the beam report sent by the terminal device to the network device usually only includes beams with better quality, which cannot meet the needs of beam management or beam switching in more scenarios.
- the terminal device sends first information to the network device, and the first information includes at least one of the following: information about a detected switching event, the switching event is used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched is the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched is the cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell is the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group is the cell group to which the new cell belongs.
- the network device by reporting the information of the switching event to the network device, the network device can be informed of the switching event detected by the terminal device, thereby being able to know the channel changes of the terminal device.
- the network device can be informed of the deterioration of the channel quality of the terminal device based on the first information, thereby being able to perform beam management or beam switching in a timely manner.
- the network device can promptly know the beam and/or new beam with deteriorating quality in the current beam, so that the beam with deteriorating quality can be switched in a targeted manner.
- the network device configures or triggers the terminal device to report a beam report.
- the terminal device performs beam measurement and reports a beam report based on the reporting period configured by the network device and/or the trigger instruction sent by the network device.
- the beam report includes quality information of one or more beams.
- the network device obtains the channel quality based on the beam report.
- the network device instructs the terminal device to switch to a new beam or activate a new beam.
- the network device configures or triggers the terminal device to send a sounding reference signal (SRS).
- SRS sounding reference signal
- the terminal device sends the SRS based on the configured transmission period and/or trigger instructions sent by the network device.
- the network device measures the SRS and determines the terminal device's channel status based on the SRS measurement results. If the network device identifies poor channel quality, it instructs the terminal device to switch to a new beam or activate a new beam.
- the existing beam management or beam switching are all initiated by the network device, and the terminal device only passively sends beam reports or SRS based on the configuration or triggering of the network device to assist the network device in determining the current beam quality. If the channel quality of the terminal device deteriorates, but the network device has not configured the terminal device to report beam reports or send SRS at this time, the network device cannot be informed of the deterioration of the channel quality in a timely manner, resulting in untimely beam switching, affecting the communication quality of the terminal device. If the network device obtains timely channel quality changes through frequent configuration or trigger signaling, it will increase the measurement and reporting overhead, as well as the reference signal and channel resource occupancy overhead.
- the terminal device In actual transmission, the terminal device usually detects changes in downlink beam quality earlier than the network device.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method.
- the terminal device in response to detecting a trigger event, the terminal device sends a first message.
- the terminal device actively reports the first information when one or more switching events are detected.
- the network device can learn about the channel changes of the terminal device based on the first information.
- the network device can learn about the deterioration of the channel quality of the terminal device based on the first information, so that beam management or beam switching can be performed in a timely manner. Therefore, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application is conducive to reducing the delay of beam management or beam switching.
- a beam is a communication resource that network devices and terminal devices can use to send and receive signals.
- the beam in the embodiment of the present application can be a wide beam, a narrow beam, or other types of beams.
- a beam can be expressed as a spatial relation, spatial domain filter, spatial filter, spatial parameter, spatial domain parameter, Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) state, Quasi Co-Location (QCL) parameter, etc.
- TCI Transmission Configuration Indication
- QCL Quasi Co-Location
- beam information may refer to information that can be used to determine or indicate a beam.
- the beam information may include any of the following: beam identification information, spatial relationship information, spatial filter information, spatial filter information, spatial parameter information, TCI information, QCL information, etc.
- the identification information of the beam may be a reference signal resource indicator or a reference signal resource index (index), where the reference signal may be a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), and accordingly, the reference signal resource indicator may be a CSI-RS resource indicator (CRI).
- the reference signal may be a synchronization signal block (SSB), and accordingly, the reference signal resource indicator may be an SSB resource indicator (SSB RI).
- the reference signal resource index may be a CSI-RS resource index or an SSB resource index.
- beam information is also referred to as "beam information”.
- downlink beam information can be generally represented by TCI status information or QCL information
- uplink beam information can be generally represented by TCI information or spatial relationship information.
- a cell can be expressed as a carrier, component carrier (CC), subband, frequency band, bandwidth, frequency point, physical cell, serving cell, or transmission and receiving point (TRP).
- CC component carrier
- TRP transmission and receiving point
- the cell information in the embodiments of the present application may include at least one of the following: cell index, cell identifier, physical cell identifier (PCI), identification information of RS resource configuration associated with the cell, identification information of RS resource set associated with the cell, identification information of RS resources associated with the cell, identification information of report configuration associated with the cell, and TRP identifier.
- cell index may include at least one of the following: cell index, cell identifier, physical cell identifier (PCI), identification information of RS resource configuration associated with the cell, identification information of RS resource set associated with the cell, identification information of RS resources associated with the cell, identification information of report configuration associated with the cell, and TRP identifier.
- PCI physical cell identifier
- the TPR identifier or TRP can be at least one of the following: control resource set, control resource set pool, control resource set group, terminal capability set, terminal capability, TCI state, TCI state pool, terminal capability value, terminal capability value set, reference signal resource, reference signal resource set, reference signal resource group, number of reference signal ports, antenna panel, antenna array, antenna subarray, antenna group, antenna subgroup, antenna set, antenna subset, serving cell, physical cell.
- the TRP can be uniquely identified by the various TPR identifiers listed above, and "TRP" in this document can be used interchangeably with the above concepts.
- the current beam refers to the beam currently being used by the terminal device.
- the number of the current beam can be one, or the number of the current beam can be multiple.
- each cell may provide one or more beams.
- the current beam may be the beam of the serving cell of the terminal device, or the beam of a cell other than the serving cell.
- the current beam may be the beam of a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
- the current beams are beams of the serving cell, and other beams are beams of other cells outside the serving cell.
- the number of current beams is one or more, wherein the current beams are all beams of the serving cell.
- the terminal device uses the beams provided by other cells but does not access or switch to other cells.
- the current cell refers to the cell to which the current beam belongs. In other words, the current cell refers to the cell that provides the current beam.
- the current cell may include a serving cell and/or a non-serving cell.
- the serving cell may include a primary cell and at least one secondary cell, and the current beam may include the current beam of the primary cell and the current beam of each secondary cell.
- a non-serving cell refers to a cell other than the serving cell.
- the current cell may include a neighboring cell. That is, the terminal device only uses the beam of the neighboring cell to transmit a channel or signal, but the neighboring cell is not the serving cell of the terminal device.
- an “alternative beam” refers to a beam configured by a network device. More specifically, an “alternative beam” may refer to a beam configured by a network device that is not currently in use by a terminal device. Alternatively, an “alternative beam” may refer to a beam available for measurement or selection by a terminal device.
- the “alternative beam” may also be described as a measurable beam, a configured beam, a selectable beam, etc.
- the name of the alternative beam is not limited herein.
- the network device may configure association relationships between beams, where one beam may be associated with another beam, or one beam may be associated with multiple beams, or multiple beams may be associated with multiple beams, or multiple beams may be associated with one beam.
- a current beam can be associated with one or more candidate beams.
- multiple current beams can be associated with multiple candidate beams.
- multiple current beams can be associated with the same candidate beam. For example, if a current beam is determined to be a beam to be switched, the candidate beam associated with the current beam can be used as a new beam, or a corresponding new beam can be determined or detected from the candidate beams associated with the current beam.
- a “candidate cell” may refer to a cell to which a candidate beam belongs.
- the number of candidate cells may be one or more.
- the candidate cell and the current cell may be different cells.
- the candidate cell may be a neighboring cell of the current cell.
- an association relationship may exist between the candidate cell and the current cell.
- the network device may configure a candidate cell group (or candidate cell list) for the current cell, and the candidate cells in the candidate cell group are associated with the current cell.
- handover event detection and/or new beam detection may be performed on the candidate cell associated with the current cell.
- a beam to be switched may refer to a current beam that meets a switching event.
- a beam to be switched refers to a current beam whose beam quality has deteriorated.
- This term may also be referred to as a beam that needs to be switched, a beam that is about to fail, an invalid beam, an unavailable beam, or a beam whose beam quality is continuously deteriorating. This document does not limit the name of the beam to be switched.
- a cell to be switched may refer to a cell to be switched.
- the cell to be switched may be a serving cell to which the beam to be switched belongs.
- the cell to be switched may refer to a serving cell that satisfies a switching event.
- the cell to be switched may include a primary cell and/or a secondary cell.
- a new beam can refer to an alternative beam that satisfies a handover event.
- a new beam can refer to a beam with improved beam quality.
- This document does not restrict the name of the new beam, and may also refer to a recommended beam, a recommended new beam, an available beam, or a beam with continuously improved beam quality.
- the new beam may include a beam in the current cell and/or a beam in the candidate cell.
- a new cell refers to a cell to which a terminal device recommends handover or a cell to which a network device instructs handover.
- the new cell may be the cell to which the new beam belongs.
- the new cell may be an alternative cell that satisfies the handover event.
- the new cell may include a primary cell and/or a secondary cell.
- the target beam may refer to the beam to which the terminal device is to switch.
- the target beam may be the first target beam, wherein the first target beam may be the target beam indicated by the first information.
- the target beam may be a second target beam, which may be a target beam indicated by the network device to the terminal device.
- the second target beam may be selected from the new beam indicated by the first information, or may be a beam other than the new beam indicated by the first information.
- the measurement RS may be an RS used for measurement.
- the measurement RS may be a positioning reference signal (PRS), a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS), or the like.
- PRS positioning reference signal
- CSI-RS channel state information-reference signal
- beam quality may be a measurement result obtained by measuring the measurement RS.
- Beam quality may include at least one of the following measurement results: Reference Signal Receiving Power (RSRP), Reference Signal Receiving Quality (RSRQ), Signal to Interference & Noise Ratio (SINR), Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI), etc.
- RSRP Reference Signal Receiving Power
- RSRQ Reference Signal Receiving Quality
- SINR Signal to Interference & Noise Ratio
- SNR Signal-to-noise ratio
- CQI Channel Quality Indicator
- RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication
- the network device may configure measurement RS resources for each cell, and the beam quality of a beam within the cell may be obtained based on the RS measurement of the cell to which the beam belongs.
- beam interference refers to interference between one beam and another.
- a terminal device can measure beam interference using an interference measurement resource (IMR).
- IMR is a dedicated RS resource used for interference measurement.
- the beam interference of the beam can be obtained based on the IMR measurement of the cell to which the beam belongs, or based on the IMR measurement of cells other than the cell to which the beam belongs. Assuming that Beam 1 is provided by Cell 1, the terminal device can measure the IMR on Cell 1 to obtain the local beam interference of Beam 1. Alternatively, the terminal device can measure the IMR on Cell 2 to obtain the neighboring cell beam interference of Beam 1.
- the actions performed by the network device can be performed by the network device, a device in the network device (such as a processor, chip), a chip, etc.
- the actions performed by the terminal device can be performed by the terminal device, a device in the terminal device (such as a processor, chip), a chip, etc., and this application does not limit them.
- the embodiments provided in this application are described using the execution subjects as network devices and terminal devices as examples.
- FIG1 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a first communication method in an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication method shown in FIG1 may include S11 and S12.
- the S in each step number represents a step.
- switching event in this document can be used for beam management or beam switching. It should be noted that the term “switching event” in this document can also be described or replaced with “event,” “beam switching event,” “beam management event,” “beam event,” etc., and this document does not limit the name of the "switching event.”
- condition (1) may mean that the beam quality of any current beam among the X current beams is less than or equal to the first threshold value.
- Condition (2) The beam quality of the candidate beam is greater than or equal to the second threshold value.
- the Y candidate beams may be beams provided by different cells or beams provided by the same cell.
- the current beam in condition (3) may be a beam that satisfies condition (1), and/or the alternative beam in condition (3) may be an alternative beam that satisfies condition (2). This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
- condition (3) may mean that the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of at least X” current beams.
- condition (3) may mean that the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of any current beam. That is, for any current beam, the beam quality of the current beam is compared with the beam quality of an alternative beam. If the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current beam, then the alternative beam and the current beam meet condition (3).
- the current beam in condition (4) can be the current beam that meets condition (1), and/or, the alternative beam in condition (4) can be the alternative beam that meets condition (2), and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
- condition (4) may mean that the beam quality of the alternative beam satisfies: being greater than or equal to the beam quality of each current beam in at least X” current beams, and the difference between the beam quality of the alternative beam and the beam quality of each current beam in the X” current beams is greater than or equal to a third threshold value. That is, the beam qualities of the X” current beams are compared with the beam quality of an alternative beam respectively. If the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the X” current beams, and the difference between the beam quality of the alternative beam and the beam quality of each current beam is greater than or equal to the third threshold value, then the alternative beam and the X” current beams satisfy condition (4).
- the beam quality of beam 6 is greater than or equal to the beam quality of beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively, and the differences between the beam quality of beam 6 and the beam quality of beam 1, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively, are all greater than or equal to the third threshold value, but the difference between the beam quality of beam 6 and the beam quality of beam 2 is less than the third threshold value, then beam 6 does not meet condition (4).
- condition (4) may mean that the beam quality of the candidate beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of any current beam, and the difference between the beam quality of the candidate beam and the beam quality of the current beam is greater than or equal to a third threshold. That is, for any current beam, the beam quality of the current beam is compared with the beam quality of an candidate beam. If the beam quality of the candidate beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current beam, and the difference between the two is greater than or equal to the third threshold, then the candidate beam and the current beam meet condition (4).
- the current beam in condition (5) may be a beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (1), (3), and (4).
- the number of current beams is X.
- the X current beams may be beams provided by different cells or beams provided by the same cell.
- condition (5) may mean that the beam interference of any current beam among the X current beams is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold value.
- Condition (6) The beam interference of the candidate beam is less than or equal to the fifth threshold.
- the candidate beam in condition (6) may be a beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (2) to (4).
- the Y candidate beams may be beams provided by different cells or beams provided by the same cell.
- condition (6) may mean that the beam interference of any one of the Y candidate beams is less than or equal to the fifth threshold value.
- the beam interference of the candidate beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam.
- the current beam in condition (7) may be a current beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (1), (3), (4) and (5), and/or the alternative beam in condition (7) may be an alternative beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (2) to (4) and (6).
- This embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
- condition (7) may mean that the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam qualities of at least X"" current beams.
- X"" is a positive integer, X"" ⁇ X.
- X"" X.
- the beam interference of X"" current beams is compared with the beam interference of an alternative beam respectively. If the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of X"" current beams, then the alternative beam and the X"" current beams meet condition (7).
- condition (7) may mean that the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of any current beam. That is, for any current beam, the beam interference of the current beam is compared with the beam interference of an alternative beam. If the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam, then the alternative beam and the current beam meet condition (7).
- the beam interference of the candidate beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam, and the difference between the beam interference of the current beam and the beam interference of the candidate beam is greater than or equal to a sixth threshold value.
- the current beam in condition (8) may be a current beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (1), (3), (4) and (5), and/or the alternative beam in condition (7) may be an alternative beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (2) to (4) and (6).
- condition (8) may mean that the beam interference of the alternative beam satisfies: less than or equal to the beam interference of each current beam in at least X"" current beams, and the difference between the beam interference of each current beam in at least X"" current beams and the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the sixth threshold value. That is to say, the beam interferences of the X"" current beams are compared with the beam interference of an alternative beam respectively.
- the alternative beam and the X"" current beams meet condition (8).
- the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4
- Y 2
- the alternative beams are beam 5 and beam 6, wherein the beam interference of beam 5 is less than or equal to the beam interference of beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively, and the differences between the beam interferences of beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4 and the beam interference of beam 5 are all greater than or equal to the sixth threshold value, then beam 5 meets condition (8).
- the beam interference of beam 6 is less than or equal to the beam interference of beam 1, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively, and the differences between the beam interferences of beam 1, beam 3 and beam 4 and the beam interference of beam 6 are all greater than or equal to the sixth threshold value, but the difference between the beam interference of beam 2 and the beam interference of beam 6 is less than the sixth threshold value, then beam 6 does not meet condition (8).
- condition (8) may mean that the alternative beam satisfies: the beam interference is less than or equal to the beam interference of any current beam, and the difference between the beam interference of the current beam and the beam interference of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to a sixth threshold value. That is, for any current beam, the beam interference of the current beam is compared with the beam interference of an alternative beam. If the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam, and the difference between the beam interference of the current beam and the beam interference of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the sixth threshold value, then the alternative beam and the current beam satisfy condition (8).
- X’, X”, X”’, X””, Y’ and Y can be configured by the network device, or can be defined by the protocol.
- the beam quality of the cell in this article can be obtained by measuring the measurement RS resources configured by the network device in the cell.
- the beam quality of the current cell may be a first result obtained based on the beam quality of at least one current beam in the current cell.
- M is a positive integer. That is, for a current cell, the beam quality of the current cell may be determined based on the beam quality of at least one current beam in the current cell.
- the beam quality of the current cell satisfies condition (9)
- it can be regarded as that all current beams in the current cell satisfy condition (9), or that the current beam used to determine the first result satisfies condition (9).
- cell 1 is the current cell
- the first result of cell 1 is less than or equal to the seventh threshold value
- cell 1 satisfies condition (9).
- cell 1 does not satisfy condition (9).
- Example 1 The first result is the beam quality of the beam with the best or worst beam quality among the M current beams.
- Example 2 The first result is the average value of the beam qualities of M current beams.
- Example 3 The first result is the average of the beam qualities of the M’ beams with the best or worst beam qualities among the M current beams, where M’ is a positive integer greater than 1, and M’ ⁇ M.
- Example 4 The first result is the average value of the beam qualities of the beams in the M current beams whose beam qualities are greater than or equal to the nineteenth threshold value, or the first result is the average value of the beam qualities of the beams in the M current beams whose beam qualities are less than or equal to the nineteenth threshold value.
- the beam quality of the current cell may refer to the beam quality of each current beam in the M current beams of the current cell. Specifically, for a current cell, if the beam qualities of all current beams in the current cell are less than or equal to the seventh threshold value, the current cell satisfies condition (9). Conversely, if the beam quality of any current beam in the current cell is greater than the seventh threshold value, the current cell does not satisfy condition (9). In this implementation, if the beam quality of a current cell satisfies condition (9), it can be regarded as that all current beams in the current cell satisfy condition (9).
- condition (9) if the beam quality of one or more beams in the M current beams is greater than the seventh threshold value, cell 1 does not satisfy condition (9).
- Condition (10) The beam quality of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the eighth threshold value.
- N beams in a candidate cell are candidate beams, where N is a positive integer
- the second result is exemplarily described below with reference to a specific example.
- Example 5 The second result is the beam quality of the beam with the best or worst beam quality among the N candidate beams.
- Example 7 The second result is the average value of the beam qualities of the N’ beams with the best or worst beam qualities among the N candidate beams, where N’ is a positive integer greater than 1, and N’ ⁇ N.
- the beam quality of the alternative cell may refer to the beam quality of each alternative beam in the N alternative beams of the alternative cell. Specifically, for an alternative cell, if the beam qualities of all alternative beams in the alternative cell are greater than or equal to the eighth threshold value, the alternative cell meets condition (10). Conversely, if the beam quality of any alternative beam in the alternative cell is less than the eighth threshold value, the alternative cell does not meet condition (10). In this implementation, if the beam quality of an alternative cell meets condition (10), it can be regarded as that all alternative beams in the alternative cell meet condition (10).
- cell 2 is an alternative cell and the N beams in cell 2 are alternative beams
- the beam qualities of the N alternative beams are greater than or equal to the eighth threshold value
- cell 2 meets condition (10).
- the beam quality of one or more beams among the N candidate beams is less than the eighth threshold value, cell 2 does not meet condition (10).
- the beam quality of the alternative cell may refer to the beam quality of K' beams among the N alternative beams of the alternative cell.
- K' is a positive integer, and K' ⁇ N.
- the value of K' may be configured by a network device, or may be defined by a protocol. Specifically, for an alternative cell, if the beam quality of K' beams among all the alternative beams in the alternative cell is greater than or equal to the eighth threshold value, the alternative cell satisfies condition (10). Conversely, if the number of beams among all the alternative beams in the alternative cell whose beam quality is greater than or equal to the eighth threshold value is less than K', the alternative cell does not satisfy condition (10).
- Condition (11) The beam quality of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current cell.
- the beam quality of a current cell satisfies condition (11) and the beam quality of an alternative cell satisfies condition (11)
- the first result and the second result please refer to the relevant description above.
- the M beams in cell 1 are the current beams and the N beams in cell 2 are the candidate beams. If the second result obtained from the beam quality of the N candidate beams of cell 2 is greater than or equal to the first result obtained from the beam quality of the M current beams of cell 1, then cell 1 meets condition (11) and cell 2 meets condition (11). Conversely, if the second result obtained from the beam quality of the N candidate beams of cell 2 is less than the first result obtained from the beam quality of the M current beams of cell 1, then cell 1 and cell 2 do not meet condition (11).
- the beam quality of the current cell refers to the beam quality of at least one current beam among the M current beams of the current cell
- the beam quality of the alternative cell refers to the beam quality of at least one alternative beam among the N alternative beams of the alternative cell.
- condition (11) can be understood as follows, but is not limited to the following understanding:
- condition (11) can be understood as: the beam quality of each of the N candidate beams in the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of all current beams in the current cell.
- condition (11) can be understood as: the beam quality of at least N" beams among the N alternative beams in the alternative cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of all current beams in the current cell.
- N" is a positive integer and N" ⁇ N.
- condition (11) can be understood as follows: for each current beam in the current cell, there is at least one alternative beam in the candidate cell whose beam quality is greater than the beam quality of the current beam.
- condition (11) can be understood as follows: the alternative beams of the candidate cell include: at least one alternative beam corresponding to each current beam in the current cell, wherein the beam quality of the at least one alternative beam corresponding to each current beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current beam.
- the at least one alternative beam corresponding to different current beams can be the same or different.
- the beam quality of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current cell, and the difference between the beam quality of the candidate cell and the beam quality of the current cell is greater than or equal to the ninth threshold value.
- the beam quality of the current cell may be a first result obtained based on the beam qualities of the M current beams of the current cell
- the beam quality of the alternative cell may be a second result obtained based on the beam qualities of the N alternative beams of the alternative cell.
- condition (12) may also be understood as: the difference obtained by subtracting the first result of the current cell from the second result of the alternative cell is greater than or equal to the ninth threshold value.
- the beam quality of a current cell satisfies condition (12) and the beam quality of an alternative cell satisfies condition (12), it can be regarded as that all current beams in the current cell satisfy condition (12), or that the current beam used to determine the first result in the cell satisfies condition (12), and that the alternative beams in the alternative cell satisfy condition (12), or that the alternative beams used to determine the second result in the alternative cell satisfy condition (12).
- the first result and the second result please refer to the relevant description above.
- the M beams in cell 1 are the current beams and the N beams in cell 2 are the candidate beams
- the beam quality of the M current beams of cell 1 obtains a first result
- the beam quality of the N candidate beams of cell 2 obtains a second result of cell 2. If the difference obtained by subtracting the first result of cell 1 from the second result of cell 2 is greater than or equal to the ninth threshold value, then cell 1 meets condition (12) and cell 2 meets condition (12). Conversely, if the difference obtained by subtracting the first result of cell 1 from the second result of cell 2 is less than the ninth threshold value, then cell 1 and cell 2 do not meet condition (12).
- the beam quality of the current cell refers to the beam quality of at least one current beam among the M current beams of the current cell
- the beam quality of the alternative cell refers to the beam quality of at least one alternative beam among the N alternative beams of the alternative cell.
- condition (12) can be understood as follows, but is not limited to the following understanding:
- condition (12) can be understood as: the beam quality of each of the N alternative beams in the alternative cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of all current beams in the current cell, and the difference between the beam quality of each alternative beam and the beam quality of each current beam is greater than or equal to the ninth threshold value.
- condition (12) can be understood as: the beam quality of at least N" beams among the N alternative beams in the alternative cell satisfies: the beam quality is greater than or equal to the beam quality of all current beams in the current cell, and the difference between the beam quality and the beam quality of each current beam is greater than or equal to the ninth threshold value.
- N" is a positive integer
- N" ⁇ N is a positive integer
- condition (12) can be understood as: for each current beam in the current cell, there is at least one alternative beam in the alternative cell that satisfies: y-x ⁇ threshold_9, where x represents the beam quality of the current beam, y represents the beam quality of the alternative beam, and threshold_9 represents the ninth threshold value.
- condition (12) can also be understood as: the alternative beams of the alternative cell include: at least one alternative beam corresponding to each current beam in the current cell, wherein each current beam and each alternative beam corresponding to the current beam satisfies: y-x ⁇ threshold_9.
- the beam interference of the current cell is greater than or equal to the tenth threshold value, which may mean that the beam interference of at least one current beam in the current cell is greater than or equal to the tenth threshold value.
- the current beam whose beam interference is greater than or equal to the tenth threshold value may be considered to meet condition (13).
- the beam interference of the current cell may be a third result obtained based on the beam interference of at least one current beam in the current cell.
- Example 1 The third result is the beam interference of the beam with the largest or smallest beam interference among the M current beams.
- Example 2 The third result is the average value of the beam interferences of the M current beams.
- Example 3 The third result is the average value of the beam interference of the M’ beams with the largest or smallest beam interference among the M current beams, where M’ is a positive integer greater than 1, and M’ ⁇ M.
- Example 4 The third result is the average value of the beam interference of the beams in the M current beams whose beam interference is greater than or equal to the twenty-fourth threshold value, or the first result is the average value of the beam interference of the beams in the M current beams whose beam interference is less than or equal to the twenty-fourth threshold value.
- the M beams within the current cell are current beams. If the beam interference of any one of the M current beams is greater than or equal to the tenth threshold value, the current cell meets condition (13).
- the M beams within the current cell are current beams. If the beam interference of each beam in the M current beams is greater than or equal to the tenth threshold value, then the current cell meets condition (13).
- M beams within the current cell are current beams. If the beam interference of at least A beams among the M current beams is greater than or equal to a tenth threshold value, then the current cell satisfies condition (13). Wherein, A is a positive integer, A ⁇ M. The value of A may be configured by a network device or defined by a protocol.
- Condition (14) The beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold.
- the beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold value may mean that the beam interference of at least one candidate beam in the candidate cell is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold value.
- the candidate beam whose beam interference is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold value can be considered to meet condition (14).
- the beam interference of the candidate cell may be a fourth result obtained based on the beam interference of at least one candidate beam in the candidate cell.
- N beams in a candidate cell are candidate beams, where N is a positive integer
- the fourth result is exemplarily described below with reference to a specific example.
- Example 1 The fourth result is the beam interference of the beam with the largest or smallest beam interference among the N candidate beams.
- Example 2 The fourth result is the average value of the beam interferences of the N candidate beams.
- Example 3 The fourth result is the average value of the beam interference of N’ beams with the largest or smallest beam interference among the N alternative beams, where N’ is a positive integer greater than 1, and N’ ⁇ N.
- Example 4 The fourth result is the average value of the beam interference of the beams among the N alternative beams whose beam interference is greater than or equal to the twenty-fifth threshold value, or the first result is the average value of the beam interference of the beams among the N alternative beams whose beam interference is less than or equal to the twenty-fifth threshold value.
- N beams within the candidate cell are candidate beams. If the beam interference of any one of the N candidate beams is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold value, the candidate cell meets condition (14).
- N beams within the candidate cell are candidate beams. If the beam interference of each beam in the N candidate beams is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold value, then the candidate cell meets condition (14).
- N beams within the candidate cell are candidate beams. If the beam interference of at least B beams among the N candidate beams is less than or equal to an eleventh threshold value, then the candidate cell meets condition (14).
- B is a positive integer, B ⁇ N.
- the value of B can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
- the beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell.
- the beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell, which may mean that the fourth result of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the third result of the current cell.
- the beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell, which may mean that the beam interference of at least one candidate beam in the candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of at least one current beam in the current cell.
- the current cell and the alternative cell meet condition (15).
- the current cell if the beam interference of at least C candidate beams among N candidate beams in a candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of all current beams in the current cell, then the current cell and the candidate cell meet condition (15).
- C is a positive integer, C ⁇ N.
- the value of C can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
- the N candidate beams of a candidate cell include: at least one candidate beam corresponding to each current beam, then the current cell and the candidate cell meet condition (15).
- the beam interference of the candidate beam corresponding to each current beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam.
- the at least one candidate beam corresponding to different current beams may be the same or different.
- the beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell, and the difference between the beam interference of the current cell and the beam interference of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the twelfth threshold value.
- condition (16) may mean that the fourth result of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the third result of the current cell, and the difference between the third result of the current cell and the fourth result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the twelfth threshold.
- condition (16) may mean that the beam interference of at least one alternative beam in the alternative cell and the beam interference of at least one current beam in the current cell satisfy: the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam, and the difference between the beam interference of the current beam and the beam interference of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the twelfth threshold value.
- x'–y' ⁇ threshold_12 the current cell and the candidate cell meet condition (16), where x' represents the beam interference of the current beam, y' represents the beam interference of the candidate beam, and threshold_12 represents the twelfth threshold value.
- a current cell if the beam interference of at least C candidate beams among N candidate beams in a candidate cell and the beam interference of all current beams in the current cell satisfy: x'–y' ⁇ threshold_12, then the current cell and the candidate cell meet condition (16).
- C is a positive integer, C ⁇ N.
- the value of C can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
- the current cell group refers to the cell group to which the current cell belongs.
- the current cell group may be the cell group to which the current serving cell belongs.
- condition (17) if the beam quality of any cell in the current cell group is less than or equal to the thirteenth threshold value, then the current cell group satisfies condition (17). If the beam quality of all cells in the current cell group is greater than the thirteenth threshold value, then the current cell group does not satisfy condition (17).
- the current cell group if the beam quality of each cell in the current cell group is less than or equal to the thirteenth threshold value, then the current cell group meets condition (17). If the beam quality of any cell in the current cell group is greater than the thirteenth threshold value, then the current cell group does not meet condition (17).
- condition (17) if the beam qualities of at least D cells in the current cell group are less than or equal to a thirteenth threshold value, then the current cell group satisfies condition (17). If the number of cells in the current cell group whose beam qualities are less than or equal to the thirteenth threshold value is less than D, then the current cell group does not satisfy condition (17).
- D is a positive integer, and the value of D can be configured by a network device or defined by a protocol.
- the candidate cell group may refer to the cell group to which the candidate cell belongs.
- the candidate cell group if the beam quality of any cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the fourteenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group meets condition (18). If the beam quality of all cells in the candidate cell group is less than the fourteenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group does not meet condition (18).
- the candidate cell group if the beam quality of each cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the fourteenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group meets condition (18). If the beam quality of any cell in the candidate cell group is less than the fourteenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group does not meet condition (18).
- condition (18) if the beam quality of at least E cells in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to a fourteenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group satisfies condition (18). If the number of cells in the candidate cell group whose beam quality is greater than or equal to the fourteenth threshold value is less than E, then the candidate cell group does not satisfy condition (18).
- E is a positive integer, and the value of E can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
- the beam quality of at least one cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the beam quality of at least one cell in the current cell group.
- condition (19) may mean that the beam quality of any candidate cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the beam quality of each current cell in the current cell group.
- condition (19) may mean that the beam quality of each candidate cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the beam quality of each current cell in the current cell group.
- condition (19) may mean that: for each current cell in the current cell group, there is a candidate cell in the candidate cell group whose beam quality is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current cell.
- condition (19) may be understood as: the candidate cells in the candidate cell group include: the candidate cells corresponding to each current cell in the current cell group, wherein the beam quality of the candidate cell corresponding to each current cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current cell.
- the candidate cells corresponding to different current cells may be the same or different.
- the beam quality of at least one cell in the alternative cell group is greater than or equal to the beam quality of at least one cell in the current cell group, and the difference between the beam quality of at least one cell in the alternative cell group and the beam quality of at least one cell in the current cell group is greater than or equal to the fifteenth threshold value.
- condition (20) may mean that any alternative cell in the alternative cell group and each current cell in the current cell group satisfy: y"-x" ⁇ threshold_15, where x" represents the beam quality of the current cell, y" represents the beam quality of the alternative cell, and threshold_15 represents the fifteenth threshold value.
- condition (20) may mean that the beam quality of each candidate cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the beam quality of each current cell in the current cell group, and the difference between the beam quality of each candidate cell and the beam quality of each current cell is greater than or equal to the fifteenth threshold. That is, each candidate cell in the candidate cell group and each current cell in the current cell group satisfies the following condition: y′′-x′′ ⁇ threshold_15.
- condition (20) may mean that: for each current cell in the current cell group, there is a candidate cell in the candidate cell group whose beam quality is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current cell, and the difference between the beam quality of the candidate cell and the beam quality of the current cell is greater than or equal to the fifteenth threshold value.
- condition (20) may be understood as: the candidate cells of the candidate cell group include: the candidate cells corresponding to each current cell in the current cell group, wherein each current cell and the candidate cell corresponding to the current cell satisfy: y′′-x′′ ⁇ threshold_15.
- Condition (21) The beam interference of at least one cell in the current cell group is greater than or equal to the sixteenth threshold.
- the current cell group if the beam interference of any cell in the current cell group is greater than or equal to the sixteenth threshold value, then the current cell group meets condition (21). If the beam interference of all cells in the current cell group is less than the sixteenth threshold value, then the current cell group does not meet condition (21).
- the current cell group if the beam interference of each cell in the current cell group is greater than or equal to the sixteenth threshold value, then the current cell group meets condition (21). If the beam interference of any cell in the current cell group is less than the sixteenth threshold value, then the current cell group does not meet condition (21).
- a current cell group if the beam interference of at least F cells in the current cell group is greater than or equal to the sixteenth threshold value, then the current cell group meets condition (21). If the number of cells in the current cell group whose beam interference is greater than or equal to the sixteenth threshold value is less than F, then the current cell group does not meet condition (21).
- F is a positive integer, and the value of F can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
- the candidate cell group if the beam interference of each cell in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the seventeenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group meets condition (22). If the beam interference of any cell in the candidate cell group is greater than the seventeenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group does not meet condition (22).
- the candidate cell group if the beam interference of at least G cells in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the seventeenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group meets condition (22). If the number of cells in the candidate cell group whose beam interference is less than or equal to the seventeenth threshold value is less than G, then the candidate cell group does not meet condition (22).
- G is a positive integer, and the value of G can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
- the beam interference of at least one cell in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the beam interference of at least one cell in the current cell group.
- condition (23) may mean that the beam interference of any candidate cell in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the beam interference of each current cell in the current cell group.
- condition (23) may mean that the beam interference of each candidate cell in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the beam interference of each current cell in the current cell group.
- condition (23) may mean that: for each current cell in the current cell group, there is a candidate cell in the candidate cell group whose beam interference is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell.
- condition (23) may be understood as: the candidate cells in the candidate cell group include: the candidate cells corresponding to each current cell in the current cell group, wherein the beam interference of the candidate cell corresponding to each current cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell.
- the beam interference of at least one cell in the alternative cell group is less than or equal to the beam interference of at least one cell in the current cell group, and the difference between the beam interference of at least one cell in the current cell group and the beam interference of at least one cell in the alternative cell group is greater than or equal to the eighteenth threshold value.
- condition (24) may mean that the beam interference of each alternative cell in the alternative cell group is less than or equal to the beam interference of each current cell in the current cell group, and the difference between the beam interference of each current cell and the beam interference of each alternative cell is greater than or equal to the eighteenth threshold value. That is, each alternative cell in the alternative cell group and each current cell in the current cell group satisfies: x'-y'' ⁇ threshold_18, where x'' represents the beam interference of the current cell, y'' represents the beam interference of the alternative cell, and threshold_18 represents the eighteenth threshold value.
- condition (24) may mean that for each current cell in the current cell group, there is an alternative cell in the alternative cell group whose beam interference is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell, and the difference between the beam interference of the current cell and the beam interference of the alternative cell is greater than or equal to the eighteenth threshold value.
- condition (24) may be understood as follows: the alternative cells of the alternative cell group include: the alternative cells corresponding to each current cell in the current cell group, wherein each current cell and the alternative cell corresponding to the current cell satisfy: x'-y'' ⁇ threshold_18, wherein x'' represents the beam interference of the current cell, y'' represents the beam interference of the alternative cell, and threshold_18 represents the eighteenth threshold value.
- the condition included in the first event may refer to an entry condition of the first event.
- the terminal device may determine the number of consecutive times the entry condition is met based on a counter and a timer to detect the first event. For details about the counter and the timer, please refer to the relevant description of Example 4 below.
- the terminal device may continue to execute S12. By detecting the switching events, the terminal device may determine the beam to be switched and the new beam.
- the terminal device executes S12.
- the terminal device executes S12. That is, S12 is executed when all the switching events in the switching event group are satisfied.
- each handover event may have a priority. If the terminal device detects at least one of the P handover events with the highest priority in the handover event group, the terminal device executes S12. Wherein, P is a positive integer, and this document does not limit the value of P. For example, if all of the P handover events with the highest priority in the handover event group are detected, S12 is executed. For another example, if any one of the P handover events with the highest priority in the handover event group is detected, S12 is executed.
- the terminal device if the terminal device detects at least one of the handover events in the handover event group whose priority is greater than or equal to the 21st threshold value, the terminal device executes S12. For example, if all the handover events in the handover event group whose priority is greater than or equal to the 21st threshold value are detected, S12 is executed. For another example, if any one of the handover events in the handover event group whose priority is greater than or equal to the 21st threshold value is detected, S12 is executed.
- the terminal device sends first information to the network device, where the first information is used for beam management or beam switching.
- the network device receives the first information.
- the terminal device may report the first information based on the report configuration information.
- the report configuration information in the embodiment of the present application is used for reporting the first information.
- the first information may include at least one of the following: information about a detected switching event, a beam to be switched, and a new beam.
- information about a detected switching event e.g., information about a detected switching event
- a beam to be switched e.g., a beam to be switched
- a new beam e.g., a new beam
- the first information may be used for beam management.
- Beam management may include at least one of the following: beam measurement, beam reporting, beam training, and beam indication.
- the network device may perform beam management.
- the network device may configure the terminal device to perform beam measurement based on the first information, or, after receiving the first information, the network device may configure the terminal device to report a beam report.
- the beam report may be a beam report defined by an existing protocol, which is not limited in this embodiment.
- the network device may initiate a beam training process based on the first information.
- the network device may initiate a conventional beam training process. For example, if the first information does not indicate a new beam (e.g., only includes information about a handover event and/or only indicates a beam to be switched), the network device may initiate a conventional beam training process.
- the beam training process may be a P2 process or a P3 process.
- the network device may initiate beam training using the beam training method recommended in the first information. For details about the recommended beam training method, refer to the relevant description below.
- beam refinement can be performed around the new beam.
- the network device can perform beam scanning around the new beam. That is, the network device configures the CSI-RS with the repetition parameter set to off and transmits on multiple beams adjacent to the new beam.
- the terminal device receives in a fixed receiving direction to determine the optimal downlink receive beam.
- downlink reference signals such as SSB or CSI-RS
- the network device configures the CSI-RS with repetition on and repeatedly transmits the downlink reference signal in the direction of the new beam.
- the terminal device performs beam scanning to determine the optimal downlink reception direction.
- the network device can indicate the target beam to the terminal device based on the first information, so that the terminal device switches to the target beam.
- the network device no longer needs to configure the terminal device to report a beam. Instead, the network device directly indicates the target beam based on the first information triggered by the switching event, which helps reduce the latency of beam switching.
- beam management can be intra-cell beam management and/or inter-cell beam management.
- Intra-cell beam management may refer to the determination of a new beam for one or more beams to be switched in the cell where the beams to be switched are located.
- Inter-cell beam management may refer to the determination of a new beam for one or more beams to be switched in cells other than the cell where the beams to be switched are located.
- the first information may be used for beam switching.
- the network device may indicate one or more new beams included in the first information to the terminal device, and the terminal device may switch to the new beam indicated by the network device.
- beam switching may include intra-cell beam switching and/or inter-cell beam switching.
- Intra-cell beam switching may refer to switching from a current beam to a target beam, where the target beam belongs to the same cell as the current beam.
- intra-cell beam switching may refer to switching from a beam to be switched to a target beam, where the target beam belongs to the same cell as the beam to be switched. That is, the beam before switching and the beam after switching belong to the same cell.
- Inter-cell beam switching may mean that the beam before switching and the beam after switching belong to different cells. Specifically, inter-cell beam switching may mean switching from a current beam to a target beam, where the target beam belongs to a different cell than the current beam. Alternatively, inter-cell beam switching may mean switching from a beam to be switched to a target beam, where the target beam belongs to a different cell than the beam to be switched.
- the number of beams before switching and the number of beams after switching can be the same or different. That is, after performing beam switching or beam management, the number of beams used by the terminal device can remain unchanged or be different from the number of beams used before switching.
- a target beam can be determined for each beam to be switched.
- the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4, where beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4 are all beams to be switched.
- a target beam can be determined for each beam, and after beam switching is performed, the beams used by the terminal device are beam 5, beam 6, beam 7, and beam 8, respectively.
- a target beam can be determined for multiple beams to be switched.
- the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4, where beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4 are all beams to be switched.
- a target beam can be determined for beam 1 and beam 2, and a target beam can be determined for beam 3 and beam 4. After beam switching is performed, the beams used by the terminal device are beam 5 and beam 6, respectively.
- the terminal device may perform a first operation if the terminal device detects one or more switching events.
- the terminal device detects a switching event and, upon detecting one or more switching events, sends first information to the network device to assist the network device in performing beam management or beam switching.
- the terminal device detects a switching event and, upon detecting one or more switching events, sends first information to the network device to assist the network device in performing beam management or beam switching.
- the network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to configure a handover event.
- the terminal device receives the first configuration information.
- the network device may inform the terminal device of the switching event that needs to be measured through the first configuration information.
- the priority information of the handover event may be used to indicate the priority of the handover event.
- the service type associated with a handover event may refer to the terminal device detecting the handover event when performing the service type associated with the handover event.
- handover event 1 is associated with the Ultra-Reliable Low-Latency Communications (uRLLC) service
- handover event 2 is associated with the enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB) service.
- uRLLC Ultra-Reliable Low-Latency Communications
- eMBB enhanced Mobile Broadband
- the network device may send report configuration information to the terminal device, and the report configuration information may be used to configure the terminal device to report the first information.
- the report configuration information may configure uplink resources for sending the first information.
- the framework of the report configuration information may be the same as the framework of the existing configuration information for configuring beam reporting, or a new framework may be adopted.
- the report configuration information may include at least one report configuration, and the report configuration may be associated with a handover event.
- the association relationship between the report configuration and the handover event can be understood as follows: after detecting a handover event, the terminal device may send the first information based on the report configuration associated with the handover event.
- a reporting configuration can be associated with one or more handover events. For example, different reporting configurations can be associated with different handover events. Alternatively, multiple reporting configurations can be associated with a single handover event. By associating a handover event with a reporting configuration, a terminal device can learn how to report the first information after detecting a handover event.
- the reporting configuration may be associated with n handover events. After detecting at least one handover event among the n handover events, the terminal device may send first information based on the reporting configuration.
- the terminal device may send the first information based on any reporting configuration associated with the handover event.
- each of the m reporting configurations may be associated with n switching events.
- different reporting configurations in the m reporting configurations are respectively associated with different switching events in the n switching events.
- the following is an exemplary description of how the reporting configuration is associated with the handover event.
- Example 1 The report configuration information is associated with the first configuration information, and the report configuration in the report configuration information and the switching event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the report configuration information may include first configuration information, wherein one or more report configurations in the report configuration information may include information of the handover events associated with each.
- report configuration 1 includes an identifier of handover event 1, indicating that report configuration 1 is associated with handover event 1.
- report configuration 1 includes identifiers of handover event 1 and handover event 2, indicating that report configuration 1 is associated with handover event 1 and handover event 2.
- handover event 1 includes the identifier of report configuration 1, it means that handover event 1 is associated with report configuration 1.
- the information of handover event 1 includes report configuration 1, it means that handover event 1 is associated with report configuration 1.
- the network device may send resource configuration information to the terminal device, and the resource configuration information may be used to configure RS resources.
- the RS resources in this embodiment may be measurement RS resources, that is, RS resources used to measure beam quality or detect switching events.
- the resource configuration information may include at least one RS transmission parameter.
- the RS transmission parameter may be associated with a handover event.
- the "RS transmission parameter" herein may refer to an RS resource configuration, or may refer to an RS resource set, or may refer to an RS resource.
- the "RS transmission parameter” hereinbelow may be applied to or replaced by "RS resource configuration," "RS resource set,” or "RS resource.”
- the resource configuration information may include at least one RS resource configuration, each RS resource configuration may include at least one RS resource set, and each RS resource set may include at least one RS resource.
- the report configuration information may include resource configuration information, for example, the report configuration information may include an RS resource configuration associated with the report configuration. Alternatively, the resource configuration information may not be included in the report configuration information, and this embodiment does not limit this.
- the resource configuration information may include at least one RS resource set, that is, the resource configuration information is used to configure at least one RS resource set.
- the resource configuration information may include an RS resource set list.
- the resource configuration information may include at least one RS resource, that is, the resource configuration information may be used to configure at least one RS resource.
- the resource configuration information may include an RS resource list.
- the RS transmission parameter can be associated with the switching event.
- the association relationship between the RS transmission parameter and the switching event can be understood as follows: for a switching event, the terminal device uses the RS transmission parameter associated with the switching event to perform measurement to detect the switching event.
- RS transmission parameter can refer to RS resource configuration, and the terminal device uses the RS resources in the RS resource configuration associated with the switching event to detect the switching event.
- RS transmission parameter can refer to an RS resource set, and the terminal device uses the RS resources in the RS resource set associated with the switching event to detect the switching event.
- RS transmission parameter can refer to RS resources, and the terminal device uses the RS resources associated with the switching event to detect the switching event.
- one RS transmission parameter can be associated with one or more switching events.
- different RS transmission parameters can be associated with different switching events.
- multiple RS transmission parameters can be associated with one switching event.
- multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the same switching event can be used to detect switching events in different situations, for example, they can be used to detect switching events at different times.
- multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the same switching event can be used to measure the beam quality of different beams.
- the RS transmission parameter can be associated with n' handover events.
- the terminal device uses the RS transmission parameter to perform measurements to detect n handover events.
- n' 1
- m' RS transmission parameters are associated with the handover event. Different RS transmission parameters can be used for measurements in different situations to detect the handover event.
- each of the m' RS transmission parameters can be associated with n' switching events.
- different RS transmission parameters in the m' RS transmission parameters are respectively associated with different switching events in the n' switching events.
- the m' RS transmission parameters are RS transmission parameter 1 and RS transmission parameter 2, and the n' handover events are handover event 1, handover event 2, handover event 3, and handover event 4.
- RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with handover event 1, handover event 2, handover event 3, and handover event 4
- RS transmission parameter 2 is associated with handover event 1, handover event 2, handover event 3, and handover event 4.
- RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with handover event 1 and handover event 2
- RS transmission parameter 2 is associated with handover event 3 and handover event 4.
- Example a The resource configuration information is associated with the first configuration information, and the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the switching event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the network device may send resource configuration information and first configuration information separately to the terminal device.
- the resource configuration information and the first configuration information do not contain each other, but are associated with each other.
- Methods for associating the resource configuration information and the first configuration information include, but are not limited to, the following: the resource configuration information may include an identifier of the first configuration information, or the first configuration information may include an identifier of the resource configuration information, or the network device may indicate the association between the resource configuration information and the first configuration information through signaling.
- the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the handover event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the RS transmission parameters and the handover events may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identification.
- the RS transmission parameters identified as 1 are associated with the handover event identified as 1
- the RS transmission parameters identified as 2 are associated with the handover event identified as 2.
- the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include information about a switching event associated with the RS transmission parameters.
- the resource configuration information may include first configuration information, wherein one or more RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include information of respective associated switching events. For example, if RS transmission parameter 1 includes an identifier of switching event 1, it indicates that RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with switching event 1. For another example, if RS transmission parameter 1 includes identifiers of switching event 1 and switching event 2, it indicates that RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with switching event 1 and switching event 2.
- the information about the handover event in the first configuration information may include RS transmission parameters associated with the handover event, or the information about the handover event in the first configuration information may include information indicating the RS transmission parameters associated with the handover event.
- the information indicating the RS transmission parameters may be an identifier of the RS transmission parameters.
- handover event 1 includes the identifier of RS transmission parameter 1, which means that handover event 1 is associated with RS transmission parameter 1.
- a network device may send cell configuration information to a terminal device.
- the cell configuration information may be used to configure at least one cell.
- the cell configuration information may include cell information of at least one cell.
- the cell configured by the cell configuration information may provide a beam for the terminal device.
- the cell information may include a cell identifier, cell configuration, and the like.
- cells can be associated with handover events.
- the association between cells and handover events can be understood as follows: for a cell or beam provided by a cell, a terminal device can detect handover events associated with that cell. For example, if the current cell is cell 1 or the current beam is the beam of cell 1, and cell 1 is associated with handover event 1, the terminal device can detect handover event 1, but will not detect handover events not associated with cell 1.
- a cell may be associated with one or more handover events. For example, different cells may be associated with different handover events. Alternatively, multiple cells may be associated with one handover event.
- Example a' The cell configuration information is associated with the first configuration information, and the cell in the cell configuration information and the switching event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the network device may send the cell configuration information and the first configuration information to the terminal device separately.
- the cell configuration information and the first configuration information do not have an inclusion relationship, but are associated with each other.
- the manner in which the cell configuration information and the first configuration information are associated includes, but is not limited to, the following: the cell configuration information may include an identifier of the first configuration information, or the first configuration information may include an identifier of the cell configuration information, or the network device indicates the association relationship between the cell configuration information and the first configuration information through signaling.
- the cells in the cell configuration information and the handover events in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the cells and handover events may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identifiers.
- the cell identified as 1 is associated with the handover event identified as 1
- the cell identified as 2 is associated with the handover event identified as 2.
- the cell configuration information may include first configuration information, wherein the cell information of one or more cells in the cell configuration information may include information of respective associated handover events. For example, if the cell information of cell 1 includes an identifier of handover event 1, it indicates that cell 1 is associated with handover event 1.
- the information about the handover event in the first configuration information may include cell information of the cell associated with the handover event.
- the network device may send cell group configuration information to the terminal device.
- the cell group configuration information may be used to configure at least one cell group.
- Each cell group may include one or more cells.
- the cell group configuration information may include at least one cell group information.
- the cells in the cell group configured by the cell group configuration information may provide beams for the terminal device.
- the cell group information may include a cell group identifier, cell group configuration, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment.
- cell groups can be associated with handover events.
- the association between cell groups and handover events can be understood as follows: for a cell group, a cell within a cell group, or a beam provided by a cell within a cell group, a terminal device can detect handover events associated with that cell group. For example, if the current cell belongs to cell group 1, and cell group 1 is associated with handover event 1, the terminal device can detect handover event 1, but will not detect handover events not associated with cell group 1.
- a cell group may be associated with one or more handover events.
- different cell groups may be associated with different handover events.
- multiple cell groups may be associated with one handover event.
- Example a the cell group configuration information is associated with the first configuration information, and the cell group in the cell group configuration information and the switching event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the network device may send the cell group configuration information and the first configuration information to the terminal device separately. There is no inclusion relationship between the cell group configuration information and the first configuration information, but there is an association relationship.
- the manner in which the cell group configuration information and the first configuration information are associated includes but is not limited to the following: the cell group configuration information may include an identifier of the first configuration information, or the first configuration information may include an identifier of the cell group configuration information, or the network device indicates the association relationship between the cell group configuration information and the first configuration information through signaling.
- the cell group in the cell group configuration information and the handover event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the cell group and the handover event may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identification.
- the cell group identified as 1 is associated with the handover event identified as 1
- the cell group identified as 2 is associated with the handover event identified as 2.
- Example b The configuration of the cell group in the cell group configuration information may include information on a handover event associated with the cell group.
- the information about the handover event in the first configuration information may include cell group information of the cell group associated with the handover event.
- the information of one or more handover events in the first configuration information may include cell group information of the respective associated cell groups.
- the information of handover event 1 includes the identifier of cell group 1, indicating that handover event 1 is associated with cell group 1.
- association can also be understood or expressed as “correspondence” or “correlation.”
- correlation can also be understood or expressed as association.
- the network device configures a switching event to the terminal device, and the switching event can be associated with at least one of the following: report configuration, RS resource configuration, RS resource set, RS resource, cell, cell group, etc.
- the communication method shown in FIG3 may include S31 and/or S32.
- S31 The network device sends report configuration information to the terminal device.
- the terminal device receives the report configuration information.
- the report configuration information may include at least one report configuration.
- a report configuration may be associated with a beam.
- the association between the report configuration and the beam may be understood as follows: for a beam, if the beam satisfies a switching event (e.g., determining that the beam is a beam to be switched or determining that the beam is a new beam), the first information may be sent based on the report configuration associated with the beam.
- a switching event e.g., determining that the beam is a beam to be switched or determining that the beam is a new beam
- a report configuration can be associated with one or more beams.
- the report configuration information may include at least two report configurations, wherein one of the at least two report configurations is associated with the current beam, and another of the at least two report configurations is associated with the alternative beam. If one or more beams in the current beam are determined as beams to be switched, the terminal device may send first information based on the report configuration associated with the current beam; if one or more beams in the alternative beam are determined as new beams, the terminal device may send first information based on the report configuration associated with the alternative beam.
- a reporting configuration associates the current beam and the alternative beam. If one or more beams in the current beam are determined as beams to be switched, and/or if one or more beams in the alternative beam are determined as new beams, the terminal device can send first information based on the reporting configuration.
- multiple reporting configurations can be associated with one beam.
- one beam can be associated with at least two reporting configurations, one of the at least two reporting configurations is used to send the first information when the beam is determined to be a beam to be switched, and the other of the at least two reporting configurations is used to send the first information when the beam is determined to be a new beam.
- beam 1 is associated with reporting configuration 1 and reporting configuration 2, respectively. If the terminal device determines that beam 1 is a beam to be switched, the terminal device can send the first information based on reporting configuration 1. If the terminal device determines that beam 1 is a new beam, the terminal device can send the first information based on reporting configuration 2.
- association relationship between the report configuration and the beam can be understood as the association relationship between the report configuration and the RS resource.
- the following is an exemplary description of how the reporting configuration and beam association are performed.
- the report configuration information is associated with the beam configuration information, and the report configuration in the report configuration information and the beam in the beam configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the network device may send report configuration information and beam configuration information to the terminal device respectively.
- the beam configuration information may include beam information of one or more beams. There is no inclusion relationship between the report configuration information and the beam configuration information, but there is an association relationship.
- the ways of associating the report configuration information and the beam configuration information include but are not limited to the following: the report configuration information may include an identifier of the beam configuration information, or the beam configuration information may include an identifier of the report configuration information, or the network device indicates the association relationship between the report configuration information and the beam configuration information through signaling.
- the report configuration in the report configuration information and the beam in the beam configuration information may be associated according to a default rule.
- the report configuration and the beam may be associated in sequence according to the order of identification.
- the report configuration in the report configuration information may include beam information associated with the report configuration.
- the report configuration information may include beam configuration information, wherein one or more report configurations in the report configuration information may include respective associated beam information. For example, if report configuration 1 includes an identifier of beam 1, it means that report configuration 1 is associated with beam 1.
- the beam information in the beam configuration information may include a beam-associated reporting configuration.
- the beam information of one or more beams in the beam configuration information may include the respective associated reporting configurations.
- the information of beam 1 includes the identifier of reporting configuration 1, it means that beam 1 is associated with reporting configuration 1.
- the reporting configuration may be associated with a cell.
- the association between the reporting configuration and the cell may be understood as follows: for a cell, the beam quality of the cell and/or the beam quality of a beam within the cell may be carried in the first information corresponding to the reporting configuration associated with the cell.
- one reporting configuration can be associated with one or more cells.
- multiple reporting configurations can be associated with one cell.
- one cell can be associated with at least two reporting configurations, one of the at least two reporting configurations can be used to send the first information when the beam of the cell is determined to be a beam to be switched, and the other of the at least two reporting configurations can be used to send the first information when the beam of the cell is determined to be a new beam.
- the following is an exemplary description of how the reporting configuration is associated with the cell.
- the report configuration information is associated with the cell configuration information, and the report configuration in the report configuration information and the cell configured by the cell configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the network device may send report configuration information and cell configuration information to the terminal device separately.
- the report configuration information and the cell configuration information do not contain each other, but are associated with each other.
- the manner in which the report configuration information and the cell configuration information are associated includes, but is not limited to, the following: the report configuration information may include an identifier of the cell configuration information, or the cell configuration information may include an identifier of the report configuration information, or the network device indicates the association between the report configuration information and the cell configuration information through signaling.
- the report configuration in the report configuration information and the cell information in the cell configuration information may be associated according to a default rule.
- the report configuration and the cell may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identifiers.
- the report configuration identified as 1 is associated with the cell identified as 1.
- the report configuration in the report configuration information may include cell information associated with the report configuration.
- the report configuration information may include cell configuration information, wherein one or more report configurations in the report configuration information may include information of respective associated cells. For example, if report configuration 1 includes an identifier of cell 1, it means that report configuration 1 is associated with cell 1.
- the cell information in the cell configuration information may include a cell-associated report configuration.
- the cell information of one or more cells in the cell configuration information may include the reporting configurations associated with each cell. For example, if the information of cell 1 includes the identifier of reporting configuration 1, it means that cell 1 is associated with reporting configuration 1.
- one reporting configuration may be associated with one or more cell groups, or multiple reporting configurations may be associated with one cell group.
- the report configuration information is associated with the cell group configuration information, and the report configuration in the report configuration information and the cell group configured by the cell group configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the network device may send report configuration information and cell group configuration information to the terminal device separately. There is no inclusion relationship between the report configuration information and the cell group configuration information, but there is an association relationship.
- the manner in which the report configuration information and the cell group configuration information are associated includes but is not limited to the following: the report configuration information may include an identifier of the cell group configuration information, or the cell group configuration information may include an identifier of the report configuration information, or the network device indicates the association relationship between the report configuration information and the cell group configuration information through signaling.
- the report configuration in the report configuration information and the cell group configured by the cell group configuration information may be associated according to a default rule.
- the report configuration and the cell group may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identifiers.
- the report configuration identified as 1 is associated with the cell group identified as 1.
- the report configuration in the report configuration information may include cell group information associated with the report configuration.
- one or more report configurations in the report configuration information may include information of the cell group associated therewith. For example, if report configuration 1 includes an identifier of cell group 1, it means that report configuration 1 is associated with cell group 1.
- the cell group information in the cell group configuration information may include a reporting configuration associated with the cell group.
- a reporting configuration associated with the cell group. For example, if the information of cell group 1 includes an identifier of reporting configuration 1, it means that cell group 1 is associated with reporting configuration 1.
- S32 The network device sends resource configuration information to the terminal device.
- the terminal device receives the resource configuration information.
- one RS transmission parameter can be associated with one or more beams, or multiple RS transmission parameters can be associated with one beam. Multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the same beam can be used to determine the beam quality of the beam in different situations. For example, for a beam, one of the multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the beam is used to measure the beam quality when the beam is the current beam, and another of the multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the beam is used to measure the beam quality when the beam is an alternative beam.
- the resource configuration information is associated with the beam configuration information, and the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the beam in the beam configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the network device may send resource configuration information and beam configuration information to the terminal device separately.
- the resource configuration information and beam configuration information do not contain each other, but are associated with each other.
- the ways in which the resource configuration information and beam configuration information are associated include, but are not limited to, the following: the resource configuration information may include an identifier of the beam configuration information, or the beam configuration information may include an identifier of the resource configuration information, or the network device may indicate the association between the resource configuration information and the beam configuration information through signaling.
- the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the beams in the beam configuration information may be associated according to a default rule.
- the RS transmission parameters and beams may be associated sequentially in the order of their identification.
- the RS transmission parameters identified as 1 are associated with the beam identified as 1
- the RS transmission parameters identified as 2 are associated with the beam identified as 2.
- the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include beam information of the beam associated with the RS transmission parameters.
- RS transmission parameters may be associated with a cell.
- the association between RS transmission parameters and cells can be understood as follows: for a cell or a beam within a cell, a terminal device uses the RS transmission parameters associated with the cell to perform measurements to obtain the beam quality of the beam within the cell or the beam quality of the cell.
- the resource configuration information is associated with the cell configuration information
- the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information are associated with the cell configured by the cell configuration information according to a default rule.
- the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the cells in the cell configuration information may be associated according to a default rule.
- the RS transmission parameters and cells may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identifications.
- the RS transmission parameters identified as 1 are associated with the cell identified as 1.
- the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include cell information associated with the RS transmission parameters.
- the resource configuration information may include cell configuration information, wherein one or more RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include information of respective associated cells.
- RS transmission parameter 1 includes an identifier of cell 1, indicating that RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with cell 1.
- the cell information in the cell configuration information may include RS transmission parameters associated with the cell, or the cell information in the cell configuration information may include information indicating RS transmission parameters associated with the cell, wherein the information indicating RS transmission parameters may be an identifier of the RS transmission parameters.
- the information of cell 1 includes the identifier of RS transmission parameter 1, which means that cell 1 is associated with RS transmission parameter 1.
- RS transmission parameters may be associated with a cell group.
- the association between RS transmission parameters and cell groups may be understood as follows: for a cell group, a cell within a cell group, or a beam within a cell within a cell group, a terminal device uses the RS transmission parameters associated with the cell group to perform measurements to obtain the beam quality of the beam within the cell within the cell group, the beam quality of the cell within the cell group, or the beam quality of the cell group.
- an RS transmission parameter can be associated with one or more cell groups.
- an RS resource configuration can be associated with a cell group, and multiple RS resource sets in the RS resource configuration can be associated with different cells in the cell group.
- the resource configuration information is associated with the cell group configuration information, and the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the cell group configured by the cell group configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
- the network device may send resource configuration information and cell group configuration information to the terminal device separately.
- the resource configuration information and the cell group configuration information do not contain each other, but are associated with each other.
- the ways in which the resource configuration information and the cell group configuration information are associated include but are not limited to the following: the resource configuration information may include an identifier of the cell group configuration information, or the cell group configuration information may include an identifier of the resource configuration information, or the network device indicates the association between the resource configuration information and the cell group configuration information through signaling.
- the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the cell group configured by the cell group configuration information may be associated according to a default rule.
- the RS transmission parameters and the cell groups may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identifications.
- the RS transmission parameters identified as 1 are associated with the cell group identified as 1.
- the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include cell group information associated with the RS transmission parameters.
- the resource configuration information may include cell group configuration information, wherein one or more RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include information of the cell groups associated therewith.
- RS transmission parameter 1 includes an identifier of cell group 1, indicating that RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with cell group 1.
- the cell group information in the cell group configuration information may include RS transmission parameters associated with the cell group, or the cell group information in the cell group configuration information may include information indicating RS transmission parameters associated with the cell group. For example, if the information of cell group 1 includes an identifier of RS transmission parameter 1, it means that cell group 1 is associated with RS transmission parameter 1.
- the network device configures the report configuration and/or RS transmission parameters to the terminal device, and the report configuration and/or RS transmission parameters can be associated with at least one of the following: beam, cell, cell group, etc., to meet the measurement requirements and reporting requirements of switching events of different beams, different cells, and different cell groups.
- the communication method shown in FIG4 may include S41.
- the network device sends second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information is at least used to configure a counter and/or timer required to detect a first event.
- the "counter required to detect the first event” can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a counter corresponding to the first event, a counter corresponding to the first reporting configuration, a counter corresponding to the first RS resource configuration, a counter corresponding to the first RS resource set, and a counter corresponding to the first RS resource.
- the timer required to detect the first event can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: the timer corresponding to the first event, the timer corresponding to the first report configuration, the timer corresponding to the first RS resource configuration, the timer corresponding to the first RS resource set, and the timer corresponding to the first RS resource.
- the first report configuration refers to the report configuration associated with the first event
- the first RS resource configuration refers to the RS resource configuration associated with the first event
- the first RS resource set refers to the RS resource set associated with the first event
- the first RS resource refers to the RS resource associated with the first event.
- the "counter corresponding to the condition” in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a counter corresponding to the report configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource set, and a counter corresponding to the RS resource.
- the "timer corresponding to the condition” in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a timer corresponding to the report configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource set, and a timer corresponding to the RS resource.
- the report configuration here may refer to the condition-associated report configuration
- the RS resource configuration here may refer to the condition-associated RS resource configuration
- the RS resource set here may refer to the condition-associated RS set configuration
- the RS resource here may refer to the condition-associated RS resource.
- the "counter corresponding to the beam” in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a counter corresponding to the report configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource set, and a counter corresponding to the RS resource.
- the "timer corresponding to the beam” in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a timer corresponding to the report configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource set, and a timer corresponding to the RS resource.
- the report configuration here may refer to the beam-associated report configuration
- the RS resource configuration here may refer to the beam-associated RS resource configuration
- the RS resource set here may refer to the beam-associated RS set configuration
- the RS resource here may refer to the beam-associated RS resource.
- the "counter corresponding to the cell” in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a counter corresponding to the report configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource set, and a counter corresponding to the RS resource.
- the "timer corresponding to the cell” in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a timer corresponding to the report configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource set, and a timer corresponding to the RS resource.
- the "counter corresponding to the cell group” below can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a counter corresponding to the report configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource set, and a counter corresponding to the RS resource.
- the "timer corresponding to the cell group” below can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a timer corresponding to the report configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource set, and a timer corresponding to the RS resource.
- the report configuration here may refer to the report configuration associated with the cell group
- the RS resource configuration here may refer to the RS resource configuration associated with the cell group
- the RS resource set here may refer to the RS set configuration associated with the cell group
- the RS resource here may refer to the RS resource associated with the cell group.
- the following description of the correspondence between the "first event" and counters and timers, the description of the correspondence between conditions and counters and timers, the description of beams and counters and timers, etc. can all be understood as: the correspondence between report configurations and counters and timers, the correspondence between RS resource configurations and counters and timers, the correspondence between RS resource sets and counters and timers, and the correspondence between RS resources and counters and timers.
- the counter may also be referred to as a counter
- the timer may also be referred to as a timer
- the number of counters corresponding to the first event is 1, and the number of timers corresponding to the first event is 1.
- Example 1 the first event includes one condition.
- the first event only includes condition 1.
- the counter corresponding to the first event is counter1, and the timer corresponding to the first event is timer1.
- condition 1 is met or detected, the value of counter1 is incremented by 1, and timer1 is restarted.
- timer1 Whenever timer1 times out, counter1 is reset to zero.
- the value of counter1 reaches the maximum count value of counter1, it is determined that the first event has been detected.
- the physical layer of the terminal device measures the RS and, based on the measurement results, determines whether the conditions included in the first event are met. If the conditions are met, the physical layer reports an indication to the MAC layer. Furthermore, based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer increments the value of the counter corresponding to the first event by 1. Furthermore, each time the MAC layer receives an indication reported by the physical layer, it restarts the timer corresponding to the first event. If the timer corresponding to the first event times out, the counter corresponding to the first event is reset to zero and restarts. When the value of the counter corresponding to the first event reaches the maximum count value, the terminal device determines that the first event has occurred.
- the first event includes multiple conditions, and the multiple conditions share a counter and a timer. Specifically, each time multiple conditions are met, the counter corresponding to the first event is incremented by 1, and the timer corresponding to the first event is restarted. Each time the timer corresponding to the first event times out, the counter corresponding to the first event is reset to zero. When the counter corresponding to the first event reaches a maximum count value, it is determined that the first event has been detected.
- the physical layer of the terminal device measures the RS and determines whether the various conditions included in the first event are met based on the measurement results. If all conditions are met, the physical layer reports an indication to the MAC layer. Furthermore, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the first event (that is, the counter shared by multiple conditions) based on the indication reported by the physical layer. In addition, each time the MAC layer receives an indication reported by the physical layer, it restarts the timer corresponding to the first event (that is, the timer shared by multiple conditions). If the timer corresponding to the first event times out, the counter corresponding to the first event is reset to zero and restarts counting. When the value of the counter corresponding to the first event reaches the maximum count value, the terminal device determines that the first event has occurred.
- the first event includes condition 1 and condition 2.
- the counter corresponding to the first event is counter1, and the counter corresponding to the first event is timer1.
- condition 1 and condition 2 are both met, the value of counter1 is incremented by 1, and timer1 is restarted.
- timer1 times out, counter1 is reset to zero.
- the value of counter1 reaches the maximum count value of counter1, the first event is detected.
- the first event includes multiple conditions, the first event corresponds to multiple counters, and the first event corresponds to one timer.
- Example 3 Each condition included in the first event corresponds to a counter, and different conditions correspond to different counters, but multiple conditions share a single timer. More specifically, whenever any one or all of the multiple conditions are met, the counter corresponding to the met condition is incremented by 1, and the timer corresponding to the first event is restarted. Whenever the timer corresponding to the first event times out, each counter corresponding to the first event is reset to zero; that is, the counters corresponding to each condition are reset to zero. When all multiple counters corresponding to the first event reach their maximum count value, it is determined that the first event has been detected.
- the physical layer of the terminal device measures the RS and determines whether the various conditions included in the first event are met based on the measurement results. If any one or all of the conditions are met, the physical layer reports an indication to the MAC layer. Furthermore, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the met condition based on the indication reported by the physical layer. In addition, each time the MAC layer receives an indication reported by the physical layer, it restarts the timer corresponding to the first event (that is, the timer shared by multiple conditions). If the timer corresponding to the first event times out, the various counters corresponding to the first event (that is, the counters corresponding to the various conditions) are reset to zero and restarted. When the values of the various counters corresponding to the first event reach the maximum count value, the terminal device determines that the first event has occurred.
- a first event includes conditions 1 and 2.
- Condition 1 corresponds to counter 1
- condition 2 corresponds to counter 2.
- Conditions 1 and 2 share timer 1.
- the value of counter 1 is incremented by 1, and timer 1 is restarted.
- the value of counter 2 is incremented by 1, and timer 1 is restarted.
- both counter 1 and counter 2 are reset to zero.
- counter 1 reaching its maximum count value and counter 2 reaching its maximum count value it is determined that the first event has been detected.
- the first event includes multiple conditions, the first event corresponds to one counter, and the first event corresponds to multiple timers.
- Example 4 Each condition included in the first event corresponds to a timer, and different conditions correspond to different timers, but multiple conditions share a counter. Wherein, whenever each of the multiple conditions is met, the counter corresponding to the first event is incremented by 1, and each timer is restarted. Whenever the timer corresponding to any one or all of the conditions times out, the counter corresponding to the first event (that is, the counter shared by multiple conditions) is reset to zero. When the counter corresponding to the first event reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the first event is detected.
- the physical layer of the terminal device measures the RS and determines whether the various conditions included in the first event are met based on the measurement results. If all conditions are met, the physical layer reports an indication to the MAC layer. Furthermore, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the first event (that is, the counter shared by multiple conditions) based on the indication reported by the physical layer. In addition, each time the MAC layer receives an indication reported by the physical layer, it restarts the multiple timers corresponding to the first event (that is, the timers corresponding to the multiple conditions). If any or all of the timers time out, the counter corresponding to the first event is reset to zero and restarts counting. When the value of the counter corresponding to the first event reaches the maximum count value, the terminal device determines that the first event has occurred.
- a first event includes conditions 1 and 2.
- Conditions 1 and 2 share counter 1.
- Condition 1 corresponds to timer 1
- condition 2 corresponds to timer 2.
- the value of counter 1 is incremented by 1, and timer 1 and timer 2 are restarted.
- timer 1 timing out or timer 2 timing out counter 1 is reset to zero.
- the value of counter 1 reaching the maximum count value of counter 1 it is determined that the first event has been detected.
- the first event includes multiple conditions, the first event corresponds to multiple counters, and the first event corresponds to multiple timers.
- Each condition included in the first event corresponds to a timer and a counter. Different conditions correspond to different timers, and different conditions correspond to different counters. More specifically, whenever any one of the multiple conditions is met, the value of the counter corresponding to the met condition is incremented by 1, and the timer corresponding to the met condition is restarted. Whenever the timer corresponding to any one of the multiple conditions times out, the counter corresponding to the condition is reset to zero. When the values of the counters corresponding to each condition reach the maximum count value, it is determined that the first event has been detected.
- the physical layer of the terminal device measures the RS and determines whether the various conditions included in the first event are met based on the measurement results. If any condition is met, the physical layer reports an indication to the MAC layer. Furthermore, based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the met condition and restarts the timer corresponding to the met condition. If the timer corresponding to any condition times out, the counter corresponding to the condition is reset to zero and restarts. When the values of the counters corresponding to the various conditions reach the maximum count value, the terminal device determines that the first event has occurred.
- a first event includes conditions 1 and 2.
- Condition 1 corresponds to counter 1
- condition 2 corresponds to counter 2
- condition 1 corresponds to timer 1
- condition 2 corresponds to timer 2.
- condition 1 being met
- the value of counter 1 is incremented by 1
- timer 1 is restarted
- the value of counter 2 is incremented by 1
- timer 2 is restarted.
- counter 1 is reset to zero
- timer 2 is reset to zero.
- counter 1 reaching its maximum count value and counter 2 reaching its maximum count value it is determined that the first event has been detected.
- the timer may be a timer corresponding to the beam
- the counter may be a counter corresponding to the beam
- the counter corresponding to the first event may include a counter corresponding to each beam, and/or the timer corresponding to the first event may include a timer corresponding to each beam.
- the counter corresponding to each condition may include a counter corresponding to each beam, and/or the timer corresponding to each condition may include a timer corresponding to each beam.
- the counters corresponding to different beams may be the same or different, and/or the timers corresponding to different beams may be the same or different.
- each beam may correspond to a counter, and/or each beam may correspond to a timer. It should be noted that the beam here may be a current beam or an alternative beam.
- one beam may correspond to one counter, and one beam may correspond to one timer.
- the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam quality of the current beam meets an event or condition by measuring RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the current beam, and restarts the timer corresponding to the current beam. If the timer corresponding to the current beam times out, the counter corresponding to the current beam is reset to zero and restarts the count.
- the value of the counter corresponding to the current beam reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the current beam meets the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the current beam meets the event, or it is determined that the current beam is a beam to be switched.
- the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam quality of the alternative beam meets the event or condition by measuring the RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative beam and restarts the timer corresponding to the alternative beam. If the timer corresponding to the alternative beam times out, the counter corresponding to the alternative beam is reset to zero and restarts. When the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative beam reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the alternative beam meets the condition has reached the maximum count value, or it is determined that the alternative beam meets the event, or it is determined that the alternative beam is a new beam.
- multiple beams may correspond to one counter, and multiple beams may correspond to one timer, that is, multiple beams may share one counter, and multiple beams may share one timer.
- the multiple alternative beams can be all alternative beams, or can be all alternative beams in the same cell, or can be a part of the alternative beams. If the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam qualities of multiple alternative beams meet the event or condition by measuring the RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer, and the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter shared by the multiple alternative beams based on the indication reported by the physical layer, and restarts the timer shared by the multiple alternative beams. If the timer shared by the multiple alternative beams times out, the counter shared by the multiple alternative beams is reset to zero and restarts.
- the value of the counter shared by the multiple alternative beams reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the multiple alternative beams meet the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the multiple alternative beams meet the event, or it is determined that the multiple alternative beams are all new beams.
- multiple beams correspond to multiple counters, and multiple beams correspond to one timer. That is, different beams correspond to different counters, and multiple beams share one timer.
- the multiple current beams can be all current beams, or can be all current beams in the same cell, or can be part of the current beams.
- the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam quality of any current beam meets the event or condition by measuring RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the current beam, and restarts the timer shared by multiple current beams. If the timer shared by multiple current beams times out, the counters corresponding to each current beam are reset to zero and restarted.
- the values of the counters corresponding to the multiple current beams reach the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the multiple current beams meet the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the multiple current beams meet the event, or it is determined that the multiple current beams are all beams to be switched.
- the multiple alternative beams can be all alternative beams, or can be all alternative beams in the same cell, or can be part of the alternative beams. If the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam quality of any alternative beam meets the event or condition by measuring the RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative beam, and restarts the timer shared by the multiple alternative beams. If the timer shared by the multiple alternative beams times out, the counters corresponding to the various alternative beams are reset to zero and restarted.
- the values of the counters corresponding to the multiple alternative beams reach the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the multiple alternative beams meet the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the multiple alternative beams meet the event, or it is determined that the multiple alternative beams are all new beams.
- setting a beam-level counter and/or timer can ensure that the number of times the same beam meets the conditions is counted, so as to accurately determine whether each current beam is a beam to be switched and whether each alternative beam is a new beam.
- the terminal device may use a counter corresponding to a condition or event and a counter corresponding to a beam to perform event detection.
- each current beam corresponds to a counter
- the counter corresponding to each current beam is used to count the number of times the current beam satisfies a condition or event. If the values of the counters corresponding to all current beams are incremented by 1, the value of the counter corresponding to the condition or event is incremented by 1. When the values of the counters corresponding to all current beams reach a maximum count value, or the value of the counter corresponding to the condition or event reaches the maximum count value, it can be determined that the condition or event has been detected, or that all current beams are beams to be switched.
- the terminal device can measure Q RS resources to detect whether the Q alternative beams corresponding to the Q RS resources are new beams.
- Q is a positive integer greater than 1.
- Each of the Q alternative beams corresponds to a counter, and the counter corresponding to each alternative beam can be used to count the number of times the alternative beam meets a condition or event. If the values of the counters corresponding to the Q alternative beams are all increased by 1, the value of the counter corresponding to the condition or event is increased by 1.
- the value of the counter corresponding to the Q alternative beams reaches the maximum count value, or the value of the counter corresponding to the condition or event reaches the maximum count value, it can be determined that the condition or event is detected, or it is determined that the Q alternative beams are new beams.
- the process of detecting the first event may also involve determining the cell-level beam quality and/or cell-level beam interference.
- the beam quality of the current cell is a first result obtained based on the beam quality of at least one current beam in the current cell, that is, whether the current cell meets the condition refers to whether the first result meets the condition, or the beam quality of the current cell refers to the beam quality of all current beams in the current cell, that is, whether the current cell meets the condition refers to whether each current beam in the current cell meets the condition, then only the counter and timer corresponding to the current cell can be used to count the number of times the current cell meets the condition or event, and there is no need to use the counter and timer corresponding to the beam in the current cell for counting.
- the physical layer of the terminal device determines the beam quality of one or more current beams by measuring RS, and determines the beam quality of the current cell based on the beam quality of one or more current beams. If it is determined that the beam quality of the current cell meets the event or condition (for example, the first result of the current cell meets the condition, or each current beam in the current cell meets the condition), an indication is reported to the MAC layer. Furthermore, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the current cell based on the indication reported by the physical layer, and restarts the timer corresponding to the current cell. If the timer corresponding to the current cell times out, the counter corresponding to the current cell is reset to zero and counts again.
- the event or condition for example, the first result of the current cell meets the condition, or each current beam in the current cell meets the condition
- the beam quality of the alternative cell is a second result obtained based on the beam quality of at least one alternative beam in the alternative cell, that is, whether the alternative cell meets the condition refers to whether the second result meets the condition, or the beam quality of the alternative cell refers to the beam quality of all alternative beams in the alternative cell, that is, whether the alternative cell meets the condition refers to whether each alternative beam in the alternative cell meets the condition, then only the counter and timer corresponding to the alternative cell can be used to count the number of times the alternative cell meets the condition or event, and there is no need to use the counter and timer corresponding to the beam in the alternative cell for counting.
- the physical layer of the terminal device determines the beam quality of one or more alternative beams by measuring RS, and determines the beam quality of the alternative cell based on the beam quality of one or more alternative beams. If it is determined that the beam quality of the alternative cell meets the event or condition (for example, the second result of the alternative cell meets the condition, or each alternative beam in the alternative cell meets the condition), an indication is reported to the MAC layer. Furthermore, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative cell based on the indication reported by the physical layer, and restarts the timer corresponding to the alternative cell. If the timer corresponding to the alternative cell times out, the counter corresponding to the alternative cell is reset to zero and counts again.
- the event or condition for example, the second result of the alternative cell meets the condition, or each alternative beam in the alternative cell meets the condition
- the counter and timer corresponding to the current cell can count based on the values of the counters corresponding to one or more beams.
- the physical layer does not need to report to the MAC layer that the cell meets the conditions.
- the MAC layer of the terminal device determines the beam quality of each current beam in the current cell by measuring RS, if any current beam meets the conditions, then the MAC layer is reported with an indication that the current beam meets the conditions. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the current beam, and restarts the timer corresponding to the current beam. Wherein, for each current beam, if the timer of the current beam times out, the counter corresponding to the current beam is reset to zero and restarts the count.
- the value of the counter corresponding to the current cell is increased by 1, and the timer corresponding to the current cell is restarted.
- the values of the counters corresponding to the K current beams in the current cell all reach the maximum count value, or when the value of the counter corresponding to the current cell reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the current cell meets the conditions reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the current cell meets the event, or it is determined that the current cell is a cell to be switched.
- the process of detecting the first event may also involve condition determination at the cell group level.
- the counter corresponding to the first event may include a counter corresponding to each cell group, and the timer corresponding to the first event may include a timer corresponding to each cell group.
- the counter corresponding to each condition may include a counter corresponding to each cell group, and the timer corresponding to each condition may include a timer corresponding to each cell group.
- each cell group may correspond to a counter, and/or each cell group may correspond to a timer.
- the cell group here may be the current cell group or the alternative cell group.
- the counters corresponding to different cell groups may be the same or different, and/or the timers corresponding to different cell groups may be the same or different.
- the cell group is the current cell group or the alternative cell group
- the indication is reported to the MAC layer.
- the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the cell group based on the indication reported by the physical layer, and restarts the timer corresponding to the current cell group. If the timer corresponding to the cell group times out, the counter corresponding to the cell group is reset to zero and restarts the count.
- the value of the counter corresponding to the cell group reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the cell group meets the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the cell group meets the event.
- the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam quality and/or beam interference of at least H cells in the cell group meet an event or condition by measuring RS. If any cell meets the condition, the MAC layer reports an indication that the cell meets the condition. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the cell, and restarts the timer corresponding to the cell. For each cell, if the timer of the cell times out, the counter corresponding to the cell is reset to zero and restarts.
- the zeroing condition of the counter may include at least one of the following:
- timer associated with the counter times out; wherein the timer associated with the counter refers to the timer that is restarted when the value of the counter is updated.
- the timer associated with the counter is reconfigured; that is, the network device reconfigures the timer associated with the counter.
- the maximum count value of the counter is reconfigured; that is, the network device reconfigures the maximum count value of the counter.
- Beam management is completed; wherein beam management refers to the beam management process triggered by the first information.
- Beam switching is completed; wherein, beam switching may refer to a beam switching process triggered by the first information.
- the measurement RS is updated; specifically, the network device may reconfigure or update the RS resources associated with the first event. In this case, the counter corresponding to the first event may be reset to zero.
- the first physical downlink control channel is received L times, where L is a positive integer.
- the value of L may be defined by the protocol or configured by the network device.
- the first PDCCH may be a PDCCH scrambled with a cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), or the first PDCCH is used to indicate a physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) of uplink authorization and a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) process number of the uplink authorized PUSCH, and the uplink authorized PUSCH is used to send the first information, or the first PDCCH is used to indicate uplink authorization, and the first PDCCH indicates the same HARQ process number as the PUSCH for sending the first information; or the first PDCCH is used to indicate uplink authorization, and the first PDCCH is used to indicate the same HARQ process number as the PUSCH for sending the first information and a flipped new data indication signaling field value.
- C-RNTI cell-radio network temporary
- the value of the counter is set to 0.
- the above zeroing condition can be applied to any counter.
- counters and/or timers required for the first event may also be defined by the protocol. Specific contents of the counters and timers required for other switching events can refer to the relevant description of the counters and timers required for the first event, which will not be repeated here.
- the initial value of the counter is 0.
- the maximum count value of the counter can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
- the maximum count values of different counters can be the same or different.
- the duration of the timer can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol. If there are multiple timers corresponding to the first event, the durations of the different timers can be the same or different.
- the communication method shown in FIG5 may include S51 .
- the terminal device sends first information to the network device, where the first information includes at least one of the following: information about a detected handover event, first indication information, and second indication information.
- the network device receives the first information.
- the first information may include information about at least one switching event among the detected switching events.
- the first indication information may include at least one of the following: first beam information, first cell information, first cell indication information, first cell group information and first cell group indication information.
- the first beam information may be indication information of the beam to be switched (such as beam information of the beam to be switched), that is, the first beam information may be used to indicate one or more beams to be switched.
- the first cell information can be used to indicate information about the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs.
- the information indicating the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs can be cell information of the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs.
- the first information includes information about the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can indicate that the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs is the cell to be switched, i.e., that the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched.
- the first cell information can be used to indicate the cell to be switched.
- the first cell indication information can be used to indicate a cell that needs to be switched or to indicate that a cell needs to be switched.
- the first cell indication information can be cell information of a cell to be switched or an indication of whether a cell to which a beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched, that is, an indication of whether the cell to which a beam to be switched belongs is a cell to be switched.
- the first cell indication information can also be referred to as indication information of a cell to be switched or information indicating a cell to be switched.
- the beam to be switched is a beam on a serving cell.
- the first information may include first cell information indicating the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs.
- the first information may also include first cell indication information to indicate that the serving cell to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched, or is recommended to be switched. If the first information only includes the first cell information indicating the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and does not include the first cell indication information, it may indicate that the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs does not need to be switched, that is, the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs still provides services for the terminal device.
- the first information does not include first cell indication information but includes first cell information indicating the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can be indicated that the cell indicated by the first cell information needs to be switched.
- the first information includes information about the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can be assumed that the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched.
- the first information does not include first cell indication information but includes first cell information indicating the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can be indicated that the cell indicated by the first cell information does not need to be switched.
- the first information includes information about the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can be assumed that the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs does not need to be switched.
- the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs may be a cell to be switched (i.e., needs to be switched) or may not be a cell to be switched (i.e., does not need to be switched).
- the first cell information indicates the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched.
- the first cell information may only indicate the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, but does not indicate whether the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched. This needs to be further combined with the first cell indication information. If the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs is indicated by the first cell indication information, then the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs is the cell to be switched, that is, it needs to be switched. If the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs is not indicated by the first cell indication information, then the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs is not the cell to be switched, that is, it does not need to be switched.
- the first cell group information may be used to indicate information about the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs.
- the information indicating the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs may be cell group information of the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs.
- the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs may refer to the cell group to which the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs belongs, or the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs may be the cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs.
- the first information includes information about the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can indicate that the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs is the cell group to be switched, that is, it indicates that the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched.
- the cell group to be switched refers to a cell group that needs to be switched, or a cell group that satisfies a switching event.
- the first cell group indication information can be used to indicate a cell group that needs to be switched or to indicate that a cell group needs to be switched.
- the first cell group indication information can be cell group information of a cell group to be switched or an indication of whether a cell group to which a beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched, that is, an indication of whether the cell group to which a beam to be switched belongs is a cell group to be switched.
- the first cell group indication information can also be referred to as indication information of a cell group to be switched.
- the first information may indicate that the cell group indicated by the first cell group information needs to be switched.
- the first information includes information about the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, it may be assumed that the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched.
- the first information may indicate that the cell group indicated by the first cell group information does not need to be switched.
- the first information may include the information of the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, it may be assumed that the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs does not need to be switched. If the first information includes the first cell group information for indicating the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs and the first cell group indication information, it may indicate that the cell group indicated by the first cell group information needs to be switched.
- cell group information herein may be at least one of the following: cell group index, cell group identifier, physical cell group identifier, identification information of RS resource configuration associated with the cell group, identification information of RS resource set associated with the cell group, identification information of RS resources associated with the cell group, and identification information of report configuration associated with the cell group.
- the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs may be a cell group to be switched (i.e., needs to be switched) or may not be a cell group to be switched (i.e., does not need to be switched).
- the first cell group information indicates the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched.
- the first cell group information only indicates the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, and does not indicate whether the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched. It is necessary to further combine the first cell group indication information. If the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs is indicated by the first cell group indication information, then the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs is the cell group to be switched, that is, it needs to be switched. If the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs is not indicated by the first cell indication information, then the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs is not the cell group to be switched, that is, it does not need to be switched.
- the second indication information may include at least one of the following: second beam information, second cell information, second cell indication information, second cell group information, and second cell group indication information.
- the second beam information may be information indicating a new beam (e.g., beam information of a new beam), that is, the second beam information may be used to indicate one or more new beams.
- the first information may include second beam information corresponding to each or all beams to be switched, to indicate the new beam corresponding to the beam to be switched.
- the second cell information may be used to indicate information about the cell to which the new beam belongs.
- the information used to indicate the cell to which the new beam belongs may be cell information about the cell to which the new beam belongs.
- the information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs may or may not be omitted. If the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to different cells, that is, the corresponding new beam is found in a cell other than the current cell where the beam to be switched is located, then the second indication information may further include information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs, that is, the information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs is not omitted.
- the first information includes second cell information of the cell to which the new beam belongs, it may indicate that it is recommended to switch to the cell to which the new beam belongs, that is, it indicates that the cell to which the new beam belongs is a new cell.
- the second cell indication information can be used to indicate a recommended new cell.
- the terminal device can recommend to the network device that it switch to the cell indicated by the second cell indication information. That is, the second cell indication information can be used to indicate the recommended new cell to switch to.
- the second cell indication information can be cell information of the new cell or an indication of whether it is recommended to switch to the cell to which the new beam belongs, that is, an indication of whether the cell to which the new beam belongs is a new cell.
- the second cell indication information can also be referred to as indication information of the new cell.
- the first information may include second cell information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs.
- the first information may also include second cell indication information to indicate a recommended handover to the cell to which the new beam belongs. If the first information only includes the second cell information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs, but does not include the second cell indication information, this may indicate that handover to the cell to which the new beam belongs is not required, and only the new beam is sufficient.
- the first information may indicate that a handover to the cell indicated by the second cell information is required.
- the first information includes information about the cell to which the new beam belongs, then a handover to the cell to which the new beam belongs may be required by default.
- the first information does not include second cell indication information but includes second cell information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs, this may indicate that handover to the cell indicated by the second cell information is not required, and only the new beam should be used.
- the first information includes information about the cell to which the new beam belongs, this may be a default setting that handover to the cell to which the new beam belongs is not required, and only the new beam should be used.
- the cell to which the new beam belongs can be a new cell (that is, the cell to which it is recommended to switch), or it may not be a new cell (that is, there is no need to switch to the cell, only the new beam is applied).
- the second cell information indicates the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the cell to which the new beam belongs is a new cell.
- the second cell information only indicates the cell to which the new beam belongs, but does not indicate whether the cell to which the new beam belongs is a new cell. This needs to be further combined with the second cell indication information. If the cell to which the new beam belongs is indicated by the second cell indication information, then the cell to which the new beam belongs is a new cell, meaning that a handover to the cell to which the new beam belongs is required or recommended. If the cell to which the new beam belongs is not indicated by the second cell indication information, then the cell to which the new beam belongs is not a new cell.
- the second cell group information may be used to indicate information about the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
- the information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs may be cell group information of the cell group to which the new cell belongs.
- the cell group to which the new beam belongs may refer to the cell group to which the cell to which the new beam belongs belongs, or the cell group to which the new beam belongs may be the cell group to which the new cell belongs.
- the information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs may or may not be omitted. If the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to different cell groups, that is, the corresponding new beam is found in a cell group other than the current cell group where the beam to be switched is located, then the second indication information may include information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs, that is, the second cell group information is not omitted.
- the first information includes second cell group information of the cell group to which the new beam belongs, it may indicate that it is recommended to switch to the cell group to which the new beam belongs, that is, it indicates that the cell group to which the new beam belongs is the new cell group.
- the new cell group refers to the cell group to which it is recommended to switch.
- the second cell group indication information can be used to indicate a recommended new cell group.
- the terminal device can suggest to the network device to switch to the cell group indicated by the second cell group information. That is, the second cell group indication information can be used to indicate the new cell group recommended to switch to.
- the second cell group indication information can be the cell group information of the new cell group or an indication of whether to recommend switching to the cell group to which the new beam belongs, that is, an indication of whether the cell group to which the new beam belongs is a new cell group.
- the second cell group indication information can also be referred to as indication information of the new cell group.
- the first information may include second cell group information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
- the first information may also include second cell group indication information to indicate a recommendation to switch to the cell group to which the new beam belongs. If the first information only includes the second cell group information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs, but does not include the second cell group indication information, this may indicate that switching to the cell group to which the new beam belongs is not required, and only the new beam is sufficient.
- the first information may indicate that a handover to the cell group indicated by the second cell group information is required.
- the first information includes information about the cell group to which the new beam belongs, then it may be assumed that a handover to the cell group to which the new beam belongs is required.
- the first information does not include second cell group indication information but includes second cell group information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs, this may indicate that switching to the cell group indicated by the second cell group information is not necessary, and only the new beam should be applied.
- the first information includes information about the cell group to which the new beam belongs, this may be a default setting that switching to the cell group to which the new beam belongs is not necessary, and only the new beam should be applied.
- the cell group to which the new beam belongs may be a new cell group (i.e., the cell to which switching is recommended) or may not be a new cell group (i.e., switching to the cell group is not recommended).
- the second cell group information indicates the cell group to which the new beam belongs, and it is recommended to switch to the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
- the second cell group information only indicates the cell group to which the new beam belongs, and does not indicate that it is recommended to switch to the cell group to which the new beam belongs. It is necessary to further combine the second cell group indication information. If the cell group to which the new beam belongs is indicated by the second cell group indication information, then the cell group to which the new beam belongs is the new cell group. If the cell group to which the new beam belongs is not indicated by the second cell indication information, then the cell group to which the new beam belongs is not a new cell group.
- the new beam may include a candidate beam and/or a first target beam.
- the second beam information may include: beam information of the candidate beam and/or beam information of the first target beam.
- the new beam indicated by the first information may include one or more candidate beams.
- the candidate beam may be understood as the new beam reported by the first information.
- the terminal device may inform the network device of the alternative beam that satisfies the switching event through the first information.
- the target beam refers to the new beam to which the terminal device is to switch.
- the first target beam may be the target beam indicated by the first information, or the first target beam may refer to the target beam recommended by the terminal device.
- the network device may be informed of the target beam recommended by the terminal device or the target beam to which the terminal device is to switch.
- the first target beam may be the new beam indicated by the first information or the beam with the best beam quality among the candidate beams.
- the first target beam may be the beam indicated by the first target indication information in the first information.
- the first target beam may be the new beam indicated by the first information or the default beam among the candidate beams.
- the default beam may be a beam with the smallest or largest identifier, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment.
- the first information may include at least one of the following: indication information indicating the cell to which the candidate beam belongs, and indication information indicating the cell to which the first target beam belongs.
- the new cell indicated or suggested by the second cell indication information may include the cell to which the candidate beam belongs and/or the cell to which the first target beam belongs.
- the new cell group indicated or suggested by the second cell group information may include the cell group to which the cell to which the candidate beam belongs and/or the cell group to which the cell to which the first target beam belongs.
- the relevant description about the new beam in this article can be applied to the candidate beam and the first target beam.
- the "new beam” in this article can also be replaced by "candidate beam”, “target beam”, “first target beam”, etc.
- the relevant description about the cell to which the new beam belongs in this article can be applied to the cell to which the candidate beam belongs and the cell to which the first target beam belongs.
- the relevant description about the cell group to which the new beam belongs in this article can be applied to the cell group to which the candidate beam belongs and the cell group to which the first target beam belongs.
- the "new cell” in this article can also be replaced by “target cell”, “candidate cell”, “first target cell”, etc.
- the "new cell group” in this article can be replaced by "target cell group”, “candidate cell group”, “first target cell group”, etc.
- the first information may also include indication information of the current beam.
- the following is an exemplary description of the uplink resources that carry the first information.
- the first information may be carried in a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).
- PUCCH physical uplink control channel
- the first information may be carried in the PUCCH of a primary cell.
- the following is an exemplary description of the recipient of the first information.
- the first information may be sent to the current serving cell, and/or to the TRP to which the current serving cell belongs or the TRP included in the current serving cell.
- the first information may be sent to the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs and/or the cell to which the new beam belongs.
- the terminal device can send the first information to the cell (i.e., the cell to which the beam to be switched and the new beam belong). In other words, the terminal device can send the first information in the current cell.
- the terminal device may use the uplink beam corresponding to the beam to be switched to send the first information.
- the terminal device may use the uplink beam corresponding to the new beam to send the first information, but is not limited thereto.
- the terminal device can send the first information to the TRP (that is, the TRP to which the beam to be switched and the new beam belong).
- the terminal device can send the first information to the current TRP.
- the single TRP scenario means that for a single terminal device, resource scheduling is performed by a single TRP.
- the terminal device can send the first information to the same TRP corresponding to the beam to be switched and the new beam. If the beam to be switched and the new beam correspond to different TRPs in multiple TRPs, the terminal device can send the first information to the TRP corresponding to the beam to be switched and/or send the first information to the TRP corresponding to the new beam.
- the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to different cells.
- the terminal device may send the first information to the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and/or send the first information to the cell to which the new beam belongs.
- Sending the first information to the cell to be switched may include sending the first information using the uplink beam corresponding to the beam to be switched.
- Sending the first information in the cell to which the new beam belongs may include sending the first information using the uplink beam corresponding to the new beam.
- the terminal device can send the first information to the TRP (that is, the TRP to which the beam to be switched and the new beam belong). That is, the terminal device can send the first information at the current TRP.
- the terminal device can send the first information to the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and/or send the first information to the cell to which the new beam belongs.
- the terminal device can send the first information to the TRP corresponding to the beam to be switched, and/or send the first information to the TRP corresponding to the new beam, and/or send the first information to the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and/or send the first information to the cell to which the new beam belongs.
- the terminal device when it sends the first information to multiple cells and/or to multiple TRPs, it can use one or more of single frequency network (SFN) transmission, time division multiplexing (TDM) transmission, space division multiplexing (SDM) transmission, and frequency division multiplexing (FDM) transmission to send the first information.
- SFN single frequency network
- TDM time division multiplexing
- SDM space division multiplexing
- FDM frequency division multiplexing
- step 6 which is a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application, may include steps S61 and S62, wherein S62 is an optional step.
- the terminal device sends first information to the network device.
- the network device receives the first information.
- the first information may be the first information sent in S51.
- the first information may also include at least one of the following: third indication information, probability information, panel information, fourth indication information, fifth indication information, sixth indication information, the type of recommended unified TCI state, the recommended unified TCI framework, the recommended transmission scheme, the recommended transmission scheme for the second channel, and the recommended beam training method.
- the specific content of the first information is exemplarily described below.
- the third indication information may include at least one of the following:
- the first channel may be at least one of the following: PUSCH, Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH), Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH), and PDCCH.
- the terminal device may suggest a new beam to be applied to the first channel in the first message.
- the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam.
- the third indication information may include: a candidate beam applicable to the first channel, and/or a first target beam applicable to the first channel.
- the third indication information may include the new beam applicable to the first channel on each cell.
- the first information may include a channel recommended for applying the new beam.
- the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam.
- the first information may include a channel to which the candidate beam is applicable and/or a channel to which the first target beam is applicable.
- the first information may include an RS that recommends application of the new beam.
- the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam.
- the first information may include an RS applicable to the candidate beam and/or an RS applicable to the first target beam.
- the first information may include a CORESET that recommends applying the new beam.
- the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam.
- the first information may include a CORESET applicable to the candidate beam and/or a CORESET applicable to the first target beam.
- the first information may include a suggestion of channels that are not applicable to the new beam.
- the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam.
- the first information may include channels for which the candidate beam is not applicable and/or channels for which the first target beam is not applicable.
- the first information may include a recommendation that the RS not be applicable to the new beam.
- the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam.
- the first information may include an RS for which the candidate beam is not applicable and/or an RS for which the first target beam is not applicable.
- the first information may include a CORESET that recommends not applying the new beam.
- the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam.
- the first information may include a CORESET to which the candidate beam is not applicable and/or a CORESET to which the first target beam is not applicable. That is, the first information may include a CORESET for which it is recommended not to apply the new beam.
- the new beam includes the candidate beam and/or the first target beam, and correspondingly,
- the following uses the first beam as an example to illustrate channels, RSs, and CORESETs that are not applicable to the new beam.
- the first beam may be one of the new beams.
- the first beam may be a new beam on the current serving cell, or a new beam on a non-serving cell (e.g., a neighboring cell); or a new beam on an alternative cell.
- the first beam is not applicable to the first PDSCH and/or the first PUSCH, wherein the transmission time interval between the PDCCH that schedules the first PDSCH and the first PDSCH is less than or equal to the twenty-second threshold, and the first PUSCH is a PUSCH indicated or activated by DCI format 0_0.
- the channels applicable to the first beam do not include the first PDSCH and the first PUSCH.
- the terminal device may switch the beam for the first PDSCH and/or the first PUSCH to the default beam on the serving cell. If the first beam is a new beam on the serving cell, the first beam may be applicable to the first PDSCH and/or the first PUSCH.
- the first beam is not applicable to the first RS, and the first RS does not apply a unified TCI state.
- the first beam is not applicable to RSs that do not apply a unified TCI state.
- the first beam can be applicable to RSs that apply a unified TCI state.
- the terminal device may switch the beam of the first RS to the default beam on the serving cell. If the first beam is a new beam on the serving cell, the first beam may be applicable to the first RS.
- the first beam is not applicable to the second RS, where the transmission time interval between the PDCCH triggering the second RS and the second RS is less than or equal to a 23rd threshold value. In other words, if the transmission time interval between the PDCCH used to trigger the RS and the RS triggered by the PDCCH is greater than the 23rd threshold value, the first beam can be applied to the RS triggered by the PDCCH.
- the terminal device can switch the beam of the second RS to the default beam on the serving cell. If the first beam is a new beam on the serving cell, the first beam can be applicable to the second RS.
- the first beam is not applicable to the first CORESET, and at least one of the search spaces (SSs) associated with the first CORESET is a common search space (CSS) or a CSS other than Type 3.
- the SS associated with the first CORESET includes a CSS
- the SS associated with the first CORESET includes a Type 3 CSS.
- the first beam may be applicable to a CORESET that is not associated with a CSS and is not associated with a Type 3 CSS.
- the terminal device may switch the beam of the first CORESET to a default beam on the serving cell. If the first beam is a new beam on the serving cell, the first beam may be applicable to the first CORESET.
- At least one of the channel, RS, and CORESET to which the first beam is not applicable mentioned above can be carried in the first information, or can also be defined by the protocol.
- the network may be configured by the network or agreed upon by the protocol that at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the second RS, and the first CORESET always does not apply the first beam, or it may be configured by RRC signaling that at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the second RS, and the first CORESET does not apply the first beam.
- RRC signaling configures at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the second RS, and the first CORESET to apply the first beam
- at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the second RS, and the first CORESET configured by RRC signaling may also apply the first beam.
- the beam applied by at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the first RS, and the first CORESET in the above text is a beam to be switched
- the beam currently applied by at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the first RS, and the first CORESET may not be switched, or the beam may be switched to the default beam on the current serving cell.
- the beam used by at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the first RS, and the first CORESET on the current serving cell may not be switched, or at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the first RS, and the first CORESET on the current serving cell may be switched to the default beam on the current serving cell.
- the probability information may include at least one of the following: probability information of applying a new beam, probability information of switching to a new cell, and probability information of switching to a new cell group.
- the probability information may be obtained by applying an artificial intelligence (AI) model or a machine learning (ML) model.
- AI artificial intelligence
- ML machine learning
- the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam.
- the probability information may include at least one of the following: probability information of applying the candidate beam; probability information of switching to the cell to which the candidate beam belongs; probability information of switching to the cell group to which the cell to which the candidate beam belongs; probability information of applying the first target beam; probability information of switching to the cell to which the first target beam belongs; probability information of switching to the cell group to which the cell to which the first target beam belongs.
- the panel information may include: panel information corresponding to the beam to be switched and/or panel information corresponding to the new beam.
- the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam
- the panel information may include: panel information corresponding to the candidate beam and/or panel information corresponding to the first target beam.
- the panel information may refer to at least one of the following: control resource set, control resource set pool, control resource set group, terminal capability set information, terminal capability information, TCI status information, TCI status pool information, terminal capability value information, terminal capability value set information, reference signal resource information, reference signal resource set information, reference signal resource group information, reference signal port number information, antenna panel, antenna array information, antenna subarray information, antenna group information, antenna subgroup information, antenna set information, antenna subset information, etc.
- the number of new beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple new beams can be used for simultaneous downlink reception.
- the fourth indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information that multiple new beams are used for simultaneous downlink reception, indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception, and panel information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception.
- the new beam includes beam 1 and beam 2
- the first information may include beam information of beam 1 and beam 2.
- the first information may also include an indication for indicating that beam 1 and beam 2 are used for simultaneous downlink reception.
- the format of the first information may include a first information element, and the first information element is used to carry beam information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception. Assuming that beam 1 and beam 2 in the new beam are used for simultaneous downlink reception, the first information element carries beam information of beam 1 and beam 2. In this case, there is no need to additionally carry an indication that beam 1 and beam 2 are used for simultaneous downlink reception.
- the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam.
- the number of candidate beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple candidate beams may be used for simultaneous downlink reception, and/or the number of first target beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple first target beams may be used for simultaneous downlink reception.
- the fourth indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information of multiple candidate beams for simultaneous downlink reception, indication information of multiple candidate beams for simultaneous downlink reception, panel information corresponding to multiple candidate beams for simultaneous downlink reception, indication information of multiple first target beams for simultaneous downlink reception, indication information of multiple first target beams for simultaneous downlink reception, and panel information corresponding to multiple first target beams for simultaneous downlink reception.
- the number of new beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple new beams may be used for uplink transmission simultaneously.
- the fifth indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information that multiple new beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission, indication information of multiple new beams used for simultaneous uplink transmission, and panel information of multiple new beams used for simultaneous uplink transmission.
- the new beam includes beam 3 and beam 4
- the first information may include beam information of beam 3 and beam 4.
- the first information may also include an indication for indicating that beam 3 and beam 4 are used for simultaneous uplink transmission.
- the format of the first information may include a second information element, and the second information element is used to carry beam information of multiple new beams used for simultaneous uplink transmission. Assuming that beam 3 and beam 4 in the new beam are used for simultaneous uplink transmission, the first information element carries beam information of beam 3 and beam 4. In this case, there is no need to additionally carry an indication that beam 3 and beam 4 are used for simultaneous uplink transmission.
- the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam.
- the number of candidate beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple candidate beams may be used for simultaneous uplink transmission, and/or the number of first target beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple first target beams may be used for simultaneous uplink transmission.
- the fifth indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information of multiple candidate beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, indication information of multiple candidate beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, panel information corresponding to multiple candidate beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, indication information of multiple first target beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, indication information of multiple first target beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, and panel information corresponding to multiple first target beams for simultaneous uplink transmission.
- the recommended unified TCI state type can be a joint TCI state or a separate TCI state. It should be noted that the unified TCI state type can also refer to a unified TCI state mode.
- the joint TCI state means that the downlink TCI state and the uplink TCI state correspond to the same beam
- the separate TCI state means that the downlink TCI state and the uplink TCI state correspond to different beams.
- the terminal device may suggest continuing to use the jointTCI state and report a new beam. If the terminal device detects a switching event and does not detect a Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) event in the direction corresponding to the new beam (that is, the uplink beam needs to be switched because the uplink signal radiates the human body to a certain extent), the terminal device may suggest using the jointTCI state in the first information.
- the network device can configure or instruct beam training and beam reporting based on the jointTCI state recommended in the first information, and perform beam indication on the terminal device.
- the beam indicated by the network device is the new jointTCI state to which the uplink beam and the downlink beam are switched.
- the terminal device may suggest adopting the separateTCI state in the first information.
- the network device may configure or indicate beam training and beam reporting based on the separateTCI state suggested in the first information, and perform beam indication on the terminal device.
- the beam indicated by the network device is only the new downlink separateTCI state to which the downlink beam is switched.
- the recommended unified TCI framework is a unified TCI activation or indication method for single TRP transmission, or the recommended unified TCI framework is a unified TCI activation or indication method for multiple TRP transmissions.
- the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method of using a unified TCI state to indicate or activate a beam in a single TRP scenario.
- the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method of activating or indicating a beam in a single TRP scenario using a joint TCI state or an independent TCI state.
- the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method for using a unified TCI state to indicate or activate beams in a multi-TRP scenario based on a single downlink control information (DCI).
- DCI downlink control information
- the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method for using a joint TCI state or an independent TCI state to activate or indicate beams in a multi-TRP scenario based on a single DCI.
- the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method of using a unified TCI state to indicate or activate a beam in a multi-TRP scenario based on multi-DCI.
- the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method of using a joint TCI state or an independent TCI state to activate or indicate a beam in a multi-TRP scenario based on multi-DCI.
- the multi-TRP scenario based on single DCI may refer to a scenario in which multiple TRPs use the same DCI to schedule terminal devices
- the multi-TRP scenario based on multiple DCIs may refer to a scenario in which multiple TRPs use different DCIs to schedule terminal devices.
- the recommended transmission scheme refers to the transmission scheme recommended by the terminal device to the network device, where the transmission scheme is single-TRP transmission or multi-TRP transmission.
- Single-TRP transmission refers to the transmission of channels or signals between the terminal device and the TRP in a single-TRP scenario
- multi-TRP transmission refers to the transmission of channels or signals between the terminal device and multiple TRPs in a multi-TRP scenario.
- Multiple TRP transmission includes at least one of the following: single frequency network (SFN) transmission, time division multiplexing (TDM) transmission, space division multiplexing (SDM) transmission, and frequency division multiplexing (FDM) transmission. That is, a terminal device can use at least one of SFN, TDM, SDM, and FDM to transmit with multiple TRPs.
- SFN single frequency network
- TDM time division multiplexing
- SDM space division multiplexing
- FDM frequency division multiplexing
- the above-mentioned recommended transmission scheme may be applicable to all channels, or may be applicable to the transmission of one or more specific channels among PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH and PDCCH, and/or may be applicable to the transmission of any one or more RSs.
- the terminal device may suggest a transmission scheme for a specific channel (ie, a second channel) in the first information, wherein the second channel may be at least one of PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH.
- a specific channel ie, a second channel
- the second channel may be at least one of PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH.
- the terminal device may suggest in the first information that the second channel adopts a single TRP transmission, or, in the second information, suggest that the second channel adopt at least one of SFN, TDM, SDM, and FDM and multiple TRPs to transmit the second channel.
- the beam training method may also be referred to as a “beam training strategy.”
- the first information may include: a value of a parameter “repetition” in the recommended beam training reference signal configuration information.
- the recommended beam training method may be the P2 process or the P3 process. Specific contents of the P2 process and the P3 process can be referred to the above description of the first embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
- the first information may include the beam quality of the new beam. More specifically, the first information may also include the beam quality of the candidate beam and the beam quality of the first target beam.
- the network device sends a response to the first information to the terminal device.
- the terminal device receives the response to the first information.
- the response to the first information may be carried in the DCI.
- the response to the first information may be used to confirm at least one or more of the following: beam switching, cell switching, and cell group switching.
- the response to the first information may be used to trigger at least one of the following: beam switching, cell switching, and cell group switching.
- the first information may include a new beam, and the response to the first information may be used to confirm or trigger switching to the new beam in the first information.
- the first information may include a first target beam, and the response to the first information may include beam confirmation information. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the first target beam.
- the first information may include at least one candidate beam, and the response to the first information may include beam confirmation information. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to one or more of the at least one candidate beam.
- the first information may not include a new beam.
- the first information may include information about a switching event and/or a beam to be switched.
- the response to the first information may include beam information of a new beam (such as the second target beam described below). After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the new beam in the response.
- the first information indicates a new beam, and the response to the first information also indicates a new beam. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the new beam indicated by the first information or the response to the first information.
- the new beam indicated by the response may be the same as or different from the new beam indicated by the first information.
- the response to the first information may be used to confirm or trigger switching to the new cell indicated by the first information.
- the first information may include second cell information or second cell indication information (such as cell information of the new cell) to indicate the new cell, and the response to the first information may include cell confirmation information.
- the terminal device may switch to the new cell indicated by the first information.
- the first information may not indicate a new cell, and the response to the first information may indicate a new cell.
- the new cell may be the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
- the terminal device may switch to the new cell indicated by the response.
- the first information indicates a new cell, and the response to the first information also indicates a new cell.
- the terminal device may switch to the new cell indicated by the first information or the response to the first information.
- the new cell indicated by the response may be the same as or different from the new cell indicated by the first information.
- the response to the first information may be used to confirm or trigger switching to the new cell group indicated by the first information.
- the first information may include second cell group information to indicate the new cell group, and the response to the first information may include cell group confirmation information. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the new cell group indicated by the first information.
- the first information may not indicate a new cell group, and the response to the first information may indicate a new cell group.
- the new cell group may be the cell group to which the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
- the terminal device may switch to the new cell group indicated by the response.
- the first information indicates a new cell group, and the response to the first information also indicates a new cell group.
- the terminal device may switch to the new cell group indicated by the first information or the response to the first information.
- the new cell group indicated by the response may be the same as or different from the new cell group indicated by the first information.
- the response to the first information may include at least one of the following:
- the seventh indication information is used to indicate the second target beam.
- the seventh indication information may be beam information of the second target beam.
- the second target beam refers to the target beam indicated by the network device in the response to the first information.
- the second target beam may be selected from the new beam indicated in the first information.
- the second target beam may be the same as the first target beam, or the second target beam may be one or more of the candidate beams.
- the second target beam may be a beam other than the new beam indicated by the first information, which is not limited herein.
- the response to the first information may further include information indicating the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
- the response to the first information may include cell information of the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
- the cell to which the second target beam belongs may or may not be a new cell.
- the response to the first information includes information indicating the cell to which the second target beam belongs
- the cell to which the second target beam belongs is a new cell
- the terminal device may switch to the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
- the response to the first information does not include information indicating the cell to which the second target beam belongs
- the cell to which the second target beam belongs is not a new cell, and the terminal device may not switch to the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
- Eighth indication information the eighth indication information is used to indicate a new cell.
- the new cell indicated by the eighth indication information and the new cell indicated by the first indication information may be the same or different.
- the new cell indicated in the response may be the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
- the terminal device may switch to the cell indicated by the eighth indication information. If the response does not include the eighth indication information, the terminal device may not perform cell switching.
- the eighth indication information may be used to indicate whether the cell to which the second target beam belongs is a new cell.
- the response to the first information may include indication information of the cell to which the second target beam belongs. If the eighth indication information indicates that the cell to which the second target beam belongs is a new cell, or the cell to which the second target beam belongs is indicated by the eighth indication information, then the cell to which the second target beam belongs is a new cell. If the indication information of the cell to which the second target beam belongs is not indicated by the eighth indication information, then the cell to which the second target beam belongs is not a new cell.
- the ninth indication information is used to indicate a new cell group.
- the new cell indicated in the response may be the cell group to which the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
- the channels to which the second target beam is applicable; that is, the response may include the channels to which the second target beam is applied.
- the response may include the RS to which the second target beam is applied.
- a CORESET to which the second target beam applies; that is, the response may include a CORESET to which the second target beam applies.
- Channels for which the second target beam is not applicable; that is, the response may include channels for which the second target beam is not applied.
- the response may include an RS to which the second target beam is not applied.
- the number of second target beams indicated in the response can be multiple, and multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous downlink reception.
- the network device can further indicate in the response that multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous downlink reception.
- the format of the response may include a third information element, and the third information element is used to carry beam information of multiple second target beams for simultaneous downlink reception, thereby, the terminal device can know that multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous downlink reception.
- Indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission specifically, the number of second target beams indicated in the response can be multiple, and multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous uplink transmission.
- the network device can further indicate in the response that multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous uplink transmission.
- the format of the response may include a fourth information element, and the fourth information element is used to carry beam information of multiple second target beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, thereby, the terminal device can know that multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous uplink transmission.
- a second target beam for a third channel can be at least one of the following: PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH. That is, the response for the first channel can include the target beam for the specific channel.
- the third channel can be the same as or different from the first channel.
- the network device may indicate the type of unified TCI state adopted to the terminal device in the response;
- Unified TCI framework that is, the network device can indicate the adopted unified TCI state framework to the terminal device in the response;
- the network device may indicate the adopted transmission scheme to the terminal device in the response;
- the transmission scheme used by the fourth channel can be at least one of the following: PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH. That is, the network device can indicate the transmission scheme used by a specific channel to the terminal device in the response; the fourth channel can be the same as or different from the second channel.
- the beam training mode indicated in the response can be the same as or different from the beam training mode recommended in the first information. That is, the value of the parameter repetition in the beam training reference signal configuration information indicated in the response can be the same as or different from the value recommended in the first information.
- the following is an exemplary description of the sender of the response to the first information.
- the response to the first information may come from the current serving cell, and/or from the TRP to which the current serving cell belongs or the TRP included in the current serving cell.
- the response to the first information may come from the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs and/or the cell to which the new beam belongs.
- the response may come from the cell to which the new beam indicated by the first information belongs, and/or the response may come from the cell to which the new beam indicated by the response belongs.
- the response to the first information may come from the cell to be handed over and/or the new cell.
- the response may come from the new cell indicated by the first information, and/or the response may come from the new cell indicated by the response.
- the terminal device may further receive third configuration information, where the third configuration information is used to reconfigure the PCI list or the candidate cell list.
- the network device may reconfigure the PCI list or the candidate cell list to update the candidate cell (such as a neighboring cell) to which the alternative beam or the new beam can be provided for the terminal device.
- the terminal device may perform the first operation after sending the first information, or the terminal device may perform the first operation after receiving a response to the first information, or the terminal device may perform the first operation before sending the first information, or the terminal device may perform the first operation independently of the first information or the response to the first information.
- the terminal device may perform the first operation after sending the first information, or the terminal device may perform the first operation after receiving a response to the first information, or the terminal device may perform the first operation before sending the first information, or the terminal device may perform the first operation independently of the first information or the response to the first information.
- FIG7 is a flow chart of a beam switching method according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the steps shown in FIG7 can be applied to a terminal device.
- the communication method shown in FIG7 may include S71 and S72.
- the terminal device in response to detecting one or more switching events, sends first information and performs a first operation. That is, if the terminal device detects one or more switching events, the terminal device may send first information to the network device and perform a first operation.
- the terminal device may first send the first information and then perform the first operation. Alternatively, the terminal device may first perform the first operation and then send the first information. Alternatively, the terminal device may simultaneously perform the first operation and send the first information.
- the terminal device in response to detecting one or more switching events, performs the first operation. That is, different from the previous implementation, if the terminal device detects one or more switching events, the terminal device can directly perform the first operation without sending the first information to the network device.
- the first operation may include at least one of the following:
- the activated new beam may be the new beam indicated in the first information (eg, a candidate beam, a first target beam), or the activated new beam may be the new beam indicated in a response to the first information.
- the new beam may be an inactive beam.
- the terminal device may only activate the new beam but not switch to the new beam.
- the terminal device may wait for other signaling from the network device before switching to the activated new beam.
- the terminal device may switch to the new beam after activating the new beam (in this case, the new beam is the target beam). For example, the terminal device may switch to the new beam without relying on a response or confirmation from the network device.
- the target beam may be a new beam or an optimal beam among candidate beams.
- the target beam may be a new beam or a default beam among candidate beams.
- the new beam may be the new beam indicated by the first information above, or may be the new beam indicated by a response to the first information.
- the target beam may be the default beam of the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, or the target beam may be the default beam of the current serving cell, or the target beam may be the optimal beam or the default beam of the new cell.
- the new cell may be the new cell indicated by the first information, or the new cell indicated by the response to the first information.
- the default beam may be the beam with the smallest or largest identifier, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment.
- the target beam may be a default beam or an optimal beam on a default cell.
- the default cell may be a current serving cell.
- the default cell may be a serving cell with the largest or smallest identifier or with the largest or smallest frequency.
- the target beam may be either the first target beam or the second target beam.
- the description herein of the target beam may apply to both the first target beam and the second target beam.
- the first information does not indicate a new beam, for example, the first information only includes information about a detected switching event and/or a beam to be switched, and the terminal device may switch to a default beam.
- the terminal device may switch to a default beam on a current serving cell.
- the beam used by the first PDSCH in Example 6 is a beam to be switched, and/or the beam used by the first PUSCH is a beam to be switched, the beam of the first PDSCH and/or the first PUSCH can be switched to a second beam, and the second beam can be a default beam on the current serving cell.
- the first PDSCH and/or the first PUSCH can be the PDSCH and/or PUSCH on the current serving cell.
- the beam of the first RS may be switched to a third beam, which may be a default beam on the current serving cell.
- the beam of the second RS may be switched to a fourth beam, which may be a default beam on the current serving cell.
- the beam of the first CORESET may be switched to the fifth beam, which may be the default beam on the current serving cell.
- the target beam corresponding to the beam to be switched can be one or more of the default beam on the non-service cell (such as the non-service cell where the beam to be switched is located), the default beam on the current service cell, and the new beam indicated by the first information.
- the first beam to be switched is a beam of a non-serving cell.
- the terminal device can switch the first beam to be switched to a sixth beam, where the sixth beam is a new beam indicated by the first information, or the sixth beam can be a default beam of a non-serving cell, or the sixth beam can be a default beam of a current serving cell.
- the terminal device may switch to multiple target beams for simultaneous downlink reception, and/or the terminal device may switch to multiple target beams for simultaneous uplink transmission.
- the multiple new beams indicated by the first information are used for simultaneous downlink reception, and the terminal device may switch to multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception.
- the multiple new beams indicated by the first information are used for simultaneous uplink transmission, and the terminal device may switch to multiple new beams for simultaneous uplink transmission.
- the terminal device may not apply multiple beams for simultaneous downlink reception and/or may not apply multiple beams for simultaneous uplink transmission.
- the terminal device can switch the transmission scheme of the fifth channel from the first transmission scheme to the second transmission scheme.
- the fifth channel can be one or more specific channels among PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH and PDCCH, or any one or more channels among PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH and PDCCH.
- the fifth channel can be a channel (such as the second channel) that recommends single TRP transmission in the first information, or the fifth channel can be a channel (such as the fourth channel) that indicates single TRP transmission in the response to the first information, or the fifth channel can be a channel that does not indicate a transmission scheme in the first information and/or the response to the first information, but is not limited to this.
- the activated cell may be at least one of the following: the new cell indicated in the first information, the cell to which the new beam indicated in the first information belongs, the new cell indicated in the response to the first information, and the cell to which the new beam indicated in the response to the first information belongs.
- the terminal device only activates the new cell but does not switch to the new cell.
- the terminal device can wait for other signaling from the network device before switching to the activated new cell.
- the terminal device may perform cell switching to switch to a target cell.
- the target cell may be at least one of the following: a cell to which the target beam belongs, a new cell indicated in the first information, a cell to which the new beam indicated in the first information belongs, a new cell indicated in a response to the first information, a cell to which the new beam indicated in a response to the first information belongs, or a default cell.
- the default cell may be, but is not limited to, a current serving cell.
- the activated cell group may be at least one of the following: the new cell group indicated in the first information, the cell group to which the new beam indicated in the first information belongs, the new cell group indicated in the response to the first information, and the cell group to which the new beam indicated in the response to the first information belongs.
- the terminal device only activates the new cell group but does not switch to the new cell group. The terminal device needs to wait for other signaling from the network device before switching to the activated new cell group.
- the terminal device may perform cell group switching to switch to the target cell group.
- the target cell group can be at least one of the following: the cell group to which the target cell belongs, the new cell group indicated in the first information, the cell group to which the cell to which the new beam indicated in the first information belongs, the new cell group indicated in the response to the first information, and the cell group to which the cell to which the new beam indicated in the response to the first information belongs.
- the deactivated cells may include at least one of the following: the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, the cell to be switched, and the cell not indicated in the first information.
- the deactivated cell group may include at least one of the following: the cell group to which the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs belongs, the cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs, and the cell group not indicated in the first information.
- the type of unified TCI state may be switched to the type of unified TCI state suggested by the first information, or the type of unified TCI state indicated in the response.
- it can be switched to the framework of the unified TCI state suggested by the first information, or it can be switched to the framework of the unified TCI state indicated in the response.
- the transmission scheme may be switched to the transmission scheme suggested by the first information, or may be switched to the transmission scheme indicated in the response.
- the sixth channel may be the second channel
- the terminal device may switch the transmission scheme of the second channel to the transmission scheme adopted by the second channel suggested by the first information, or the transmission scheme indicated by the response to the first information.
- the sixth channel may be the fourth channel
- the terminal device may switch the transmission scheme of the fourth channel to the transmission scheme indicated by the response to the first information.
- the sixth channel may be one or more specific channels among PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH, or the sixth channel may be any one or more channels among PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH.
- the transmission scheme adopted by the sixth channel may be single TRP transmission, or may be multi-TRP transmission.
- the sixth channel uses multiple TRP transmission. If the first information indicates multiple new beams, the terminal device can select multiple new beams with the best beam quality among the multiple new beams to continue using multiple TRP transmission.
- the sixth channel adopts multi-TRP transmission. If the first information only indicates a new beam, the terminal device can switch the transmission scheme of the sixth channel to single TRP transmission.
- the sixth channel may be the fifth channel mentioned above.
- the first information indicates that the seventh channel is applicable to the first target beam.
- the terminal device may switch the beam of the seventh channel to the first target beam.
- the first information indicates that the eighth channel is applicable to a new beam, a candidate beam, or the first target beam.
- the terminal device may switch the eighth channel to the target beam.
- the target beam to which the eighth channel is switched may be one or more of the target beams described above.
- the eighth channel may be switched to the beam with the best beam quality among the new beams indicated by the first information, or the eighth channel may be switched to the default beam.
- the following is an exemplary description of the execution timing of the first operation, wherein the first time unit hereinafter refers to the execution timing of the first operation.
- the terminal device performs the first operation upon receiving a response to the first information.
- the first operation in response to receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the duration between the transmission time unit of the first information and the first time unit is a first preset duration.
- the transmission time unit of the first information or the starting time unit of the first preset duration may refer to a symbol occupied by a channel resource carrying the first information (e.g., the last symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the first information).
- the terminal device may perform the first operation a period of time after sending the first information.
- the time unit for a terminal device to send a first message is t1. If the terminal device receives a response to the first message before a second time unit, the terminal device may perform the first operation at time unit (t1+T1), where T1 represents a first preset duration.
- the second time unit may be the end time of a response time window.
- the start time of the response time window may be the transmission time unit of the first message.
- the first operation in response to receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the duration between the transmission time unit of the response and the first time unit is a second preset duration.
- the transmission time unit of the response or the starting time unit of the second preset duration may refer to a symbol occupied by a channel resource carrying the response (e.g., the last symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the response).
- the terminal device may perform the first operation some time after receiving the response.
- the time unit in which the terminal device sends the first information is t1. If the terminal device receives a response to the first information before the second time unit, the terminal device may perform the first operation at the time unit (t2 + T2).
- t2 represents the transmission time unit of the response to the first information
- T2 represents the second preset duration.
- the second time unit may be the end time of the response time window.
- the start time of the response time window may be the transmission time unit of the first information.
- the first operation in response to receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the duration between the second time unit and the first time unit is a third preset duration.
- the terminal device may perform the first operation after a second preset time period after the end of the response time window.
- the time unit in which the terminal device sends the first information is t1. If the terminal device receives a response to the first information before the second time unit, the terminal device may perform the first operation at the time unit (t3 + T3).
- t3 represents the second time unit
- T3 represents the third preset duration.
- the second time unit may be the end time of the response time window.
- the start time of the response time window may be the transmission time unit of the first information.
- the terminal device performs the first operation when not receiving a response to the first information.
- not receiving a response to the first information may indicate that the network device confirms the first information, or confirms starting beam management or beam switching.
- the first operation in response to not receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the duration between the transmission time unit of the first information and the first time unit is a fourth preset duration.
- the transmission time unit of the first information or the starting time unit of the fourth preset duration may refer to a symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the first information (e.g., the last symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the first information).
- the terminal device may perform the first operation a period of time after sending the first information.
- the time unit for the terminal device to send the first information is t1. If the terminal device does not receive a response to the first information before the second time unit, the terminal device may perform the first operation at the time unit (t1+T4), where T4 represents a fourth preset duration.
- the second time unit may be the end time of the response time window.
- the start time of the response time window may be the time unit for the terminal device to send the first information.
- the first operation in response to not receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the duration between the second time unit and the first time unit is a fifth preset duration.
- the terminal device may perform the first operation some time after the end of the response time window.
- the time unit in which the terminal device sends the first information is t1. If the terminal device does not receive a response to the first information before the second time unit, the terminal device may perform the first operation in the time unit (t3+T5). t3 represents the second time unit, and T5 represents the fifth preset duration. The second time unit may be the end moment of the response time window. The starting moment of the response time window may be the transmission time unit of the first information. In a sixth embodiment, in response to not receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the first time unit is the second time unit.
- the terminal device may perform the first operation at the end of the response time window.
- the terminal device sends the first information at time t1. If the terminal device does not receive a response to the first information before the second time, the terminal device may perform the first operation at time t3. t3 represents the second time. The second time may be the end of the response time window.
- the first operation is performed in a first time unit, and the duration between the transmission time unit of the first information and the first time unit is a sixth preset duration. That is, the transmission time unit of the first information or the starting time unit of the sixth preset duration is the symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the first information (e.g., the last symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the first information).
- the first time unit may be later than the transmission time unit of the first information.
- the terminal device performs the first operation independently of the response to the first information.
- the time unit for the terminal device to send the first information is t1
- the terminal device may perform the first operation in the time unit (t1+T6), where T6 represents the sixth preset time length.
- time unit in this article may refer to a symbol, a time slot, a frame, a subframe, etc., but is not limited thereto.
- this document does not limit the length of the above-mentioned response time window, the first preset time window, the second preset time window, the third preset time window, the fourth preset time window, the fifth preset time window and the sixth preset time window.
- At least one of the length of the response time window, the first preset time window, the second preset time window, the third preset time window, the fourth preset time window, the fifth preset time window and the sixth preset time window can be configured by the network device and/or can be defined by the protocol.
- multiple CCs may adopt a unified TCI framework, that is, multiple CCs may use the same one or more beams. If the same beam used by multiple CCs is the beam to be switched, the terminal device may perform beam switching on multiple CCs corresponding to the beam to be switched.
- the preset duration may be determined based on the minimum value of the subcarrier spacing (SCS) of all bandwidth parts (Bandwidth Part, BWP) of the multiple CCs corresponding to the beam to be switched, or the preset duration may be determined based on the minimum value of the SCS of the currently activated BWP of the multiple CCs corresponding to the beam to be switched.
- the preset duration may be at least one of the first preset duration, the second preset duration, the third preset duration, the fourth preset duration, the fifth preset duration, and the sixth preset duration.
- multiple CCs may adopt a unified TCI framework, that is, multiple CCs may use the same one or more beams. If the target beams to which multiple CCs are switched are the same one or more beams, that is, the target beam can be applied to multiple CCs, in this case, the preset duration may be determined based on the minimum value of the SCS of all BWPs of the multiple CCs to which the target beam is applied, or the preset duration may be determined based on the minimum value of the SCS of the currently activated BWPs of the multiple CCs to which the target beam is applied.
- the first operation may include beam switching.
- the preset duration mentioned above may be referred to as beam application time (BAT).
- the preset duration may also be referred to as cell switching time.
- the BAT of the target beam may include at least one of the following:
- the cell switching duration required to switch to the cell to which the target beam belongs that is, the terminal device performs beam switching between cells, and switches not only to the target beam, but also to the cell to which the target beam belongs.
- the BAT of the target beam needs to include the cell switching duration.
- the configuration validity period may include: the transmission duration of the configuration signaling containing the RRC pre-configuration of the cell to which the target beam belongs and/or the validity period of the RRC pre-configuration of the cell to which the target beam belongs.
- the terminal device performs inter-cell beam switching, and switches not only to the target beam, but also to the cell to which the target beam belongs. In this case, it is also necessary to consider: the transmission duration of the configuration signaling containing the RRC pre-configuration of the cell to which the target beam belongs and/or the validity duration of the RRC pre-configuration of the cell to which the target beam belongs.
- the network device after receiving the first information, can determine the target beam based on the first information and determine that the terminal device switches to the cell to which the target beam belongs. Thus, the network device can send the RRC preconfiguration information of the cell to which the target beam belongs to the terminal device. Compared with sending the RRC preconfiguration information of multiple cells before receiving the first information, with such a solution, the network device only needs to configure the RRC preconfiguration information of the cell to be switched to, which is conducive to reducing signaling overhead.
- the terminal device not only switches to the target beam, but also activates the cell to which the target beam belongs.
- the BAT of the target beam may include the activation duration of the cell to which the target beam belongs.
- the BAT of the target beam may include the activation duration of the secondary cell to which the target beam belongs.
- the BAT of the target beam may include the activation duration of the TCI state corresponding to the target beam.
- the terminal device may deactivate the currently activated TCI state (such as the TCI state corresponding to the beam to be switched).
- the BAT of the target beam may include the deactivation duration of the currently activated TCI state.
- the activated TCI state may include the TCI state corresponding to the target beam, and may also include TCI states corresponding to beams other than the target beam.
- the terminal device may deactivate other activated TCI states in the currently activated TCI state except the TCI state corresponding to the target beam before applying the target beam.
- the BAT of the target beam may include the deactivation duration of other activated TCI states in the currently activated TCI state except the TCI state corresponding to the target beam.
- the current cell when the first operation includes cell switching, the current cell may be deactivated before applying the target beam.
- the BAT of the target beam may include the deactivation duration of the current cell.
- the terminal device may deactivate the candidate cells that do not provide the target beam.
- the BAT of the target beam may include the deactivation duration of other candidate cells in the candidate cells except the cell to which the target beam belongs.
- FIG 8 is a flow chart of a fourth communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the steps shown in FIG8 can be applied to a terminal device.
- the communication method shown in FIG8 can include S81.
- the first information includes at least one of the following: information about a detected switching event, the switching event is used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched is the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched is the cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell is the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group is the cell group to which the new cell belongs.
- the network device may pre-configure the association relationship between beams.
- the first information may include indication information of the new beam, but does not include indication information of the beam to be switched.
- the network device may determine the beam to be switched associated with the new beam based on the new beam and the association relationship between the beams.
- the first information may include indication information of the beam to be switched, but does not include indication information of the new beam.
- the network device may determine the new beam associated with the beam to be switched based on the beam to be switched and the association relationship between the beams.
- the first information may include indication information of the beam to be switched and indication information of the new beam. Furthermore, the first information may also indicate an association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam, and the association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam may be indicated explicitly or implicitly.
- the first information may include association indication information
- the association indication information may be used to indicate at least one of the following: an association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam, an association relationship between the cell to be switched and the new cell, and an association relationship between the cell group to be switched and the new cell group.
- the association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam refers to switching from the beam to be switched to the associated new beam
- the association relationship between the cell to be switched and the new cell refers to switching from the cell to be switched to the associated new cell
- the association relationship between the cell group to be switched and the new cell group refers to switching from the cell group to be switched to the associated new cell group.
- the first information implicitly indicates at least one of the following: an association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam, an association relationship between the cell to be switched and the new cell, and an association relationship between the cell group to be switched and the new cell group.
- the implicit method may be to carry the mutually associated information in the first information according to a preset order and position.
- the new beam and the beam to be switched may be associated with each other.
- the new beam and the current beam may be associated with each other.
- the terminal device can switch to a new beam. Specifically, the terminal device can switch to a new beam associated with the beam to be switched or a new beam associated with the current beam. For example, if beam 1 is the beam to be switched, beam 1 is associated with beam 2, and beam 2 is a new beam, the terminal device can switch from beam 1 to beam 2.
- the terminal device may no longer use all current beams associated with the new beam or the beam to be switched associated with the new beam.
- Beam 1 is the new beam
- Beam 2 and Beam 3 associated with Beam 1 are the current beams.
- Beam 2 is the beam to be switched, and Beam 3 is not.
- the terminal device may switch Beam 2 to Beam 1.
- the terminal device may not switch Beam 3 to Beam 1, or it may switch Beam 3 to Beam 1.
- the network device can configure the association relationship between RS transmission parameters to configure the association relationship between beams.
- the resource configuration information may include configuration information of a first RS transmission parameter and configuration information of a second RS transmission parameter, wherein the first RS transmission parameter is associated with the current beam, the second RS transmission parameter is associated with the alternative beam, and the first RS transmission parameter and the second RS transmission parameter are associated.
- the first RS transmission parameter may be at least one of the following: a first RS resource, a first RS resource set, or a first RS resource configuration
- the second RS transmission parameter may be at least one of the following: a second RS resource, a second RS resource set, or a second RS resource configuration.
- the RS transmission parameter may be represented by an index or identifier of the RS transmission parameter.
- the first RS transmission parameter and the second RS transmission parameter can be associated in at least one of the following ways: the configuration information of the first RS transmission parameter includes the configuration information of the second RS transmission parameter, the configuration information of the second RS transmission parameter includes the configuration information of the first RS transmission parameter, and the network device indicates the association relationship between the first RS transmission parameter and the second RS transmission parameter through signaling.
- the terminal device can use the alternative beam associated with the second RS transmission parameter as the new beam corresponding to the beam to be switched, or the terminal device can measure the second RS transmission parameter to determine the new beam corresponding to the beam to be switched.
- one RS resource can be associated with another RS resource.
- the terminal device determines that beam 1 is the beam to be switched by measuring RS resource 1, it can measure RS resource 2 associated with RS resource 1 to determine whether beam 2 is the corresponding new beam.
- an RS resource can be associated with multiple RS resources.
- an RS resource can be associated with an RS resource set, thereby being associated with the RS resources in the RS resource set.
- an RS resource can be associated with an RS resource configuration, thereby being associated with the RS resources in the RS resource configuration.
- the terminal device determines that beam 1 is the beam to be switched by measuring RS resource 1, it can measure RS resource 2 and RS resource 3 associated with RS resource 1 to determine whether beam 2 corresponding to RS resource 2 and beam 3 corresponding to RS resource 3 are corresponding new beams.
- multiple RS resources can be associated with multiple RS resources.
- an RS resource set can be associated with another RS resource set.
- an RS resource set can be associated with an RS resource configuration.
- an RS resource configuration can be associated with another RS resource configuration.
- an RS resource configuration can be associated with an RS resource set.
- the terminal device can measure the RS resources in RS resource set 2 to determine the new beam.
- the network device may not configure the association relationship between beams. For example, after receiving the first information, the network device may start a beam training process.
- the above method can be implemented in the form of a software program, which runs in a processor integrated inside a chip or chip module; or, the method can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and software, for example, using a dedicated chip or chip module, or using a dedicated chip or chip module in combination with a software program.
- Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device in an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device shown in Figure 9 can be deployed in a terminal device.
- the device shown in Figure 9 may include:
- the sending module 91 is configured to send first information, where the first information includes at least one of the following:
- First indication information where the first indication information is used to indicate a beam to be switched and/or a cell to be switched and/or a cell group to be switched, where the cell to be switched is a cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched is a cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs;
- the second indication information is used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell is the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group is the cell group to which the new cell belongs.
- the sending module 91 may be a communication interface, a transceiver, etc.
- the communication device shown in Figure 9 may correspond to a chip with communication function in a terminal device; or correspond to a chip or chip module with communication function in a terminal device, or correspond to a terminal device.
- Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another communication device in an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device shown in Figure 10 can be deployed in a network device.
- the device shown in Figure 10 may include:
- the receiving module 101 is configured to receive first information, where the first information includes at least one of the following:
- First indication information where the first indication information is used to indicate a beam to be switched and/or a cell to be switched and/or a cell group to be switched, where the cell to be switched is a cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched is a cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs;
- the second indication information is used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell is the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group is the cell group to which the new cell belongs.
- the receiving module 101 may be a communication interface, a transceiver, etc.
- the communication device shown in FIG10 may correspond to a chip with a communication function in a network device; or correspond to a chip or chip module with a communication function in a network device, or correspond to a network device.
- the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium having a computer program stored thereon.
- the storage medium may include a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
- the storage medium may also include a non-volatile memory or a non-transitory memory.
- An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device comprising a memory and a processor, wherein the memory stores a computer program executable on the processor, and the processor executes the steps of the above method when executing the computer program.
- the communication device may be a terminal device or a network device, wherein the terminal device may be, but is not limited to, a mobile phone, a computer, a tablet computer, an in-vehicle terminal, or a wearable device.
- FIG 11 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a communication device in an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device shown in Figure 11 can be the above-mentioned terminal device or the above-mentioned network device.
- the communication device shown in Figure 11 includes a memory 111, a processor 112 and a transceiver 113.
- the processor 112 is coupled to the memory 111 and the transceiver 113.
- the memory 111 can be located inside the communication device or outside the communication device.
- the memory 111, the processor 112 and the transceiver 113 can be connected via a communication bus.
- the transceiver 113 is used to communicate with other devices.
- the transceiver 113 may be a transmitter or a receiver.
- the memory 111 stores a computer program that can be executed on the processor 112.
- the transceiver 113 executes the steps of the method provided in the above embodiment, and/or when the processor 112 executes the computer program, the transceiver 113 executes the steps of the method provided in the above embodiment.
- the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), or may be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field-programmable gate arrays (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
- a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
- the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
- the non-volatile memory may be ROM, programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or flash memory.
- the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
- RAM dynamic random access memory
- DRAM dynamic random access memory
- SDRAM synchronous DRAM
- DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
- ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
- SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
- DR RAM direct rambus RAM
- the above embodiments can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination.
- the above embodiments can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs.
- the computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
- the computer program can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
- the computer program can be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired or wireless means.
- the size of the serial numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution.
- the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
- the disclosed methods, devices, and systems can be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are merely schematic; for example, the division of the units is merely a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation; for example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not executed.
- Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed across multiple network units. Some or all of these units may be selected to achieve the purpose of this embodiment according to actual needs.
- the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may be physically included separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of hardware plus software functional units.
- the various modules/units contained therein may all be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits, or at least some of the modules/units may be implemented in the form of software programs, which run on the processor integrated inside the chip, and the remaining (if any) modules/units may be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits;
- the various modules/units contained therein may all be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits, and different modules/units may be located in the same component (such as a chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components of the chip module, or at least some of the modules/units may be located in the same component (such as a chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components of the chip module, or at least some of the modules/units may be located in the same component (such as a chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components of the chip module, or at least some of the modules/units may be located in the same component (such as a chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components of the chip module.).
- the element can be implemented in the form of a software program, which runs on the processor integrated inside the chip module, and the remaining (if any) modules/units can be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits; for various devices and products applied to or integrated in the terminal, the various modules/units contained therein can be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits, and different modules/units can be located in the same component (for example, chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components in the terminal, or, at least some modules/units can be implemented in the form of a software program, which runs on the processor integrated inside the terminal, and the remaining (if any) modules/units can be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits.
- the above-mentioned integrated unit implemented in the form of a software functional unit can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- the above-mentioned software functional unit is stored in a storage medium and includes a number of instructions for causing a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform some steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
- the aforementioned storage medium includes: a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, ROM, random access memory RAM, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, etc., various media that can store program code.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Quality & Reliability (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请要求于2024年2月8日提交中国专利局、申请号为202410178154.3、发明名称为“通信方法、通信装置、计算机可读存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the China Patent Office on February 8, 2024, with application number 202410178154.3 and invention name “Communication method, communication device, computer-readable storage medium”, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference into this application.
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法、通信装置、计算机可读存储介质。The present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method, a communication device, and a computer-readable storage medium.
波束赋形(Beam Forming)是一种使用天线阵列定向地发送和接收信号的信号处理技术。在波束赋形技术中,信号在特定方向上发送,而不是全向发送,这种基于波束的信号传输方法可以使信号功率聚焦在特定方向上,使得在目的地处检测到信号的可能性更高或信号接收质量更优。Beamforming is a signal processing technique that uses an antenna array to transmit and receive signals in a directionally controlled manner. In beamforming, signals are sent in a specific direction rather than omnidirectionally. This beam-based signal transmission method focuses signal power in a specific direction, increasing the likelihood of signal detection at the destination or improving signal reception quality.
在现有的波束管理或波束切换的方案中,终端设备根据网络设备的配置进行波束测量并向网络设备发送波束报告,在波束报告中通常仅包括质量较优的波束,这种波束报告的作用有限,无法满足更多场景下波束管理或波束切换的需求,更因为网络设备控制所导致的波束切换不及时,有待进一步优化。In existing beam management or beam switching solutions, the terminal device performs beam measurement based on the configuration of the network device and sends a beam report to the network device. The beam report usually only includes beams with better quality. The role of this beam report is limited and cannot meet the needs of beam management or beam switching in more scenarios. Moreover, the beam switching caused by network device control is not timely and needs further optimization.
本申请的技术目的之一在于提供一种通信方法、通信装置及计算机可读存储介质,能够优化现有的波束报告,从而进一步优化波束管理或波束切换过程。One of the technical objectives of the present application is to provide a communication method, a communication device and a computer-readable storage medium that can optimize existing beam reports, thereby further optimizing beam management or beam switching processes.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,所述方法包括:发送第一信息,所述第一信息包括以下至少一项:检测到的切换事件的信息,所述切换事件用于波束管理或波束切换;第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示待切换波束和/或待切换小区和/或待切换小区组,所述待切换小区为所述待切换波束所属的小区,所述待切换小区组为所述待切换波束所属的小区组;第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示新波束和/或新小区和/或新小区组,所述新小区为所述新波束所属的小区,所述新小区组为所述新波束所属的小区组。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, the method comprising: sending first information, the first information comprising at least one of the following: information of a detected switching event, the switching event being used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information being used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched being the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched being the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information being used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell being the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group being the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
上述方案中,通过向网络设备上报切换事件的信息,能够使网络设备获知终端设备检测到的切换事件,从而能够获知终端设备的信道变化,尤其是网络设备可以基于第一信息获知终端设备的信道质量变差的情况,从而能够及时地进行波束管理或波束切换。In the above scheme, by reporting the information of the switching event to the network device, the network device can be informed of the switching event detected by the terminal device, thereby being able to know the channel changes of the terminal device. In particular, the network device can be informed of the deterioration of the channel quality of the terminal device based on the first information, thereby being able to perform beam management or beam switching in a timely manner.
上述方案中,通过向网络设备上报待切换波束和/或新波束,能够使网络设备及时获知当前波束中质量变差的波束和/或新波束,从而能够针对性地对质量变差的波束进行切换。In the above scheme, by reporting the beam to be switched and/or the new beam to the network device, the network device can promptly know the beam and/or new beam with deteriorating quality in the current beam, so that the beam with deteriorating quality can be switched in a targeted manner.
上述方案中,通过向网络设备上报待切换小区和/或新小区,能够满足在多个小区能够为终端设备提供波束的情况下,在波束切换或波束管理过程中进一步执行小区切换的需求。In the above scheme, by reporting the cell to be switched and/or the new cell to the network device, it can meet the need to further perform cell switching during the beam switching or beam management process when multiple cells can provide beams for the terminal device.
上述方案中,通过向网络设备上报待切换小区组和/或新小区组,能够满足在多个小区组的小区能够为终端设备提供波束的情况下,在波束切换或波束管理过程中进一步执行小区组切换的需求。In the above scheme, by reporting the cell group to be switched and/or the new cell group to the network equipment, it can meet the need to further perform cell group switching during beam switching or beam management when the cells of multiple cell groups can provide beams for the terminal equipment.
可选的,所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:所述待切换小区的小区标识信息、所述待切换小区关联的参考信号RS资源配置的标识信息、所述待切换小区关联的RS资源集的标识信息、所述待切换小区关联的RS资源的标识信息、所述待切换小区关联的报告配置的标识信息;和/或,所述第二指示信息包括以下至少一项:所述新小区的小区标识信息、所述新小区关联的RS资源配置的标识信息、所述新小区关联的RS资源集的标识信息、所述新小区关联的RS资源的标识信息、所述新小区关联的报告配置的标识信息。Optionally, the first indication information includes at least one of the following: cell identification information of the cell to be switched, identification information of the reference signal RS resource configuration associated with the cell to be switched, identification information of the RS resource set associated with the cell to be switched, identification information of the RS resources associated with the cell to be switched, and identification information of the report configuration associated with the cell to be switched; and/or, the second indication information includes at least one of the following: cell identification information of the new cell, identification information of the RS resource configuration associated with the new cell, identification information of the RS resource set associated with the new cell, identification information of the RS resources associated with the new cell, and identification information of the report configuration associated with the new cell.
可选的,所述方法还包括:接收资源配置信息,所述资源配置信息包括至少一个RS传输参数,所述RS传输参数为RS资源配置、RS资源集、RS资源中的至少一项;其中,所述至少一个RS传输参数满足以下至少一项:所述至少一个RS传输参数关联一个或多个切换事件;每个RS传输参数包括该RS传输参数关联的切换事件的信息;每个切换事件的信息包括该切换事件关联的RS传输参数;所述至少一个RS传输参数关联一个或多个波束;每个RS传输参数包括该RS传输参数关联的波束的信息;每个波束的信息包括该波束关联的RS传输参数;所述至少一个RS传输参数关联一个或多个小区;每个RS传输参数包括该RS传输参数关联的小区的信息;每个小区的信息包括该小区关联的RS传输参数的信息;所述至少一个RS传输参数中的第一RS传输参数关联当前波束,所述至少一个RS传输参数中的第二RS传输参数关联备选波束;所述第一RS传输参数与所述第二RS传输参数关联。Optionally, the method also includes: receiving resource configuration information, the resource configuration information including at least one RS transmission parameter, the RS transmission parameter being at least one of RS resource configuration, RS resource set, and RS resource; wherein the at least one RS transmission parameter satisfies at least one of the following: the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more switching events; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the switching event associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each switching event includes the RS transmission parameter associated with the switching event; the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more beams; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the beam associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each beam includes the RS transmission parameter associated with the beam; the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more cells; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the cell associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each cell includes information about the RS transmission parameter associated with the cell; the first RS transmission parameter among the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with the current beam, and the second RS transmission parameter among the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with the alternative beam; the first RS transmission parameter is associated with the second RS transmission parameter.
可选的,所述方法还包括:接收报告配置信息,所述报告配置信息包括至少一个报告配置;其中,所述至少一个报告配置满足以下至少一项:所述至少一个报告配置关联一个或多个切换事件;每个报告配置包括该报告配置关联的切换事件的信息;每个切换事件的信息包括该切换事件关联的报告配置;所述至少一个报告配置关联一个或多个波束;每个报告配置包括该报告配置关联的波束的信息;每个波束的信息包括该波束关联的报告配置;所述至少一个报告配置关联一个或多个小区;每个报告配置包括该报告配置关联的小区的信息;每个小区的信息包括该小区关联的报告配置的信息。Optionally, the method also includes: receiving report configuration information, the report configuration information including at least one report configuration; wherein the at least one report configuration satisfies at least one of the following: the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more switching events; each report configuration includes information about the switching event associated with the report configuration; the information about each switching event includes the report configuration associated with the switching event; the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more beams; each report configuration includes information about the beam associated with the report configuration; the information of each beam includes the report configuration associated with the beam; the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more cells; each report configuration includes information about the cell associated with the report configuration; the information of each cell includes information about the report configuration associated with the cell.
可选的,所述第一信息还包括以下至少一项:关联指示信息,关联指示信息用于指示以下至少一项:所述待切换波束和所述新波束之间的关联关系、所述待切换小区和所述新小区之间的关联关系、所述待切换小区组和所述新小区组之间的关联关系;第一信道适用的新波束;所述新波束适用的信道;所述新波束适用的RS;所述新波束适用的控制资源集CORESET;所述新波束不适用的信道;所述新候选波束不适用的RS;所述新候选波束不适用的CORESET;应用所述新波束的概率信息;切换至所述新小区的概率信息;切换至所述新小区组的概率信息;切换至所述第一目标小区组的概率信息;所述待切换波束对应的面板信息;所述新波束对应的面板信息;多个所述新波束用于下行同时接收的指示信息;用于下行同时接收的多个新波束的指示信息;用于下行同时接收的多个新波束对应的面板信息;多个所述新波束用于上行同时发送的指示信息;用于上行同时发送的多个新波束的指示信息;用于上行同时发送的多个新波束对应的面板信息;建议的统一传输配置指示TCI状态的类型;建议的统一TCI框架;建议的传输方案;建议第二信道采用的传输方案;建议的波束训练方式;建议的波束训练参考信号配置信息中的参数repetition的取值。Optionally, the first information also includes at least one of the following: association indication information, the association indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following: the association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam, the association relationship between the cell to be switched and the new cell, the association relationship between the cell group to be switched and the new cell group; the new beam applicable to the first channel; the channel applicable to the new beam; the RS applicable to the new beam; the control resource set CORESET applicable to the new beam; the channel not applicable to the new beam; the RS not applicable to the new candidate beam; the CORESET not applicable to the new candidate beam; the probability information of applying the new beam; the probability information of switching to the new cell; the probability information of switching to the new cell group; the probability information of switching to the first target Probability information of the cell group; panel information corresponding to the beam to be switched; panel information corresponding to the new beam; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception; panel information corresponding to multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous uplink transmission; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous uplink transmission; panel information corresponding to multiple new beams for simultaneous uplink transmission; recommended unified transmission configuration indication TCI state type; recommended unified TCI framework; recommended transmission scheme; recommended transmission scheme for the second channel; recommended beam training method; recommended value of parameter repetition in beam training reference signal configuration information.
可选的,所述传输方案为单传输接收点TRP传输或多TRP传输;其中,所述多TRP传输包括以下至少一项:单频网SFN传输、时分复用TDM传输、空分复用SDM传输、频分复用FDM传输。Optionally, the transmission scheme is single transmission receiving point TRP transmission or multiple TRP transmission; wherein, the multiple TRP transmission includes at least one of the following: single frequency network SFN transmission, time division multiplexing TDM transmission, space division multiplexing SDM transmission, and frequency division multiplexing FDM transmission.
可选的,所述建议的统一TCI框架为单TRP传输的统一TCI激活或指示方式或者多TRP传输的统一TCI激活或指示方式。Optionally, the proposed unified TCI framework is a unified TCI activation or indication method for single TRP transmission or a unified TCI activation or indication method for multiple TRP transmission.
可选的,所述新波束包括第一波束,所述第一波束满足以下至少一项:所述第一波束不适用于第一物理下行共享信道PDSCH和/或第一物理上行共享信道PUSCH,其中,调度所述第一PDSCH的物理下行控制信道PDCCH和所述第一PDSCH的传输时间间隔小于或等于第二十二门限值,所述第一PUSCH为下行控制信息DCI格式0_0指示或激活的PUSCH;所述第一波束不适用于第一RS,所述第一RS不应用统一TCI状态;所述第一波束不适用于第二RS,其中,触发所述第二RS的PDCCH与所述第二RS的传输时间间隔小于或等于第二十三门限值;所述第一波束不适用于第一CORESET,所述第一CORESET关联的搜索空间SS中的至少一个SS为公共搜索空间CSS或者除类型3以外的CSS。Optionally, the new beam includes a first beam, and the first beam satisfies at least one of the following: the first beam is not applicable to the first physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and/or the first physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, wherein the transmission time interval between the physical downlink control channel PDCCH that schedules the first PDSCH and the first PDSCH is less than or equal to the twenty-second threshold value, and the first PUSCH is a PUSCH indicated or activated by the downlink control information DCI format 0_0; the first beam is not applicable to the first RS, and the first RS does not apply a unified TCI state; the first beam is not applicable to the second RS, wherein the transmission time interval between the PDCCH that triggers the second RS and the second RS is less than or equal to the twenty-third threshold value; the first beam is not applicable to the first CORESET, and at least one SS in the search space SS associated with the first CORESET is a common search space CSS or a CSS other than type 3.
可选的,所述第一信息被传输至当前的服务小区,和/或,所述待切换小区,和/或,所述新小区。Optionally, the first information is transmitted to the current serving cell, and/or the cell to be switched, and/or the new cell.
可选的,所述方法还包括:接收所述第一信息的响应,所述响应满足以下至少一项:所述响应用于确认或触发波束切换、小区切换和小区组切换中的至少一项;所述响应包括第第二目标波束的指示信息;所述响应包括第所述第二目标波束所属的小区的指示信息;所述响应包括第所述第二目标波束所属小区所属的小区组的指示信息;所述第二目标波束适用的信道;所述第二目标波束适用的RS;所述第二目标波束适用的CORESET;所述第二目标波束不适用的信道;所述第二目标波束不适用的RS;所述第二目标波束不适用的CORESET;多个所述第二目标波束用于下行同时接收的指示信息;用于下行同时接收的多个所述第二目标波束的指示信息;多个所述第二目标波束用于上行同时发送的指示信息;用于上行同时发送的多个所述第二目标波束的指示信息;第三信道适用的第二目标波束;统一TCI状态的类型;统一TCI框架;传输方案;第四信道采用的传输方案;波束训练方式;波束训练参考信号配置信息中的参数repetition的取值。Optionally, the method also includes: receiving a response to the first information, the response satisfying at least one of the following: the response is used to confirm or trigger at least one of beam switching, cell switching and cell group switching; the response includes indication information of the second target beam; the response includes indication information of the cell to which the second target beam belongs; the response includes indication information of the cell group to which the cell to which the second target beam belongs belongs; the channel to which the second target beam is applicable; the RS to which the second target beam is applicable; the CORESET to which the second target beam is applicable; the channel to which the second target beam is not applicable; the RS to which the second target beam is not applicable; the CORESET to which the second target beam is not applicable; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous downlink reception; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission; the second target beam applicable to the third channel; the type of unified TCI state; the unified TCI framework; the transmission scheme; the transmission scheme adopted by the fourth channel; the beam training method; the value of the parameter repetition in the beam training reference signal configuration information.
可选的,所述接收所述第一信息的响应,包括以下至少一项:从当前的服务小区接收所述响应;从所述待切换小区接收所述响应;从所述新小区接收所述响应;从所述第二目标波束所属的小区接收所述响应。Optionally, the response to receiving the first information includes at least one of the following: receiving the response from the current serving cell; receiving the response from the cell to be switched; receiving the response from the new cell; or receiving the response from the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
可选的,所述方法还包括:接收第三配置信息,所述第三配置信息用于重配置物理小区标识PCI列表。Optionally, the method further includes: receiving third configuration information, where the third configuration information is used to reconfigure a physical cell identifier (PCI) list.
第二方面,本申请实施例还提供一种通信方法,所述方法包括:接收第一信息,所述第一信息包括以下至少一项:检测到的切换事件的信息,所述切换事件用于波束管理或波束切换;第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示待切换波束和/或待切换小区和/或待切换小区组,所述待切换小区为所述待切换波束所属的小区,所述待切换小区组为所述待切换波束所属的小区组;第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示新波束和/或新小区和/或新小区组,所述新小区为所述新波束所属的小区,所述新小区组为所述新波束所属的小区组。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method, the method comprising: receiving first information, the first information comprising at least one of the following: information of a detected switching event, the switching event being used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information being used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched being the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched being the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information being used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell being the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group being the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
可选的,所述第一指示信息包括以下至少一项:所述待切换小区的小区标识信息、所述待切换小区关联的参考信号RS资源配置的标识信息、所述待切换小区关联的RS资源集的标识信息、所述待切换小区关联的RS资源的标识信息、所述待切换小区关联的报告配置的标识信息;和/或,所述第二指示信息包括以下至少一项:所述新小区的小区标识信息、所述新小区关联的RS资源配置的标识信息、所述新小区关联的RS资源集的标识信息、所述新小区关联的RS资源的标识信息、所述新小区关联的报告配置的标识信息。。Optionally, the first indication information includes at least one of the following: cell identification information of the cell to be switched, identification information of the reference signal (RS) resource configuration associated with the cell to be switched, identification information of the RS resource set associated with the cell to be switched, identification information of the RS resources associated with the cell to be switched, and identification information of the report configuration associated with the cell to be switched; and/or, the second indication information includes at least one of the following: cell identification information of the new cell, identification information of the RS resource configuration associated with the new cell, identification information of the RS resource set associated with the new cell, identification information of the RS resources associated with the new cell, and identification information of the report configuration associated with the new cell.
可选的,所述方法还包括:发送资源配置信息,所述资源配置信息包括至少一个RS传输参数,所述RS传输参数为RS资源配置、RS资源集、RS资源中的至少一项;其中,所述至少一个RS传输参数满足以下至少一项:所述至少一个RS传输参数关联一个或多个切换事件;每个RS传输参数包括该RS传输参数关联的切换事件的信息;每个切换事件的信息包括该切换事件关联的RS传输参数;所述至少一个RS传输参数关联一个或多个波束;每个RS传输参数包括该RS传输参数关联的波束的信息;每个波束的信息包括该波束关联的RS传输参数;所述至少一个RS传输参数关联一个或多个小区;每个RS传输参数包括该RS传输参数关联的小区的信息;每个小区的信息包括该小区关联的RS传输参数的信息;所述至少一个RS传输参数中的第一RS传输参数关联当前波束,所述至少一个RS传输参数中的第二RS传输参数关联备选波束;所述第一RS传输参数与所述第二RS传输参数关联。Optionally, the method also includes: sending resource configuration information, the resource configuration information includes at least one RS transmission parameter, the RS transmission parameter is at least one of RS resource configuration, RS resource set, and RS resource; wherein the at least one RS transmission parameter satisfies at least one of the following: the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more switching events; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the switching event associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each switching event includes the RS transmission parameter associated with the switching event; the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more beams; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the beam associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each beam includes the RS transmission parameter associated with the beam; the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with one or more cells; each RS transmission parameter includes information about the cell associated with the RS transmission parameter; the information about each cell includes information about the RS transmission parameter associated with the cell; the first RS transmission parameter in the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with the current beam, and the second RS transmission parameter in the at least one RS transmission parameter is associated with the alternative beam; the first RS transmission parameter is associated with the second RS transmission parameter.
可选的,所述方法还包括:发送报告配置信息,所述报告配置信息包括至少一个报告配置;其中,所述至少一个报告配置满足以下至少一项:所述至少一个报告配置关联一个或多个切换事件;每个报告配置包括该报告配置关联的切换事件的信息;每个切换事件的信息包括该切换事件关联的报告配置;所述至少一个报告配置关联一个或多个波束;每个报告配置包括该报告配置关联的波束的信息;每个波束的信息包括该波束关联的报告配置;所述至少一个报告配置关联一个或多个小区;每个报告配置包括该报告配置关联的小区的信息;每个小区的信息包括该小区关联的报告配置的信息。Optionally, the method also includes: sending report configuration information, the report configuration information includes at least one report configuration; wherein the at least one report configuration satisfies at least one of the following: the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more switching events; each report configuration includes information about the switching event associated with the report configuration; the information about each switching event includes the report configuration associated with the switching event; the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more beams; each report configuration includes information about the beam associated with the report configuration; the information of each beam includes the report configuration associated with the beam; the at least one report configuration is associated with one or more cells; each report configuration includes information about the cell associated with the report configuration; the information of each cell includes information about the report configuration associated with the cell.
可选的,所述第一信息还包括以下至少一项:关联指示信息,关联指示信息用于指示以下至少一项:所述待切换波束和所述新波束之间的关联关系、所述待切换小区和所述新小区之间的关联关系、所述待切换小区组和所述新小区组之间的关联关系;第一信道适用的新波束;所述新波束适用的信道;所述新波束适用的RS;所述新波束适用的控制资源集CORESET;所述新波束不适用的信道;所述新波束不适用的RS;所述新波束不适用的CORESET;应用所述新波束的概率信息;切换至所述新小区的概率信息;切换至所述新小区组的概率信息;所述待切换波束对应的面板信息;所述新波束对应的面板信息;多个所述新波束用于下行同时接收的指示信息;用于下行同时接收的多个新波束的指示信息;用于下行同时接收的多个新波束对应的面板信息;多个所述新波束用于上行同时发送的指示信息;用于上行同时发送的多个新波束的指示信息;用于上行同时发送的多个新波束对应的面板信息;建议的统一传输配置指示TCI状态的类型;建议的统一TCI框架;建议的传输方案;建议第二信道采用的传输方案;建议的波束训练方式;建议的波束训练参考信号配置信息中的参数repetition的取值。Optionally, the first information also includes at least one of the following: association indication information, the association indication information is used to indicate at least one of the following: the association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam, the association relationship between the cell to be switched and the new cell, the association relationship between the cell group to be switched and the new cell group; the new beam applicable to the first channel; the channel applicable to the new beam; the RS applicable to the new beam; the control resource set CORESET applicable to the new beam; the channel not applicable to the new beam; the RS not applicable to the new beam; the CORESET not applicable to the new beam; the probability information of applying the new beam; the probability information of switching to the new cell; the probability information of switching to the new cell group; the Panel information corresponding to the beam to be switched; panel information corresponding to the new beam; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception; panel information corresponding to multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous uplink transmission; indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous uplink transmission; panel information corresponding to multiple new beams for simultaneous uplink transmission; recommended unified transmission configuration indication TCI state type; recommended unified TCI framework; recommended transmission scheme; recommended transmission scheme for the second channel; recommended beam training method; recommended value of parameter repetition in beam training reference signal configuration information.
可选的,所述传输方案为单传输接收点TRP传输或多TRP传输;其中,所述多TRP传输包括以下至少一项:单频网SFN传输、时分复用TDM传输、空分复用SDM传输、频分复用FDM传输。Optionally, the transmission scheme is single transmission receiving point TRP transmission or multiple TRP transmission; wherein, the multiple TRP transmission includes at least one of the following: single frequency network SFN transmission, time division multiplexing TDM transmission, space division multiplexing SDM transmission, and frequency division multiplexing FDM transmission.
可选的,所述建议的统一TCI框架为单TRP传输的统一TCI激活或指示方式或者多TRP传输的统一TCI激活或指示方式。Optionally, the proposed unified TCI framework is a unified TCI activation or indication method for single TRP transmission or a unified TCI activation or indication method for multiple TRP transmission.
可选的,所述新波束包括第一波束,所述第一波束满足以下至少一项:所述第一波束不适用于第一物理下行共享信道PDSCH和/或第一物理上行共享信道PUSCH,其中,调度所述第一PDSCH的物理下行控制信道PDCCH和所述第一PDSCH的传输时间间隔小于或等于第二十二门限值,所述第一PUSCH为下行控制信息DCI格式0_0指示或激活的PUSCH;所述第一波束不适用于第一RS,所述第一RS不应用统一TCI状态;所述第一波束不适用于第二RS,其中,触发所述第二RS的PDCCH与所述第二RS的传输时间间隔小于或等于第二十三门限值;所述第一波束不适用于第一CORESET,所述第一CORESET关联的搜索空间SS中的至少一个SS为公共搜索空间CSS或者除类型3以外的CSS。Optionally, the new beam includes a first beam, and the first beam satisfies at least one of the following: the first beam is not applicable to the first physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and/or the first physical uplink shared channel PUSCH, wherein the transmission time interval between the physical downlink control channel PDCCH that schedules the first PDSCH and the first PDSCH is less than or equal to the twenty-second threshold value, and the first PUSCH is a PUSCH indicated or activated by the downlink control information DCI format 0_0; the first beam is not applicable to the first RS, and the first RS does not apply a unified TCI state; the first beam is not applicable to the second RS, wherein the transmission time interval between the PDCCH that triggers the second RS and the second RS is less than or equal to the twenty-third threshold value; the first beam is not applicable to the first CORESET, and at least one SS in the search space SS associated with the first CORESET is a common search space CSS or a CSS other than type 3.
可选的,所述第一信息被传输至当前的服务小区,和/或,所述待切换小区,和/或,所述新小区。Optionally, the first information is transmitted to the current serving cell, and/or the cell to be switched, and/or the new cell.
可选的,所述方法还包括:发送所述第一信息的响应,所述响应满足以下至少一项:所述响应用于确认或触发波束切换、小区切换和小区组切换中的至少一项;第二目标波束的指示信息;所述第二目标波束所属的小区的指示信息;所述第二目标波束所属小区所属的小区组的指示信息;所述第二目标波束适用的信道;所述第二目标波束适用的RS;所述第二目标波束适用的CORESET;所述第二目标波束不适用的信道;所述第二目标波束不适用的RS;所述第二目标波束不适用的CORESET;多个所述第二目标波束用于下行同时接收的指示信息;用于下行同时接收的多个所述第二目标波束的指示信息;多个所述第二目标波束用于上行同时发送的指示信息;用于上行同时发送的多个所述第二目标波束的指示信息;第三信道适用的第二目标波束;统一TCI状态的类型;统一TCI框架;传输方案;第四信道采用的传输方案;波束训练方式;波束训练参考信号配置信息中的参数repetition的取值。Optionally, the method also includes: sending a response to the first information, the response satisfying at least one of the following: the response is used to confirm or trigger at least one of beam switching, cell switching and cell group switching; indication information of the second target beam; indication information of the cell to which the second target beam belongs; indication information of the cell group to which the cell to which the second target beam belongs belongs; the channel to which the second target beam is applicable; the RS to which the second target beam is applicable; the CORESET to which the second target beam is applicable; the channel to which the second target beam is not applicable; the RS to which the second target beam is not applicable; the CORESET to which the second target beam is not applicable; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous downlink reception; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission; indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission; the second target beam applicable to the third channel; the type of unified TCI state; the unified TCI framework; the transmission scheme; the transmission scheme adopted by the fourth channel; the beam training method; the value of the parameter repetition in the beam training reference signal configuration information.
可选的,所述发送所述第一信息的响应,包括以下至少一项:在当前的服务小区发送所述响应;在所述待切换小区发送所述响应;在所述新小区发送所述响应;在所述第二目标波束所属的小区发送所述响应。Optionally, the response to sending the first information includes at least one of the following: sending the response in the current serving cell; sending the response in the cell to be switched; sending the response in the new cell; sending the response in the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
可选的,所述方法还包括:发送第三配置信息,所述第三配置信息用于重配置物理小区标识PCI列表。Optionally, the method further includes: sending third configuration information, where the third configuration information is used to reconfigure the physical cell identifier (PCI) list.
第三方面,本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,所述装置包括:发送模块,用于发送第一信息,所述第一信息包括以下至少一项:检测到的切换事件的信息,所述切换事件用于波束管理或波束切换;第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示待切换波束和/或待切换小区和/或待切换小区组,所述待切换小区为所述待切换波束所属的小区,所述待切换小区组为所述待切换波束所属的小区组;第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示新波束和/或新小区和/或新小区组,所述新小区为所述新波束所属的小区,所述新小区组为所述新波束所属的小区组。In the third aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, which includes: a sending module for sending first information, the first information including at least one of the following: information of a detected switching event, the switching event being used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information being used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched being the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched being the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information being used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell being the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group being the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
第四方面,本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,所述装置包括:接收模块,用于接收第一信息,所述第一信息包括以下至少一项:检测到的切换事件的信息,所述切换事件用于波束管理或波束切换;第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示待切换波束和/或待切换小区和/或待切换小区组,所述待切换小区为所述待切换波束所属的小区,所述待切换小区组为所述待切换波束所属的小区组;第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示新波束和/或新小区和/或新小区组,所述新小区为所述新波束所属的小区,所述新小区组为所述新波束所属的小区组。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, comprising: a receiving module for receiving first information, the first information comprising at least one of the following: information of a detected switching event, the switching event being used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information being used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched being the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched being the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information being used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell being the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group being the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
第五方面,本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器运行时,使得第一方面或第二方面提供的通信方法被执行。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium having a computer program stored thereon. When the computer program is executed by a processor, the communication method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect is executed.
第六方面,本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,包括存储器和处理器,所述存储器上存储有可在所述处理器上运行的计算机程序,所述处理器运行所述计算机程序时执行第一方面的通信方法的步骤。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device comprising a memory and a processor, wherein the memory stores a computer program that can be run on the processor, and the processor executes the steps of the communication method of the first aspect when running the computer program.
第七方面,本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,包括存储器和处理器,所述存储器上存储有可在所述处理器上运行的计算机程序,所述处理器运行所述计算机程序时执行第二方面提供的通信方法的步骤。In the seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, including a memory and a processor, wherein the memory stores a computer program that can be run on the processor, and when the processor runs the computer program, it executes the steps of the communication method provided in the second aspect.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供一种芯片(或者说通信装置),该芯片上存储有计算机程序,在计算机程序被芯片执行时,使得第一方面或第二方面提供的方法被执行。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip (or a communication device) on which a computer program is stored. When the computer program is executed by the chip, the method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect is executed.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供一种芯片模组,该芯片模组上存储有计算机程序,在计算机程序被芯片模组执行时,使得第一方面或第二方面提供的方法被执行。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip module having a computer program stored thereon. When the computer program is executed by the chip module, the method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect is executed.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行第一方面或第二方面提供的方法。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which includes a computer program. When the computer program runs on a computer, it enables the computer to execute the method provided in the first aspect or the second aspect.
第十一方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括用于执行第一方面的方法的装置和用于执行第二方面提供的方法的装置。In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, comprising an apparatus for executing the method of the first aspect and an apparatus for executing the method provided by the second aspect.
图1是本申请实施例中第一种通信方法的信令交互示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction in a first communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例中第二种通信方法的信令交互示意图;FIG2 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a second communication method in an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例中第三种通信方法的信令交互示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a third communication method in an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例中第四种通信方法的信令交互示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a fourth communication method in an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例中第五种通信方法的信令交互示意图;FIG5 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a fifth communication method in an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请实施例中第六种通信方法的信令交互示意图;FIG6 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction in a sixth communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例中一种波束切换方法的流程示意图;FIG7 is a schematic flow chart of a beam switching method in an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例中一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG8 is a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请实施例中一种通信装置的结构示意图;FIG9 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例中另一种通信装置的结构示意图;FIG10 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请实施例中一种通信装置的硬件结构示意图。FIG11 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a communication device in an embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例适用的通信系统包括但不限于长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、第五代(5th-generation,5G)系统(如新空口(New Radio,NR)系统),以及未来演进系统或者多种通信融合系统。其中,5G系统可以为非独立组网(non-standalone,NSA)的5G系统或独立组网(standalone,SA)的5G系统。本申请实施例的方案还可适用于未来新的通信系统,例如,第六代(6th generation,6G)通信系统、第七代(7th generation,7G)通信系统等。The communication systems to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable include, but are not limited to, long-term evolution (LTE) systems, fifth-generation (5G) systems (such as new radio (NR) systems), and future evolution systems or multiple communication convergence systems. The 5G system may be a non-standalone (NSA) 5G system or a standalone (SA) 5G system. The solutions of the embodiments of the present application may also be applicable to future new communication systems, such as sixth-generation (6G) communication systems and seventh-generation (7G) communication systems.
本申请主要涉及终端设备(或者简称为终端)和网络设备之间的通信。This application mainly relates to the communication between terminal devices (or simply referred to as terminals) and network devices.
本申请实施例中的终端设备(Terminal Equipment)可以指各种形式的用户设备(User Equipment,简称UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台(Mobile Station,简称MS)、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端设备(Terminal Equipment)、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,简称SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,简称WLL)站、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,简称PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的终端或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(Public Land Mobile Network,简称PLMN)中的终端等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。在本申请的一些实施例中,终端设备可以是具有数据无线传输功能的电子设备。在本申请的另一些实施例中,终端设备还可以是具有收发功能的装置,例如芯片系统。其中,芯片系统可以包括芯片,还可以包括其它分立器件。The terminal equipment (Terminal Equipment) in the embodiments of the present application may refer to various forms of user equipment (User Equipment, abbreviated as UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station (Mobile Station, abbreviated as MS), remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal equipment (Terminal Equipment), wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device. The terminal may also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), a handheld device with wireless communication function, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, a terminal in a future 5G network or a terminal in a future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN), etc., and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this. In some embodiments of the present application, the terminal equipment may be an electronic device with a data wireless transmission function. In other embodiments of the present application, the terminal device may also be a device with transceiver functions, such as a chip system, wherein the chip system may include a chip and may also include other discrete devices.
本申请实施例中的网络设备也可以称为接入网设备,例如,可以为基站(base station,简称BS)(也可称为基站设备),网络设备是一种部署在无线接入网(Radio Access Network,简称RAN)用以提供无线通信功能的装置。例如在第二代(2nd-generation,简称2G)网络中提供基站功能的设备包括基地无线收发站(base transceiver station,简称BTS),3G网络中提供基站功能的设备包括节点B(NodeB),4G网络中提供基站功能的设备包括演进的节点B(evolved NodeB,简称eNB),在无线局域网络(wireless local area networks,简称WLAN)中,提供基站功能的设备为接入点(access point,简称AP),NR中的提供基站功能的设备下一代基站节点(nextgeneration node base station,简称gNB),以及继续演进的节点B(ng-eNB),其中gNB和终端之间采用NR技术进行通信,ng-eNB和终端之间采用演进的通用地面无线电接入(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access,简称E-UTRA)技术进行通信,gNB和ng-eNB均可连接到5G核心网。本申请实施例中的网络设备还包含在未来新的通信系统中提供基站功能的设备等。在一些实施例中,网络设备还可以为具有为终端设备提供无线通信功能的装置,例如芯片系统。示例的,芯片系统可以包括芯片,还可以包括其它分立器件。The network device in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as an access network device. For example, it may be a base station (BS) (also referred to as a base station device). The network device is a device deployed in a radio access network (RAN) to provide wireless communication functions. For example, in the second-generation (2G) network, the equipment providing base station functions includes the base transceiver station (BTS), the equipment providing base station functions in the 3G network includes the node B (NodeB), the equipment providing base station functions in the 4G network includes the evolved node B (eNB), and in wireless local area networks (WLAN), the equipment providing base station functions is the access point (AP). The equipment providing base station functions in NR includes the next generation node base station (gNB) and the evolved node B (ng-eNB). The gNB and the terminal communicate using NR technology, and the ng-eNB and the terminal communicate using evolved universal terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) technology. Both gNB and ng-eNB can be connected to the 5G core network. The network devices in the embodiments of the present application also include devices that provide base station functions in future new communication systems. In some embodiments, the network devices may also be devices that provide wireless communication functions for terminal devices, such as chip systems. For example, chip systems may include chips and other discrete devices.
如背景技术所述,在现有的波束管理或波束切换的方案中,终端设备向网络设备发送的波束报告通常仅包括质量较优的波束,无法满足更多场景下波束管理或波束切换的需求。As described in the background technology, in existing beam management or beam switching solutions, the beam report sent by the terminal device to the network device usually only includes beams with better quality, which cannot meet the needs of beam management or beam switching in more scenarios.
有鉴于此,本申请实施例的方案中,终端设备向网络设备发送第一信息,第一信息包括以下至少一项:检测到的切换事件的信息,所述切换事件用于波束管理或波束切换;第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示待切换波束和/或待切换小区和/或待切换小区组,所述待切换小区为所述待切换波束所属的小区,所述待切换小区组为所述待切换小区所属的小区组;第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示新波束和/或新小区和/或新小区组,所述新小区为所述新波束所属的小区,所述新小区组为所述新小区所属的小区组。In view of this, in the solution of the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device sends first information to the network device, and the first information includes at least one of the following: information about a detected switching event, the switching event is used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched is the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched is the cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell is the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group is the cell group to which the new cell belongs.
上述方案中,通过向网络设备上报切换事件的信息,能够使网络设备获知终端设备检测到的切换事件,从而能够获知终端设备的信道变化,尤其是网络设备可以基于第一信息获知终端设备的信道质量变差的情况,从而能够及时地进行波束管理或波束切换。In the above scheme, by reporting the information of the switching event to the network device, the network device can be informed of the switching event detected by the terminal device, thereby being able to know the channel changes of the terminal device. In particular, the network device can be informed of the deterioration of the channel quality of the terminal device based on the first information, thereby being able to perform beam management or beam switching in a timely manner.
上述方案中,通过向网络设备上报待切换波束和/或新波束,能够使网络设备及时获知当前波束中质量变差的波束和/或新波束,从而能够针对性地对质量变差的波束进行切换。In the above scheme, by reporting the beam to be switched and/or the new beam to the network device, the network device can promptly know the beam and/or new beam with deteriorating quality in the current beam, so that the beam with deteriorating quality can be switched in a targeted manner.
上述方案中,通过向网络设备上报待切换小区和/或新小区,能够满足在多个小区能够为终端设备提供波束的情况下,在波束切换或波束管理过程中进一步执行小区切换的需求。In the above scheme, by reporting the cell to be switched and/or the new cell to the network device, it can meet the need to further perform cell switching during the beam switching or beam management process when multiple cells can provide beams for the terminal device.
上述方案中,通过向网络设备上报待切换小区组和/或新小区组,能够满足在多个小区组的小区能够为终端设备提供波束的情况下,在波束切换或波束管理过程中进一步执行小区组切换的需求。In the above scheme, by reporting the cell group to be switched and/or the new cell group to the network equipment, it can meet the need to further perform cell group switching during beam switching or beam management when the cells of multiple cell groups can provide beams for the terminal equipment.
在现有的波束管理或波束切换的方案中,容易出现波束切换不及时的情况。In existing beam management or beam switching solutions, it is easy for beam switching to fail to occur in a timely manner.
具体而言,在现有的下行波束管理或下行波束切换的方案中,由网络设备配置或触发终端设备上报波束报告,终端设备基于网络设备配置的上报周期和/或网络设备发送的触发指令,进行波束测量以及上报波束报告,波束报告包括一个或多个波束的质量信息,网络设备基于波束报告获知信道质量,在网络设备识别出信道质量较差的情况下,网络设备向终端设备指示切换至新波束或者激活新波束。Specifically, in the existing downlink beam management or downlink beam switching scheme, the network device configures or triggers the terminal device to report a beam report. The terminal device performs beam measurement and reports a beam report based on the reporting period configured by the network device and/or the trigger instruction sent by the network device. The beam report includes quality information of one or more beams. The network device obtains the channel quality based on the beam report. When the network device identifies that the channel quality is poor, the network device instructs the terminal device to switch to a new beam or activate a new beam.
在上行波束管理或上行波束切换的方案中,由网络设备配置或触发终端设备发送探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS),终端设备基于网络设备配置的发送周期和/或网络设备发送的触发指令发送SRS,网络设备对SRS进行测量,并根据SRS的测量结果来确定终端设备的信道状态。在网络设备识别出信道质量较差的情况下,网络设备向终端设备指示切换至新的波束或者激活新的波束。In uplink beam management or uplink beam switching, the network device configures or triggers the terminal device to send a sounding reference signal (SRS). The terminal device sends the SRS based on the configured transmission period and/or trigger instructions sent by the network device. The network device measures the SRS and determines the terminal device's channel status based on the SRS measurement results. If the network device identifies poor channel quality, it instructs the terminal device to switch to a new beam or activate a new beam.
由此可见,现有的波束管理或波束切换均是由网络设备来发起的,终端设备仅被动地基于网络设备的配置或者触发来发送波束报告或者SRS,以辅助网络设备确定当前的波束质量。如果终端设备的信道质量变差,但网络设备并未配置终端设备此时上报波束报告或者发送SRS,使得网络设备无法及时地获知信道质量变差的情况,从而导致波束切换不及时,影响终端设备的通信质量。如果网络设备通过频繁的配置或触发信令获得及时的信道质量变化情况,则会增加测量和上报开销,以及参考信号与信道资源的占用开销。It can be seen that the existing beam management or beam switching are all initiated by the network device, and the terminal device only passively sends beam reports or SRS based on the configuration or triggering of the network device to assist the network device in determining the current beam quality. If the channel quality of the terminal device deteriorates, but the network device has not configured the terminal device to report beam reports or send SRS at this time, the network device cannot be informed of the deterioration of the channel quality in a timely manner, resulting in untimely beam switching, affecting the communication quality of the terminal device. If the network device obtains timely channel quality changes through frequent configuration or trigger signaling, it will increase the measurement and reporting overhead, as well as the reference signal and channel resource occupancy overhead.
在实际传输中,终端设备通常比网络设备更早发现下行波束质量的变化,有鉴于此,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,在本申请实施例的方案中,响应于检测到触发事件,终端设备发送第一信息。在这种方案中,由终端设备主动在检测到一个或多个切换事件的情况下上报第一信息,网络设备可以根据第一信息获知终端设备的信道变化,尤其是网络设备可以基于第一信息获知终端设备的信道质量变差的情况,从而能够及时地进行波束管理或波束切换。因此,本申请实施例提供的方法有利于降低波束管理或波束切换的时延。In actual transmission, the terminal device usually detects changes in downlink beam quality earlier than the network device. In view of this, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. In the scheme of the embodiment of the present application, in response to detecting a trigger event, the terminal device sends a first message. In this scheme, the terminal device actively reports the first information when one or more switching events are detected. The network device can learn about the channel changes of the terminal device based on the first information. In particular, the network device can learn about the deterioration of the channel quality of the terminal device based on the first information, so that beam management or beam switching can be performed in a timely manner. Therefore, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application is conducive to reducing the delay of beam management or beam switching.
首先对本申请实施例涉及的部分名词进行介绍,以便于本领域技术人员理解。First, some of the terms involved in the embodiments of the present application are introduced to facilitate understanding by those skilled in the art.
1、波束1. Beam
波束是一种通信资源,网络设备和终端设备可以通过波束的形式进行信号的发送和接收。本申请实施例中的波束可以是宽波束,或者窄波束,或者还可以是其他类型的波束。A beam is a communication resource that network devices and terminal devices can use to send and receive signals. The beam in the embodiment of the present application can be a wide beam, a narrow beam, or other types of beams.
在通信协议中,波束可以表述为空间关系(spatial relation)、空域滤波器(spatial domain filter)、空间滤波器(spatial filter)、空间参数(spatial parameter)、空域参数(spatial domain parameter)、传输配置指示(Transmission Configuration Indication,TCI)状态、准共址(Quasi Co-Location,QCL)参数等。本文采用“波束”进行表述,但“波束”可以替换理解为其他等同的概念,且不限于上述提到的概念。In communication protocols, a beam can be expressed as a spatial relation, spatial domain filter, spatial filter, spatial parameter, spatial domain parameter, Transmission Configuration Indication (TCI) state, Quasi Co-Location (QCL) parameter, etc. This article uses the term "beam," but "beam" can be replaced with other equivalent concepts and is not limited to the aforementioned ones.
2、波束信息2. Beam information
本申请实施例中的“波束信息”可以是指能够用于确定或指示波束的信息。示例性的,波束信息可以是以下任意一项:波束的标识信息、空间关系信息、空域滤波器信息、空间滤波器信息、空间参数信息、TCI信息、QCL信息等。In the embodiments of the present application, "beam information" may refer to information that can be used to determine or indicate a beam. For example, the beam information may include any of the following: beam identification information, spatial relationship information, spatial filter information, spatial filter information, spatial parameter information, TCI information, QCL information, etc.
在具体实施中,波束的标识信息可以是参考信号资源指示或参考信号资源索引(index),其中,参考信号可以是信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal,CSI-RS),相应的,参考信号资源指示可以是CSI-RS资源指示(CSI-RS Resource Indicator,CRI)。或者,参考信号也可以是同步信号块(Synchronization Signal Block,SSB),相应的,参考信号资源指示可以是SSB资源指示(SSB Resource Indicator,SSB RI)。参考信号资源索引可以是CSI-RS资源索引或者SSB资源索引。In a specific implementation, the identification information of the beam may be a reference signal resource indicator or a reference signal resource index (index), where the reference signal may be a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), and accordingly, the reference signal resource indicator may be a CSI-RS resource indicator (CRI). Alternatively, the reference signal may be a synchronization signal block (SSB), and accordingly, the reference signal resource indicator may be an SSB resource indicator (SSB RI). The reference signal resource index may be a CSI-RS resource index or an SSB resource index.
在本文中,波束信息也被称之为“波束的信息”。In this article, beam information is also referred to as "beam information".
示例性的,下行波束信息通常可使用TCI状态信息或QCL信息表示。上行波束信息通常可使用TCI信息或空间关系信息表示。For example, downlink beam information can be generally represented by TCI status information or QCL information, and uplink beam information can be generally represented by TCI information or spatial relationship information.
3、小区3. Community
在通信协议中,小区可以表述为载波、成员载波(ComponentCarrier,CC)、子带、频带、带宽、频点、物理小区、服务小区、传输接收点(Transmission and Receiving Point,TRP)等。本文采用“小区”进行表述,但“小区”和上述等同概念可以互相替换。“小区”可以替换理解为其他等同的概念,例如,上文中所列出的概念,但并不限于此。In communication protocols, a cell can be expressed as a carrier, component carrier (CC), subband, frequency band, bandwidth, frequency point, physical cell, serving cell, or transmission and receiving point (TRP). This document uses the term "cell," but "cell" and its equivalents are interchangeable. "Cell" can be replaced with other equivalent concepts, such as, but not limited to, those listed above.
进一步地,本申请实施例中的小区信息可以包括以下至少一项:小区索引、小区标识、物理小区标识(Physical Cell Identifier,PCI)、小区关联的RS资源配置的标识信息、小区关联的RS资源集的标识信息、小区关联的RS资源的标识信息、小区关联的报告配置的标识信息、TRP标识。Furthermore, the cell information in the embodiments of the present application may include at least one of the following: cell index, cell identifier, physical cell identifier (PCI), identification information of RS resource configuration associated with the cell, identification information of RS resource set associated with the cell, identification information of RS resources associated with the cell, identification information of report configuration associated with the cell, and TRP identifier.
其中,TPR标识或TRP可以为以下至少一项:控制资源集、控制资源集池、控制资源集组、终端能力集、终端能力、TCI状态、TCI状态池、终端能力值、终端能力值集、参考信号资源、参考信号资源集、参考信号资源组、参考信号端口数、天线面板、天线阵列、天线子阵列、天线组、天线子组、天线集合、天线子集、服务小区、物理小区。TRP可以由上文所列出的各种TPR标识进行唯一地标识,本文中“TRP”可以与上述概念互相替换。The TPR identifier or TRP can be at least one of the following: control resource set, control resource set pool, control resource set group, terminal capability set, terminal capability, TCI state, TCI state pool, terminal capability value, terminal capability value set, reference signal resource, reference signal resource set, reference signal resource group, number of reference signal ports, antenna panel, antenna array, antenna subarray, antenna group, antenna subgroup, antenna set, antenna subset, serving cell, physical cell. The TRP can be uniquely identified by the various TPR identifiers listed above, and "TRP" in this document can be used interchangeably with the above concepts.
4、当前波束4. Current beam
本申请实施例中,当前波束是指终端设备当前正在使用的波束。当前波束的数量可以为一个,或者,当前波束的数量可以为多个。In the embodiment of the present application, the current beam refers to the beam currently being used by the terminal device. The number of the current beam can be one, or the number of the current beam can be multiple.
在具体实施中,每个小区可以提供一个或多个波束。当前波束可以是终端设备的服务小区的波束,也可以是服务小区以外的其他小区的波束。例如,当前波束可以是服务小区的邻小区的波束。In a specific implementation, each cell may provide one or more beams. The current beam may be the beam of the serving cell of the terminal device, or the beam of a cell other than the serving cell. For example, the current beam may be the beam of a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
示例性的,当前波束的数量为多个,其中,一部分当前波束为服务小区的波束,另一部分波束为服务小区以外的其他小区的波束。Exemplarily, there are multiple current beams, where some of the current beams are beams of the serving cell, and other beams are beams of other cells outside the serving cell.
又示例性的,当前波束的数量为一个或多个,其中,当前波束均为服务小区的波束。As another example, the number of current beams is one or more, wherein the current beams are all beams of the serving cell.
需要说明的是,在当前波束包括服务小区以外的其他小区的波束的情况下,终端设备使用其他小区提供的波束,但并不接入或切换至其他小区。It should be noted that, when the current beam includes beams of other cells other than the serving cell, the terminal device uses the beams provided by other cells but does not access or switch to other cells.
5、当前小区5. Current cell
本申请实施例中,当前小区是指当前波束所属的小区。换言之,当前小区是指提供当前波束的小区。In the embodiment of the present application, the current cell refers to the cell to which the current beam belongs. In other words, the current cell refers to the cell that provides the current beam.
具体的,当前小区可以包括服务小区和/或非服务小区。其中,在载波聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)场景中,服务小区可以包括主小区和至少一个辅小区,当前波束可以包括主小区的当前波束和各个辅小区的当前波束。非服务小区是指服务小区以外的其他小区。例如,当前小区可以包括邻小区。也即,终端设备仅使用邻小区的波束传输信道或信号,但邻小区并不是终端设备的服务小区。Specifically, the current cell may include a serving cell and/or a non-serving cell. In a carrier aggregation (CA) scenario, the serving cell may include a primary cell and at least one secondary cell, and the current beam may include the current beam of the primary cell and the current beam of each secondary cell. A non-serving cell refers to a cell other than the serving cell. For example, the current cell may include a neighboring cell. That is, the terminal device only uses the beam of the neighboring cell to transmit a channel or signal, but the neighboring cell is not the serving cell of the terminal device.
6、备选波束6. Alternative beams
本申请实施例中的“备选波束”是指网络设备配置的波束。更具体地,“备选波束”可以是指网络设备配置的、且终端设备当前未使用的波束。或者,“备选波束”可以是指可供终端设备测量或者选择的波束。In the embodiments of this application, an "alternative beam" refers to a beam configured by a network device. More specifically, an "alternative beam" may refer to a beam configured by a network device that is not currently in use by a terminal device. Alternatively, an "alternative beam" may refer to a beam available for measurement or selection by a terminal device.
“备选波束”也可以描述为可测量波束、配置的波束、可选择波束等。本文对于备选波束的名称并不限制。The “alternative beam” may also be described as a measurable beam, a configured beam, a selectable beam, etc. The name of the alternative beam is not limited herein.
在具体实施中,网络设备可以配置波束之间的关联关系。其中,一个波束可以关联另一个波束,或者,一个波束可以关联多个波束,或者,多个波束可以关联多个波束,或者,多个波束可以关联一个波束。In a specific implementation, the network device may configure association relationships between beams, where one beam may be associated with another beam, or one beam may be associated with multiple beams, or multiple beams may be associated with multiple beams, or multiple beams may be associated with one beam.
更具体地,一个当前波束可以关联一个或多个备选波束。或者,多个当前波束可以关联多个备选波束。又或者,多个当前波束可以关联同一个备选波束。示例性的,若某一个当前波束被确定为待切换波束,则可以将该当前波束关联的备选波束作为新波束,或者,可以从该当前波束关联的备选波束中确定或检测对应的新波束。More specifically, a current beam can be associated with one or more candidate beams. Alternatively, multiple current beams can be associated with multiple candidate beams. Alternatively, multiple current beams can be associated with the same candidate beam. For example, if a current beam is determined to be a beam to be switched, the candidate beam associated with the current beam can be used as a new beam, or a corresponding new beam can be determined or detected from the candidate beams associated with the current beam.
7、备选小区7. Alternative Residential Areas
本申请实施例中的“备选小区”可以是指备选波束所属的小区。备选小区的数量可以为一个或多个。其中,备选小区和当前小区可以是不同的小区。例如,备选小区可以是当前小区的邻区。In the embodiments of the present application, a "candidate cell" may refer to a cell to which a candidate beam belongs. The number of candidate cells may be one or more. The candidate cell and the current cell may be different cells. For example, the candidate cell may be a neighboring cell of the current cell.
示例性的,备选小区和当前小区之间可以具有关联关系。例如,网络设备可以为当前小区配置备选小区组(或者备选小区列表),备选小区组中的备选小区和当前小区关联。对于一个当前小区而言,可以在该当前小区关联的备选小区上进行切换事件的检测,和/或,检测新波束等。Exemplarily, an association relationship may exist between the candidate cell and the current cell. For example, the network device may configure a candidate cell group (or candidate cell list) for the current cell, and the candidate cells in the candidate cell group are associated with the current cell. For a current cell, handover event detection and/or new beam detection may be performed on the candidate cell associated with the current cell.
8、待切换波束8. Beam to be switched
本申请实施例的方案中,待切换波束可以是指满足切换事件的当前波束。换言之,待切换波束是指波束质量变差的当前波束。“待切换波束”也可以被称之为:需要被切换的波束、即将失效的波束、失效波束、不可用波束、波束质量持续变差的波束等,本文对于待切换波束的名称并不限制。In the embodiments of the present application, a beam to be switched may refer to a current beam that meets a switching event. In other words, a beam to be switched refers to a current beam whose beam quality has deteriorated. This term may also be referred to as a beam that needs to be switched, a beam that is about to fail, an invalid beam, an unavailable beam, or a beam whose beam quality is continuously deteriorating. This document does not limit the name of the beam to be switched.
9、待切换小区9. Cell to be switched
本申请实施例的方案中,待切换小区可以是指需要被切换的小区。在具体实施中,待切换小区可以是待切换波束所属的服务小区。或者,待切换小区可以是指满足切换事件的服务小区。示例性的,待切换小区可以包括主小区和/或辅小区。In the embodiments of the present application, a cell to be switched may refer to a cell to be switched. In a specific implementation, the cell to be switched may be a serving cell to which the beam to be switched belongs. Alternatively, the cell to be switched may refer to a serving cell that satisfies a switching event. Exemplarily, the cell to be switched may include a primary cell and/or a secondary cell.
10、新波束10. New Beam
新波束可以是指满足切换事件的备选波束。换言之,新波束可以是指波束质量变优的波束。“新波束”也可以被称之为:建议的波束、建议的新波束、可用的波束、波束质量持续变优的波束等,本文对于新波束的名称并不限制。A new beam can refer to an alternative beam that satisfies a handover event. In other words, a new beam can refer to a beam with improved beam quality. This document does not restrict the name of the new beam, and may also refer to a recommended beam, a recommended new beam, an available beam, or a beam with continuously improved beam quality.
具体的,新波束可以包括当前小区内的波束和/或备选小区内的波束。Specifically, the new beam may include a beam in the current cell and/or a beam in the candidate cell.
11、新小区11. New Community
本申请实施例的方案中,新小区是指终端设备建议切换到的小区或者网络设备指示切换到的小区。在具体实施中,新小区可以是新波束所属的小区。或者,新小区可以是指满足切换事件的备选小区。示例性的,新小区可以包括主小区和/或辅小区。In the embodiments of this application, a new cell refers to a cell to which a terminal device recommends handover or a cell to which a network device instructs handover. In specific implementations, the new cell may be the cell to which the new beam belongs. Alternatively, the new cell may be an alternative cell that satisfies the handover event. Exemplarily, the new cell may include a primary cell and/or a secondary cell.
12、目标波束12. Target Beam
本申请实施例的方案中,目标波束可以是指终端设备所要切换到的波束。In the solution of the embodiment of the present application, the target beam may refer to the beam to which the terminal device is to switch.
具体的,目标波束可以是第一目标波束,其中,第一目标波束可以是第一信息所指示的目标波束。Specifically, the target beam may be the first target beam, wherein the first target beam may be the target beam indicated by the first information.
或者,目标波束可以是第二目标波束,第二目标波束可以是指网络设备向终端设备指示的目标波束。其中,第二目标波束可以选自第一信息所指示的新波束,也可以是第一信息所指示的新波束以外的其他波束。Alternatively, the target beam may be a second target beam, which may be a target beam indicated by the network device to the terminal device. The second target beam may be selected from the new beam indicated by the first information, or may be a beam other than the new beam indicated by the first information.
13、测量参考信号(Reference Signal,RS)13. Measuring Reference Signal (RS)
本申请实施例的方案中,测量RS可以是用于测量的RS。示例性的,测量RS可以是定位参考信号(Positioning Reference Signal,PRS)、信道状态信息-参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signal,CSI-RS)等。In the embodiments of the present application, the measurement RS may be an RS used for measurement. For example, the measurement RS may be a positioning reference signal (PRS), a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS), or the like.
14、波束质量14. Beam quality
本申请实施例的方案中,波束质量可以是对测量RS进行测量得到的测量结果。波束质量可以包括以下至少一项测量结果:参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Receiving Power,RSRP)、参考信号接收质量(Reference Signal Receiving Quality,RSRQ)、信干噪比(Signal to Interference&Noise Ratio,SINR)、信噪比(signal-to-noise ratio,SNR)、信道质量指示(Channel Quality Indicator,CQI)、信号接收强度指示(Received Signal Strength Indication,RSSI)等。In the embodiments of the present application, beam quality may be a measurement result obtained by measuring the measurement RS. Beam quality may include at least one of the following measurement results: Reference Signal Receiving Power (RSRP), Reference Signal Receiving Quality (RSRQ), Signal to Interference & Noise Ratio (SINR), Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), Channel Quality Indicator (CQI), Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI), etc.
在具体实施中,波束质量所包括的测量结果可以由网络设备配置或者可以由协议定义。In a specific implementation, the measurement results included in the beam quality may be configured by the network device or may be defined by a protocol.
在具体实施中,网络设备可以为每个小区配置测量RS资源,小区内的某个波束的波束质量可以是基于该波束所属小区的RS测量得到。In a specific implementation, the network device may configure measurement RS resources for each cell, and the beam quality of a beam within the cell may be obtained based on the RS measurement of the cell to which the beam belongs.
15、波束干扰15. Beam Interference
本申请实施例的方案中,波束干扰是指一个波束受到其他波束的干扰。终端设备可以在干扰测量资源(interference measurement resource,IMR)上进行测量,得到波束干扰。其中,IMR是指专用于测量干扰的RS资源。In the embodiments of this application, beam interference refers to interference between one beam and another. A terminal device can measure beam interference using an interference measurement resource (IMR). An IMR is a dedicated RS resource used for interference measurement.
在具体实施中,对于一个波束而言,该波束的波束干扰可以是基于该波束所属的小区上的IMR测量得到,或者,可以基于该波束所属小区以外的其他小区上的IMR测量得到。假设波束1由小区1提供,终端设备可以测量小区1上的IMR得到波束1的本区波束干扰,或者,终端设备可以测量小区2上的IMR来得到波束1的邻区波束干扰。In a specific implementation, for a beam, the beam interference of the beam can be obtained based on the IMR measurement of the cell to which the beam belongs, or based on the IMR measurement of cells other than the cell to which the beam belongs. Assuming that Beam 1 is provided by Cell 1, the terminal device can measure the IMR on Cell 1 to obtain the local beam interference of Beam 1. Alternatively, the terminal device can measure the IMR on Cell 2 to obtain the neighboring cell beam interference of Beam 1.
下面结合附图对本申请的具体实施例做详细的说明。下述实施例中网络设备执行的动作可以由网络设备、网络设备中的装置(比如,处理器、芯片)、芯片等执行,终端设备执行的动作可以由终端设备、终端设备中的装置(比如,处理器、芯片)、芯片等执行,本申请不作限制。为了方便描述,以执行主体为网络设备和终端设备为例对本申请提供的实施例进行阐述。The following is a detailed description of the specific embodiments of the present application in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. In the following embodiments, the actions performed by the network device can be performed by the network device, a device in the network device (such as a processor, chip), a chip, etc., and the actions performed by the terminal device can be performed by the terminal device, a device in the terminal device (such as a processor, chip), a chip, etc., and this application does not limit them. For the convenience of description, the embodiments provided in this application are described using the execution subjects as network devices and terminal devices as examples.
实施例一Example 1
参照图1,图1是本申请实施例中第一种通信方法的信令交互示意图。图1示出的通信方法可以包括S11和S12。其中,本申请中各个步骤编号中的S表示步骤(step)。1, which is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a first communication method in an embodiment of the present application. The communication method shown in FIG1 may include S11 and S12. In this application, the S in each step number represents a step.
S11,终端设备检测切换事件。S11, the terminal device detects a switching event.
本文中的“切换事件”可以用于波束管理或波束切换。需要说明的是,本文中的“切换事件”也可以描述或替换为“事件”、“波束切换事件”、“波束管理事件”、“波束事件”等,本文对于“切换事件”的名称并不限定。The term "switching event" in this document can be used for beam management or beam switching. It should be noted that the term "switching event" in this document can also be described or replaced with "event," "beam switching event," "beam management event," "beam event," etc., and this document does not limit the name of the "switching event."
具体的,终端设备可以对协议定义的切换事件进行检测,和/或,终端设备可以对网络设备配置的切换事件进行检测。Specifically, the terminal device may detect a switching event defined by a protocol, and/or the terminal device may detect a switching event configured by a network device.
示例性的,切换事件组可以包括至少一个切换事件,终端设备可以对切换事件组中的切换事件进行检测。其中,切换事件组中的切换事件可以是由网络设备配置的。或者,切换事件组中的切换事件可以是由协议定义的。又或者,切换事件组中一部分切换事件可以由网络设备配置,另一部分切换事件可以由协议定义。Exemplarily, a handover event group may include at least one handover event, and the terminal device may detect the handover event in the handover event group. The handover events in the handover event group may be configured by the network device. Alternatively, the handover events in the handover event group may be defined by a protocol. Alternatively, some of the handover events in the handover event group may be configured by the network device, while other parts may be defined by a protocol.
下面以第一事件为例,对本申请实施例中的切换事件进行具体描述。其中,第一事件可以是由协议定义,或者,第一事件也可以是由网络设备配置。需要说明的是,本文对于第一事件的名称并不限制。The following takes the first event as an example to specifically describe the switching event in the embodiment of the present application. The first event may be defined by a protocol, or may be configured by a network device. It should be noted that the name of the first event is not limited herein.
第一事件可以包括以下至少一个条件:The first event may include at least one of the following conditions:
条件(1):当前波束的波束质量小于或等于第一门限值。Condition (1): The beam quality of the current beam is less than or equal to the first threshold value.
假设当前波束的数量为X个。其中,X个当前波束可以是不同小区提供的波束,也可以是同一个小区提供的波束。Assume that the number of current beams is X. The X current beams may be beams provided by different cells or beams provided by the same cell.
示例性的,条件(1)可以是指X个当前波束中至少X’个当前波束的波束质量小于或等于第一门限值。也即,X’为正整数,X’≤X。在一个例子中,X’=X。也即,条件(1)可以是指X个当前波束的波束质量均小于或等于第一门限值。Exemplarily, condition (1) may mean that the beam qualities of at least X' current beams among the X current beams are less than or equal to the first threshold. That is, X' is a positive integer, X' ≤ X. In one example, X' = X. That is, condition (1) may mean that the beam qualities of all X current beams are less than or equal to the first threshold.
又示例性的,条件(1)可以是指X个当前波束中任意一个当前波束的波束质量小于或等于第一门限值。As another example, condition (1) may mean that the beam quality of any current beam among the X current beams is less than or equal to the first threshold value.
条件(2):备选波束的波束质量大于或等于第二门限值。Condition (2): The beam quality of the candidate beam is greater than or equal to the second threshold value.
假设备选波束的数量为Y个。其中,Y个备选波束可以是不同小区提供的波束,也可以是同一个小区提供的波束。Assume that the number of candidate beams is Y. The Y candidate beams may be beams provided by different cells or beams provided by the same cell.
示例性的,条件(2)可以是指Y个备选波束中至少Y’个的波束质量大于或等于第二门限值。也即,Y’为正整数,Y’≤Y。在一个例子中,Y’=Y。也即,条件(2)可以是指Y个备选波束的波束质量均大于或等于第二门限值。Exemplarily, condition (2) may mean that the beam qualities of at least Y' of the Y candidate beams are greater than or equal to the second threshold. That is, Y' is a positive integer, and Y' ≤ Y. In one example, Y' = Y. That is, condition (2) may mean that the beam qualities of all Y candidate beams are greater than or equal to the second threshold.
又示例性的,条件(2)可以是指Y个备选波束中任意一个备选波束的波束质量大于或等于第二门限值。As another example, condition (2) may mean that the beam quality of any one of the Y candidate beams is greater than or equal to the second threshold value.
条件(3):备选波束的波束质量大于或等于当前波束的波束质量。Condition (3): The beam quality of the candidate beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current beam.
在一种可能的实现方式中,条件(3)中的当前波束可以是满足条件(1)的波束,和/或,条件(3)中的备选波束可以是满足条件(2)的备选波束,本申请实施例对此并不限制。In one possible implementation, the current beam in condition (3) may be a beam that satisfies condition (1), and/or the alternative beam in condition (3) may be an alternative beam that satisfies condition (2). This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
示例性的,条件(3)可以是指:备选波束的波束质量大于或等于至少X”个当前波束的波束质量。X”为正整数,X”≤X。也就是说,分别将X”个当前波束的波束质量与一个备选波束的波束质量进行比较,若该备选波束的波束质量均大于或等于X”个当前波束的波束质量,则该备选波束和X”个当前波束满足条件(3)。在一个例子中,X”=X。也即,条件(3)可以是指备选波束的波束质量均大于或等于所有当前波束的波束质量。Exemplarily, condition (3) may mean that the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of at least X” current beams. X” is a positive integer, X”≤X. That is, the beam quality of the X” current beams is compared with the beam quality of an alternative beam respectively. If the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the X” current beams, then the alternative beam and the X” current beams meet condition (3). In one example, X”=X. That is, condition (3) may mean that the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of all current beams.
例如,X=4,X”=4,当前波束为波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4,Y=2,备选波束为波束5和波束6,其中,波束5的波束质量分别大于或等于波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4的波束质量,则波束5满足条件(3),波束6的波束质量小于波束1的波束质量,但分别大于波束2、波束3和波束4的波束质量,则波束6不满足条件(3)。For example, X=4, X″=4, the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4, Y=2, and the alternative beams are beam 5 and beam 6, where the beam quality of beam 5 is greater than or equal to the beam quality of beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4, respectively. In this case, beam 5 meets condition (3). The beam quality of beam 6 is less than the beam quality of beam 1, but greater than the beam quality of beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4, respectively. In this case, beam 6 does not meet condition (3).
示例性的,条件(3)可以是指:备选波束的波束质量大于或等于任意一个当前波束的波束质量。也就是说,对于任意一个当前波束,将该当前波束的波束质量与一个备选波束的波束质量进行比较,若该备选波束的波束质量大于或等于该当前波束的波束质量,则该备选波束和该当前波束满足条件(3)。例如,X=4,当前波束为波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4,Y=2,波束5和波束6,其中,波束5的波束质量大于或等于波束1的波束质量,波束6的波束质量大于波束4的波束质量,则波束5和波束6均满足条件(3)。Exemplarily, condition (3) may mean that the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of any current beam. That is, for any current beam, the beam quality of the current beam is compared with the beam quality of an alternative beam. If the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current beam, then the alternative beam and the current beam meet condition (3). For example, X=4, the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4, and Y=2, beam 5 and beam 6, where the beam quality of beam 5 is greater than or equal to the beam quality of beam 1, and the beam quality of beam 6 is greater than the beam quality of beam 4, then both beam 5 and beam 6 meet condition (3).
条件(4):备选波束的波束质量大于或等于当前波束的波束质量,且备选波束的波束质量与当前波束的波束质量之间的差值大于或等于第三门限值。Condition (4): The beam quality of the candidate beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current beam, and the difference between the beam quality of the candidate beam and the beam quality of the current beam is greater than or equal to a third threshold value.
其中,条件(4)中的当前波束可以是满足条件(1)的当前波束,和/或,条件(4)中的备选波束可以是满足条件(2)的备选波束,本申请实施例对此并不限制。Among them, the current beam in condition (4) can be the current beam that meets condition (1), and/or, the alternative beam in condition (4) can be the alternative beam that meets condition (2), and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
示例性的,条件(4)可以是指:备选波束的波束质量满足:大于或等于至少X”个当前波束中每个当前波束的波束质量,且与X”个当前波束中每个当前波束的波束质量的差值均大于或等于第三门限值。也就是说,分别将X”个当前波束的波束质量与一个备选波束的波束质量进行比较,若该备选波束的波束质量均大于或等于X”个当前波束的波束质量,且该备选波束的波束质量分别与各个当前波束的波束质量之间的差值均大于或等于第三门限值,则该备选波束和X”个当前波束满足条件(4)。Exemplarily, condition (4) may mean that the beam quality of the alternative beam satisfies: being greater than or equal to the beam quality of each current beam in at least X” current beams, and the difference between the beam quality of the alternative beam and the beam quality of each current beam in the X” current beams is greater than or equal to a third threshold value. That is, the beam qualities of the X” current beams are compared with the beam quality of an alternative beam respectively. If the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the X” current beams, and the difference between the beam quality of the alternative beam and the beam quality of each current beam is greater than or equal to the third threshold value, then the alternative beam and the X” current beams satisfy condition (4).
例如,X=4,X”=4,当前波束为波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4,Y=2,备选波束为波束5和波束6,其中,波束5的波束质量分别大于或等于波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4的波束质量,且波束5的波束质量分别与波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4的波束质量之间的差值均大于或等于第三门限值,则波束5满足条件(4)。波束6的波束质量分别大于或等于波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4的波束质量,且波束6的波束质量分别与波束1、波束3和波束4的波束质量之间的差值均大于或等于第三门限值,但波束6的波束质量与波束2的波束质量之间的差值小于第三门限值,则波束6不满足条件(4)。For example, X=4, X″=4, the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, Y=2, and the alternative beams are beam 5 and beam 6, wherein the beam quality of beam 5 is greater than or equal to the beam quality of beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively, and the differences between the beam quality of beam 5 and the beam quality of beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively, are all greater than or equal to the third threshold value, then beam 5 meets condition (4). The beam quality of beam 6 is greater than or equal to the beam quality of beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively, and the differences between the beam quality of beam 6 and the beam quality of beam 1, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively, are all greater than or equal to the third threshold value, but the difference between the beam quality of beam 6 and the beam quality of beam 2 is less than the third threshold value, then beam 6 does not meet condition (4).
示例性的,条件(4)可以是指:备选波束的波束质量大于或等于任意一个当前波束的波束质量,且与该当前波束的波束质量之间的差值大于或等于第三门限值。也就是说,对于任意一个当前波束,将该当前波束的波束质量与一个备选波束的波束质量进行比较,若该备选波束的波束质量大于或等于该当前波束的波束质量,且两者之间的差值大于或等于第三门限值,则该备选波束和该当前波束满足条件(4)。例如,X=4,当前波束为波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4,Y=2,波束5和波束6,其中,波束5的波束质量大于或等于波束1的波束质量,且波束5的波束质量与波束1的波束质量之间的差值大于或等于第三门限值,波束6的波束质量与波束2的波束质量之间的差值大于或等于第三门限值,则波束5和波束6均满足条件(4)。Exemplarily, condition (4) may mean that the beam quality of the candidate beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of any current beam, and the difference between the beam quality of the candidate beam and the beam quality of the current beam is greater than or equal to a third threshold. That is, for any current beam, the beam quality of the current beam is compared with the beam quality of an candidate beam. If the beam quality of the candidate beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current beam, and the difference between the two is greater than or equal to the third threshold, then the candidate beam and the current beam meet condition (4). For example, X=4, the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, Y=2, beam 5 and beam 6, where the beam quality of beam 5 is greater than or equal to the beam quality of beam 1, and the difference between the beam quality of beam 5 and the beam quality of beam 1 is greater than or equal to the third threshold value, and the difference between the beam quality of beam 6 and the beam quality of beam 2 is greater than or equal to the third threshold value, then beam 5 and beam 6 both meet condition (4).
条件(5):当前波束的波束干扰大于或等于第四门限值。Condition (5): The beam interference of the current beam is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold value.
在一种可能的实现方式中,条件(5)中的当前波束可以是满足条件(1)、条件(3)、条件(4)中至少一项的波束。In a possible implementation, the current beam in condition (5) may be a beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (1), (3), and (4).
假设当前波束的数量为X个。其中,X个当前波束可以是不同小区提供的波束,也可以是同一个小区提供的波束。Assume that the number of current beams is X. The X current beams may be beams provided by different cells or beams provided by the same cell.
示例性的,条件(5)可以是指X个当前波束中至少X”’个当前波束的波束干扰大于或等于第四门限值。也即,X”’为正整数,X”’≤X。在一个例子中,X”’=X。也即,条件(5)可以是指X个当前波束的波束干扰均大于或等于第四门限值。Exemplarily, condition (5) may mean that the beam interference of at least X'' current beams among the X current beams is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold. That is, X'' is a positive integer, X'' ≤ X. In one example, X'' = X. That is, condition (5) may mean that the beam interference of the X current beams is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold.
又示例性的,条件(5)可以是指X个当前波束中任意一个当前波束的波束干扰大于或等于第四门限值。As another example, condition (5) may mean that the beam interference of any current beam among the X current beams is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold value.
条件(6):备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于第五门限值。Condition (6): The beam interference of the candidate beam is less than or equal to the fifth threshold.
在一种可能的实现方式中,条件(6)中的备选波束可以是满足条件(2)至条件(4)中至少一项的波束。In a possible implementation, the candidate beam in condition (6) may be a beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (2) to (4).
假设备选波束的数量为Y个。其中,Y个备选波束可以是不同小区提供的波束,也可以是同一个小区提供的波束。Assume that the number of candidate beams is Y. The Y candidate beams may be beams provided by different cells or beams provided by the same cell.
示例性的,条件(6)可以是指Y个备选波束中至少Y”个的波束干扰小于或等于第五门限值。也即,Y”为正整数,Y”≤Y。在一个例子中,Y”=Y。也即,条件(6)可以是指Y”个备选波束的波束干扰均小于或等于第二门限值。Exemplarily, condition (6) may mean that the beam interference of at least Y” of the Y alternative beams is less than or equal to the fifth threshold value. That is, Y” is a positive integer, Y”≤Y. In one example, Y”=Y. That is, condition (6) may mean that the beam interference of the Y” alternative beams is less than or equal to the second threshold value.
又示例性的,条件(6)可以是指Y个备选波束中任意一个备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于第五门限值。As another example, condition (6) may mean that the beam interference of any one of the Y candidate beams is less than or equal to the fifth threshold value.
条件(7):备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于当前波束的波束干扰。Condition (7): The beam interference of the candidate beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam.
在一种可能的实现方式中,条件(7)中的当前波束可以是满足条件(1)、条件(3)、条件(4)和条件(5)中至少一项的当前波束,和/或,条件(7)中的备选波束可以是满足条件(2)至条件(4)、条件(6)中至少一项的备选波束,本申请实施例对此并不限制。In one possible implementation, the current beam in condition (7) may be a current beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (1), (3), (4) and (5), and/or the alternative beam in condition (7) may be an alternative beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (2) to (4) and (6). This embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
示例性的,条件(7)可以是指:备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于至少X””个当前波束的波束质量。X””为正整数,X””≤X。在一个例子中,X””=X。换言之,分别将X””个当前波束的波束干扰与一个备选波束的波束干扰进行比较,若该备选波束的波束干扰均小于或等于X””个当前波束的波束干扰,则该备选波束和X””个当前波束满足条件(7)。Exemplarily, condition (7) may mean that the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam qualities of at least X"" current beams. X"" is a positive integer, X""≤X. In one example, X""=X. In other words, the beam interference of X"" current beams is compared with the beam interference of an alternative beam respectively. If the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of X"" current beams, then the alternative beam and the X"" current beams meet condition (7).
例如,X=4,X””=4,当前波束为波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4,Y=2,备选波束为波束5和波束6,其中,波束5的波束干扰分别小于或等于波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4的波束干扰,则波束5满足条件(7),波束6的波束干扰分别小于波束2、波束3和波束4的波束干扰,但波束6的波束干扰大于波束1的波束干扰,则波束6不满足条件(7)。For example, X=4, X""=4, the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, Y=2, and the alternative beams are beam 5 and beam 6, where the beam interference of beam 5 is less than or equal to the beam interference of beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively. Then beam 5 meets condition (7), and the beam interference of beam 6 is less than the beam interference of beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively. However, the beam interference of beam 6 is greater than the beam interference of beam 1. Then beam 6 does not meet condition (7).
示例性的,条件(7)可以是指:备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于任意一个当前波束的波束干扰。也就是说,对于任意一个当前波束,将该当前波束的波束干扰与一个备选波束的波束干扰进行比较,若该备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于该当前波束的波束干扰,则该备选波束和该当前波束满足条件(7)。例如,X=4,当前波束为波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4,Y=2,波束5和波束6,其中,波束5的波束干扰小于或等于波束1的波束干扰,波束6的波束质量小于或等于波束4的波束干扰,则波束5和波束6均满足条件(7)。Exemplarily, condition (7) may mean that the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of any current beam. That is, for any current beam, the beam interference of the current beam is compared with the beam interference of an alternative beam. If the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam, then the alternative beam and the current beam meet condition (7). For example, X=4, the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4, and Y=2, beam 5 and beam 6, where the beam interference of beam 5 is less than or equal to the beam interference of beam 1, and the beam quality of beam 6 is less than or equal to the beam interference of beam 4, then both beam 5 and beam 6 meet condition (7).
条件(8):备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于当前波束的波束干扰,且当前波束的波束干扰与当备选波束的波束干扰之间的差值大于或等于第六门限值。Condition (8): The beam interference of the candidate beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam, and the difference between the beam interference of the current beam and the beam interference of the candidate beam is greater than or equal to a sixth threshold value.
在一种可能的实现方式中,条件(8)中的当前波束可以是满足条件(1)、条件(3)、条件(4)和条件(5)中至少一项的当前波束,和/或,条件(7)中的备选波束可以是满足条件(2)至条件(4)、条件(6)中至少一项的备选波束示例性的,条件(8)可以是指:备选波束的波束干扰满足:小于或等于至少X””个当前波束中每个当前波束的波束干扰,且至少X””个当前波束中每个当前波束的波束干扰与备选波束的波束质量的差值均大于或等于第六门限值。也就是说,分别将X””个当前波束的波束干扰与一个备选波束的波束干扰进行比较,若该备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于X””个当前波束的波束干扰,且各个当前波束的波束干扰分别和该备选波束的波束干扰之间的差值均大于或等于第六门限值,则该备选波束和X””个当前波束满足条件(8)。In one possible implementation, the current beam in condition (8) may be a current beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (1), (3), (4) and (5), and/or the alternative beam in condition (7) may be an alternative beam that satisfies at least one of conditions (2) to (4) and (6). For example, condition (8) may mean that the beam interference of the alternative beam satisfies: less than or equal to the beam interference of each current beam in at least X"" current beams, and the difference between the beam interference of each current beam in at least X"" current beams and the beam quality of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the sixth threshold value. That is to say, the beam interferences of the X"" current beams are compared with the beam interference of an alternative beam respectively. If the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the X"" current beams, and the differences between the beam interferences of each current beam and the beam interference of the alternative beam are greater than or equal to the sixth threshold value, then the alternative beam and the X"" current beams meet condition (8).
例如,X=4,X””=4,当前波束为波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4,Y=2,备选波束为波束5和波束6,其中,波束5的波束干扰分别小于或等于波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4的波束干扰,且波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4的波束干扰分别和波束5的波束干扰之间的差值均大于或等于第六门限值,则波束5满足条件(8)。波束6的波束干扰分别小于或等于波束1、波束3和波束4的波束干扰,且波束1、波束3和波束4的波束干扰分别和波束6的波束干扰之间的差值均大于或等于第六门限值,但波束2的波束干扰和波束6的波束干扰之间的差值小于第六门限值,则波束6不满足条件(8)。For example, X=4, X""=4, the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, Y=2, and the alternative beams are beam 5 and beam 6, wherein the beam interference of beam 5 is less than or equal to the beam interference of beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively, and the differences between the beam interferences of beam 1, beam 2, beam 3 and beam 4 and the beam interference of beam 5 are all greater than or equal to the sixth threshold value, then beam 5 meets condition (8). The beam interference of beam 6 is less than or equal to the beam interference of beam 1, beam 3 and beam 4, respectively, and the differences between the beam interferences of beam 1, beam 3 and beam 4 and the beam interference of beam 6 are all greater than or equal to the sixth threshold value, but the difference between the beam interference of beam 2 and the beam interference of beam 6 is less than the sixth threshold value, then beam 6 does not meet condition (8).
又示例性的,条件(8)可以是指:备选波束满足:波束干扰小于或等于任意一个当前波束的波束干扰,且该当前波束的波束干扰和备选波束的波束干扰之间的差值大于或等于第六门限值。也就是说,对于任意一个当前波束,将该当前波束的波束干扰与一个备选波束的波束干扰进行比较,若该备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于该当前波束的波束干扰,且该当前波束的波束干扰和该备选波束的波束干扰之间的差值大于或等于第六门限值,则该备选波束和该当前波束满足条件(8)。As another example, condition (8) may mean that the alternative beam satisfies: the beam interference is less than or equal to the beam interference of any current beam, and the difference between the beam interference of the current beam and the beam interference of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to a sixth threshold value. That is, for any current beam, the beam interference of the current beam is compared with the beam interference of an alternative beam. If the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam, and the difference between the beam interference of the current beam and the beam interference of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the sixth threshold value, then the alternative beam and the current beam satisfy condition (8).
例如,X=4,当前波束为波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4,Y=2,波束5和波束6,其中,波束5的波束干扰小于或等于波束1的波束干扰,且波束1的波束干扰和波束5的波束干扰之间的差值大于或等于第六门限值,则波束5满足条件(7)。波束6的波束干扰小于或等于波束4的波束干扰,且波束4的波束干扰和波束6的波束干扰之间的差值大于或等于第六门限值,则波束6满足条件(7)。For example, if X=4, the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4, and if Y=2, beam 5 and beam 6, the beam interference of beam 5 is less than or equal to the beam interference of beam 1, and the difference between the beam interference of beam 1 and the beam interference of beam 5 is greater than or equal to the sixth threshold value, then beam 5 satisfies condition (7). If the beam interference of beam 6 is less than or equal to the beam interference of beam 4, and the difference between the beam interference of beam 4 and the beam interference of beam 6 is greater than or equal to the sixth threshold value, then beam 6 satisfies condition (7).
需要说明的是,本文中的X’、X”、X”’、X””、Y’和Y”中的一项或多项的取值可以由网络设备配置,或者,可以由协议定义。It should be noted that the value of one or more of X’, X”, X”’, X””, Y’ and Y” in this document can be configured by the network device, or can be defined by the protocol.
条件(9):当前小区的波束质量小于或等于第七门限值。Condition (9): The beam quality of the current cell is less than or equal to the seventh threshold.
具体的,本文中小区的波束质量可以是通过测量网络设备配置在小区中的测量RS资源得到的。Specifically, the beam quality of the cell in this article can be obtained by measuring the measurement RS resources configured by the network device in the cell.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当前小区的波束质量可以是基于当前小区内至少一个当前波束的波束质量得到的第一结果。其中,M为正整数。也就是说,对于一个当前小区而言,该当前小区的波束质量可以是基于该当前小区中至少一个当前波束的波束质量确定的。在这种情况下,若当前小区的波束质量满足条件(9),可以视为当前小区内的当前波束均满足条件(9),或者,用于确定第一结果的当前波束满足条件(9)。假设小区1为当前小区,如果小区1的第一结果小于或等于第七门限值,则小区1满足条件(9)。反之,如果小区1的第一结果大于第七门限值,则小区1不满足条件(9)。In one possible implementation, the beam quality of the current cell may be a first result obtained based on the beam quality of at least one current beam in the current cell. Wherein, M is a positive integer. That is, for a current cell, the beam quality of the current cell may be determined based on the beam quality of at least one current beam in the current cell. In this case, if the beam quality of the current cell satisfies condition (9), it can be regarded as that all current beams in the current cell satisfy condition (9), or that the current beam used to determine the first result satisfies condition (9). Assuming that cell 1 is the current cell, if the first result of cell 1 is less than or equal to the seventh threshold value, cell 1 satisfies condition (9). Conversely, if the first result of cell 1 is greater than the seventh threshold value, cell 1 does not satisfy condition (9).
假设一个当前小区内的M个波束为当前波束,其中,M为正整数,下面结合具体例子对第一结果进行示例性的说明。Assuming that M beams in a current cell are current beams, where M is a positive integer, the first result is exemplarily described below with reference to a specific example.
例子1:第一结果为M个当前波束中波束质量最优或最差的波束的波束质量。Example 1: The first result is the beam quality of the beam with the best or worst beam quality among the M current beams.
例子2:第一结果为M个当前波束的波束质量的平均值。Example 2: The first result is the average value of the beam qualities of M current beams.
例子3:第一结果为M个当前波束中波束质量最优或最差的M’个波束的波束质量的平均值,M’为大于1的正整数,且M’≤M。Example 3: The first result is the average of the beam qualities of the M’ beams with the best or worst beam qualities among the M current beams, where M’ is a positive integer greater than 1, and M’≤M.
例子4:第一结果为M个当前波束中波束质量大于或等于第十九门限值的波束的波束质量的平均值,或者第一结果为M个当前波束中波束质量小于或等于第十九门限值的波束的波束质量的平均值。Example 4: The first result is the average value of the beam qualities of the beams in the M current beams whose beam qualities are greater than or equal to the nineteenth threshold value, or the first result is the average value of the beam qualities of the beams in the M current beams whose beam qualities are less than or equal to the nineteenth threshold value.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,当前小区的波束质量可以是指当前小区的M个当前波束中每个当前波束的波束质量。具体的,对于一个当前小区而言,若该当前小区内所有的当前波束的波束质量均小于或等于第七门限值,则该当前小区满足条件(9)。反之,若该当前小区内任意一个当前波束的波束质量大于第七门限值,则该当前小区不满足条件(9)。在这种实现方式中,若一个当前小区的波束质量满足条件(9),可以视为该当前小区内的当前波束均满足条件(9)。假设小区1为当前小区,当前小区内的M个波束为当前波束,如果M个当前波束的波束质量均小于或等于第七门限值,则小区1满足条件(9)。反之,如果M个当前波束中一个或多个波束的波束质量大于第七门限值,则小区1不满足条件(9)。In another possible implementation, the beam quality of the current cell may refer to the beam quality of each current beam in the M current beams of the current cell. Specifically, for a current cell, if the beam qualities of all current beams in the current cell are less than or equal to the seventh threshold value, the current cell satisfies condition (9). Conversely, if the beam quality of any current beam in the current cell is greater than the seventh threshold value, the current cell does not satisfy condition (9). In this implementation, if the beam quality of a current cell satisfies condition (9), it can be regarded as that all current beams in the current cell satisfy condition (9). Assuming that cell 1 is the current cell and the M beams in the current cell are the current beams, if the beam qualities of the M current beams are less than or equal to the seventh threshold value, cell 1 satisfies condition (9). Conversely, if the beam quality of one or more beams in the M current beams is greater than the seventh threshold value, cell 1 does not satisfy condition (9).
在又一种可能的实现方式中,当前小区的波束质量可以是指当前小区的M个当前波束中K个波束的波束质量。其中,K为正整数,且K≤M。其中,K的取值可以由网络设备配置,或者,也可以由协议定义的。具体的,对于一个当前小区而言,若该当前小区内所有的当前波束中有K个波束的波束质量小于或等于第七门限值,则该当前小区满足条件(9)。反之,若该当前小区内所有的当前波束中波束质量小于或等于第七门限值的波束数量小于K,则该当前小区不满足条件(9)。In another possible implementation, the beam quality of the current cell may refer to the beam quality of K beams among the M current beams of the current cell. Wherein, K is a positive integer, and K≤M. Wherein, the value of K may be configured by a network device, or may be defined by a protocol. Specifically, for a current cell, if the beam quality of K beams among all the current beams in the current cell is less than or equal to the seventh threshold value, then the current cell satisfies condition (9). Conversely, if the number of beams among all the current beams in the current cell whose beam quality is less than or equal to the seventh threshold value is less than K, then the current cell does not satisfy condition (9).
条件(10):备选小区的波束质量大于或等于第八门限值。Condition (10): The beam quality of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the eighth threshold value.
在一种可能的实现方式中,备选小区的波束质量可以是基于备选小区内至少一个备选波束的波束质量得到的第二结果。其中,N为正整数。也就是说,对于一个备选小区而言,该备选小区的波束质量可以是基于该备选小区中至少一个备选波束的波束质量确定的。在这种情况下,若备选小区的波束质量满足条件(10),可以视为备选小区内的备选波束均满足条件(10),或者,用于确定第二结果的备选波束满足条件(10)。假设小区2为备选小区,如果小区2的第二结果大于或等于第八门限值,则小区2满足条件(10)。反之,如果小区2的第二结果小于第八门限值,则小区2不满足条件(10)。In one possible implementation, the beam quality of the alternative cell may be a second result obtained based on the beam quality of at least one alternative beam in the alternative cell. Wherein, N is a positive integer. That is, for an alternative cell, the beam quality of the alternative cell may be determined based on the beam quality of at least one alternative beam in the alternative cell. In this case, if the beam quality of the alternative cell satisfies condition (10), it can be regarded that all alternative beams in the alternative cell satisfy condition (10), or the alternative beam used to determine the second result satisfies condition (10). Assuming that cell 2 is an alternative cell, if the second result of cell 2 is greater than or equal to the eighth threshold value, cell 2 satisfies condition (10). Conversely, if the second result of cell 2 is less than the eighth threshold value, cell 2 does not satisfy condition (10).
假设一个备选小区内的N个波束为备选波束,其中,N为正整数,下面结合具体例子对第二结果进行示例性的说明。Assuming that N beams in a candidate cell are candidate beams, where N is a positive integer, the second result is exemplarily described below with reference to a specific example.
例子5:第二结果为N个备选波束中波束质量最优或最差的波束的波束质量。Example 5: The second result is the beam quality of the beam with the best or worst beam quality among the N candidate beams.
例子6:第二结果为N个备选波束的波束质量的平均值。Example 6: The second result is the average value of the beam qualities of the N candidate beams.
例子7:第二结果为N个备选波束中波束质量最优或最差的N’个波束的波束质量的平均值,N’为大于1的正整数,且N’≤N。Example 7: The second result is the average value of the beam qualities of the N’ beams with the best or worst beam qualities among the N candidate beams, where N’ is a positive integer greater than 1, and N’≤N.
例子8:第二结果为N个备选波束中波束质量大于或等于第二十门限值的波束的波束质量的平均值,或者第二结果为N个备选波束中波束质量小于或等于第二十门限值的波束的波束质量的平均值。Example 8: The second result is the average value of the beam qualities of the beams whose beam qualities are greater than or equal to the twentieth threshold value among the N alternative beams, or the second result is the average value of the beam qualities of the beams whose beam qualities are less than or equal to the twentieth threshold value among the N alternative beams.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,备选小区的波束质量可以是指备选小区的N个备选波束中每个备选波束的波束质量。具体的,对于一个备选小区而言,若该备选小区内所有的备选波束的波束质量均大于或等于第八门限值,则该备选小区满足条件(10)。反之,若该备选小区内任意一个备选波束的波束质量小于第八门限值,则该备选小区不满足条件(10)。在这种实现方式中,若一个备选小区的波束质量满足条件(10),可以视为该备选小区内的备选波束均满足条件(10)。假设小区2为备选小区,小区2内的N个波束为备选波束,如果N个备选波束的波束质量均大于或等于第八门限值,则小区2满足条件(10)。反之,如果N个备选波束中一个或多个波束的波束质量小于第八门限值,则小区2不满足条件(10)。In another possible implementation, the beam quality of the alternative cell may refer to the beam quality of each alternative beam in the N alternative beams of the alternative cell. Specifically, for an alternative cell, if the beam qualities of all alternative beams in the alternative cell are greater than or equal to the eighth threshold value, the alternative cell meets condition (10). Conversely, if the beam quality of any alternative beam in the alternative cell is less than the eighth threshold value, the alternative cell does not meet condition (10). In this implementation, if the beam quality of an alternative cell meets condition (10), it can be regarded as that all alternative beams in the alternative cell meet condition (10). Assuming that cell 2 is an alternative cell and the N beams in cell 2 are alternative beams, if the beam qualities of the N alternative beams are greater than or equal to the eighth threshold value, cell 2 meets condition (10). On the contrary, if the beam quality of one or more beams among the N candidate beams is less than the eighth threshold value, cell 2 does not meet condition (10).
在又一种可能的实现方式中,备选小区的波束质量可以是指备选小区的N个备选波束中K’个波束的波束质量。其中,K’为正整数,且K’≤N。其中,K’的取值可以由网络设备配置,或者,也可以由协议定义的。具体的,对于一个备选小区而言,若该备选小区内所有的备选波束中有K’个波束的波束质量大于或等于第八门限值,则该备选小区满足条件(10)。反之,若该备选小区内所有的备选波束中波束质量大于或等于第八门限值的波束数量小于K’,则该备选小区不满足条件(10)。In another possible implementation, the beam quality of the alternative cell may refer to the beam quality of K' beams among the N alternative beams of the alternative cell. K' is a positive integer, and K'≤N. The value of K' may be configured by a network device, or may be defined by a protocol. Specifically, for an alternative cell, if the beam quality of K' beams among all the alternative beams in the alternative cell is greater than or equal to the eighth threshold value, the alternative cell satisfies condition (10). Conversely, if the number of beams among all the alternative beams in the alternative cell whose beam quality is greater than or equal to the eighth threshold value is less than K', the alternative cell does not satisfy condition (10).
条件(11):备选小区的波束质量大于或等于当前小区的波束质量。Condition (11): The beam quality of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current cell.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当前小区的波束质量可以是基于当前小区的M个当前波束的波束质量得到的第一结果,备选小区的波束质量可以是基于备选小区的N个备选波束的波束质量得到的第二结果。在这种情况下,条件(11)也可以理解为:备选小区的第二结果大于或等于当前小区的第一结果。若一个当前小区的波束质量满足条件(11)以及一个备选小区的波束质量满足条件(11),可以视为该当前小区内的当前波束均满足条件(11),或者,该小区内用于确定第一结果的当前波束满足条件(11),以及该备选小区内的当前波束均满足条件(11),或者,该备选小区内用于确定第二结果的备选波束满足条件(11)。其中,关于第一结果和第二结果的具体内容请参见上文的相关描述。In one possible implementation, the beam quality of the current cell may be a first result obtained based on the beam qualities of the M current beams of the current cell, and the beam quality of the alternative cell may be a second result obtained based on the beam qualities of the N alternative beams of the alternative cell. In this case, condition (11) may also be understood as: the second result of the alternative cell is greater than or equal to the first result of the current cell. If the beam quality of a current cell satisfies condition (11) and the beam quality of an alternative cell satisfies condition (11), it can be regarded as that all current beams in the current cell satisfy condition (11), or that the current beam in the cell used to determine the first result satisfies condition (11), and that the current beam in the alternative cell satisfies condition (11), or that the alternative beam in the alternative cell used to determine the second result satisfies condition (11). For the specific contents of the first result and the second result, please refer to the relevant description above.
假设小区1为当前小区,小区2为备选小区,小区1中的M个波束为当前波束,小区2中的N个波束为备选波束,若小区2的N个备选波束的波束质量得到的第二结果大于或等于小区1的M个当前波束的波束质量得到的第一结果,则小区1满足条件(11),小区2满足条件(11)。反之,若小区2的N个备选波束的波束质量得到的第二结果小于小区1的M个当前波束的波束质量得到的第一结果,则小区1和小区2不满足条件(11)。Assume that cell 1 is the current cell and cell 2 is the candidate cell, the M beams in cell 1 are the current beams and the N beams in cell 2 are the candidate beams. If the second result obtained from the beam quality of the N candidate beams of cell 2 is greater than or equal to the first result obtained from the beam quality of the M current beams of cell 1, then cell 1 meets condition (11) and cell 2 meets condition (11). Conversely, if the second result obtained from the beam quality of the N candidate beams of cell 2 is less than the first result obtained from the beam quality of the M current beams of cell 1, then cell 1 and cell 2 do not meet condition (11).
在另一种可能的实现方式中,当前小区的波束质量是指当前小区的M个当前波束中至少一个当前波束的波束质量,备选小区的波束质量是指备选小区的N个备选波束中至少一个备选波束的波束质量。In another possible implementation, the beam quality of the current cell refers to the beam quality of at least one current beam among the M current beams of the current cell, and the beam quality of the alternative cell refers to the beam quality of at least one alternative beam among the N alternative beams of the alternative cell.
具体而言,假设一个当前小区内M个波束为当前波束,一个备选小区内N个波束为备选波束,则在该种可能的实现方式中,条件(11)可以有如下理解,但不限于下述理解:Specifically, assuming that M beams in a current cell are current beams and N beams in a candidate cell are candidate beams, in this possible implementation, condition (11) can be understood as follows, but is not limited to the following understanding:
在第一个例子中,条件(11)可以理解为:备选小区内的N个备选波束中每个备选波束的波束质量均大于或等于当前小区所有当前波束的波束质量。In the first example, condition (11) can be understood as: the beam quality of each of the N candidate beams in the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of all current beams in the current cell.
在第二个例子中,条件(11)可以理解为:备选小区内N个备选波束中至少N”个波束的波束质量大于或等于当前小区所有当前波束的波束质量。其中,N”为正整数,且N”≤N。In the second example, condition (11) can be understood as: the beam quality of at least N" beams among the N alternative beams in the alternative cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of all current beams in the current cell. Wherein, N" is a positive integer and N"≤N.
在第三个例子中,条件(11)可以理解为:对于当前小区内的每个当前波束,备选小区内均有至少一个备选波束的波束质量大于该当前波束的波束质量。换言之,条件(11)可以理解为:备选小区的备选波束包括:当前小区内每个当前波束对应的至少一个备选波束,其中,每个当前波束对应的至少一个备选波束的波束质量大于或等于该当前波束的波束质量。其中,不同当前波束对应的至少一个备选波束可以相同或者可以不同。In the third example, condition (11) can be understood as follows: for each current beam in the current cell, there is at least one alternative beam in the candidate cell whose beam quality is greater than the beam quality of the current beam. In other words, condition (11) can be understood as follows: the alternative beams of the candidate cell include: at least one alternative beam corresponding to each current beam in the current cell, wherein the beam quality of the at least one alternative beam corresponding to each current beam is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current beam. The at least one alternative beam corresponding to different current beams can be the same or different.
条件(12):备选小区的波束质量大于或等于当前小区的波束质量,且备选小区的波束质量与当前小区的波束质量之间的差值大于或等于第九门限值。Condition (12): The beam quality of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current cell, and the difference between the beam quality of the candidate cell and the beam quality of the current cell is greater than or equal to the ninth threshold value.
在一种可能的实现方式中,当前小区的波束质量可以是基于当前小区的M个当前波束的波束质量得到的第一结果,备选小区的波束质量可以是基于备选小区的N个备选波束的波束质量得到的第二结果。在这种情况下,条件(12)也可以理解为:备选小区的第二结果减去当前小区的第一结果得到的差值大于或等于第九门限值。若一个当前小区的波束质量满足条件(12)以及一个备选小区的波束质量满足条件(12),可以视为该当前小区内的当前波束均满足条件(12),或者,该小区内用于确定第一结果的当前波束满足条件(12),以及该备选小区内的备选波束均满足条件(12),或者,该备选小区内用于确定第二结果的备选波束满足条件(12)。其中,关于第一结果和第二结果的具体内容请参见上文的相关描述。In one possible implementation, the beam quality of the current cell may be a first result obtained based on the beam qualities of the M current beams of the current cell, and the beam quality of the alternative cell may be a second result obtained based on the beam qualities of the N alternative beams of the alternative cell. In this case, condition (12) may also be understood as: the difference obtained by subtracting the first result of the current cell from the second result of the alternative cell is greater than or equal to the ninth threshold value. If the beam quality of a current cell satisfies condition (12) and the beam quality of an alternative cell satisfies condition (12), it can be regarded as that all current beams in the current cell satisfy condition (12), or that the current beam used to determine the first result in the cell satisfies condition (12), and that the alternative beams in the alternative cell satisfy condition (12), or that the alternative beams used to determine the second result in the alternative cell satisfy condition (12). For the specific contents of the first result and the second result, please refer to the relevant description above.
假设小区1为当前小区,小区2为备选小区,小区1中的M个波束为当前波束,小区2中的N个波束为备选波束,小区1的M个当前波束的波束质量得到第一结果,小区2的N个备选波束的波束质量得到小区2的第二结果,若小区2的第二结果减去小区1的第一结果得到的差值大于或等于第九门限值,则小区1满足条件(12),小区2满足条件(12)。反之,若小区2的第二结果减去小区1的第一结果得到的差值小于第九门限值,则小区1和小区2不满足条件(12)。Assume that cell 1 is the current cell and cell 2 is the candidate cell, the M beams in cell 1 are the current beams and the N beams in cell 2 are the candidate beams, the beam quality of the M current beams of cell 1 obtains a first result, and the beam quality of the N candidate beams of cell 2 obtains a second result of cell 2. If the difference obtained by subtracting the first result of cell 1 from the second result of cell 2 is greater than or equal to the ninth threshold value, then cell 1 meets condition (12) and cell 2 meets condition (12). Conversely, if the difference obtained by subtracting the first result of cell 1 from the second result of cell 2 is less than the ninth threshold value, then cell 1 and cell 2 do not meet condition (12).
在另一种可能的实现方式中,当前小区的波束质量是指当前小区的M个当前波束中至少一个当前波束的波束质量,备选小区的波束质量是指备选小区的N个备选波束中至少一个备选波束的波束质量。In another possible implementation, the beam quality of the current cell refers to the beam quality of at least one current beam among the M current beams of the current cell, and the beam quality of the alternative cell refers to the beam quality of at least one alternative beam among the N alternative beams of the alternative cell.
具体而言,假设一个当前小区内M个波束为当前波束,一个备选小区内N个波束为备选波束,则在该种可能的实现方式中,条件(12)可以有如下理解,但不限于下述理解:Specifically, assuming that M beams in a current cell are current beams and N beams in a candidate cell are candidate beams, in this possible implementation, condition (12) can be understood as follows, but is not limited to the following understanding:
在第一个例子中,条件(12)可以理解为:备选小区内的N个备选波束中每个备选波束的波束质量均大于或等于当前小区所有当前波束的波束质量,且每个备选波束的波束质量分别和各个当前波束的波束质量之间的差值均大于或等于第九门限值。In the first example, condition (12) can be understood as: the beam quality of each of the N alternative beams in the alternative cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of all current beams in the current cell, and the difference between the beam quality of each alternative beam and the beam quality of each current beam is greater than or equal to the ninth threshold value.
在第二个例子中,条件(12)可以理解为:备选小区内N个备选波束中至少N”个波束的波束质量满足:波束质量大于或等于当前小区所有当前波束的波束质量,且波束质量分别和各个当前波束的波束质量之间的差值均大于或等于第九门限值。其中,N”为正整数,且N”≤N。In the second example, condition (12) can be understood as: the beam quality of at least N" beams among the N alternative beams in the alternative cell satisfies: the beam quality is greater than or equal to the beam quality of all current beams in the current cell, and the difference between the beam quality and the beam quality of each current beam is greater than or equal to the ninth threshold value. Wherein, N" is a positive integer, and N"≤N.
在第三个例子中,条件(12)可以理解为:对于当前小区内的每个当前波束,备选小区内均有至少一个备选波束满足:y-x≥threshold_9,其中,x表示当前波束的波束质量,y表示备选波束的波束质量,threshold_9表示第九门限值。In the third example, condition (12) can be understood as: for each current beam in the current cell, there is at least one alternative beam in the alternative cell that satisfies: y-x≥threshold_9, where x represents the beam quality of the current beam, y represents the beam quality of the alternative beam, and threshold_9 represents the ninth threshold value.
换言之,在上述第三个例子中,条件(12)也可以理解为:备选小区的备选波束包括:当前小区内每个当前波束对应的至少一个备选波束,其中,每个当前波束以及该当前波束对应的每个备选波束满足:y-x≥threshold_9。In other words, in the third example above, condition (12) can also be understood as: the alternative beams of the alternative cell include: at least one alternative beam corresponding to each current beam in the current cell, wherein each current beam and each alternative beam corresponding to the current beam satisfies: y-x≥threshold_9.
条件(13):当前小区的波束干扰大于或等于第十门限值。Condition (13): The beam interference of the current cell is greater than or equal to the tenth threshold value.
具体的,当前小区的波束干扰大于或等于第十门限值可以是指当前小区内至少一个当前波束的波束干扰大于或等于第十门限值。其中,波束干扰大于或等于第十门限值的当前波束可以视为满足条件(13)。Specifically, the beam interference of the current cell is greater than or equal to the tenth threshold value, which may mean that the beam interference of at least one current beam in the current cell is greater than or equal to the tenth threshold value. The current beam whose beam interference is greater than or equal to the tenth threshold value may be considered to meet condition (13).
在一种可能的实现方式中,对于一个当前小区,当前小区的波束干扰可以是基于当前小区内至少一个当前波束的波束干扰得到的第三结果。In a possible implementation, for a current cell, the beam interference of the current cell may be a third result obtained based on the beam interference of at least one current beam in the current cell.
假设一个当前小区内的M个波束为当前波束,其中,M为正整数,下面结合具体例子对第三结果进行示例性的说明。Assuming that M beams in a current cell are current beams, where M is a positive integer, the third result is exemplarily described below with reference to a specific example.
例子1:第三结果为M个当前波束中波束干扰最大或最小的波束的波束干扰。Example 1: The third result is the beam interference of the beam with the largest or smallest beam interference among the M current beams.
例子2:第三结果为M个当前波束的波束干扰的平均值。Example 2: The third result is the average value of the beam interferences of the M current beams.
例子3:第三结果为M个当前波束中波束干扰最大或最小的M’个波束的波束干扰的平均值,M’为大于1的正整数,且M’≤M。Example 3: The third result is the average value of the beam interference of the M’ beams with the largest or smallest beam interference among the M current beams, where M’ is a positive integer greater than 1, and M’≤M.
例子4:第三结果为M个当前波束中波束干扰大于或等于第二十四门限值的波束的波束干扰的平均值,或者第一结果为M个当前波束中波束干扰小于或等于第二十四门限值的波束的波束干扰的平均值。Example 4: The third result is the average value of the beam interference of the beams in the M current beams whose beam interference is greater than or equal to the twenty-fourth threshold value, or the first result is the average value of the beam interference of the beams in the M current beams whose beam interference is less than or equal to the twenty-fourth threshold value.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,对于一个当前小区,该当前小区内的M个波束为当前波束,若M个当前波束中任意一个波束的波束干扰大于或等于第十门限值,则该当前小区满足条件(13)。In another possible implementation, for a current cell, the M beams within the current cell are current beams. If the beam interference of any one of the M current beams is greater than or equal to the tenth threshold value, the current cell meets condition (13).
在又一种可能的实现方式中,对于一个当前小区,该当前小区内的M个波束为当前波束,若M个当前波束中各个波束的波束干扰均大于或等于第十门限值,则该当前小区满足条件(13)。In another possible implementation, for a current cell, the M beams within the current cell are current beams. If the beam interference of each beam in the M current beams is greater than or equal to the tenth threshold value, then the current cell meets condition (13).
在再一种可能的实现方式中,对于一个当前小区,该当前小区内的M个波束为当前波束,若M个当前波束中至少A个波束的波束干扰大于或等于第十门限值,则该当前小区满足条件(13)。其中,A为正整数,A≤M。A的取值可以由网络设备配置或者由协议定义。In another possible implementation, for a current cell, M beams within the current cell are current beams. If the beam interference of at least A beams among the M current beams is greater than or equal to a tenth threshold value, then the current cell satisfies condition (13). Wherein, A is a positive integer, A≤M. The value of A may be configured by a network device or defined by a protocol.
条件(14):备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于第十一门限值。Condition (14): The beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold.
具体的,备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于第十一门限值可以是指备选小区内至少一个备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于第十一门限值。其中,波束干扰小于或等于第十一门限值的备选波束可以视为满足条件(14)。Specifically, the beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold value may mean that the beam interference of at least one candidate beam in the candidate cell is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold value. Among them, the candidate beam whose beam interference is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold value can be considered to meet condition (14).
在一种可能的实现方式中,对于一个备选小区,备选小区的波束干扰可以是基于备选小区内至少一个备选波束的波束干扰得到的第四结果。In a possible implementation, for a candidate cell, the beam interference of the candidate cell may be a fourth result obtained based on the beam interference of at least one candidate beam in the candidate cell.
假设一个备选小区内的N个波束为备选波束,其中,N为正整数,下面结合具体例子对第四结果进行示例性的说明。Assuming that N beams in a candidate cell are candidate beams, where N is a positive integer, the fourth result is exemplarily described below with reference to a specific example.
例子1:第四结果为N个备选波束中波束干扰最大或最小的波束的波束干扰。Example 1: The fourth result is the beam interference of the beam with the largest or smallest beam interference among the N candidate beams.
例子2:第四结果为N个备选波束的波束干扰的平均值。Example 2: The fourth result is the average value of the beam interferences of the N candidate beams.
例子3:第四结果为N个备选波束中波束干扰最大或最小的N’个波束的波束干扰的平均值,N’为大于1的正整数,且N’≤N。Example 3: The fourth result is the average value of the beam interference of N’ beams with the largest or smallest beam interference among the N alternative beams, where N’ is a positive integer greater than 1, and N’≤N.
例子4:第四结果为N个备选波束中波束干扰大于或等于第二十五门限值的波束的波束干扰的平均值,或者第一结果为N个备选波束中波束干扰小于或等于第二十五门限值的波束的波束干扰的平均值。Example 4: The fourth result is the average value of the beam interference of the beams among the N alternative beams whose beam interference is greater than or equal to the twenty-fifth threshold value, or the first result is the average value of the beam interference of the beams among the N alternative beams whose beam interference is less than or equal to the twenty-fifth threshold value.
在一种可能的实现方式中,对于一个备选小区,该备选小区内的N个波束为备选波束,若N个备选波束中任意一个波束的波束干扰小于或等于第十一门限值,则该备选小区满足条件(14)。In one possible implementation, for a candidate cell, N beams within the candidate cell are candidate beams. If the beam interference of any one of the N candidate beams is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold value, the candidate cell meets condition (14).
在另一种可能的实现方式中,对于一个备选小区,该备选小区内的N个波束为备选波束,若N个备选波束中各个波束的波束干扰均小于或等于第十一门限值,则该备选小区满足条件(14)。In another possible implementation, for a candidate cell, N beams within the candidate cell are candidate beams. If the beam interference of each beam in the N candidate beams is less than or equal to the eleventh threshold value, then the candidate cell meets condition (14).
在又一种可能的实现方式中,对于一个备选小区,该备选小区内的N个波束为备选波束,若N个备选波束中至少B个波束的波束干扰小于或等于第十一门限值,则该备选小区满足条件(14)。其中,B为正整数,B≤N。B的取值可以由网络设备配置或者由协议定义。In another possible implementation, for a candidate cell, N beams within the candidate cell are candidate beams. If the beam interference of at least B beams among the N candidate beams is less than or equal to an eleventh threshold value, then the candidate cell meets condition (14). Wherein, B is a positive integer, B≤N. The value of B can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
条件(15):备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于当前小区的波束干扰。Condition (15): The beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell.
具体的,备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于当前小区的波束干扰,可以是指备选小区的第四结果小于或等于当前小区的第三结果。或者,备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于当前小区的波束干扰,可以是指备选小区内至少一个备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于当前小区内至少一个当前波束的波束干扰。Specifically, the beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell, which may mean that the fourth result of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the third result of the current cell. Alternatively, the beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell, which may mean that the beam interference of at least one candidate beam in the candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of at least one current beam in the current cell.
在一个例子中,对于一个当前小区而言,若一个备选小区内的N个备选波束中每个备选波束的波束干扰均小于或等于该当前小区内所有当前波束的波束干扰,则该当前小区和该备选小区满足条件(15)。In one example, for a current cell, if the beam interference of each of the N alternative beams in an alternative cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of all current beams in the current cell, then the current cell and the alternative cell meet condition (15).
在另一个例子中,对于一个当前小区而言,若一个备选小区内的N个备选波束中至少C个备选波束的波束干扰均小于或等于该当前小区内所有当前波束的波束干扰,则该当前小区和该备选小区满足条件(15)。其中,C为正整数,C≤N。C的取值可以由网络设备配置或者由协议定义。In another example, for a current cell, if the beam interference of at least C candidate beams among N candidate beams in a candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of all current beams in the current cell, then the current cell and the candidate cell meet condition (15). Where C is a positive integer, C ≤ N. The value of C can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
在又一个例子中,对于一个当前小区中的每个当前波束,若一个备选小区的N个备选波束包括:每个当前波束对应的至少一个备选波束,则该当前小区和该备选小区满足条件(15)。其中,每个当前波束对应的备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于该当前波束的波束干扰。其中,不同当前波束对应的至少一个备选波束可以相同或者可以不同。In another example, for each current beam in a current cell, if the N candidate beams of a candidate cell include: at least one candidate beam corresponding to each current beam, then the current cell and the candidate cell meet condition (15). The beam interference of the candidate beam corresponding to each current beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam. The at least one candidate beam corresponding to different current beams may be the same or different.
条件(16):备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于当前小区的波束干扰,且当前小区的波束干扰与备选小区的波束干扰之间的差值大于或等于第十二门限值。Condition (16): The beam interference of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell, and the difference between the beam interference of the current cell and the beam interference of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the twelfth threshold value.
具体的,条件(16)可以是指备选小区的第四结果小于或等于当前小区的第三结果,且当前小区的第三结果与备选小区的第四结果之间的差值大于或等于第十二门限值。Specifically, condition (16) may mean that the fourth result of the candidate cell is less than or equal to the third result of the current cell, and the difference between the third result of the current cell and the fourth result of the candidate cell is greater than or equal to the twelfth threshold.
或者,条件(16)可以是指,备选小区内至少一个备选波束的波束干扰和当前小区内至少一个当前波束的波束干扰满足:备选波束的波束干扰小于或等于当前波束的波束干扰,且当前波束的波束干扰与备选波束的波束干扰之间的差值大于或等于第十二门限值。Alternatively, condition (16) may mean that the beam interference of at least one alternative beam in the alternative cell and the beam interference of at least one current beam in the current cell satisfy: the beam interference of the alternative beam is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current beam, and the difference between the beam interference of the current beam and the beam interference of the alternative beam is greater than or equal to the twelfth threshold value.
在一个例子中,对于一个当前小区而言,若一个备选小区内的N个备选波束中每个备选波束的波束干扰和该当前小区内所有当前波束的波束干扰满足:x’–y’≥threshold_12,则该当前小区和该备选小区满足条件(16)。其中,x’表示当前波束的波束干扰,y’表示备选波束的波束干扰,threshold_12表示第十二门限值。In one example, for a current cell, if the beam interference of each of the N candidate beams in a candidate cell and the beam interference of all current beams in the current cell satisfy: x'–y'≥threshold_12, then the current cell and the candidate cell meet condition (16), where x' represents the beam interference of the current beam, y' represents the beam interference of the candidate beam, and threshold_12 represents the twelfth threshold value.
在另一个例子中,对于一个当前小区而言,若一个备选小区内的N个备选波束中至少C个备选波束的波束干扰和该当前小区内所有当前波束的波束干扰满足:x’–y’≥threshold_12,则该当前小区和该备选小区满足条件(16)。其中,C为正整数,C≤N。C的取值可以由网络设备配置或者由协议定义。In another example, for a current cell, if the beam interference of at least C candidate beams among N candidate beams in a candidate cell and the beam interference of all current beams in the current cell satisfy: x'–y'≥threshold_12, then the current cell and the candidate cell meet condition (16). Where C is a positive integer, C≤N. The value of C can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
在又一个例子中,对于一个当前小区中的每个当前波束,若一个备选小区的N个备选波束包括:每个当前波束对应的至少一个备选波束,则该当前小区和该备选小区满足条件(16)。其中,每个当前波束以及该当前波束对应的备选波束满足:x’–y’≥threshold_12,则该当前小区和该备选小区满足条件(16)。其中,不同当前波束对应的至少一个备选波束可以相同或者可以不同。In another example, for each current beam in a current cell, if the N candidate beams of a candidate cell include: at least one candidate beam corresponding to each current beam, then the current cell and the candidate cell meet condition (16). Wherein, each current beam and the candidate beam corresponding to the current beam meet: x'–y'≥threshold_12, then the current cell and the candidate cell meet condition (16). Wherein, the at least one candidate beam corresponding to different current beams may be the same or different.
条件(17):当前小区组中至少一个小区的波束质量小于或等于第十三门限值。Condition (17): The beam quality of at least one cell in the current cell group is less than or equal to the thirteenth threshold.
本申请实施例中,当前小区组是指当前小区所属的小区组。或者,当前小区组可以是当前的服务小区所属的小区组。In the embodiment of the present application, the current cell group refers to the cell group to which the current cell belongs. Alternatively, the current cell group may be the cell group to which the current serving cell belongs.
在一个例子中,对于一个当前小区组,若该当前小区组中任意一个小区的波束质量小于或等于第十三门限值,则该当前小区组满足条件(17)。若该当前小区组中所有小区的波束质量均大于第十三门限值,则该当前小区组不满足条件(17)。In one example, for a current cell group, if the beam quality of any cell in the current cell group is less than or equal to the thirteenth threshold value, then the current cell group satisfies condition (17). If the beam quality of all cells in the current cell group is greater than the thirteenth threshold value, then the current cell group does not satisfy condition (17).
在另一个例子中,对于一个当前小区组,若该当前小区组中各个小区的波束质量均小于或等于第十三门限值,则该当前小区组满足条件(17)。若该当前小区组中任意一个小区的波束质量大于第十三门限值,则该当前小区组不满足条件(17)。In another example, for a current cell group, if the beam quality of each cell in the current cell group is less than or equal to the thirteenth threshold value, then the current cell group meets condition (17). If the beam quality of any cell in the current cell group is greater than the thirteenth threshold value, then the current cell group does not meet condition (17).
在又一个例子中,对于一个当前小区组,若该当前小区组中至少D个小区的波束质量小于或等于第十三门限值,则该当前小区组满足条件(17)。若该当前小区组中波束质量小于或等于第十三门限值的小区数量小于D,则该当前小区组不满足条件(17)。其中,D为正整数,且D的取值可以由网络设备配置或者由协议定义。In another example, for a current cell group, if the beam qualities of at least D cells in the current cell group are less than or equal to a thirteenth threshold value, then the current cell group satisfies condition (17). If the number of cells in the current cell group whose beam qualities are less than or equal to the thirteenth threshold value is less than D, then the current cell group does not satisfy condition (17). Wherein, D is a positive integer, and the value of D can be configured by a network device or defined by a protocol.
条件(18):备选小区组中至少一个小区的波束质量大于或等于第十四门限值。Condition (18): The beam quality of at least one cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the fourteenth threshold value.
本申请实施例的方案中,备选小区组可以是指备选小区所属的小区组。In the solution of the embodiment of the present application, the candidate cell group may refer to the cell group to which the candidate cell belongs.
在一个例子中,对于一个备选小区组,若该备选小区组中任意一个小区的波束质量大于或等于第十四门限值,则该备选小区组满足条件(18)。若该备选小区组中所有小区的波束质量均小于第十四门限值,则该备选小区组不满足条件(18)。In one example, for a candidate cell group, if the beam quality of any cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the fourteenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group meets condition (18). If the beam quality of all cells in the candidate cell group is less than the fourteenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group does not meet condition (18).
在另一个例子中,对于一个备选小区组,若该备选小区组中各个小区的波束质量均大于或等于第十四门限值,则该备选小区组满足条件(18)。若该备选小区组中任意一个小区的波束质量小于第十四门限值,则该备选小区组不满足条件(18)。In another example, for a candidate cell group, if the beam quality of each cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the fourteenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group meets condition (18). If the beam quality of any cell in the candidate cell group is less than the fourteenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group does not meet condition (18).
在又一个例子中,对于一个备选小区组,若该备选小区组中至少E个小区的波束质量大于或等于第十四门限值,则该备选小区组满足条件(18)。若该备选小区组中波束质量大于或等于第十四门限值的小区数量小于E,则该备选小区组不满足条件(18)。其中,E为正整数,且E的取值可以由网络设备配置或者由协议定义。In another example, for a candidate cell group, if the beam quality of at least E cells in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to a fourteenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group satisfies condition (18). If the number of cells in the candidate cell group whose beam quality is greater than or equal to the fourteenth threshold value is less than E, then the candidate cell group does not satisfy condition (18). Wherein, E is a positive integer, and the value of E can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
条件(19):备选小区组中至少一个小区的波束质量大于或等于当前小区组中至少一个小区的波束质量。Condition (19): The beam quality of at least one cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the beam quality of at least one cell in the current cell group.
在一个例子中,条件(19)可以是指:备选小区组内的任意一个备选小区的波束质量大于或等于当前小区组中各个当前小区的波束质量。In an example, condition (19) may mean that the beam quality of any candidate cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the beam quality of each current cell in the current cell group.
在另一个例子中,条件(19)可以是指:备选小区组中每个备选小区的波束质量大于或等于当前小区组中各个当前小区的波束质量。In another example, condition (19) may mean that the beam quality of each candidate cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the beam quality of each current cell in the current cell group.
在又一个例子中,条件(19)可以是指:对于当前小区组中的每个当前小区,备选小区组中均有一个备选小区的波束质量大于或等于该当前小区的波束质量。换言之,条件(19)可以理解为:备选小区组的备选小区包括:当前小区组内每个当前小区对应的备选小区,其中,每个当前小区对应的备选小区的波束质量大于或等于该当前小区的波束质量。其中,不同当前小区对应的备选小区可以相同或者可以不同。In another example, condition (19) may mean that: for each current cell in the current cell group, there is a candidate cell in the candidate cell group whose beam quality is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current cell. In other words, condition (19) may be understood as: the candidate cells in the candidate cell group include: the candidate cells corresponding to each current cell in the current cell group, wherein the beam quality of the candidate cell corresponding to each current cell is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current cell. The candidate cells corresponding to different current cells may be the same or different.
条件(20):备选小区组中至少一个小区的波束质量大于或等于当前小区组中至少一个小区的波束质量,且备选小区组中至少一个小区的波束质量与当前小区组中至少一个小区的波束质量之间的差值大于或等于第十五门限值。Condition (20): The beam quality of at least one cell in the alternative cell group is greater than or equal to the beam quality of at least one cell in the current cell group, and the difference between the beam quality of at least one cell in the alternative cell group and the beam quality of at least one cell in the current cell group is greater than or equal to the fifteenth threshold value.
在一个例子中,条件(20)可以是指:备选小区组内的任意一个备选小区与当前小区组中各个当前小区满足:y”-x”≥threshold_15,其中,x”表示当前小区的波束质量,y”表示备选小区的波束质量,threshold_15表示第十五门限值。In an example, condition (20) may mean that any alternative cell in the alternative cell group and each current cell in the current cell group satisfy: y"-x"≥threshold_15, where x" represents the beam quality of the current cell, y" represents the beam quality of the alternative cell, and threshold_15 represents the fifteenth threshold value.
在另一个例子中,条件(20)可以是指:备选小区组中每个备选小区的波束质量大于或等于当前小区组中各个当前小区的波束质量,且每个备选小区的波束质量分别减去各个当前小区的波束质量得到的差值均大于或等于第十五门限值。也即,备选小区组中每个备选小区和当前小区组中每个当前小区满足:y”-x”≥threshold_15。In another example, condition (20) may mean that the beam quality of each candidate cell in the candidate cell group is greater than or equal to the beam quality of each current cell in the current cell group, and the difference between the beam quality of each candidate cell and the beam quality of each current cell is greater than or equal to the fifteenth threshold. That is, each candidate cell in the candidate cell group and each current cell in the current cell group satisfies the following condition: y″-x″≥threshold_15.
在又一个例子中,条件(20)可以是指:对于当前小区组中的每个当前小区,备选小区组中均有一个备选小区的波束质量大于或等于该当前小区的波束质量,且该备选小区的波束质量减去该当前小区的波束质量得到的差值大于或等于第十五门限值。换言之,条件(20)可以理解为:备选小区组的备选小区包括:当前小区组内每个当前小区对应的备选小区,其中,每个当前小区以及该当前小区对应的备选小区满足:y”-x”≥threshold_15。In another example, condition (20) may mean that: for each current cell in the current cell group, there is a candidate cell in the candidate cell group whose beam quality is greater than or equal to the beam quality of the current cell, and the difference between the beam quality of the candidate cell and the beam quality of the current cell is greater than or equal to the fifteenth threshold value. In other words, condition (20) may be understood as: the candidate cells of the candidate cell group include: the candidate cells corresponding to each current cell in the current cell group, wherein each current cell and the candidate cell corresponding to the current cell satisfy: y″-x″≥threshold_15.
条件(21):当前小区组中至少一个小区的波束干扰大于或等于第十六门限值。Condition (21): The beam interference of at least one cell in the current cell group is greater than or equal to the sixteenth threshold.
在一个例子中,对于一个当前小区组,若该当前小区组中任意一个小区的波束干扰大于或等于第十六门限值,则该当前小区组满足条件(21)。若该当前小区组中所有小区的波束干扰均小于第十六门限值,则该当前小区组不满足条件(21)。In one example, for a current cell group, if the beam interference of any cell in the current cell group is greater than or equal to the sixteenth threshold value, then the current cell group meets condition (21). If the beam interference of all cells in the current cell group is less than the sixteenth threshold value, then the current cell group does not meet condition (21).
在另一个例子中,对于一个当前小区组,若该当前小区组中各个小区的波束干扰大于或等于第十六门限值,则该当前小区组满足条件(21)。若该当前小区组中任意一个小区的波束干扰小于第十六门限值,则该当前小区组不满足条件(21)。In another example, for a current cell group, if the beam interference of each cell in the current cell group is greater than or equal to the sixteenth threshold value, then the current cell group meets condition (21). If the beam interference of any cell in the current cell group is less than the sixteenth threshold value, then the current cell group does not meet condition (21).
在又一个例子中,对于一个当前小区组,若该当前小区组中至少F个小区的波束干扰大于或等于第十六门限值,则该当前小区组满足条件(21)。若该当前小区组中波束干扰大于或等于第十六门限值的小区数量小于F,则该当前小区组不满足条件(21)。其中,F为正整数,且F的取值可以由网络设备配置或者由协议定义。In another example, for a current cell group, if the beam interference of at least F cells in the current cell group is greater than or equal to the sixteenth threshold value, then the current cell group meets condition (21). If the number of cells in the current cell group whose beam interference is greater than or equal to the sixteenth threshold value is less than F, then the current cell group does not meet condition (21). Wherein, F is a positive integer, and the value of F can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
条件(22):备选小区组中至少一个小区的波束干扰小于或等于第十七门限值。Condition (22): The beam interference of at least one cell in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the seventeenth threshold value.
在一个例子中,对于一个备选小区组,若该备选小区组中任意一个小区的波束干扰小于或等于第十七门限值,则该备选小区组满足条件(22)。若该备选小区组中所有小区的波束干扰均大于第十七门限值,则该备选小区组不满足条件(22)。In one example, for a candidate cell group, if the beam interference of any cell in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the seventeenth threshold value, the candidate cell group meets condition (22). If the beam interference of all cells in the candidate cell group is greater than the seventeenth threshold value, the candidate cell group does not meet condition (22).
在另一个例子中,对于一个备选小区组,若该备选小区组中各个小区的波束干扰均小于或等于第十七门限值,则该备选小区组满足条件(22)。若该备选小区组中任意一个小区的波束干扰大于第十七门限值,则该备选小区组不满足条件(22)。In another example, for a candidate cell group, if the beam interference of each cell in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the seventeenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group meets condition (22). If the beam interference of any cell in the candidate cell group is greater than the seventeenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group does not meet condition (22).
在又一个例子中,对于一个备选小区组,若该备选小区组中至少G个小区的波束干扰小于或等于第十七门限值,则该备选小区组满足条件(22)。若该备选小区组中波束干扰小于或等于第十七门限值的小区数量小于G,则该备选小区组不满足条件(22)。其中,G为正整数,且G的取值可以由网络设备配置或者由协议定义。In another example, for a candidate cell group, if the beam interference of at least G cells in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the seventeenth threshold value, then the candidate cell group meets condition (22). If the number of cells in the candidate cell group whose beam interference is less than or equal to the seventeenth threshold value is less than G, then the candidate cell group does not meet condition (22). Wherein, G is a positive integer, and the value of G can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol.
条件(23):备选小区组中至少一个小区的波束干扰小于或等于当前小区组中至少一个小区的波束干扰。Condition (23): The beam interference of at least one cell in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the beam interference of at least one cell in the current cell group.
在一个例子中,条件(23)可以是指:备选小区组内的任意一个备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于当前小区组中各个当前小区的波束干扰。In an example, condition (23) may mean that the beam interference of any candidate cell in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the beam interference of each current cell in the current cell group.
在另一个例子中,条件(23)可以是指:备选小区组中每个备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于当前小区组中各个当前小区的波束干扰。In another example, condition (23) may mean that the beam interference of each candidate cell in the candidate cell group is less than or equal to the beam interference of each current cell in the current cell group.
在又一个例子中,条件(23)可以是指:对于当前小区组中的每个当前小区,备选小区组中均有一个备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于该当前小区的波束干扰。换言之,条件(23)可以理解为:备选小区组的备选小区包括:当前小区组内每个当前小区对应的备选小区,其中,每个当前小区对应的备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于该当前小区的波束干扰。In another example, condition (23) may mean that: for each current cell in the current cell group, there is a candidate cell in the candidate cell group whose beam interference is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell. In other words, condition (23) may be understood as: the candidate cells in the candidate cell group include: the candidate cells corresponding to each current cell in the current cell group, wherein the beam interference of the candidate cell corresponding to each current cell is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell.
条件(24):备选小区组中至少一个小区的波束干扰小于或等于当前小区组中至少一个小区的波束干扰,且当前小区组中至少一个小区的波束干扰与备选小区组中至少一个小区的波束干扰之间的差值大于或等于第十八门限值。Condition (24): The beam interference of at least one cell in the alternative cell group is less than or equal to the beam interference of at least one cell in the current cell group, and the difference between the beam interference of at least one cell in the current cell group and the beam interference of at least one cell in the alternative cell group is greater than or equal to the eighteenth threshold value.
在一个例子中,条件(24)可以是指:备选小区组内的任意一个备选小区与当前小区组中各个当前小区满足:x”’-y”’≥threshold_18,其中,x”’表示当前小区的波束干扰,y”’表示备选小区的波束干扰,threshold_18表示第十八门限值。In an example, condition (24) may mean that any alternative cell in the alternative cell group and each current cell in the current cell group satisfy: x”’-y”’≥threshold_18, where x”’ represents the beam interference of the current cell, y”’ represents the beam interference of the alternative cell, and threshold_18 represents the eighteenth threshold value.
在另一个例子中,条件(24)可以是指:备选小区组中每个备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于当前小区组中各个当前小区的波束干扰,且每个当前小区的波束干扰分别减去各个备选小区的波束干扰得到的差值均大于或等于第十八门限值。也即,备选小区组中每个备选小区和当前小区组中每个当前小区满足:x”’-y”’≥threshold_18,其中,x”’表示当前小区的波束干扰,y”’表示备选小区的波束干扰,threshold_18表示第十八门限值。In another example, condition (24) may mean that the beam interference of each alternative cell in the alternative cell group is less than or equal to the beam interference of each current cell in the current cell group, and the difference between the beam interference of each current cell and the beam interference of each alternative cell is greater than or equal to the eighteenth threshold value. That is, each alternative cell in the alternative cell group and each current cell in the current cell group satisfies: x'-y''≥threshold_18, where x'' represents the beam interference of the current cell, y'' represents the beam interference of the alternative cell, and threshold_18 represents the eighteenth threshold value.
在又一个例子中,条件(24)可以是指:对于当前小区组中的每个当前小区,备选小区组中均有一个备选小区的波束干扰小于或等于该当前小区的波束干扰,且该当前小区的波束干扰减去该备选小区的波束干扰得到的差值大于或等于第十八门限值。换言之,条件(24)可以理解为:备选小区组的备选小区包括:当前小区组内每个当前小区对应的备选小区,其中,每个当前小区以及该当前小区对应的备选小区满足:x”’-y”’≥threshold_18,其中,x”’表示当前小区的波束干扰,y”’表示备选小区的波束干扰,threshold_18表示第十八门限值。In another example, condition (24) may mean that for each current cell in the current cell group, there is an alternative cell in the alternative cell group whose beam interference is less than or equal to the beam interference of the current cell, and the difference between the beam interference of the current cell and the beam interference of the alternative cell is greater than or equal to the eighteenth threshold value. In other words, condition (24) may be understood as follows: the alternative cells of the alternative cell group include: the alternative cells corresponding to each current cell in the current cell group, wherein each current cell and the alternative cell corresponding to the current cell satisfy: x'-y''≥threshold_18, wherein x'' represents the beam interference of the current cell, y'' represents the beam interference of the alternative cell, and threshold_18 represents the eighteenth threshold value.
需要说明的是,关于小区的波束质量以及小区的波束干扰的具体内容可以参照上文的相关描述,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that the specific contents about the beam quality of the cell and the beam interference of the cell can be referred to the relevant description above and will not be repeated here.
在具体实施中,第一事件所包含的条件可以是指第一事件的进入条件(Entering condition),在满足进入条件之后,终端设备可以基于计数器和计时器对进入条件的连续满足次数进行判断,以检测第一事件。关于计数器和计时器的具体内容可以参照下文关于实施例四的相关描述。In a specific implementation, the condition included in the first event may refer to an entry condition of the first event. After the entry condition is met, the terminal device may determine the number of consecutive times the entry condition is met based on a counter and a timer to detect the first event. For details about the counter and the timer, please refer to the relevant description of Example 4 below.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的“计数器”和“计时器”可以是媒体接入控制-控制单元(medium access control-control element,MAC CE)层的计数器和计时器。It should be noted that the "counter" and "timer" in the embodiments of the present application can be the counter and timer of the medium access control-control element (MAC CE) layer.
进一步地,如果终端设备检测到一个或多个切换事件,则终端设备可以继续执行S12。通过检测切换事件,终端设备可以确定待切换波束和新波束。Furthermore, if the terminal device detects one or more switching events, the terminal device may continue to execute S12. By detecting the switching events, the terminal device may determine the beam to be switched and the new beam.
在一个例子中,如果终端设备检测到切换事件组中的任意一个切换事件,则终端设备执行S12。In an example, if the terminal device detects any one switching event in the switching event group, the terminal device executes S12.
在另一个例子中,如果终端设备检测到切换事件组中所有的切换事件,则终端设备执行S12。也就是说,在切换事件组中所有切换事件均被满足的情况下,S12被执行。In another example, if the terminal device detects all the switching events in the switching event group, the terminal device executes S12. That is, S12 is executed when all the switching events in the switching event group are satisfied.
在又一个例子中,每个切换事件可以具有优先级,如果终端设备检测到切换事件组中优先级最高的P个切换事件中的至少一个,则终端设备执行S12。其中,P为正整数,本文对于P的取值并不限制。例如,如果切换事件组中优先级最高的P个切换事件均被检测到,则S12被执行。又例如,如果切换事件组中优先级最高的P个切换事件中任意一个切换事件被检测到,则S12被执行。In another example, each handover event may have a priority. If the terminal device detects at least one of the P handover events with the highest priority in the handover event group, the terminal device executes S12. Wherein, P is a positive integer, and this document does not limit the value of P. For example, if all of the P handover events with the highest priority in the handover event group are detected, S12 is executed. For another example, if any one of the P handover events with the highest priority in the handover event group is detected, S12 is executed.
在再一个例子中,如果终端设备检测切换事件组中优先级大于或等于第二十一门限值的切换事件中的至少一个,则终端设备执行S12。例如,如果切换事件组中优先级大于或等于第二十一门限值的切换事件均被检测到,则S12被执行。又例如,如果切换事件组中优先级大于或等于第二十一门限值的切换事件中任意一个切换事件被检测到,则S12被执行。In another example, if the terminal device detects at least one of the handover events in the handover event group whose priority is greater than or equal to the 21st threshold value, the terminal device executes S12. For example, if all the handover events in the handover event group whose priority is greater than or equal to the 21st threshold value are detected, S12 is executed. For another example, if any one of the handover events in the handover event group whose priority is greater than or equal to the 21st threshold value is detected, S12 is executed.
需要说明的是,本文对于本文中涉及的各个门限值的取值并不限定,各个门限值的取值可以是由网络设备配置和/或可以由协议定义。It should be noted that this document does not limit the values of the various thresholds involved in this document. The values of the various thresholds may be configured by network devices and/or defined by protocols.
S12,终端设备向网络设备发送第一信息,第一信息用于波束管理或波束切换。对应的,网络设备接收第一信息。S12: The terminal device sends first information to the network device, where the first information is used for beam management or beam switching. Correspondingly, the network device receives the first information.
示例性的,终端设备可以基于报告配置信息上报第一信息。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的报告配置信息用于第一信息的上报。Exemplarily, the terminal device may report the first information based on the report configuration information. It should be noted that the report configuration information in the embodiment of the present application is used for reporting the first information.
其中,第一信息可以包括以下至少一项:检测到的切换事件的信息、待切换波束和新波束。其中,关于第一信息的更多内容可以参照下文关于其他实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。The first information may include at least one of the following: information about a detected switching event, a beam to be switched, and a new beam. For more details about the first information, please refer to the following description of other embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
在一种可能的实施方式中,第一信息可以用于波束管理(Beam Management)。波束管理可以包括以下至少一项:波束测量、波束报告、波束训练和波束指示。具体而言,网络设备在接收到第一信息之后,可以进行波束管理。In one possible implementation, the first information may be used for beam management. Beam management may include at least one of the following: beam measurement, beam reporting, beam training, and beam indication. Specifically, after receiving the first information, the network device may perform beam management.
示例性的,网络设备可以根据第一信息配置终端设备进行波束测量,或者,在接收到第一信息之后,网络设备可以配置终端设备上报波束报告。其中,波束报告可以是现有协议定义的波束报告,本实施例对此并不限定。Exemplarily, the network device may configure the terminal device to perform beam measurement based on the first information, or, after receiving the first information, the network device may configure the terminal device to report a beam report. The beam report may be a beam report defined by an existing protocol, which is not limited in this embodiment.
又示例性的,网络设备可以基于第一信息启动波束训练过程。As another example, the network device may initiate a beam training process based on the first information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备可以启动传统的波束训练过程。例如,在第一信息未指示新波束的情况下(例如,仅包括切换事件的信息和/或仅指示待切换波束),网络设备可以启动传统的波束训练过程。In one possible implementation, the network device may initiate a conventional beam training process. For example, if the first information does not indicate a new beam (e.g., only includes information about a handover event and/or only indicates a beam to be switched), the network device may initiate a conventional beam training process.
在一种可能的实现方式中,波束训练过程可以是P2过程或P3过程。例如,网络设备可以采用第一信息中所建议的波束训练方式启动波束训练。关于建议的波束训练方式的具体内容可以参照下文的相关描述。In one possible implementation, the beam training process may be a P2 process or a P3 process. For example, the network device may initiate beam training using the beam training method recommended in the first information. For details about the recommended beam training method, refer to the relevant description below.
其中,在P2过程中可以围绕新波束进行波束细化(beam refinement)。具体地,网络设备可以围绕新波束进行波束扫描,也即,网络设备配置参数repetition为off的CSI-RS,并在新波束相邻的多个波束上进行发射,终端设备在固定的接收方向进行接收,以确定一个最优的下行接收波束。During the P2 process, beam refinement can be performed around the new beam. Specifically, the network device can perform beam scanning around the new beam. That is, the network device configures the CSI-RS with the repetition parameter set to off and transmits on multiple beams adjacent to the new beam. The terminal device receives in a fixed receiving direction to determine the optimal downlink receive beam.
在P3过程中,在新波束的波束方向上重复传输下行参考信号(如SSB或CSI-RS)。具体地,网络设备配置repetition为on的CSI-RS,并在新波束的方向上重复传输下行参考信号,终端设备进行波束扫描,以确定一个最优的下行接收方向。During the P3 process, downlink reference signals (such as SSB or CSI-RS) are repeatedly transmitted in the direction of the new beam. Specifically, the network device configures the CSI-RS with repetition on and repeatedly transmits the downlink reference signal in the direction of the new beam. The terminal device performs beam scanning to determine the optimal downlink reception direction.
再示例性的,网络设备可以根据第一信息向终端设备指示目标波束,以使终端设备切换至目标波束。采用这样的方案,网络设备无需再配置终端设备上报波束报告,而是直接基于切换事件所触发的第一信息来指示目标波束,有利于降低波束切换的时延。As another example, the network device can indicate the target beam to the terminal device based on the first information, so that the terminal device switches to the target beam. With this solution, the network device no longer needs to configure the terminal device to report a beam. Instead, the network device directly indicates the target beam based on the first information triggered by the switching event, which helps reduce the latency of beam switching.
在具体实施中,波束管理可以是小区内的波束管理,和/或,小区间的波束管理。其中,小区内的波束管理可以是指对于一个或多个待切换波束,待切换波束所在的小区中确定新波束的波束管理。小区间的波束管理可以是指:对于一个或多个待切换波束,在待切换波束所在的小区以外的其他小区确定新波束的波束管理。In a specific implementation, beam management can be intra-cell beam management and/or inter-cell beam management. Intra-cell beam management may refer to the determination of a new beam for one or more beams to be switched in the cell where the beams to be switched are located. Inter-cell beam management may refer to the determination of a new beam for one or more beams to be switched in cells other than the cell where the beams to be switched are located.
在另一种可能的实施方式中,第一信息可以用于波束切换。示例性的,网络设备可以向终端设备指示第一信息中所包含的一个或多个新波束,终端设备可以切换至网络设备所指示的新波束。In another possible implementation, the first information may be used for beam switching. Exemplarily, the network device may indicate one or more new beams included in the first information to the terminal device, and the terminal device may switch to the new beam indicated by the network device.
具体的,波束切换可以包括:小区内的波束切换,和/或,小区间的波束切换。其中,小区内的波束切换可以是指:从当前波束切换至目标波束,目标波束所属的小区和当前波束所属的小区相同。或者,小区内的波束切换可以是指:从待切换波束切换至目标波束,目标波束所属的小区和待切换波束所属的小区相同。也即,切换前的波束和切换后的波束属于同一个小区。Specifically, beam switching may include intra-cell beam switching and/or inter-cell beam switching. Intra-cell beam switching may refer to switching from a current beam to a target beam, where the target beam belongs to the same cell as the current beam. Alternatively, intra-cell beam switching may refer to switching from a beam to be switched to a target beam, where the target beam belongs to the same cell as the beam to be switched. That is, the beam before switching and the beam after switching belong to the same cell.
其中,小区间的波束切换可以是指:切换前的波束和切换后的波束属于不同的小区。具体的,小区间的波束切换可以是指:从当前波束切换至目标波束,目标波束所属的小区和当前波束所属的小区不同。或者,小区间的波束切换可以是指:从待切换波束切换至目标波束,目标波束所属的小区和待切换波束所属的小区不同。Inter-cell beam switching may mean that the beam before switching and the beam after switching belong to different cells. Specifically, inter-cell beam switching may mean switching from a current beam to a target beam, where the target beam belongs to a different cell than the current beam. Alternatively, inter-cell beam switching may mean switching from a beam to be switched to a target beam, where the target beam belongs to a different cell than the beam to be switched.
在一种可能的实现方式中,小区间的波束切换还可以包括:从当前小区切换至目标小区,目标小区和当前小区不同。其中,此处的当前小区为当前的服务小区。In a possible implementation, the inter-cell beam switching may further include: switching from a current cell to a target cell, where the target cell is different from the current cell, where the current cell is a current serving cell.
需要说明的是,切换前的波束数量和切换后的波束数量可以相同,或者,也可以不同。也即,执行波束切换或波束管理之后,终端设备所使用的波束数量可以保持不变,也可以与切换前使用的波束数量不同。It should be noted that the number of beams before switching and the number of beams after switching can be the same or different. That is, after performing beam switching or beam management, the number of beams used by the terminal device can remain unchanged or be different from the number of beams used before switching.
具体的,对于每个待切换波束,可以确定一个目标波束。例如,当前波束为波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4,其中,波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4均为待切换波束,则可以分别为每个波束确定一个目标波束,在执行波束切换之后,终端设备使用的波束分别为波束5、波束6、波束7和波束8。或者,对于多个待切换波束,可以确定一个目标波束。例如,当前波束为波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4,其中,波束1、波束2、波束3和波束4均为待切换波束,可以为波束1和波束2确定一个目标波束,以及为波束3和波束4确定一个目标波束,在执行波束切换之后,终端设备使用的波束分别为波束5、和波束6。Specifically, for each beam to be switched, a target beam can be determined. For example, the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4, where beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4 are all beams to be switched. A target beam can be determined for each beam, and after beam switching is performed, the beams used by the terminal device are beam 5, beam 6, beam 7, and beam 8, respectively. Alternatively, for multiple beams to be switched, a target beam can be determined. For example, the current beams are beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4, where beam 1, beam 2, beam 3, and beam 4 are all beams to be switched. A target beam can be determined for beam 1 and beam 2, and a target beam can be determined for beam 3 and beam 4. After beam switching is performed, the beams used by the terminal device are beam 5 and beam 6, respectively.
在其他实施例中,如果检测到一个或多个切换事件,终端设备可以发起随机接入。具体的,终端设备可以在新波束所在的小区上发起随机接入。In other embodiments, if one or more handover events are detected, the terminal device may initiate random access. Specifically, the terminal device may initiate random access on the cell where the new beam is located.
在其他实施例中,如果终端设备检测到一个或多个切换事件,终端设备可以执行第一操作。In other embodiments, if the terminal device detects one or more switching events, the terminal device may perform a first operation.
由上,实施例一的方案中,终端设备对切换事件进行检测,并在检测到一个或多个切换事件的情况下,向网络设备发送第一信息,以辅助网络设备进行波束管理或波束切换。关于实施例一的更多内容可以参照本文关于其他实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。As described above, in the solution of Example 1, the terminal device detects a switching event and, upon detecting one or more switching events, sends first information to the network device to assist the network device in performing beam management or beam switching. For more details about Example 1, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments in this document and will not be repeated here.
实施例二Example 2
参照图2,图2是本申请实施例中第二种通信方法的信令交互示意图。图2示出的通信方法可以包括S21。2, which is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction in a second communication method according to an embodiment of the present application, the communication method shown in FIG2 may include S21.
S21,网络设备向终端设备发送第一配置信息,第一配置信息用于配置切换事件。对应的,终端设备接收第一配置信息。S21: The network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to configure a handover event. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first configuration information.
基于S21,网络设备可以通过第一配置信息告知终端设备所需测量的切换事件。Based on S21, the network device may inform the terminal device of the switching event that needs to be measured through the first configuration information.
具体的,第一配置信息可以包括一个或多个切换事件的信息,其中,切换事件的信息可以包括以下至少一项:切换事件包含的条件、切换事件的标识信息、切换事件的优先级信息、切换事件关联的业务类型。Specifically, the first configuration information may include information about one or more switching events, wherein the information about the switching event may include at least one of the following: conditions included in the switching event, identification information of the switching event, priority information of the switching event, and service type associated with the switching event.
其中,关于切换事件包含的条件可以参照上文关于实施例一的相关描述。切换事件的标识信息可以用于唯一地标识切换事件,也即,不同切换事件的标识信息是不同的。其中,本文中的“标识”也可以替换为“索引”。The conditions for the handover event can be referred to the above description of the first embodiment. The identification information of the handover event can be used to uniquely identify the handover event, that is, the identification information of different handover events is different. In this document, "identification" can also be replaced by "index".
切换事件的优先级信息可以用于指示切换事件的优先级。The priority information of the handover event may be used to indicate the priority of the handover event.
切换事件关联的业务类型可以是指终端设备在进行切换事件关联的业务类型时检测切换事件。例如,切换事件1关联低时延高可靠通信(Ultra-Reliable Low-Latency Communications,uRLLC)业务,切换事件2关联增强移动宽带(Enhanced Mobile Broadband,eMBB)业务,在终端设备进行uRLLC业务的过程中,终端设备检测切换事件1,但不检测切换事件2。在终端设备进行eMBB业务的过程中,终端设备检测切换事件2,但不检测切换事件1。The service type associated with a handover event may refer to the terminal device detecting the handover event when performing the service type associated with the handover event. For example, handover event 1 is associated with the Ultra-Reliable Low-Latency Communications (uRLLC) service, and handover event 2 is associated with the enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB) service. When the terminal device is performing the uRLLC service, the terminal device detects handover event 1 but does not detect handover event 2. When the terminal device is performing the eMBB service, the terminal device detects handover event 2 but does not detect handover event 1.
在具体实施中,网络设备可以向终端设备发送报告配置信息,报告配置信息可以用于配置终端设备上报第一信息。例如,报告配置信息可以配置发送第一信息的上行资源等。其中,报告配置信息的框架可以与现有的用于配置波束报告的配置信息的框架相同,也可以采用新的框架。In a specific implementation, the network device may send report configuration information to the terminal device, and the report configuration information may be used to configure the terminal device to report the first information. For example, the report configuration information may configure uplink resources for sending the first information. The framework of the report configuration information may be the same as the framework of the existing configuration information for configuring beam reporting, or a new framework may be adopted.
具体地,报告配置信息可以包括至少一个报告配置,报告配置可以与切换事件关联。报告配置和切换事件之间的关联关系,可以理解为,终端设备在检测到一个切换事件后,可以基于该切换事件关联的报告配置发送第一信息。Specifically, the report configuration information may include at least one report configuration, and the report configuration may be associated with a handover event. The association relationship between the report configuration and the handover event can be understood as follows: after detecting a handover event, the terminal device may send the first information based on the report configuration associated with the handover event.
本申请实施例的方案中,一个报告配置可以关联一个或多个切换事件。例如,不同报告配置可以关联不同的切换事件。或者,多个报告配置可以关联一个切换事件。通过将切换事件与报告配置进行关联,使得终端设备可以获知在检测到切换事件之后如何上报第一信息。In the embodiments of the present application, a reporting configuration can be associated with one or more handover events. For example, different reporting configurations can be associated with different handover events. Alternatively, multiple reporting configurations can be associated with a single handover event. By associating a handover event with a reporting configuration, a terminal device can learn how to report the first information after detecting a handover event.
假设网络设备配置了m个报告配置和n个切换事件,可以有以下几种情况,但不限于此,其中,m和n均为正整数:Assuming that a network device is configured with m reporting configurations and n switching events, the following situations may occur, but are not limited to these, where m and n are both positive integers:
在一种情况下,m=1,n≥1。在这种情况下,该报告配置可以关联n个切换事件。终端设备在检测到n个切换事件中的至少一个切换事件之后,可以基于该报告配置发送第一信息。In one case, m=1, n≥1. In this case, the reporting configuration may be associated with n handover events. After detecting at least one handover event among the n handover events, the terminal device may send first information based on the reporting configuration.
在另一种情况下,m>1,n=1。在这种情况下,m个报告配置中的一个或多个报告配置关联该切换事件。终端设备在检测到该切换事件之后,可以基于该切换事件关联的任意一个报告配置发送第一信息。In another case, m>1, n=1. In this case, one or more reporting configurations among the m reporting configurations are associated with the handover event. After detecting the handover event, the terminal device may send the first information based on any reporting configuration associated with the handover event.
在又一种情况下,m>1,n>1。在一个例子中,m个报告配置中每个报告配置可以均与n个切换事件关联。在另一个例子中,m个报告配置中不同的报告配置分别关联n个切换事件中不同的切换事件。In another case, m>1, n>1. In one example, each of the m reporting configurations may be associated with n switching events. In another example, different reporting configurations in the m reporting configurations are respectively associated with different switching events in the n switching events.
假设m个报告配置为报告配置1和报告配置2,n个切换事件为切换事件1、切换事件2、切换事件3和切换事件4。在例子1中,报告配置1关联切换事件1、切换事件2、切换事件3和切换事件4,报告配置2关联切换事件1、切换事件2、切换事件3和切换事件4。在例子2中,报告配置1关联切换事件1和切换事件2,报告配置2关联切换事件3和切换事件4。Assume that the m reporting configurations are reporting configuration 1 and reporting configuration 2, and the n handover events are handover event 1, handover event 2, handover event 3, and handover event 4. In Example 1, reporting configuration 1 is associated with handover event 1, handover event 2, handover event 3, and handover event 4, and reporting configuration 2 is associated with handover event 1, handover event 2, handover event 3, and handover event 4. In Example 2, reporting configuration 1 is associated with handover event 1 and handover event 2, and reporting configuration 2 is associated with handover event 3 and handover event 4.
下面对报告配置和切换事件关联的方式进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of how the reporting configuration is associated with the handover event.
示例1:报告配置信息和第一配置信息关联,且报告配置信息中的报告配置和第一配置信息中的切换事件按照默认规则关联。Example 1: The report configuration information is associated with the first configuration information, and the report configuration in the report configuration information and the switching event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
具体的,网络设备可以向终端设备分别发送报告配置信息和第一配置信息。报告配置信息和第一配置信息之间无包含关系,但是具有关联关系。报告配置信息和第一配置信息关联的方式包括但不限于以下几种:报告配置信息可以包括第一配置信息的标识,或者,第一配置信息可以包括报告配置信息的标识,或者,网络设备通过信令指示报告配置信息和第一配置信息之间的关联关系。需要说明的是,本文中的信令可以是无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层信令、MAC层信令、物理层信令中的至少一项。Specifically, the network device may send the report configuration information and the first configuration information to the terminal device respectively. There is no inclusion relationship between the report configuration information and the first configuration information, but there is an association relationship. The ways in which the report configuration information and the first configuration information are associated include but are not limited to the following: the report configuration information may include an identifier of the first configuration information, or the first configuration information may include an identifier of the report configuration information, or the network device indicates the association relationship between the report configuration information and the first configuration information through signaling. It should be noted that the signaling in this article may be at least one of radio resource control (RRC) layer signaling, MAC layer signaling, and physical layer signaling.
进一步地,报告配置信息中的报告配置和第一配置信息中的切换事件按照默认规则关联。例如,报告配置和切换事件可以按照标识顺序依次关联。例如,标识为1的报告配置和标识为1的切换事件关联,标识为2的报告配置和标识为2的切换事件关联。Furthermore, the reporting configuration in the reporting configuration information and the handover event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule. For example, the reporting configuration and the handover event may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identifiers. For example, the reporting configuration identified as 1 is associated with the handover event identified as 1, and the reporting configuration identified as 2 is associated with the handover event identified as 2.
示例2:报告配置信息中的报告配置可以包括该报告配置关联的切换事件的信息。Example 2: The report configuration in the report configuration information may include information about a switching event associated with the report configuration.
具体的,报告配置信息可以包括第一配置信息,其中,报告配置信息中的一个或多个报告配置可以包括各自关联的切换事件的信息。例如,报告配置1包括切换事件1的标识,表示报告配置1与切换事件1关联。又例如,报告配置1包括切换事件1和切换事件2的标识,表示报告配置1与切换事件1、切换事件2关联。Specifically, the report configuration information may include first configuration information, wherein one or more report configurations in the report configuration information may include information of the handover events associated with each. For example, report configuration 1 includes an identifier of handover event 1, indicating that report configuration 1 is associated with handover event 1. For another example, report configuration 1 includes identifiers of handover event 1 and handover event 2, indicating that report configuration 1 is associated with handover event 1 and handover event 2.
示例3:第一配置信息中切换事件的信息可以包括该切换事件关联的报告配置,或者,第一配置信息中切换事件的信息可以包括用于指示该切换事件关联的报告配置的信息。其中,用于指示报告配置的信息可以是报告配置的标识。Example 3: The information about the handover event in the first configuration information may include a report configuration associated with the handover event, or the information about the handover event in the first configuration information may include information indicating the report configuration associated with the handover event, wherein the information indicating the report configuration may be an identifier of the report configuration.
例如,切换事件1的信息包括报告配置1的标识,则表示切换事件1与报告配置1关联。又例如,切换事件1的信息包括报告配置1,则表示切换事件1与报告配置1关联。For example, if the information of handover event 1 includes the identifier of report configuration 1, it means that handover event 1 is associated with report configuration 1. For another example, if the information of handover event 1 includes report configuration 1, it means that handover event 1 is associated with report configuration 1.
在具体实施中,网络设备可以向终端设备发送资源配置信息,资源配置信息可以用于配置RS资源。其中,本实施例中的RS资源可以是测量RS资源,也即,用于测量波束质量或检测切换事件的RS资源。In a specific implementation, the network device may send resource configuration information to the terminal device, and the resource configuration information may be used to configure RS resources. The RS resources in this embodiment may be measurement RS resources, that is, RS resources used to measure beam quality or detect switching events.
具体的,资源配置信息可以包括至少一个RS传输参数。RS传输参数可以与切换事件关联。需要说明的是,此处的“RS传输参数”可以是指RS资源配置,或者,可以是指RS资源集,或者,可以是指RS资源。也就是说,下文中关于“RS传输参数”可以适用于或者替换为“RS资源配置”,或者,“RS资源集”,或者,“RS资源”。Specifically, the resource configuration information may include at least one RS transmission parameter. The RS transmission parameter may be associated with a handover event. It should be noted that the "RS transmission parameter" herein may refer to an RS resource configuration, or may refer to an RS resource set, or may refer to an RS resource. In other words, the "RS transmission parameter" hereinbelow may be applied to or replaced by "RS resource configuration," "RS resource set," or "RS resource."
更具体的,资源配置信息可以包括至少一个RS资源配置,每个RS资源配置可以包括至少一个RS资源集,每个RS资源集可以包括至少一个RS资源。示例性的,报告配置信息可以包括资源配置信息,例如,报告配置信息可以包括报告配置关联的RS资源配置。或者,资源配置信息也可以不包含于报告配置信息中,本实施例对此不作限制。More specifically, the resource configuration information may include at least one RS resource configuration, each RS resource configuration may include at least one RS resource set, and each RS resource set may include at least one RS resource. Exemplarily, the report configuration information may include resource configuration information, for example, the report configuration information may include an RS resource configuration associated with the report configuration. Alternatively, the resource configuration information may not be included in the report configuration information, and this embodiment does not limit this.
或者,资源配置信息可以包括至少一个RS资源集,也即,资源配置信息用于配置至少一个RS资源集。例如,资源配置信息可以包括一个RS资源集列表。Alternatively, the resource configuration information may include at least one RS resource set, that is, the resource configuration information is used to configure at least one RS resource set. For example, the resource configuration information may include an RS resource set list.
或者,资源配置信息可以包括至少一个RS资源,也即,资源配置信息可以用于配置至少一个RS资源。例如,资源配置信息可以包括一个RS资源列表。Alternatively, the resource configuration information may include at least one RS resource, that is, the resource configuration information may be used to configure at least one RS resource. For example, the resource configuration information may include an RS resource list.
本申请实施例的方案中,RS传输参数可以与切换事件关联。其中,RS传输参数和切换事件之间的关联关系,可以理解为,对于一个切换事件,终端设备使用该切换事件关联的RS传输参数进行测量,以检测该切换事件。例如,“RS传输参数”可以是指RS资源配置,则终端设备使用切换事件关联的RS资源配置中的RS资源检测该切换事件。又例如,“RS传输参数”可以是指RS资源集,则终端设备使用切换事件关联的RS资源集中的RS资源检测该切换事件。再例如,“RS传输参数”可以是指RS资源,则终端设备使用切换事件关联的RS资源检测该切换事件。In the solution of the embodiment of the present application, the RS transmission parameter can be associated with the switching event. The association relationship between the RS transmission parameter and the switching event can be understood as follows: for a switching event, the terminal device uses the RS transmission parameter associated with the switching event to perform measurement to detect the switching event. For example, "RS transmission parameter" can refer to RS resource configuration, and the terminal device uses the RS resources in the RS resource configuration associated with the switching event to detect the switching event. For another example, "RS transmission parameter" can refer to an RS resource set, and the terminal device uses the RS resources in the RS resource set associated with the switching event to detect the switching event. For another example, "RS transmission parameter" can refer to RS resources, and the terminal device uses the RS resources associated with the switching event to detect the switching event.
本申请实施例的方案中,一个RS传输参数可以关联一个或多个切换事件。例如,不同RS传输参数可以关联不同的切换事件。或者,多个RS传输参数可以关联一个切换事件。其中,关联同一个切换事件的多个RS传输参数可以用于在不同情况下检测切换事件,例如,可以用于不同时间检测切换事件。或者,关联同一个切换事件的多个RS传输参数可以用于测量不同波束的波束质量。通过将切换事件与RS传输参数进行关联,使得终端设备可以获知用于检测切换事件的RS资源。In the solution of the embodiment of the present application, one RS transmission parameter can be associated with one or more switching events. For example, different RS transmission parameters can be associated with different switching events. Alternatively, multiple RS transmission parameters can be associated with one switching event. Among them, multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the same switching event can be used to detect switching events in different situations, for example, they can be used to detect switching events at different times. Alternatively, multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the same switching event can be used to measure the beam quality of different beams. By associating the switching event with the RS transmission parameter, the terminal device can be informed of the RS resources used to detect the switching event.
假设网络设备配置了m’个RS传输参数和n’个切换事件,可以有以下几种情况,但不限于此,其中,m’和n’均为正整数:Assuming that a network device is configured with m' RS transmission parameters and n' switching events, the following situations may occur, but are not limited to these, where m' and n' are both positive integers:
在一种情况下,m’=1,n’≥1。在这种情况下,该RS传输参数可以关联n’个切换事件。终端设备使用该RS传输参数进行测量,以检测n个切换事件。In one case, m'=1, n'≥1. In this case, the RS transmission parameter can be associated with n' handover events. The terminal device uses the RS transmission parameter to perform measurements to detect n handover events.
在另一种情况下,m’>1,n’=1。在这种情况下,m’个RS传输参数关联该切换事件。其中,不同RS传输参数可以用于在不同情况下的测量,以检测该切换事件。In another case, m'>1, n'=1. In this case, m' RS transmission parameters are associated with the handover event. Different RS transmission parameters can be used for measurements in different situations to detect the handover event.
在又一种情况下,m’>1,n’>1。在一个例子中,m’个RS传输参数中的每个RS传输参数可以均与n’个切换事件关联。在另一个例子中,m’个RS传输参数中不同的RS传输参数分别关联n’个切换事件中不同的切换事件。In another case, m'>1, n'>1. In one example, each of the m' RS transmission parameters can be associated with n' switching events. In another example, different RS transmission parameters in the m' RS transmission parameters are respectively associated with different switching events in the n' switching events.
假设m’个RS传输参数为RS传输参数1和RS传输参数2,n’个切换事件为切换事件1、切换事件2、切换事件3和切换事件4。在例子3中,RS传输参数1关联切换事件1、切换事件2、切换事件3和切换事件4,RS传输参数2关联切换事件1、切换事件2、切换事件3和切换事件4。在例子4中,RS传输参数1关联切换事件1和切换事件2,RS传输参数2关联切换事件3和切换事件4。Assume that the m' RS transmission parameters are RS transmission parameter 1 and RS transmission parameter 2, and the n' handover events are handover event 1, handover event 2, handover event 3, and handover event 4. In Example 3, RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with handover event 1, handover event 2, handover event 3, and handover event 4, and RS transmission parameter 2 is associated with handover event 1, handover event 2, handover event 3, and handover event 4. In Example 4, RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with handover event 1 and handover event 2, and RS transmission parameter 2 is associated with handover event 3 and handover event 4.
下面对RS传输参数和切换事件关联的方式进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of how RS transmission parameters are associated with handover events.
示例a:资源配置信息和第一配置信息关联,且资源配置信息中的RS传输参数和第一配置信息中的切换事件按照默认规则关联。Example a: The resource configuration information is associated with the first configuration information, and the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the switching event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
具体的,网络设备可以向终端设备分别发送资源配置信息和第一配置信息。资源配置信息和第一配置信息之间无包含关系,但是具有关联关系。资源配置信息和第一配置信息关联的方式包括但不限于以下几种:资源配置信息可以包括第一配置信息的标识,或者,第一配置信息可以包括资源配置信息的标识,或者,网络设备通过信令指示资源配置信息和第一配置信息之间的关联关系。Specifically, the network device may send resource configuration information and first configuration information separately to the terminal device. The resource configuration information and the first configuration information do not contain each other, but are associated with each other. Methods for associating the resource configuration information and the first configuration information include, but are not limited to, the following: the resource configuration information may include an identifier of the first configuration information, or the first configuration information may include an identifier of the resource configuration information, or the network device may indicate the association between the resource configuration information and the first configuration information through signaling.
进一步地,资源配置信息中的RS传输参数和第一配置信息中的切换事件按照默认规则关联。例如,RS传输参数和切换事件可以按照标识顺序依次关联。例如,标识为1的RS传输参数和标识为1的切换事件关联,标识为2的RS传输参数和标识为2的切换事件关联。Furthermore, the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the handover event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule. For example, the RS transmission parameters and the handover events may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identification. For example, the RS transmission parameters identified as 1 are associated with the handover event identified as 1, and the RS transmission parameters identified as 2 are associated with the handover event identified as 2.
示例b:资源配置信息中的RS传输参数可以包括RS传输参数关联的切换事件的信息。Example b: The RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include information about a switching event associated with the RS transmission parameters.
具体的,资源配置信息可以包括第一配置信息,其中,资源配置信息中的一个或多个RS传输参数可以包括各自关联的切换事件的信息。例如,RS传输参数1包括切换事件1的标识,则表示RS传输参数1与切换事件1关联。又例如,RS传输参数1包括切换事件1和切换事件2的标识,则表示RS传输参数1与切换事件1、切换事件2关联。Specifically, the resource configuration information may include first configuration information, wherein one or more RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include information of respective associated switching events. For example, if RS transmission parameter 1 includes an identifier of switching event 1, it indicates that RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with switching event 1. For another example, if RS transmission parameter 1 includes identifiers of switching event 1 and switching event 2, it indicates that RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with switching event 1 and switching event 2.
示例c:第一配置信息中切换事件的信息可以包括该切换事件关联的RS传输参数,或者,第一配置信息中切换事件的信息可以包括用于指示该切换事件关联的RS传输参数的信息。其中,用于指示RS传输参数的信息可以是RS传输参数的标识。Example c: The information about the handover event in the first configuration information may include RS transmission parameters associated with the handover event, or the information about the handover event in the first configuration information may include information indicating the RS transmission parameters associated with the handover event. The information indicating the RS transmission parameters may be an identifier of the RS transmission parameters.
例如,切换事件1包括RS传输参数1的标识,则表示切换事件1与RS传输参数1关联。For example, handover event 1 includes the identifier of RS transmission parameter 1, which means that handover event 1 is associated with RS transmission parameter 1.
在具体实施中,网络设备可以向终端设备发送小区配置信息,小区配置信息可以用于配置至少一个小区。具体的,小区配置信息可以包括至少一个小区的小区信息。其中,小区配置信息所配置的小区可以为终端设备提供波束。示例性的,小区信息可以包括小区标识、小区配置等。In a specific implementation, a network device may send cell configuration information to a terminal device. The cell configuration information may be used to configure at least one cell. Specifically, the cell configuration information may include cell information of at least one cell. The cell configured by the cell configuration information may provide a beam for the terminal device. Exemplarily, the cell information may include a cell identifier, cell configuration, and the like.
进一步地,小区可以与切换事件关联。小区和切换事件之间的关联关系,可以理解为,对于一个小区或者小区提供的波束,终端设备可以检测该小区关联的切换事件。例如,当前小区为小区1或者当前波束为小区1的波束,小区1关联切换事件1,则终端设备可以检测切换事件1,但并不检测小区1未关联的切换事件。Furthermore, cells can be associated with handover events. The association between cells and handover events can be understood as follows: for a cell or beam provided by a cell, a terminal device can detect handover events associated with that cell. For example, if the current cell is cell 1 or the current beam is the beam of cell 1, and cell 1 is associated with handover event 1, the terminal device can detect handover event 1, but will not detect handover events not associated with cell 1.
本申请实施例的方案中,一个小区可以关联一个或多个切换事件。例如,不同小区可以关联不同的切换事件。或者,多个小区可以关联一个切换事件。In the embodiments of the present application, a cell may be associated with one or more handover events. For example, different cells may be associated with different handover events. Alternatively, multiple cells may be associated with one handover event.
下面对小区和切换事件关联的方式进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of the manner in which cells and handover events are associated.
示例a’:小区配置信息和第一配置信息关联,且小区配置信息中的小区和第一配置信息中的切换事件按照默认规则关联。Example a': The cell configuration information is associated with the first configuration information, and the cell in the cell configuration information and the switching event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
具体的,网络设备可以向终端设备分别发送小区配置信息和第一配置信息。小区配置信息和第一配置信息之间无包含关系,但是具有关联关系。小区配置信息和第一配置信息关联的方式包括但不限于以下几种:小区配置信息可以包括第一配置信息的标识,或者,第一配置信息可以包括小区配置信息的标识,或者,网络设备通过信令指示小区配置信息和第一配置信息之间的关联关系。Specifically, the network device may send the cell configuration information and the first configuration information to the terminal device separately. The cell configuration information and the first configuration information do not have an inclusion relationship, but are associated with each other. The manner in which the cell configuration information and the first configuration information are associated includes, but is not limited to, the following: the cell configuration information may include an identifier of the first configuration information, or the first configuration information may include an identifier of the cell configuration information, or the network device indicates the association relationship between the cell configuration information and the first configuration information through signaling.
进一步地,小区配置信息中的小区和第一配置信息中的切换事件按照默认规则关联。例如,小区和切换事件可以按照标识顺序依次关联。例如,标识为1的小区和标识为1的切换事件关联,标识为2的小区和标识为2的切换事件关联。Furthermore, the cells in the cell configuration information and the handover events in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule. For example, the cells and handover events may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identifiers. For example, the cell identified as 1 is associated with the handover event identified as 1, and the cell identified as 2 is associated with the handover event identified as 2.
示例b’:小区配置信息中的小区信息可以包括小区关联的切换事件的信息。Example b': The cell information in the cell configuration information may include information about a handover event associated with the cell.
具体的,小区配置信息可以包括第一配置信息,其中,小区配置信息中的一个或多个小区的小区信息可以包括各自关联的切换事件的信息。例如,小区1的小区信息包括切换事件1的标识,则表示小区1与切换事件1关联。Specifically, the cell configuration information may include first configuration information, wherein the cell information of one or more cells in the cell configuration information may include information of respective associated handover events. For example, if the cell information of cell 1 includes an identifier of handover event 1, it indicates that cell 1 is associated with handover event 1.
示例c’:第一配置信息中切换事件的信息可以包括切换事件关联的小区的小区信息。Example c’: The information about the handover event in the first configuration information may include cell information of the cell associated with the handover event.
具体的,第一配置信息中的一个或多个切换事件的信息可以包括各自关联的小区信息。例如,切换事件1的信息包括小区1的标识,则表示切换事件1与小区1关联。又例如,切换事件的信息1包括小区1的配置,则表示切换事件1与小区1关联。Specifically, the information of one or more handover events in the first configuration information may include information of the cells associated with each. For example, if the information of handover event 1 includes the identifier of cell 1, it means that handover event 1 is associated with cell 1. For another example, if the information of handover event 1 includes the configuration of cell 1, it means that handover event 1 is associated with cell 1.
在具体实施中,网络设备可以向终端设备发送小区组配置信息,小区组配置信息可以用于配置至少一个小区组。每个小区组可以包括一个或多个小区。具体的,小区组配置信息可以包括至少一个小区组信息。其中,小区组配置信息所配置的小区组中的小区可以为终端设备提供波束。小区组信息可以包括小区组的标识、小区组的配置等,本实施例并不作限制。In a specific implementation, the network device may send cell group configuration information to the terminal device. The cell group configuration information may be used to configure at least one cell group. Each cell group may include one or more cells. Specifically, the cell group configuration information may include at least one cell group information. The cells in the cell group configured by the cell group configuration information may provide beams for the terminal device. The cell group information may include a cell group identifier, cell group configuration, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment.
进一步地,小区组可以与切换事件关联。小区组和切换事件之间的关联关系,可以理解为,对于一个小区组或者小区组内的小区或者小区组内小区提供的波束,终端设备可以检测该小区组关联的切换事件。例如,当前小区属于小区组1,小区组1关联切换事件1,则终端设备可以检测切换事件1,但并不检测小区组1未关联的切换事件。Furthermore, cell groups can be associated with handover events. The association between cell groups and handover events can be understood as follows: for a cell group, a cell within a cell group, or a beam provided by a cell within a cell group, a terminal device can detect handover events associated with that cell group. For example, if the current cell belongs to cell group 1, and cell group 1 is associated with handover event 1, the terminal device can detect handover event 1, but will not detect handover events not associated with cell group 1.
本申请实施例的方案中,一个小区组可以关联一个或多个切换事件。例如,不同小区组关联的切换事件可以不同。或者,多个小区组可以关联一个切换事件。In the embodiments of the present application, a cell group may be associated with one or more handover events. For example, different cell groups may be associated with different handover events. Alternatively, multiple cell groups may be associated with one handover event.
下面对小区组和切换事件关联的方式进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of how cell groups and handover events are associated.
示例a”:小区组配置信息和第一配置信息关联,且小区组配置信息中的小区组和第一配置信息中的切换事件按照默认规则关联。Example a": the cell group configuration information is associated with the first configuration information, and the cell group in the cell group configuration information and the switching event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
具体的,网络设备可以向终端设备分别发送小区组配置信息和第一配置信息。小区组配置信息和第一配置信息之间无包含关系,但是具有关联关系。小区组配置信息和第一配置信息关联的方式包括但不限于以下几种:小区组配置信息可以包括第一配置信息的标识,或者,第一配置信息可以包括小区组配置信息的标识,或者,网络设备通过信令指示小区组配置信息和第一配置信息之间的关联关系。Specifically, the network device may send the cell group configuration information and the first configuration information to the terminal device separately. There is no inclusion relationship between the cell group configuration information and the first configuration information, but there is an association relationship. The manner in which the cell group configuration information and the first configuration information are associated includes but is not limited to the following: the cell group configuration information may include an identifier of the first configuration information, or the first configuration information may include an identifier of the cell group configuration information, or the network device indicates the association relationship between the cell group configuration information and the first configuration information through signaling.
进一步地,小区组配置信息中的小区组和第一配置信息中的切换事件按照默认规则关联。例如,小区组和切换事件可以按照标识顺序依次关联。例如,标识为1的小区组和标识为1的切换事件关联,标识为2的小区组和标识为2的切换事件关联。Furthermore, the cell group in the cell group configuration information and the handover event in the first configuration information are associated according to a default rule. For example, the cell group and the handover event may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identification. For example, the cell group identified as 1 is associated with the handover event identified as 1, and the cell group identified as 2 is associated with the handover event identified as 2.
示例b”:小区组配置信息中小区组的配置可以包括小区组关联的切换事件的信息。Example b": The configuration of the cell group in the cell group configuration information may include information on a handover event associated with the cell group.
具体的,小区组配置信息可以包括第一配置信息,其中,小区组配置信息中的一个或多个小区组的小区组信息可以包括各自关联的切换事件的信息。例如,小区组1的配置包括切换事件1的标识,则表示小区组1与切换事件1关联。Specifically, the cell group configuration information may include first configuration information, wherein the cell group information of one or more cell groups in the cell group configuration information may include information of respective associated handover events. For example, if the configuration of cell group 1 includes an identifier of handover event 1, it indicates that cell group 1 is associated with handover event 1.
示例c”:第一配置信息中切换事件的信息可以包括切换事件关联的小区组的小区组信息。Example c": The information about the handover event in the first configuration information may include cell group information of the cell group associated with the handover event.
具体的,第一配置信息中的一个或多个切换事件的信息可以包括各自关联的小区组的小区组信息。例如,切换事件1的信息包括小区组1的标识,则表示切换事件1与小区组1关联。Specifically, the information of one or more handover events in the first configuration information may include cell group information of the respective associated cell groups. For example, the information of handover event 1 includes the identifier of cell group 1, indicating that handover event 1 is associated with cell group 1.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中的“关联”也可以理解或表述为“对应”或者“相关”。类似的,本申请实施例中的“对应”也可以理解或表述为关联。It should be noted that, in the embodiments of the present application, “association” can also be understood or expressed as “correspondence” or “correlation.” Similarly, in the embodiments of the present application, “correspondence” can also be understood or expressed as association.
由上,实施例二的方案中,网络设备向终端设备配置切换事件,切换事件可以与以下至少一项相关联:报告配置、RS资源配置、RS资源集、RS资源、小区、小区组等。From the above, in the solution of embodiment 2, the network device configures a switching event to the terminal device, and the switching event can be associated with at least one of the following: report configuration, RS resource configuration, RS resource set, RS resource, cell, cell group, etc.
关于实施例二的更多内容可以参照本文关于其他实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For more details about the second embodiment, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments in this document, which will not be repeated here.
实施例三Example 3
参照图3,图3是本申请实施例中第三种通信方法的信令交互示意图。图3示出的通信方法可以包括S31和/或S32。3, which is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction of a third communication method in an embodiment of the present application, the communication method shown in FIG3 may include S31 and/or S32.
S31,网络设备向终端设备发送报告配置信息。对应的,终端设备接收报告配置信息。S31: The network device sends report configuration information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the report configuration information.
具体的,报告配置信息可以包括至少一个报告配置。Specifically, the report configuration information may include at least one report configuration.
在一种可能的实现方式中,报告配置可以与波束关联。其中,报告配置和波束之间的关联关系,可以理解为,对于一个波束,若该波束满足切换事件(如确定该波束为待切换波束或者确定该波束为新波束),则可以基于该波束关联的报告配置来发送第一信息。In one possible implementation, a report configuration may be associated with a beam. The association between the report configuration and the beam may be understood as follows: for a beam, if the beam satisfies a switching event (e.g., determining that the beam is a beam to be switched or determining that the beam is a new beam), the first information may be sent based on the report configuration associated with the beam.
本申请实施例的方案中,一个报告配置可以关联一个或多个波束。示例性的,报告配置信息可以包括至少两个报告配置,其中,至少两个报告配置中的一个报告配置关联当前波束,至少两个报告配置中的另一个报告配置关联备选波束,若当前波束中一个或多个波束被确定为待切换波束,则终端设备可以基于当前波束关联的报告配置发送第一信息,若备选波束中一个或多个波束被确定为新波束,则终端设备可以基于备选波束关联的报告配置发送第一信息。In the solution of the embodiment of the present application, a report configuration can be associated with one or more beams. Exemplarily, the report configuration information may include at least two report configurations, wherein one of the at least two report configurations is associated with the current beam, and another of the at least two report configurations is associated with the alternative beam. If one or more beams in the current beam are determined as beams to be switched, the terminal device may send first information based on the report configuration associated with the current beam; if one or more beams in the alternative beam are determined as new beams, the terminal device may send first information based on the report configuration associated with the alternative beam.
或者,一个报告配置关联当前波束和备选波束,若当前波束中一个或多个波束被确定为待切换波束,和/或,若备选波束中一个或多个波束被确定为新波束,则终端设备可以基于该报告配置发送第一信息。Alternatively, a reporting configuration associates the current beam and the alternative beam. If one or more beams in the current beam are determined as beams to be switched, and/or if one or more beams in the alternative beam are determined as new beams, the terminal device can send first information based on the reporting configuration.
或者,多个报告配置可以关联一个波束。示例性的,一个波束可以关联至少两个报告配置,至少两个报告配置中的一个用于在该波束被确定为待切换波束的情况下发送第一信息,至少两个报告配置中的另一个用于在该波束被确定为新波束的情况下发送第一信息。例如,波束1分别和报告配置1、报告配置2关联,若终端设备确定波束1为待切换波束,则终端设备可以基于报告配置1发送第一信息,若终端设备确定波束1为新波束,则终端设备可以基于报告配置2发送第一信息。Alternatively, multiple reporting configurations can be associated with one beam. Exemplarily, one beam can be associated with at least two reporting configurations, one of the at least two reporting configurations is used to send the first information when the beam is determined to be a beam to be switched, and the other of the at least two reporting configurations is used to send the first information when the beam is determined to be a new beam. For example, beam 1 is associated with reporting configuration 1 and reporting configuration 2, respectively. If the terminal device determines that beam 1 is a beam to be switched, the terminal device can send the first information based on reporting configuration 1. If the terminal device determines that beam 1 is a new beam, the terminal device can send the first information based on reporting configuration 2.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,报告配置和波束之间的关联关系可以理解为报告配置和RS资源之间的关联关系。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the association relationship between the report configuration and the beam can be understood as the association relationship between the report configuration and the RS resource.
下面对报告配置和波束关联的方式进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of how the reporting configuration and beam association are performed.
示例性的:报告配置信息和波束配置信息关联,且报告配置信息中的报告配置和波束配置信息中的波束按照默认规则关联。Exemplary: the report configuration information is associated with the beam configuration information, and the report configuration in the report configuration information and the beam in the beam configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
具体的,网络设备可以向终端设备分别发送报告配置信息和波束配置信息。波束配置信息可以包括一个或多个波束的波束信息。报告配置信息和波束配置信息之间无包含关系,但是具有关联关系。报告配置信息和波束配置信息关联的方式包括但不限于以下几种:报告配置信息可以包括波束配置信息的标识,或者,波束配置信息可以包括报告配置信息的标识,或者,网络设备通过信令指示报告配置信息和波束配置信息之间的关联关系。Specifically, the network device may send report configuration information and beam configuration information to the terminal device respectively. The beam configuration information may include beam information of one or more beams. There is no inclusion relationship between the report configuration information and the beam configuration information, but there is an association relationship. The ways of associating the report configuration information and the beam configuration information include but are not limited to the following: the report configuration information may include an identifier of the beam configuration information, or the beam configuration information may include an identifier of the report configuration information, or the network device indicates the association relationship between the report configuration information and the beam configuration information through signaling.
进一步地,报告配置信息中的报告配置和波束配置信息中的波束可以按照默认规则关联。例如,报告配置和波束可以按照标识顺序依次关联。Furthermore, the report configuration in the report configuration information and the beam in the beam configuration information may be associated according to a default rule. For example, the report configuration and the beam may be associated in sequence according to the order of identification.
再示例性的:报告配置信息中的报告配置可以包括报告配置关联的波束信息。Another example: the report configuration in the report configuration information may include beam information associated with the report configuration.
具体的,报告配置信息可以包括波束配置信息,其中,报告配置信息中的一个或多个报告配置可以包括各自关联的波束信息。例如,报告配置1包括波束1的标识,则表示报告配置1与波束1关联。Specifically, the report configuration information may include beam configuration information, wherein one or more report configurations in the report configuration information may include respective associated beam information. For example, if report configuration 1 includes an identifier of beam 1, it means that report configuration 1 is associated with beam 1.
又示例性的:波束配置信息中的波束信息可以包括波束关联的报告配置。Another example: the beam information in the beam configuration information may include a beam-associated reporting configuration.
具体的,波束配置信息中一个或多个波束的波束信息可以包括各自关联的报告配置。例如,波束1的信息包括报告配置1的标识,则表示波束1与报告配置1关联。Specifically, the beam information of one or more beams in the beam configuration information may include the respective associated reporting configurations. For example, if the information of beam 1 includes the identifier of reporting configuration 1, it means that beam 1 is associated with reporting configuration 1.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,报告配置可以与小区关联。其中,报告配置和小区之间的关联关系,可以理解为,对于一个小区而言,该小区的波束质量和/或该小区内波束的波束质量可以承载于该小区关联的报告配置对应的第一信息中。In another possible implementation, the reporting configuration may be associated with a cell. The association between the reporting configuration and the cell may be understood as follows: for a cell, the beam quality of the cell and/or the beam quality of a beam within the cell may be carried in the first information corresponding to the reporting configuration associated with the cell.
本申请实施例的方案中,一个报告配置可以关联一个或多个小区。或者,多个报告配置可以关联一个小区。示例性的,在小区间的波束切换的场景下,一个小区可以关联至少两个报告配置,至少两个报告配置中的一个报告配置可以用于在该小区的波束被确定为待切换波束的情况下发送第一信息,至少两个报告配置中的另一个报告配置可以用于在该小区的波束被确定为新波束的情况下发送第一信息。或者,一个小区(例如,该小区为当前小区)可以关联至少两个报告配置,至少两个报告配置中的一个报告配置可以用于在该小区的波束被确定为待切换波束的情况下发送第一信息,至少两个报告配置中的另一个报告配置可以用于在该小区的邻区的波束被确定为新波束的情况下发送第一信息。In the solution of the embodiment of the present application, one reporting configuration can be associated with one or more cells. Alternatively, multiple reporting configurations can be associated with one cell. Exemplarily, in the scenario of beam switching between cells, one cell can be associated with at least two reporting configurations, one of the at least two reporting configurations can be used to send the first information when the beam of the cell is determined to be a beam to be switched, and the other of the at least two reporting configurations can be used to send the first information when the beam of the cell is determined to be a new beam. Alternatively, one cell (for example, the cell is the current cell) can be associated with at least two reporting configurations, one of the at least two reporting configurations can be used to send the first information when the beam of the cell is determined to be a beam to be switched, and the other of the at least two reporting configurations can be used to send the first information when the beam of the neighboring cell of the cell is determined to be a new beam.
下面对报告配置和小区关联的方式进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of how the reporting configuration is associated with the cell.
示例性的:报告配置信息和小区配置信息关联,且报告配置信息中的报告配置和小区配置信息所配置的小区按照默认规则关联。Exemplarily: the report configuration information is associated with the cell configuration information, and the report configuration in the report configuration information and the cell configured by the cell configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
具体的,网络设备可以向终端设备分别发送报告配置信息和小区配置信息。报告配置信息和小区配置信息之间无包含关系,但是具有关联关系。报告配置信息和小区配置信息关联的方式包括但不限于以下几种:报告配置信息可以包括小区配置信息的标识,或者,小区配置信息可以包括报告配置信息的标识,或者,网络设备通过信令指示报告配置信息和小区配置信息之间的关联关系。Specifically, the network device may send report configuration information and cell configuration information to the terminal device separately. The report configuration information and the cell configuration information do not contain each other, but are associated with each other. The manner in which the report configuration information and the cell configuration information are associated includes, but is not limited to, the following: the report configuration information may include an identifier of the cell configuration information, or the cell configuration information may include an identifier of the report configuration information, or the network device indicates the association between the report configuration information and the cell configuration information through signaling.
进一步地,报告配置信息中的报告配置和小区配置信息中的小区信息可以按照默认规则关联。例如,报告配置和小区可以按照标识顺序依次关联。例如,标识为1的报告配置和标识为1的小区关联。Furthermore, the report configuration in the report configuration information and the cell information in the cell configuration information may be associated according to a default rule. For example, the report configuration and the cell may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identifiers. For example, the report configuration identified as 1 is associated with the cell identified as 1.
再示例性的:报告配置信息中的报告配置可以包括报告配置关联的小区信息。As another example: the report configuration in the report configuration information may include cell information associated with the report configuration.
具体的,报告配置信息可以包括小区配置信息,其中,报告配置信息中的一个或多个报告配置可以包括各自关联的小区信息。例如,报告配置1包括小区1的标识,则表示报告配置1与小区1关联。Specifically, the report configuration information may include cell configuration information, wherein one or more report configurations in the report configuration information may include information of respective associated cells. For example, if report configuration 1 includes an identifier of cell 1, it means that report configuration 1 is associated with cell 1.
又示例性的:小区配置信息中的小区信息可以包括小区关联的报告配置。As another example, the cell information in the cell configuration information may include a cell-associated report configuration.
具体的,小区配置信息中一个或多个小区的小区信息可以包括各自关联的报告配置。例如,小区1的信息包括报告配置1的标识,则表示小区1与报告配置1关联。Specifically, the cell information of one or more cells in the cell configuration information may include the reporting configurations associated with each cell. For example, if the information of cell 1 includes the identifier of reporting configuration 1, it means that cell 1 is associated with reporting configuration 1.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,报告配置可以与小区组关联。其中,报告配置和小区组之间的关联关系,可以理解为,对于一个小区组而言,该小区组的波束质量、小区组中小区的波束质量以及小区组中小区内波束的波束质量中的一项或多项可以承载于该小区组关联的报告配置对应的第一信息中。In another possible implementation, a reporting configuration may be associated with a cell group. The association between the reporting configuration and the cell group may be understood as follows: for a cell group, one or more of the following: the beam quality of the cell group, the beam quality of cells in the cell group, and the beam quality of beams within cells in the cell group may be included in the first information corresponding to the reporting configuration associated with the cell group.
本申请实施例的方案中,一个报告配置可以关联一个或多个小区组。或者,多个报告配置可以关联一个小区组。In the solution of the embodiment of the present application, one reporting configuration may be associated with one or more cell groups, or multiple reporting configurations may be associated with one cell group.
下面对报告配置和小区组关联的方式进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of how the reporting configuration is associated with the cell group.
示例性的:报告配置信息和小区组配置信息关联,且报告配置信息中的报告配置和小区组配置信息所配置的小区组按照默认规则关联。Exemplary: the report configuration information is associated with the cell group configuration information, and the report configuration in the report configuration information and the cell group configured by the cell group configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
具体的,网络设备可以向终端设备分别发送报告配置信息和小区组配置信息。报告配置信息和小区组配置信息之间无包含关系,但是具有关联关系。报告配置信息和小区组配置信息关联的方式包括但不限于以下几种:报告配置信息可以包括小区组配置信息的标识,或者,小区组配置信息可以包括报告配置信息的标识,或者,网络设备通过信令指示报告配置信息和小区组配置信息之间的关联关系。Specifically, the network device may send report configuration information and cell group configuration information to the terminal device separately. There is no inclusion relationship between the report configuration information and the cell group configuration information, but there is an association relationship. The manner in which the report configuration information and the cell group configuration information are associated includes but is not limited to the following: the report configuration information may include an identifier of the cell group configuration information, or the cell group configuration information may include an identifier of the report configuration information, or the network device indicates the association relationship between the report configuration information and the cell group configuration information through signaling.
进一步地,报告配置信息中的报告配置和小区组配置信息所配置的小区组可以按照默认规则关联。例如,报告配置和小区组可以按照标识顺序依次关联。例如,标识为1的报告配置和标识为1的小区组关联。Furthermore, the report configuration in the report configuration information and the cell group configured by the cell group configuration information may be associated according to a default rule. For example, the report configuration and the cell group may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identifiers. For example, the report configuration identified as 1 is associated with the cell group identified as 1.
又示例性的:报告配置信息中的报告配置可以包括报告配置关联的小区组信息。Another example: the report configuration in the report configuration information may include cell group information associated with the report configuration.
具体的,报告配置信息中的一个或多个报告配置可以包括各自关联的小区组信息。例如,报告配置1包括小区组1的标识,则表示报告配置1与小区组1关联。Specifically, one or more report configurations in the report configuration information may include information of the cell group associated therewith. For example, if report configuration 1 includes an identifier of cell group 1, it means that report configuration 1 is associated with cell group 1.
再示例性的:小区组配置信息中的小区组信息可以包括小区组关联的报告配置。例如,小区组1的信息包括报告配置1的标识,则表示小区组1与报告配置1关联。For example, the cell group information in the cell group configuration information may include a reporting configuration associated with the cell group. For example, if the information of cell group 1 includes an identifier of reporting configuration 1, it means that cell group 1 is associated with reporting configuration 1.
S32,网络设备向终端设备发送资源配置信息。对应的,终端设备接收资源配置信息。S32: The network device sends resource configuration information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the resource configuration information.
具体的,资源配置信息可以包括至少一个RS传输参数。Specifically, the resource configuration information may include at least one RS transmission parameter.
在一种可能的实现方式中,RS传输参数可以与波束关联。其中,RS传输参数和波束之间的关联关系,可以理解为,对于一个波束,终端设备使用该波束关联的RS传输参数进行测量,以得到该波束的波束质量。例如,“RS传输参数”可以是指RS资源配置,则终端设备测量波束关联的RS资源配置中的RS资源,得到波束的波束质量。又例如,“RS传输参数”可以是指RS资源集,则终端设备使用波束关联的RS资源集中的RS资源进行测量,得到波束的波束质量。再例如,“RS传输参数”可以是指RS资源,则终端设备使用波束关联的RS资源进行测量,得到波束的波束质量。In one possible implementation, RS transmission parameters may be associated with beams. The association relationship between RS transmission parameters and beams may be understood as follows: for a beam, the terminal device uses the RS transmission parameters associated with the beam to perform measurements to obtain the beam quality of the beam. For example, "RS transmission parameters" may refer to RS resource configurations, and the terminal device measures the RS resources in the RS resource configuration associated with the beam to obtain the beam quality of the beam. For another example, "RS transmission parameters" may refer to RS resource sets, and the terminal device uses the RS resources in the RS resource sets associated with the beam to perform measurements to obtain the beam quality of the beam. For another example, "RS transmission parameters" may refer to RS resources, and the terminal device uses the RS resources associated with the beam to perform measurements to obtain the beam quality of the beam.
本申请实施例的方案中,一个RS传输参数可以关联一个或多个波束,或者,多个RS传输参数可以关联一个波束。其中,关联同一个波束的多个RS传输参数可以用于在不同情况下确定该波束的波束质量。示例性的,对于一个波束而言,该波束关联的多个RS传输参数中的一个RS传输参数用于该波束为当前波束时波束质量的测量,该波束关联的多个RS传输参数中的另一个RS传输参数用于该波束为备选波束时波束质量的测量。In the embodiments of the present application, one RS transmission parameter can be associated with one or more beams, or multiple RS transmission parameters can be associated with one beam. Multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the same beam can be used to determine the beam quality of the beam in different situations. For example, for a beam, one of the multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the beam is used to measure the beam quality when the beam is the current beam, and another of the multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the beam is used to measure the beam quality when the beam is an alternative beam.
下面对RS传输参数和波束关联的方式进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of how RS transmission parameters and beams are associated.
示例性的,资源配置信息和波束配置信息关联,且资源配置信息中的RS传输参数和波束配置信息中的波束按照默认规则关联。Exemplarily, the resource configuration information is associated with the beam configuration information, and the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the beam in the beam configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
具体的,网络设备可以向终端设备分别发送资源配置信息和波束配置信息。资源配置信息和波束配置信息之间无包含关系,但是具有关联关系。资源配置信息和波束配置信息关联的方式包括但不限于以下几种:资源配置信息可以包括波束配置信息的标识,或者,波束配置信息可以包括资源配置信息的标识,或者,网络设备通过信令指示资源配置信息和波束配置信息之间的关联关系。Specifically, the network device may send resource configuration information and beam configuration information to the terminal device separately. The resource configuration information and beam configuration information do not contain each other, but are associated with each other. The ways in which the resource configuration information and beam configuration information are associated include, but are not limited to, the following: the resource configuration information may include an identifier of the beam configuration information, or the beam configuration information may include an identifier of the resource configuration information, or the network device may indicate the association between the resource configuration information and the beam configuration information through signaling.
进一步地,资源配置信息中的RS传输参数和波束配置信息中的波束可以按照默认规则关联。例如,RS传输参数和波束可以按照标识顺序依次关联。例如,标识为1的RS传输参数和标识为1的波束关联,标识为2的RS传输参数和标识为2的波束关联。Furthermore, the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the beams in the beam configuration information may be associated according to a default rule. For example, the RS transmission parameters and beams may be associated sequentially in the order of their identification. For example, the RS transmission parameters identified as 1 are associated with the beam identified as 1, and the RS transmission parameters identified as 2 are associated with the beam identified as 2.
又示例性的,资源配置信息中的RS传输参数可以包括RS传输参数关联的波束的波束信息。As another example, the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include beam information of the beam associated with the RS transmission parameters.
具体的,资源配置信息可以包括波束配置信息,其中,资源配置信息中的一个或多个RS传输参数可以包括各自关联的波束信息。例如,RS传输参数1包括波束1的标识,则表示RS传输参数1与波束1关联。Specifically, the resource configuration information may include beam configuration information, wherein one or more RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include respective associated beam information. For example, RS transmission parameter 1 includes an identifier of beam 1, indicating that RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with beam 1.
再示例性的,波束配置信息中的波束信息可以包括波束关联的RS传输参数,或者,波束配置信息中的波束信息可以包括用于指示波束关联的RS传输参数的信息。其中,用于指示RS传输参数的信息可以是RS传输参数的标识。As another example, the beam information in the beam configuration information may include beam-associated RS transmission parameters, or the beam information in the beam configuration information may include information for indicating beam-associated RS transmission parameters. The information for indicating RS transmission parameters may be an identifier of the RS transmission parameters.
例如,波束1的信息包括RS传输参数1的标识,则表示波束1与RS传输参数1关联。For example, the information of beam 1 includes the identifier of RS transmission parameter 1, which means that beam 1 is associated with RS transmission parameter 1.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,RS传输参数可以与小区关联。其中,RS传输参数和小区之间的关联关系,可以理解为,对于一个小区或小区内的波束,终端设备使用该小区关联的RS传输参数进行测量,以得到该小区内波束的波束质量或者得到该小区的波束质量。In another possible implementation, RS transmission parameters may be associated with a cell. The association between RS transmission parameters and cells can be understood as follows: for a cell or a beam within a cell, a terminal device uses the RS transmission parameters associated with the cell to perform measurements to obtain the beam quality of the beam within the cell or the beam quality of the cell.
本申请实施例的方案中,一个RS传输参数可以关联一个或多个小区。示例性的,一个RS资源配置中的多个RS资源集可以分别关联多个小区。或者,多个RS传输参数可以关联一个小区。示例性的,对于一个小区而言,该小区关联的多个RS传输参数中的一个RS传输参数可以用于该小区内的波束为当前波束或者该小区为当前小区时的测量,该小区关联的多个RS传输参数中的另一个RS传输参数可以用于该小区内的波束为备选波束或者该小区为备选小区时的测量。In the solution of the embodiment of the present application, an RS transmission parameter can be associated with one or more cells. Exemplarily, multiple RS resource sets in an RS resource configuration can be associated with multiple cells respectively. Alternatively, multiple RS transmission parameters can be associated with one cell. Exemplarily, for a cell, one RS transmission parameter among the multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the cell can be used for measurement when the beam in the cell is the current beam or the cell is the current cell, and another RS transmission parameter among the multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the cell can be used for measurement when the beam in the cell is an alternative beam or the cell is an alternative cell.
下面对RS传输参数和小区关联的方式进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of the manner in which RS transmission parameters are associated with cells.
示例性的,资源配置信息和小区配置信息关联,且资源配置信息中的RS传输参数和小区配置信息所配置的小区按照默认规则关联。Exemplarily, the resource configuration information is associated with the cell configuration information, and the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information are associated with the cell configured by the cell configuration information according to a default rule.
具体的,网络设备可以向终端设备分别发送资源配置信息和小区配置信息。资源配置信息和小区配置信息之间无包含关系,但是具有关联关系。资源配置信息和小区配置信息关联的方式包括但不限于以下几种:资源配置信息可以包括小区配置信息的标识,或者,小区配置信息可以包括资源配置信息的标识,或者,网络设备通过信令指示资源配置信息和小区配置信息之间的关联关系。Specifically, the network device may send resource configuration information and cell configuration information separately to the terminal device. The resource configuration information and the cell configuration information do not contain each other, but are associated with each other. The ways in which the resource configuration information and the cell configuration information are associated include, but are not limited to, the following: the resource configuration information may include an identifier of the cell configuration information, or the cell configuration information may include an identifier of the resource configuration information, or the network device may indicate the association between the resource configuration information and the cell configuration information through signaling.
进一步地,资源配置信息中的RS传输参数和小区配置信息中的小区可以按照默认规则关联。例如,RS传输参数和小区可以按照标识顺序依次关联。例如,标识为1的RS传输参数和标识为1的小区关联。Furthermore, the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the cells in the cell configuration information may be associated according to a default rule. For example, the RS transmission parameters and cells may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identifications. For example, the RS transmission parameters identified as 1 are associated with the cell identified as 1.
又示例性的,资源配置信息中的RS传输参数可以包括RS传输参数关联的小区信息。As another example, the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include cell information associated with the RS transmission parameters.
具体的,资源配置信息可以包括小区配置信息,其中,资源配置信息中的一个或多个RS传输参数可以包括各自关联的小区信息。例如,RS传输参数1包括小区1的标识,则表示RS传输参数1与小区1关联。Specifically, the resource configuration information may include cell configuration information, wherein one or more RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include information of respective associated cells. For example, RS transmission parameter 1 includes an identifier of cell 1, indicating that RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with cell 1.
再示例性的,小区配置信息中的小区信息可以包括小区关联的RS传输参数,或者,小区配置信息中的小区信息可以包括用于指示小区关联的RS传输参数的信息。其中,用于指示RS传输参数的信息可以是RS传输参数的标识。As another example, the cell information in the cell configuration information may include RS transmission parameters associated with the cell, or the cell information in the cell configuration information may include information indicating RS transmission parameters associated with the cell, wherein the information indicating RS transmission parameters may be an identifier of the RS transmission parameters.
例如,小区1的信息包括RS传输参数1的标识,则表示小区1与RS传输参数1关联。For example, the information of cell 1 includes the identifier of RS transmission parameter 1, which means that cell 1 is associated with RS transmission parameter 1.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,RS传输参数可以与小区组关联。其中,RS传输参数和小区组之间的关联关系,可以理解为,对于一个小区组或小区组中的小区或小区组中小区内的波束,终端设备使用该小区组关联的RS传输参数进行测量,以得到该小区组中小区内波束的波束质量或者得到该小区组中小区的波束质量或者得到该小区组的波束质量。In another possible implementation, RS transmission parameters may be associated with a cell group. The association between RS transmission parameters and cell groups may be understood as follows: for a cell group, a cell within a cell group, or a beam within a cell within a cell group, a terminal device uses the RS transmission parameters associated with the cell group to perform measurements to obtain the beam quality of the beam within the cell within the cell group, the beam quality of the cell within the cell group, or the beam quality of the cell group.
本申请实施例的方案中,一个RS传输参数可以关联一个或多个小区组。示例性的,一个RS资源配置可以关联一个小区组,且该RS资源配置中的多个RS资源集可以分别关联该小区组中的不同小区。In the solution of the embodiment of the present application, an RS transmission parameter can be associated with one or more cell groups. Exemplarily, an RS resource configuration can be associated with a cell group, and multiple RS resource sets in the RS resource configuration can be associated with different cells in the cell group.
或者,多个RS传输参数可以关联一个小区组。示例性的,对于一个小区组而言,该小区组关联的多个RS传输参数中的一个RS传输参数可以用于该小区组内的波束为当前波束或者该小区组内的小区为当前小区时的测量,该小区组关联的多个RS传输参数中的另一个RS传输参数可以用于该小区组内的波束为备选波束或者该小区组内的小区为备选小区时的测量。Alternatively, multiple RS transmission parameters may be associated with a cell group. Exemplarily, for a cell group, one of the multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the cell group may be used for measurement when a beam within the cell group is a current beam or a cell within the cell group is a current cell, and another of the multiple RS transmission parameters associated with the cell group may be used for measurement when a beam within the cell group is a candidate beam or a cell within the cell group is a candidate cell.
下面对RS传输参数和小区组关联的方式进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of how RS transmission parameters are associated with cell groups.
示例性的,资源配置信息和小区组配置信息关联,且资源配置信息中的RS传输参数和小区组配置信息所配置的小区组按照默认规则关联。Exemplarily, the resource configuration information is associated with the cell group configuration information, and the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the cell group configured by the cell group configuration information are associated according to a default rule.
具体的,网络设备可以向终端设备分别发送资源配置信息和小区组配置信息。资源配置信息和小区组配置信息之间无包含关系,但是具有关联关系。资源配置信息和小区组配置信息关联的方式包括但不限于以下几种:资源配置信息可以包括小区组配置信息的标识,或者,小区组配置信息可以包括资源配置信息的标识,或者,网络设备通过信令指示资源配置信息和小区组配置信息之间的关联关系。Specifically, the network device may send resource configuration information and cell group configuration information to the terminal device separately. The resource configuration information and the cell group configuration information do not contain each other, but are associated with each other. The ways in which the resource configuration information and the cell group configuration information are associated include but are not limited to the following: the resource configuration information may include an identifier of the cell group configuration information, or the cell group configuration information may include an identifier of the resource configuration information, or the network device indicates the association between the resource configuration information and the cell group configuration information through signaling.
进一步地,资源配置信息中的RS传输参数和小区组配置信息所配置的小区组可以按照默认规则关联。例如,RS传输参数和小区组可以按照标识顺序依次关联。例如,标识为1的RS传输参数和标识为1的小区组关联。Furthermore, the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information and the cell group configured by the cell group configuration information may be associated according to a default rule. For example, the RS transmission parameters and the cell groups may be associated in sequence according to the order of their identifications. For example, the RS transmission parameters identified as 1 are associated with the cell group identified as 1.
又示例性的,资源配置信息中的RS传输参数可以包括RS传输参数关联的小区组信息。As another example, the RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include cell group information associated with the RS transmission parameters.
具体的,资源配置信息可以包括小区组配置信息,其中,资源配置信息中的一个或多个RS传输参数可以包括各自关联的小区组信息。例如,RS传输参数1包括小区组1的标识,则表示RS传输参数1与小区组1关联。Specifically, the resource configuration information may include cell group configuration information, wherein one or more RS transmission parameters in the resource configuration information may include information of the cell groups associated therewith. For example, RS transmission parameter 1 includes an identifier of cell group 1, indicating that RS transmission parameter 1 is associated with cell group 1.
再示例性的,小区组配置信息中的小区组信息可以包括小区组关联的RS传输参数,或者,小区组配置信息中的小区组信息可以包括用于指示小区组关联的RS传输参数的信息。例如,小区组1的信息包括RS传输参数1的标识,则表示小区组1与RS传输参数1关联。As another example, the cell group information in the cell group configuration information may include RS transmission parameters associated with the cell group, or the cell group information in the cell group configuration information may include information indicating RS transmission parameters associated with the cell group. For example, if the information of cell group 1 includes an identifier of RS transmission parameter 1, it means that cell group 1 is associated with RS transmission parameter 1.
由上,实施例三的方案中,网络设备向终端设备配置报告配置和/或RS传输参数,报告配置和/或RS传输参数可以与以下至少一项相关联:波束、小区、小区组等,以满足不同波束、不同小区、不同小区组的切换事件的测量需求以及上报需求。From the above, in the solution of embodiment three, the network device configures the report configuration and/or RS transmission parameters to the terminal device, and the report configuration and/or RS transmission parameters can be associated with at least one of the following: beam, cell, cell group, etc., to meet the measurement requirements and reporting requirements of switching events of different beams, different cells, and different cell groups.
关于实施例三的更多内容可以参照本文关于其他实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For more details about the third embodiment, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments in this document, which will not be repeated here.
实施例四Example 4
参照图4,图4是本申请实施例中第四种通信方法的信令交互示意图。图4示出的通信方法可以包括S41。4, which is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction in a fourth communication method according to an embodiment of the present application, the communication method shown in FIG4 may include S41.
S41,网络设备向终端设备发送第二配置信息,第二配置信息至少用于配置检测第一事件所需的计数器和/或计时器。S41: The network device sends second configuration information to the terminal device, where the second configuration information is at least used to configure a counter and/or timer required to detect a first event.
需要说明的是,“检测第一事件所需的计数器”可以替换为以下任意一种描述:第一事件对应的计数器、第一报告配置对应的计数器、第一RS资源配置对应的计数器、第一RS资源集对应的计数器、第一RS资源对应的计数器。It should be noted that the "counter required to detect the first event" can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a counter corresponding to the first event, a counter corresponding to the first reporting configuration, a counter corresponding to the first RS resource configuration, a counter corresponding to the first RS resource set, and a counter corresponding to the first RS resource.
对应的,“检测第一事件所需的计时器”可以替换为以下任意一种描述:第一事件对应的计时器、第一报告配置对应的计时器、第一RS资源配置对应的计时器、第一RS资源集对应的计时器、第一RS资源对应的计时器。Correspondingly, "the timer required to detect the first event" can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: the timer corresponding to the first event, the timer corresponding to the first report configuration, the timer corresponding to the first RS resource configuration, the timer corresponding to the first RS resource set, and the timer corresponding to the first RS resource.
其中,第一报告配置是指第一事件关联的报告配置,第一RS资源配置是指第一事件关联的RS资源配置,第一RS资源集是指第一事件关联的RS资源集,第一RS资源是指第一事件关联的RS资源。Among them, the first report configuration refers to the report configuration associated with the first event, the first RS resource configuration refers to the RS resource configuration associated with the first event, the first RS resource set refers to the RS resource set associated with the first event, and the first RS resource refers to the RS resource associated with the first event.
类似的,下文中“条件对应的计数器”可以替换为以下任意一种描述:报告配置对应的计数器、RS资源配置对应的计数器、RS资源集对应的计数器、RS资源对应的计数器。下文中“条件对应的计时器”可以替换为以下任意一种描述:报告配置对应的计时器、RS资源配置对应的计时器、RS资源集对应的计时器、RS资源对应的计时器。其中,此处的报告配置可以是指条件关联的报告配置,此处的RS资源配置可以是指条件关联的RS资源配置,此处的RS资源集可以是指条件关联的RS集配置,此处的RS资源可以是指条件关联的RS资源。Similarly, the "counter corresponding to the condition" in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a counter corresponding to the report configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource set, and a counter corresponding to the RS resource. The "timer corresponding to the condition" in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a timer corresponding to the report configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource set, and a timer corresponding to the RS resource. Among them, the report configuration here may refer to the condition-associated report configuration, the RS resource configuration here may refer to the condition-associated RS resource configuration, the RS resource set here may refer to the condition-associated RS set configuration, and the RS resource here may refer to the condition-associated RS resource.
类似的,下文中的“波束对应的计数器”可以替换为以下任意一种描述:报告配置对应的计数器、RS资源配置对应的计数器、RS资源集对应的计数器、RS资源对应的计数器。下文中“波束对应的计时器”可以替换为以下任意一种描述:报告配置对应的计时器、RS资源配置对应的计时器、RS资源集对应的计时器、RS资源对应的计时器。其中,此处的报告配置可以是指波束关联的报告配置,此处的RS资源配置可以是指波束关联的RS资源配置,此处的RS资源集可以是指波束关联的RS集配置,此处的RS资源可以是指波束关联的RS资源。Similarly, the "counter corresponding to the beam" in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a counter corresponding to the report configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource set, and a counter corresponding to the RS resource. The "timer corresponding to the beam" in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a timer corresponding to the report configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource set, and a timer corresponding to the RS resource. Among them, the report configuration here may refer to the beam-associated report configuration, the RS resource configuration here may refer to the beam-associated RS resource configuration, the RS resource set here may refer to the beam-associated RS set configuration, and the RS resource here may refer to the beam-associated RS resource.
类似的,下文中的“小区对应的计数器”可以替换为以下任意一种描述:报告配置对应的计数器、RS资源配置对应的计数器、RS资源集对应的计数器、RS资源对应的计数器。下文中“小区对应的计时器”可以替换为以下任意一种描述:报告配置对应的计时器、RS资源配置对应的计时器、RS资源集对应的计时器、RS资源对应的计时器。其中,此处的报告配置可以是指小区关联的报告配置,此处的RS资源配置可以是指小区关联的RS资源配置,此处的RS资源集可以是指小区关联的RS集配置,此处的RS资源可以是指小区关联的RS资源。Similarly, the "counter corresponding to the cell" in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a counter corresponding to the report configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource set, and a counter corresponding to the RS resource. The "timer corresponding to the cell" in the following text can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a timer corresponding to the report configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource set, and a timer corresponding to the RS resource. Among them, the report configuration here may refer to the report configuration associated with the cell, the RS resource configuration here may refer to the RS resource configuration associated with the cell, the RS resource set here may refer to the RS set configuration associated with the cell, and the RS resource here may refer to the RS resource associated with the cell.
类似的,下文中的“小区组对应的计数器”可以替换为以下任意一种描述:报告配置对应的计数器、RS资源配置对应的计数器、RS资源集对应的计数器、RS资源对应的计数器。下文中“小区组对应的计时器”可以替换为以下任意一种描述:报告配置对应的计时器、RS资源配置对应的计时器、RS资源集对应的计时器、RS资源对应的计时器。其中,此处的报告配置可以是指小区组关联的报告配置,此处的RS资源配置可以是指小区组关联的RS资源配置,此处的RS资源集可以是指小区组关联的RS集配置,此处的RS资源可以是指小区组关联的RS资源。Similarly, the "counter corresponding to the cell group" below can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a counter corresponding to the report configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a counter corresponding to the RS resource set, and a counter corresponding to the RS resource. The "timer corresponding to the cell group" below can be replaced by any of the following descriptions: a timer corresponding to the report configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource configuration, a timer corresponding to the RS resource set, and a timer corresponding to the RS resource. Among them, the report configuration here may refer to the report configuration associated with the cell group, the RS resource configuration here may refer to the RS resource configuration associated with the cell group, the RS resource set here may refer to the RS set configuration associated with the cell group, and the RS resource here may refer to the RS resource associated with the cell group.
也就是说,下文关于“第一事件”和计数器、计时器之间对应关系的描述、关于条件和计数器、计数器之间对应关系的描述、关于波束和计数器、计时器之间的描述等,均可以理解为:报告配置和计数器、计时器之间的对应关系、RS资源配置和计数器、计时器之间的对应关系、RS资源集和计数器、计时器之间的对应关系、RS资源和计数器、计时器之间的对应关系。That is to say, the following description of the correspondence between the "first event" and counters and timers, the description of the correspondence between conditions and counters and timers, the description of beams and counters and timers, etc. can all be understood as: the correspondence between report configurations and counters and timers, the correspondence between RS resource configurations and counters and timers, the correspondence between RS resource sets and counters and timers, and the correspondence between RS resources and counters and timers.
下面以第一事件为例对终端设备检测切换事件所需的计数器和计时器进行具体说明。在本文描述中,计数器也可以被称之为counter,计时器也可以被称之为timer。The following takes the first event as an example to specifically describe the counter and timer required for the terminal device to detect the handover event. In the description herein, the counter may also be referred to as a counter, and the timer may also be referred to as a timer.
在第一种情况中,第一事件对应的计数器的数量为1个,第一事件对应的计时器的数量为1个。In the first case, the number of counters corresponding to the first event is 1, and the number of timers corresponding to the first event is 1.
在示例1中,第一事件包含的条件的数量为1个。In Example 1, the first event includes one condition.
假设第一事件仅包括条件1,第一事件对应的计数器为counter1,第一事件对应的计时器为timer1。每当条件1被满足或者检测到条件1,counter1的值加1,且timer1重启。每当timer1超时,counter1置零。当counter1的值达到counter1的最大计数值,则确定检测到第一事件。Assume that the first event only includes condition 1. The counter corresponding to the first event is counter1, and the timer corresponding to the first event is timer1. Whenever condition 1 is met or detected, the value of counter1 is incremented by 1, and timer1 is restarted. Whenever timer1 times out, counter1 is reset to zero. When the value of counter1 reaches the maximum count value of counter1, it is determined that the first event has been detected.
在具体实施中,由终端设备的物理层对RS进行测量,并基于测量结果判断第一事件所包含的条件是否满足,如果该条件被满足,物理层向MAC层上报指示。进一步地,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将第一事件对应的计数器的值加1。此外,MAC层每收到物理层上报的指示,重启第一事件对应的计时器。如果第一事件对应的计时器超时,则第一事件对应的计数器置零并重新计数,当第一事件对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,终端设备确定发生第一事件。In a specific implementation, the physical layer of the terminal device measures the RS and, based on the measurement results, determines whether the conditions included in the first event are met. If the conditions are met, the physical layer reports an indication to the MAC layer. Furthermore, based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer increments the value of the counter corresponding to the first event by 1. Furthermore, each time the MAC layer receives an indication reported by the physical layer, it restarts the timer corresponding to the first event. If the timer corresponding to the first event times out, the counter corresponding to the first event is reset to zero and restarts. When the value of the counter corresponding to the first event reaches the maximum count value, the terminal device determines that the first event has occurred.
在示例2中,第一事件包含的条件的数量为多个,多个条件共用一个计数器,且多个条件共用一个计时器。具体的,每当多个条件均被满足,第一事件对应的计数器加1,且第一事件对应的计时器重启。每当第一事件对应的计时器超时,则第一事件对应的计数器置零。当第一事件对应的计数器达到最大计数值,则确定检测到第一事件。In Example 2, the first event includes multiple conditions, and the multiple conditions share a counter and a timer. Specifically, each time multiple conditions are met, the counter corresponding to the first event is incremented by 1, and the timer corresponding to the first event is restarted. Each time the timer corresponding to the first event times out, the counter corresponding to the first event is reset to zero. When the counter corresponding to the first event reaches a maximum count value, it is determined that the first event has been detected.
具体的,由终端设备的物理层对RS进行测量,并基于测量结果判断第一事件所包含的各个条件是否满足,如果各个条件均被满足,物理层向MAC层上报指示。进一步地,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将第一事件对应的计数器(也即,多个条件共用的计数器)的值加1。此外,MAC层每收到物理层上报的指示,重启第一事件对应的计时器(也即,多个条件共用的计时器)。如果第一事件对应的计时器超时,则第一事件对应的计数器置零并重新计数,当第一事件对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,终端设备确定发生第一事件。Specifically, the physical layer of the terminal device measures the RS and determines whether the various conditions included in the first event are met based on the measurement results. If all conditions are met, the physical layer reports an indication to the MAC layer. Furthermore, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the first event (that is, the counter shared by multiple conditions) based on the indication reported by the physical layer. In addition, each time the MAC layer receives an indication reported by the physical layer, it restarts the timer corresponding to the first event (that is, the timer shared by multiple conditions). If the timer corresponding to the first event times out, the counter corresponding to the first event is reset to zero and restarts counting. When the value of the counter corresponding to the first event reaches the maximum count value, the terminal device determines that the first event has occurred.
假设第一事件包括条件1和条件2,第一事件对应的计数器为counter1,第一事件对应的计数器为timer1。每当条件1被满足且条件2被满足,counter1的值加1,且timer1重启。每当timer1超时,counter1置零。当counter1的值达到counter1的最大计数值,则确定检测到第一事件。Assume that the first event includes condition 1 and condition 2. The counter corresponding to the first event is counter1, and the counter corresponding to the first event is timer1. Whenever condition 1 and condition 2 are both met, the value of counter1 is incremented by 1, and timer1 is restarted. Whenever timer1 times out, counter1 is reset to zero. When the value of counter1 reaches the maximum count value of counter1, the first event is detected.
在第二种情况中,第一事件包含的条件的数量为多个,第一事件对应的计数器的数量为多个,第一事件对应的计时器的数量为1个。In the second case, the first event includes multiple conditions, the first event corresponds to multiple counters, and the first event corresponds to one timer.
示例3:第一事件所包含的每个条件对应一个计数器,不同条件分别对应不同的计数器,但多个条件共用一个计时器。更具体地,每当多个条件中任意一个条件或全部条件被满足,被满足的条件对应的计数器加1,且第一事件对应的计时器重启。每当第一事件对应的计时器超时,则第一事件对应的各个计数器均置零,也即,各个条件对应的计数器均置零。当第一事件对应的多个计数器均达到最大计数值,则确定检测到第一事件。Example 3: Each condition included in the first event corresponds to a counter, and different conditions correspond to different counters, but multiple conditions share a single timer. More specifically, whenever any one or all of the multiple conditions are met, the counter corresponding to the met condition is incremented by 1, and the timer corresponding to the first event is restarted. Whenever the timer corresponding to the first event times out, each counter corresponding to the first event is reset to zero; that is, the counters corresponding to each condition are reset to zero. When all multiple counters corresponding to the first event reach their maximum count value, it is determined that the first event has been detected.
具体的,由终端设备的物理层对RS进行测量,并基于测量结果判断第一事件所包含的各个条件是否满足,如果任意一个条件或全部条件被满足,物理层向MAC层上报指示。进一步地,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将被满足的条件对应的计数器的值加1。此外,MAC层每收到物理层上报的指示,重启第一事件对应的计时器(也即,多个条件共用的计时器)。如果第一事件对应的计时器超时,则第一事件对应的各个计数器(也即,各个条件对应的计数器)均置零并重新计数,当第一事件对应的各个计数器的值均达到最大计数值,终端设备确定发生第一事件。Specifically, the physical layer of the terminal device measures the RS and determines whether the various conditions included in the first event are met based on the measurement results. If any one or all of the conditions are met, the physical layer reports an indication to the MAC layer. Furthermore, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the met condition based on the indication reported by the physical layer. In addition, each time the MAC layer receives an indication reported by the physical layer, it restarts the timer corresponding to the first event (that is, the timer shared by multiple conditions). If the timer corresponding to the first event times out, the various counters corresponding to the first event (that is, the counters corresponding to the various conditions) are reset to zero and restarted. When the values of the various counters corresponding to the first event reach the maximum count value, the terminal device determines that the first event has occurred.
例如,第一事件包括条件1和条件2,条件1对应counter1,条件2对应counter2,条件1和条件2共用timer1。响应于条件1被满足,counter1的值加1,timer1重启。响应于条件2被满足,counter2的值加1,timer1重启。响应于timer1超时,counter1和couter2均置零。响应于counter1的值达到counter1的最大计数值,且counter2的值达到counter2的最大计数值,确定检测到第一事件。For example, a first event includes conditions 1 and 2. Condition 1 corresponds to counter 1, and condition 2 corresponds to counter 2. Conditions 1 and 2 share timer 1. In response to condition 1 being met, the value of counter 1 is incremented by 1, and timer 1 is restarted. In response to condition 2 being met, the value of counter 2 is incremented by 1, and timer 1 is restarted. In response to timer 1 timing out, both counter 1 and counter 2 are reset to zero. In response to counter 1 reaching its maximum count value and counter 2 reaching its maximum count value, it is determined that the first event has been detected.
在第三种情况中,第一事件包含的条件的数量为多个,第一事件对应的计数器的数量为一个,第一事件对应的计时器的数量为多个。In the third case, the first event includes multiple conditions, the first event corresponds to one counter, and the first event corresponds to multiple timers.
示例4,第一事件所包含的每个条件对应一个计时器,不同条件分别对应不同的计时器,但多个条件共用一个计数器。其中,每当多个条件中各个条件均被满足,第一事件对应的计数器加1,且各个计时器重启。每当任意一个或全部条件对应的计时器超时,则第一事件对应的计数器(也即,多个条件共用的计数器)置零。当第一事件对应的计数器达到最大计数值,则确定检测到第一事件。Example 4: Each condition included in the first event corresponds to a timer, and different conditions correspond to different timers, but multiple conditions share a counter. Wherein, whenever each of the multiple conditions is met, the counter corresponding to the first event is incremented by 1, and each timer is restarted. Whenever the timer corresponding to any one or all of the conditions times out, the counter corresponding to the first event (that is, the counter shared by multiple conditions) is reset to zero. When the counter corresponding to the first event reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the first event is detected.
具体的,由终端设备的物理层对RS进行测量,并基于测量结果判断第一事件所包含的各个条件是否满足,如果各个条件均被满足,物理层向MAC层上报指示。进一步地,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将第一事件对应的计数器(也即,多个条件共用的计数器)的值加1。此外,每当MAC层收到物理层上报的指示,重启第一事件对应的多个计时器(也即,多个条件各自对应的计时器)。如果任意一个或全部计时器超时,则第一事件对应的计数器置零并重新计数,当第一事件对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,终端设备确定发生第一事件。Specifically, the physical layer of the terminal device measures the RS and determines whether the various conditions included in the first event are met based on the measurement results. If all conditions are met, the physical layer reports an indication to the MAC layer. Furthermore, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the first event (that is, the counter shared by multiple conditions) based on the indication reported by the physical layer. In addition, each time the MAC layer receives an indication reported by the physical layer, it restarts the multiple timers corresponding to the first event (that is, the timers corresponding to the multiple conditions). If any or all of the timers time out, the counter corresponding to the first event is reset to zero and restarts counting. When the value of the counter corresponding to the first event reaches the maximum count value, the terminal device determines that the first event has occurred.
例如,第一事件包括条件1和条件2,条件1和条件2共用counter1,条件1对应timer1,条件2对应timer2。响应于条件1被满足且条件2被满足,counter1的值加1,timer1和timer2重启。响应于timer1超时或者timer2超时,counter1置零。响应于counter1的值达到counter1的最大计数值,确定检测到第一事件。For example, a first event includes conditions 1 and 2. Conditions 1 and 2 share counter 1. Condition 1 corresponds to timer 1, and condition 2 corresponds to timer 2. In response to both condition 1 and condition 2 being met, the value of counter 1 is incremented by 1, and timer 1 and timer 2 are restarted. In response to timer 1 timing out or timer 2 timing out, counter 1 is reset to zero. In response to the value of counter 1 reaching the maximum count value of counter 1, it is determined that the first event has been detected.
在第四种情况中,第一事件包含的条件的数量为多个,第一事件对应的计数器的数量为多个,第一事件对应的计时器的数量为多个。In the fourth case, the first event includes multiple conditions, the first event corresponds to multiple counters, and the first event corresponds to multiple timers.
示例5,第一事件所包含的每个条件对应一个计时器和一个计数器。不同条件分别对应不同的计时器,不同条件分别对应不同的计数器。更具体的,每当多个条件中任意一个条件被满足,该被满足的条件对应的计数器的值加1,该被满足的条件对应的计时器重启。每当多个条件中任意一个条件对应的计时器超时,该条件对应的计数器置零。当各个条件对应的计数器的值均达到最大计数值,则确定检测到第一事件。Example 5: Each condition included in the first event corresponds to a timer and a counter. Different conditions correspond to different timers, and different conditions correspond to different counters. More specifically, whenever any one of the multiple conditions is met, the value of the counter corresponding to the met condition is incremented by 1, and the timer corresponding to the met condition is restarted. Whenever the timer corresponding to any one of the multiple conditions times out, the counter corresponding to the condition is reset to zero. When the values of the counters corresponding to each condition reach the maximum count value, it is determined that the first event has been detected.
具体的,由终端设备的物理层对RS进行测量,并基于测量结果判断第一事件所包含的各个条件是否满足,如果任意一个条件被满足,物理层向MAC层上报指示。进一步地,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将该被满足的条件对应的计数器的值加1,并重启该被满足的条件对应的计时器。如果任意一个条件对应的计时器超时,则该条件对应的计数器置零并重新计数,当各个条件对应的计数器的值均达到最大计数值,终端设备确定发生第一事件。Specifically, the physical layer of the terminal device measures the RS and determines whether the various conditions included in the first event are met based on the measurement results. If any condition is met, the physical layer reports an indication to the MAC layer. Furthermore, based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the met condition and restarts the timer corresponding to the met condition. If the timer corresponding to any condition times out, the counter corresponding to the condition is reset to zero and restarts. When the values of the counters corresponding to the various conditions reach the maximum count value, the terminal device determines that the first event has occurred.
例如,第一事件包括条件1和条件2,条件1对应counter1,条件2对应counter2,条件1对应timer1,条件2对应timer2。响应于条件1被满足,counter1的值加1,timer1重启。响应于条件2被满足,counter2的值加1,timer2重启。响应于timer1超时,counter1置零。响应于timer2超时,counter2置零。响应于counter1的值达到counter1的最大计数值,且counter2的值达到counter2的最大计数值,确定检测到第一事件。For example, a first event includes conditions 1 and 2. Condition 1 corresponds to counter 1, condition 2 corresponds to counter 2, condition 1 corresponds to timer 1, and condition 2 corresponds to timer 2. In response to condition 1 being met, the value of counter 1 is incremented by 1, and timer 1 is restarted. In response to condition 2 being met, the value of counter 2 is incremented by 1, and timer 2 is restarted. In response to timer 1 timing out, counter 1 is reset to zero. In response to timer 2 timing out, counter 2 is reset to zero. In response to counter 1 reaching its maximum count value and counter 2 reaching its maximum count value, it is determined that the first event has been detected.
考虑到当前波束的数量有可能为多个,和/或,备选波束的数量有可能为多个,为此,本申请实施例的方案中,计时器可以是波束对应的计时器,和/或,计数器可以是波束对应的计数器。Considering that there may be multiple current beams and/or multiple alternative beams, in the embodiment of the present application, the timer may be a timer corresponding to the beam, and/or the counter may be a counter corresponding to the beam.
具体而言,第一事件对应的计数器可以包括每个波束对应的计数器,和/或,第一事件对应的计时器可以包括每个波束对应的计时器。或者,每个条件对应的计数器可以包括每个波束对应的计数器,和/或,每个条件对应的计时器可以包括每个波束对应的计时器。其中,不同波束对应的计数器可以相同或不同,和/或,不同波束对应的计时器可以相同或不同。Specifically, the counter corresponding to the first event may include a counter corresponding to each beam, and/or the timer corresponding to the first event may include a timer corresponding to each beam. Alternatively, the counter corresponding to each condition may include a counter corresponding to each beam, and/or the timer corresponding to each condition may include a timer corresponding to each beam. The counters corresponding to different beams may be the same or different, and/or the timers corresponding to different beams may be the same or different.
示例性的,每个波束可以对应一个计数器,和/或,每个波束可以对应一个计时器。需要说明的是,此处的波束可以是当前波束,也可以是备选波束。Exemplarily, each beam may correspond to a counter, and/or each beam may correspond to a timer. It should be noted that the beam here may be a current beam or an alternative beam.
在第一种可能的实施方式中,一个波束可以对应一个计数器,以及一个波束可以对应一个计时器。In a first possible implementation, one beam may correspond to one counter, and one beam may correspond to one timer.
具体的,以一个当前波束为例,若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定该当前波束的波束质量满足事件或条件,则向MAC层上报指示,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将该当前波束对应的计数器的值加1,并且该当前波束对应的计时器重启。若该当前波束对应的计时器超时,则该当前波束对应的计数器置零并重新计数。当该当前波束对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定该当前波束满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定该当前波束满足事件,或者,确定该当前波束为待切换波束。Specifically, taking a current beam as an example, if the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam quality of the current beam meets an event or condition by measuring RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the current beam, and restarts the timer corresponding to the current beam. If the timer corresponding to the current beam times out, the counter corresponding to the current beam is reset to zero and restarts the count. When the value of the counter corresponding to the current beam reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the current beam meets the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the current beam meets the event, or it is determined that the current beam is a beam to be switched.
以一个备选波束为例,若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定该备选波束的波束质量满足事件或条件,则向MAC层上报指示,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将该备选波束对应的计数器的值加1,并且该备选波束对应的计时器重启。若该备选波束对应的计时器超时,则该备选波束对应的计数器置零并重新计数。当该备选波束对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定该备选波束满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定该备选波束满足事件,或者,确定该备选波束为新波束。Taking an alternative beam as an example, if the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam quality of the alternative beam meets the event or condition by measuring the RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative beam and restarts the timer corresponding to the alternative beam. If the timer corresponding to the alternative beam times out, the counter corresponding to the alternative beam is reset to zero and restarts. When the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative beam reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the alternative beam meets the condition has reached the maximum count value, or it is determined that the alternative beam meets the event, or it is determined that the alternative beam is a new beam.
在第二种可能的实施方式中,多个波束可以对应一个计数器,以及多个波束可以对应一个计时器。也即,多个波束可以共用一个计数器,以及多个波束可以共用一个计时器。In a second possible implementation, multiple beams may correspond to one counter, and multiple beams may correspond to one timer, that is, multiple beams may share one counter, and multiple beams may share one timer.
具体的,以多个当前波束为例,其中,多个当前波束可以是所有的当前波束,或者,可以是同一个小区内所有的当前波束,或者,可以是一部分的当前波束。若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定多个当前波束的波束质量均满足事件或条件,则向MAC层上报指示,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将多个当前波束共用的计数器的值加1,并且多个当前波束共用的计时器重启。若多个当前波束共用的计时器超时,则多个当前波束共用的计数器置零并重新计数。当多个当前波束共用的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定多个当前波束满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定多个当前波束满足事件,或者,确定多个当前波束均为待切换波束。Specifically, taking multiple current beams as an example, the multiple current beams can be all current beams, or can be all current beams in the same cell, or can be part of the current beams. If the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam qualities of multiple current beams meet the event or condition by measuring RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter shared by the multiple current beams, and restarts the timer shared by the multiple current beams. If the timer shared by the multiple current beams times out, the counter shared by the multiple current beams is reset to zero and restarts. When the value of the counter shared by the multiple current beams reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the multiple current beams meet the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the multiple current beams meet the event, or it is determined that the multiple current beams are all beams to be switched.
以多个备选波束为例,其中,多个备选波束可以是所有的备选波束,或者,可以是同一个小区内所有的备选波束,或者,可以是一部分的备选波束。若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定多个备选波束的波束质量均满足事件或条件,则向MAC层上报指示,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将多个备选波束共用的计数器的值加1,并且多个备选波束共用的计时器重启。若多个备选波束共用的计时器超时,则多个备选波束共用的计数器置零并重新计数。当多个备选波束共用的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定多个备选波束满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定多个备选波束满足事件,或者,确定多个备选波束均为新波束。Take multiple alternative beams as an example, wherein the multiple alternative beams can be all alternative beams, or can be all alternative beams in the same cell, or can be a part of the alternative beams. If the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam qualities of multiple alternative beams meet the event or condition by measuring the RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer, and the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter shared by the multiple alternative beams based on the indication reported by the physical layer, and restarts the timer shared by the multiple alternative beams. If the timer shared by the multiple alternative beams times out, the counter shared by the multiple alternative beams is reset to zero and restarts. When the value of the counter shared by the multiple alternative beams reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the multiple alternative beams meet the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the multiple alternative beams meet the event, or it is determined that the multiple alternative beams are all new beams.
在第三种可能的实施方式中,多个波束对应一个计数器,多个波束对应多个计时器。In a third possible implementation, multiple beams correspond to one counter, and multiple beams correspond to multiple timers.
具体的,以多个当前波束为例,其中,多个当前波束可以是所有的当前波束,或者,可以是同一个小区内所有的当前波束,或者,可以是一部分的当前波束。若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定多个当前波束的波束质量均满足事件或条件,则向MAC层上报指示,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将多个当前波束共用的计数器的值加1,并且各个当前波束各自对应的计时器均重启。若任意一个当前波束或全部当前波束对应的计时器超时,则多个当前波束共用的计数器置零并重新计数。当多个当前波束共用的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定多个当前波束满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定多个当前波束满足事件,或者,确定多个当前波束均为待切换波束。Specifically, taking multiple current beams as an example, the multiple current beams can be all current beams, or can be all current beams in the same cell, or can be part of the current beams. If the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam qualities of multiple current beams meet the event or condition by measuring RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter shared by the multiple current beams, and restarts the timer corresponding to each current beam. If the timer corresponding to any current beam or all current beams times out, the counter shared by the multiple current beams is reset to zero and restarts. When the value of the counter shared by the multiple current beams reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the multiple current beams meet the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the multiple current beams meet the event, or it is determined that the multiple current beams are all beams to be switched.
以多个备选波束为例,其中,多个备选波束可以是所有的备选波束,或者,可以是同一个小区内所有的备选波束,或者,可以是一部分的备选波束。若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定多个备选波束的波束质量均满足事件或条件,则向MAC层上报指示,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将多个备选波束共用的计数器的值加1,并且各个备选波束各自对应的计时器均重启。若任意一个备选波束或全部备选波束对应的计时器超时,则多个备选波束共用的计数器置零并重新计数。当多个备选波束共用的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定多个备选波束满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定多个备选波束满足事件,或者,确定多个备选波束均为新波束。Take multiple alternative beams as an example, where the multiple alternative beams can be all alternative beams, or can be all alternative beams in the same cell, or can be part of the alternative beams. If the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam qualities of multiple alternative beams meet the event or condition by measuring the RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter shared by the multiple alternative beams, and restarts the timer corresponding to each alternative beam. If the timer corresponding to any one alternative beam or all alternative beams times out, the counter shared by the multiple alternative beams is reset to zero and restarts. When the value of the counter shared by the multiple alternative beams reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the multiple alternative beams meet the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the multiple alternative beams meet the event, or it is determined that the multiple alternative beams are all new beams.
在第四种可能的实施方式中,多个波束对应多个计数器,多个波束对应一个计时器。也即,不同波束分别对应不同的计数器,多个波束共用一个计时器。In a fourth possible implementation, multiple beams correspond to multiple counters, and multiple beams correspond to one timer. That is, different beams correspond to different counters, and multiple beams share one timer.
具体的,以多个当前波束为例,其中,多个当前波束可以是所有的当前波束,或者,可以是同一个小区内所有的当前波束,或者,可以是一部分的当前波束。若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定任意一个当前波束的波束质量满足事件或条件,则向MAC层上报指示,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将该当前波束对应的计数器的值加1,并且多个当前波束共用的计时器重启。若多个当前波束共用的计时器超时,则各个当前波束对应的计数器均置零并重新计数。当多个当前波束各自对应的计数器的值均达到最大计数值,则确定多个当前波束满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定多个当前波束满足事件,或者,确定多个当前波束均为待切换波束。Specifically, taking multiple current beams as an example, the multiple current beams can be all current beams, or can be all current beams in the same cell, or can be part of the current beams. If the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam quality of any current beam meets the event or condition by measuring RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the current beam, and restarts the timer shared by multiple current beams. If the timer shared by multiple current beams times out, the counters corresponding to each current beam are reset to zero and restarted. When the values of the counters corresponding to the multiple current beams reach the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the multiple current beams meet the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the multiple current beams meet the event, or it is determined that the multiple current beams are all beams to be switched.
以多个备选波束为例,其中,多个备选波束可以是所有的备选波束,或者,可以是同一个小区内所有的备选波束,或者,可以是一部分的备选波束。若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定任意一个备选波束的波束质量满足事件或条件,则向MAC层上报指示,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将该备选波束对应的计数器的值加1,并且多个备选波束共用的计时器重启。若多个备选波束共用的计时器超时,则各个备选波束对应的计数器均置零并重新计数。当多个备选波束各自对应的计数器的值均达到最大计数值,则确定多个备选波束满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,确定多个备选波束满足事件,或者,确定多个备选波束均为新波束。Take multiple alternative beams as an example, wherein the multiple alternative beams can be all alternative beams, or can be all alternative beams in the same cell, or can be part of the alternative beams. If the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam quality of any alternative beam meets the event or condition by measuring the RS, it reports an indication to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative beam, and restarts the timer shared by the multiple alternative beams. If the timer shared by the multiple alternative beams times out, the counters corresponding to the various alternative beams are reset to zero and restarted. When the values of the counters corresponding to the multiple alternative beams reach the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the multiple alternative beams meet the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the multiple alternative beams meet the event, or it is determined that the multiple alternative beams are all new beams.
上述方案中,设置波束级别的计数器和/或计时器,可以保证对同一个波束满足条件的次数进行计数,以准确判断每个当前波束是否为待切换波束,以及每个备选波束是否为新波束。In the above scheme, setting a beam-level counter and/or timer can ensure that the number of times the same beam meets the conditions is counted, so as to accurately determine whether each current beam is a beam to be switched and whether each alternative beam is a new beam.
在具体实施中,终端设备可以使用条件或事件对应的计数器和波束对应的计数器进行事件检测。In a specific implementation, the terminal device may use a counter corresponding to a condition or event and a counter corresponding to a beam to perform event detection.
示例性的,每个当前波束对应一个计数器,每个当前波束对应的计数器用于对该当前波束满足条件或事件的次数进行计数。若所有当前波束对应的计数器的值均加1,则条件或事件对应的计数器的值加1。当所有当前波束对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,或者,条件或事件对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则可以确定检测到该条件或事件,或确定所有当前波束均为待切换波束。Exemplarily, each current beam corresponds to a counter, and the counter corresponding to each current beam is used to count the number of times the current beam satisfies a condition or event. If the values of the counters corresponding to all current beams are incremented by 1, the value of the counter corresponding to the condition or event is incremented by 1. When the values of the counters corresponding to all current beams reach a maximum count value, or the value of the counter corresponding to the condition or event reaches the maximum count value, it can be determined that the condition or event has been detected, or that all current beams are beams to be switched.
又示例性的,假设终端设备需要确定Q个新波束,终端设备可以测量Q个RS资源来检测Q个RS资源对应的Q个备选波束是否为新波束。Q为大于1的正整数。其中,Q个备选波束中的每个备选波束对应一个计数器,每个备选波束对应的计数器可以用于对该备选波束满足条件或事件的次数进行计数。如果Q个备选波束对应的计数器的值均加1,则条件或事件对应的计数器的值加1。当Q个备选波束对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,或者,条件或事件对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则可以确定检测到该条件或事件,或者,确定Q个备选波束为新波束。As another example, assuming that the terminal device needs to determine Q new beams, the terminal device can measure Q RS resources to detect whether the Q alternative beams corresponding to the Q RS resources are new beams. Q is a positive integer greater than 1. Each of the Q alternative beams corresponds to a counter, and the counter corresponding to each alternative beam can be used to count the number of times the alternative beam meets a condition or event. If the values of the counters corresponding to the Q alternative beams are all increased by 1, the value of the counter corresponding to the condition or event is increased by 1. When the value of the counter corresponding to the Q alternative beams reaches the maximum count value, or the value of the counter corresponding to the condition or event reaches the maximum count value, it can be determined that the condition or event is detected, or it is determined that the Q alternative beams are new beams.
进一步地,终端设备可以使用波束对应的计时器,和/或,条件或事件对应的计时器。例如,条件或事件对应的计时器超时,则上述条件或事件对应的计数器和/或波束对应的计数器置零并重新计数,条件或事件对应的计数器的值更新,则条件或事件对应的计时器重启。Furthermore, the terminal device may use a timer corresponding to a beam and/or a timer corresponding to a condition or event. For example, if a timer corresponding to a condition or event times out, the counter corresponding to the condition or event and/or the counter corresponding to the beam are reset to zero and restarted. If the value of the counter corresponding to the condition or event is updated, the timer corresponding to the condition or event is restarted.
如实施例一中的描述,在检测第一事件的过程中,还可以涉及小区级别的波束质量和/或小区级别的波束干扰的判定。As described in the first embodiment, the process of detecting the first event may also involve determining the cell-level beam quality and/or cell-level beam interference.
本申请实施例的方案中,第一事件对应的计数器可以包括每个小区对应的计数器,第一事件对应的计时器可以包括每个小区对应的计时器。或者,每个条件对应的计数器可以包括每个小区对应的计数器,每个条件对应的计时器可以包括每个小区对应的计时器。具体的,每个小区可以对应一个计数器,和/或,每个小区可以对应一个计时器。需要说明的是,此处的小区可以是当前小区,也可以是备选小区。其中,不同小区对应的计数器可以相同或不同,和/或,不同小区对应的计时器可以相同或不同。In the solution of the embodiment of the present application, the counter corresponding to the first event may include a counter corresponding to each cell, and the timer corresponding to the first event may include a timer corresponding to each cell. Alternatively, the counter corresponding to each condition may include a counter corresponding to each cell, and the timer corresponding to each condition may include a timer corresponding to each cell. Specifically, each cell may correspond to a counter, and/or each cell may correspond to a timer. It should be noted that the cell here may be a current cell or an alternative cell. The counters corresponding to different cells may be the same or different, and/or the timers corresponding to different cells may be the same or different.
示例性的,若当前小区的波束质量是基于当前小区内至少一个当前波束的波束质量得到的第一结果,也即,当前小区是否满足条件是指第一结果是否满足条件,或者,当前小区的波束质量是指当前小区中所有当前波束的波束质量,也即,当前小区是否满足条件是指当前小区中各个当前波束是否均满足条件,则可以仅采用当前小区对应的计数器和计时器对当前小区满足条件或事件的次数进行计数,可以无需采用当前小区内波束对应的计数器和计时器进行计数。Exemplarily, if the beam quality of the current cell is a first result obtained based on the beam quality of at least one current beam in the current cell, that is, whether the current cell meets the condition refers to whether the first result meets the condition, or the beam quality of the current cell refers to the beam quality of all current beams in the current cell, that is, whether the current cell meets the condition refers to whether each current beam in the current cell meets the condition, then only the counter and timer corresponding to the current cell can be used to count the number of times the current cell meets the condition or event, and there is no need to use the counter and timer corresponding to the beam in the current cell for counting.
具体的,以一个当前小区为例,若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定一个或多个当前波束的波束质量,并根据一个或多个当前波束的波束质量确定当前小区的波束质量。若确定该当前小区的波束质量满足事件或条件(例如,当前小区的第一结果满足条件,或者当前小区中各个当前波束均满足条件),则向MAC层上报指示。进一步地,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将该当前小区对应的计数器的值加1,并且该当前小区对应的计时器重启。若该当前小区对应的计时器超时,则该当前小区对应的计数器置零并重新计数。当该当前小区对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定该当前小区满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定该当前小区满足事件,或者,确定该当前小区为待切换小区。Specifically, taking a current cell as an example, if the physical layer of the terminal device determines the beam quality of one or more current beams by measuring RS, and determines the beam quality of the current cell based on the beam quality of one or more current beams. If it is determined that the beam quality of the current cell meets the event or condition (for example, the first result of the current cell meets the condition, or each current beam in the current cell meets the condition), an indication is reported to the MAC layer. Furthermore, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the current cell based on the indication reported by the physical layer, and restarts the timer corresponding to the current cell. If the timer corresponding to the current cell times out, the counter corresponding to the current cell is reset to zero and counts again. When the value of the counter corresponding to the current cell reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the current cell meets the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the current cell meets the event, or it is determined that the current cell is a cell to be switched.
类似的,若备选小区的波束质量是基于备选小区内至少一个备选波束的波束质量得到的第二结果,也即,备选小区是否满足条件是指第二结果是否满足条件,或者,备选小区的波束质量是指备选小区中所有备选波束的波束质量,也即,备选小区是否满足条件是指备选小区中各个备选波束是否均满足条件,则可以仅采用备选小区对应的计数器和计时器对备选小区满足条件或事件的次数进行计数,可以无需采用备选小区内波束对应的计数器和计时器进行计数。Similarly, if the beam quality of the alternative cell is a second result obtained based on the beam quality of at least one alternative beam in the alternative cell, that is, whether the alternative cell meets the condition refers to whether the second result meets the condition, or the beam quality of the alternative cell refers to the beam quality of all alternative beams in the alternative cell, that is, whether the alternative cell meets the condition refers to whether each alternative beam in the alternative cell meets the condition, then only the counter and timer corresponding to the alternative cell can be used to count the number of times the alternative cell meets the condition or event, and there is no need to use the counter and timer corresponding to the beam in the alternative cell for counting.
具体的,以一个备选小区为例,若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定一个或多个备选波束的波束质量,并根据一个或多个备选波束的波束质量确定备选小区的波束质量。若确定该备选小区的波束质量满足事件或条件(例如,备选小区的第二结果满足条件,或者备选小区中各个备选波束均满足条件),则向MAC层上报指示。进一步地,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将该备选小区对应的计数器的值加1,并且该备选小区对应的计时器重启。若该备选小区对应的计时器超时,则该备选小区对应的计数器置零并重新计数。当该备选小区对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定该备选小区满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定该备选小区满足事件,或者,确定该备选小区为新小区。Specifically, taking an alternative cell as an example, if the physical layer of the terminal device determines the beam quality of one or more alternative beams by measuring RS, and determines the beam quality of the alternative cell based on the beam quality of one or more alternative beams. If it is determined that the beam quality of the alternative cell meets the event or condition (for example, the second result of the alternative cell meets the condition, or each alternative beam in the alternative cell meets the condition), an indication is reported to the MAC layer. Furthermore, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative cell based on the indication reported by the physical layer, and restarts the timer corresponding to the alternative cell. If the timer corresponding to the alternative cell times out, the counter corresponding to the alternative cell is reset to zero and counts again. When the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative cell reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the alternative cell meets the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the alternative cell meets the event, or it is determined that the alternative cell is a new cell.
又示例性的,若当前小区的波束质量是指当前小区的M个当前波束中至少K个波束的波束质量,也即,当前小区是否满足条件是指所有的当前波束中是否至少有K个当前波束满足条件,则可以既采用当前小区内波束对应的计数器和计时器进行计数,又采用当前小区对应的计数器和计时器进行计数。As another example, if the beam quality of the current cell refers to the beam quality of at least K beams out of the M current beams of the current cell, that is, whether the current cell meets the conditions refers to whether at least K current beams out of all the current beams meet the conditions, then both the counter and timer corresponding to the beams in the current cell and the counter and timer corresponding to the current cell can be used for counting.
在这种情况下,当前小区对应的计数器和计时器可以基于一个或多个波束对应的计数器的值进行计数。也即,物理层可以无需向MAC层上报小区满足条件的指示。In this case, the counter and timer corresponding to the current cell can count based on the values of the counters corresponding to one or more beams. In other words, the physical layer does not need to report to the MAC layer that the cell meets the conditions.
具体的,若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定当前小区内各个当前波束的波束质量,若任意一个当前波束满足条件,则向MAC层上报该当前波束满足条件指示,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将该当前波束对应的计数器的值加1,并且该当前波束对应的计时器重启。其中,对于每个当前波束,若该当前波束的计时器超时,则该当前波束对应的计数器置零并重新计数。进一步地,每当MAC层中有K个当前波束对应的计数器的值加1,则当前小区对应的计数器的值加1,且当前小区对应的计时器重启。当该当前小区有K个当前波束对应的计数器的值都达到最大计数值,或者,当该当前小区对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定该当前小区满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定该当前小区满足事件,或者,确定该当前小区为待切换小区。Specifically, if the physical layer of the terminal device determines the beam quality of each current beam in the current cell by measuring RS, if any current beam meets the conditions, then the MAC layer is reported with an indication that the current beam meets the conditions. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the current beam, and restarts the timer corresponding to the current beam. Wherein, for each current beam, if the timer of the current beam times out, the counter corresponding to the current beam is reset to zero and restarts the count. Furthermore, whenever the values of the counters corresponding to K current beams in the MAC layer are increased by 1, the value of the counter corresponding to the current cell is increased by 1, and the timer corresponding to the current cell is restarted. When the values of the counters corresponding to the K current beams in the current cell all reach the maximum count value, or when the value of the counter corresponding to the current cell reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the current cell meets the conditions reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the current cell meets the event, or it is determined that the current cell is a cell to be switched.
类似的,若备选小区的波束质量是指备选小区的N个备选波束中至少K’个波束的波束质量,也即,备选小区是否满足条件是指所有的备选波束中是否至少有K’个备选波束满足条件,则可以既采用备选小区内波束对应的计数器和计时器进行计数,又采用备选小区对应的计数器和计时器进行计数。Similarly, if the beam quality of the alternative cell refers to the beam quality of at least K’ beams among the N alternative beams of the alternative cell, that is, whether the alternative cell meets the conditions refers to whether at least K’ alternative beams among all the alternative beams meet the conditions, then both the counters and timers corresponding to the beams in the alternative cell and the counters and timers corresponding to the alternative cell can be used for counting.
在这种情况下,备选小区对应的计数器和计时器可以基于一个或多个波束对应的计数器的值进行计数。也即,物理层可以无需向MAC层上报小区满足条件的指示。In this case, the counter and timer corresponding to the candidate cell can count based on the value of the counter corresponding to one or more beams. In other words, the physical layer does not need to report to the MAC layer that the cell meets the conditions.
具体的,若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定备选小区内各个备选波束的波束质量,任意一个备选波束满足条件,则向MAC层上报该备选波束满足条件指示,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将该备选波束对应的计数器的值加1,并且该备选波束对应的计时器重启。其中,对于每个备选波束,若该备选波束的计时器超时,则该备选波束对应的计数器置零并重新计数。进一步地,每当MAC层中有K’个备选波束对应的计数器的值加1,则备选小区对应的计数器的值加1,且备选小区对应的计时器重启。当该备选小区有K’个备选波束对应的计数器的值都达到最大计数值,或者,当该备选小区对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定该备选小区满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定该备选小区满足事件,或者,确定该备选小区为新小区。Specifically, if the physical layer of the terminal device determines the beam quality of each alternative beam in the alternative cell by measuring RS, and any alternative beam meets the conditions, then the alternative beam meets the conditions indication is reported to the MAC layer. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative beam, and restarts the timer corresponding to the alternative beam. Among them, for each alternative beam, if the timer of the alternative beam times out, the counter corresponding to the alternative beam is reset to zero and restarts the counting. Furthermore, whenever the value of the counter corresponding to K' alternative beams in the MAC layer is increased by 1, the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative cell is increased by 1, and the timer corresponding to the alternative cell is restarted. When the values of the counters corresponding to the K' alternative beams of the alternative cell all reach the maximum count value, or when the value of the counter corresponding to the alternative cell reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the alternative cell meets the conditions has reached the maximum count value, or it is determined that the alternative cell meets the event, or it is determined that the alternative cell is a new cell.
如实施例一中的描述,在检测第一事件的过程中,还可以涉及小区组级别的条件判定。As described in the first embodiment, the process of detecting the first event may also involve condition determination at the cell group level.
本申请实施例的方案中,第一事件对应的计数器可以包括每个小区组对应的计数器,第一事件对应的计时器可以包括每个小区组对应的计时器。或者,每个条件对应的计数器可以包括每个小区组对应的计数器,每个条件对应的计时器可以包括每个小区组对应的计时器。具体的,每个小区组可以对应一个计数器,和/或,每个小区组可以对应一个计时器。需要说明的是,此处的小区组可以是当前小区组,也可以是备选小区组。其中,不同小区组对应的计数器可以相同或不同,和/或,不同小区组对应的计时器可以相同或不同。In the solution of the embodiment of the present application, the counter corresponding to the first event may include a counter corresponding to each cell group, and the timer corresponding to the first event may include a timer corresponding to each cell group. Alternatively, the counter corresponding to each condition may include a counter corresponding to each cell group, and the timer corresponding to each condition may include a timer corresponding to each cell group. Specifically, each cell group may correspond to a counter, and/or each cell group may correspond to a timer. It should be noted that the cell group here may be the current cell group or the alternative cell group. Among them, the counters corresponding to different cell groups may be the same or different, and/or the timers corresponding to different cell groups may be the same or different.
示例性的,以一个小区组(该小区组为当前小区组或备选小区组)为例,若终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定该小区组中所有小区的波束质量和/或波束干扰均满足事件或条件,则向MAC层上报指示。进一步地,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将该小区组对应的计数器的值加1,并且该当前小区组对应的计时器重启。若该小区组对应的计时器超时,则该小区组对应的计数器置零并重新计数。当该小区组对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定该小区组满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定该小区组满足事件。Exemplarily, taking a cell group (the cell group is the current cell group or the alternative cell group) as an example, if the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam quality and/or beam interference of all cells in the cell group meet the event or condition by measuring RS, the indication is reported to the MAC layer. Furthermore, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the cell group based on the indication reported by the physical layer, and restarts the timer corresponding to the current cell group. If the timer corresponding to the cell group times out, the counter corresponding to the cell group is reset to zero and restarts the count. When the value of the counter corresponding to the cell group reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the cell group meets the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the cell group meets the event.
又示例性的,以一个小区组为例,终端设备的物理层通过测量RS,确定该小区组中至少H个小区的波束质量和/或波束干扰满足事件或条件,若任意一个小区满足条件,则向MAC层上报该小区满足条件的指示,MAC层基于物理层上报的指示,将该小区对应的计数器的值加1,并且该小区对应的计时器重启。其中,对于每个小区,若该小区的计时器超时,则该小区对应的计数器置零并重新计数。进一步地,每当MAC层中有H个小区对应的计数器的值加1,则小区组对应的计数器的值加1,且小区组对应的计时器重启。当有K个小区对应的计数器的值都达到最大计数值,或者,当小区组对应的计数器的值达到最大计数值,则确定该小区组满足条件的次数达到最大计数值,或者,则确定该小区组满足事件。其中,H为正整数,H的取值小于或等于小区组所包含的小区数量。在本申请实施例的方案中,计数器的置零条件可以包括以下至少一项:As another example, taking a cell group as an example, the physical layer of the terminal device determines that the beam quality and/or beam interference of at least H cells in the cell group meet an event or condition by measuring RS. If any cell meets the condition, the MAC layer reports an indication that the cell meets the condition. Based on the indication reported by the physical layer, the MAC layer adds 1 to the value of the counter corresponding to the cell, and restarts the timer corresponding to the cell. For each cell, if the timer of the cell times out, the counter corresponding to the cell is reset to zero and restarts. Furthermore, whenever the values of the counters corresponding to H cells in the MAC layer are increased by 1, the value of the counter corresponding to the cell group is increased by 1, and the timer corresponding to the cell group is restarted. When the values of the counters corresponding to K cells reach the maximum count value, or when the value of the counter corresponding to the cell group reaches the maximum count value, it is determined that the number of times the cell group meets the condition reaches the maximum count value, or it is determined that the cell group meets the event. Wherein, H is a positive integer, and the value of H is less than or equal to the number of cells contained in the cell group. In the scheme of the embodiment of the present application, the zeroing condition of the counter may include at least one of the following:
(1)计数器关联的计时器超时;其中,计数器关联的计时器是指,计数器的值更新时被重启的计时器。(1) The timer associated with the counter times out; wherein the timer associated with the counter refers to the timer that is restarted when the value of the counter is updated.
(2)计数器关联的计时器被重配置;也即,网络设备重新配置了计数器关联的计时器。(2) The timer associated with the counter is reconfigured; that is, the network device reconfigures the timer associated with the counter.
(3)计数器的值达到最大计数值;(3) The counter value reaches the maximum count value;
(4)计数器的最大计数值被重配置;也即,网络设备重新配置了计数器的最大计数值。(4) The maximum count value of the counter is reconfigured; that is, the network device reconfigures the maximum count value of the counter.
(5)波束管理完成;其中,波束管理是指第一信息触发的波束管理过程。(5) Beam management is completed; wherein beam management refers to the beam management process triggered by the first information.
(6)波束切换完成;其中,波束切换可以是指第一信息触发的波束切换过程。(6) Beam switching is completed; wherein, beam switching may refer to a beam switching process triggered by the first information.
(7)一个或多个切换事件触发的随机接入过程完成。(7) The random access process triggered by one or more handover events is completed.
(8)测量RS被更新;具体的,网络设备可以重配置或者更新第一事件关联的RS资源,在这种情况下,第一事件对应的计数器可以置零。(8) The measurement RS is updated; specifically, the network device may reconfigure or update the RS resources associated with the first event. In this case, the counter corresponding to the first event may be reset to zero.
(9)测量RS的QCL参数被更新;具体的,网络设备可以重配置或者更新第一事件关联的RS资源的QCL参数,在这种情况下,第一事件对应的计数器可以置零。(9) The QCL parameters of the measured RS are updated; specifically, the network device may reconfigure or update the QCL parameters of the RS resources associated with the first event. In this case, the counter corresponding to the first event may be reset to zero.
(10)第一物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH)被接收L次,L为正整数。其中,L的取值可以由协议定义或者由网络设备配置。示例性的,第一PDCCH可以是采用小区无线网络临时标识(Cell-RadioNetworkTemporaryIdentifier,C-RNTI)加扰的PDCCH,或者,第一PDCCH用于指示上行授权的物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel,PUSCH)以及上行授权的PUSCH的混合自动重传请求(Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest,HARQ)进程号,且上行授权的PUSCH用于发送第一信息,或者,第一PDCCH用于指示上行授权,且该第一PDCCH指示了与发送第一信息的PUSCH相同的HARQ进程号;或者,第一PDCCH用于指示上行授权,且该第一PDCCH用于指示与发送第一信息的PUSCH相同的HARQ进程号和翻转的新数据指示信令域值。(10) The first physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) is received L times, where L is a positive integer. The value of L may be defined by the protocol or configured by the network device. Exemplarily, the first PDCCH may be a PDCCH scrambled with a cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), or the first PDCCH is used to indicate a physical uplink shared channel (Physical Uplink Shared Channel, PUSCH) of uplink authorization and a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) process number of the uplink authorized PUSCH, and the uplink authorized PUSCH is used to send the first information, or the first PDCCH is used to indicate uplink authorization, and the first PDCCH indicates the same HARQ process number as the PUSCH for sending the first information; or the first PDCCH is used to indicate uplink authorization, and the first PDCCH is used to indicate the same HARQ process number as the PUSCH for sending the first information and a flipped new data indication signaling field value.
(11)第一事件对应的辅小区被去激活。具体的,在载波聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)场景中,网络设备使用一个主小区和至少一个辅小区为终端设备服务,在其中一个辅小区上检测切换事件的过程中,该辅小区被去激活,则该辅小区对应的计数器被置零。(11) The secondary cell corresponding to the first event is deactivated. Specifically, in a carrier aggregation (CA) scenario, a network device uses a primary cell and at least one secondary cell to serve a terminal device. During the process of detecting a handover event on one of the secondary cells, the secondary cell is deactivated, and the counter corresponding to the secondary cell is reset to zero.
需要说明的是,响应于置零条件被满足,则计数器的值置为0。上述的置零条件可以适用于任意一个计数器。It should be noted that, in response to the zeroing condition being met, the value of the counter is set to 0. The above zeroing condition can be applied to any counter.
需要说明的是,第一事件所需的计数器和/或计时器也可以由协议定义。其他切换事件所需的计数器和计时器的具体内容可以参照第一事件所需的计数器和计时器的相关描述,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that the counters and/or timers required for the first event may also be defined by the protocol. Specific contents of the counters and timers required for other switching events can refer to the relevant description of the counters and timers required for the first event, which will not be repeated here.
还需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,计数器的初始值为0。计数器的最大计数值可以由网络设备配置或者可以由协议定义。不同计数器的最大计数值可以相同或不同。计时器的时长可以由网络设备配置或者可以由协议定义。第一事件对应的计时器的数量为多个的情况下,不同计时器的时长可以相同或不同。It should also be noted that in the embodiments of the present application, the initial value of the counter is 0. The maximum count value of the counter can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol. The maximum count values of different counters can be the same or different. The duration of the timer can be configured by the network device or defined by the protocol. If there are multiple timers corresponding to the first event, the durations of the different timers can be the same or different.
关于实施例四的更多内容可以参照本文关于其他实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For more details about the fourth embodiment, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments in this document, which will not be repeated here.
实施例五Example 5
参照图5,图5是本申请实施例中第五种通信方法的信令交互示意图。图5示出的通信方法可以包括S51。5 , which is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction in a fifth communication method according to an embodiment of the present application, the communication method shown in FIG5 may include S51 .
S51,终端设备向网络设备发送第一信息,第一信息包括以下至少一项:检测到的切换事件的信息、第一指示信息、第二指示信息。对应的,网络设备接收第一信息。S51: The terminal device sends first information to the network device, where the first information includes at least one of the following: information about a detected handover event, first indication information, and second indication information. Correspondingly, the network device receives the first information.
具体的,第一信息可以包括检测到的切换事件中至少一个切换事件的信息。Specifically, the first information may include information about at least one switching event among the detected switching events.
第一指示信息可以包括以下至少一项:第一波束信息、第一小区信息、第一小区指示信息、第一小区组信息和第一小区组指示信息。The first indication information may include at least one of the following: first beam information, first cell information, first cell indication information, first cell group information and first cell group indication information.
其中,第一波束信息可以是待切换波束的指示信息(如待切换波束的波束信息),也就是说,第一波束信息可以用于指示一个或多个待切换波束。The first beam information may be indication information of the beam to be switched (such as beam information of the beam to be switched), that is, the first beam information may be used to indicate one or more beams to be switched.
进一步地,第一小区信息可以用于指示待切换波束所属小区的信息。例如,用于指示待切换波束所属小区的信息可以是待切换波束所属小区的小区信息。示例性的,若第一信息包括待切换波束所属小区的信息,则可以表示待切换波束所属小区为待切换小区,也即,表示待切换波束所属小区需要被切换。在这种情况下,第一小区信息可以用于指示待切换小区。Furthermore, the first cell information can be used to indicate information about the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs. For example, the information indicating the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs can be cell information of the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs. Exemplarily, if the first information includes information about the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can indicate that the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs is the cell to be switched, i.e., that the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched. In this case, the first cell information can be used to indicate the cell to be switched.
进一步地,第一小区指示信息可以用于指示需要被切换的小区或者指示小区需要被切换。示例性的,第一小区指示信息可以是待切换小区的小区信息或者是待切换波束所属的小区是否需要被切换的指示,也即,待切换波束所属的小区是否为待切换小区的指示。本文中,第一小区指示信息也可以称之为待切换小区的指示信息或者指示待切换小区的信息。Furthermore, the first cell indication information can be used to indicate a cell that needs to be switched or to indicate that a cell needs to be switched. Exemplarily, the first cell indication information can be cell information of a cell to be switched or an indication of whether a cell to which a beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched, that is, an indication of whether the cell to which a beam to be switched belongs is a cell to be switched. Herein, the first cell indication information can also be referred to as indication information of a cell to be switched or information indicating a cell to be switched.
例如,以一个待切换波束为例,该待切换波束为服务小区上的波束,第一信息可以包括用于指示该待切换波束所属小区的第一小区信息,第一信息还可以包括第一小区指示信息,以指示该待切换波束所属的服务小区需要被切换,或者建议被切换。若第一信息仅包括用于指示该待切换波束所属小区的第一小区信息,不包括第一小区指示信息,则可以表示该待切换波束所属的小区不需要被切换,也即,该待切换波束所属的小区仍为终端设备提供服务。For example, taking a beam to be switched as an example, the beam to be switched is a beam on a serving cell. The first information may include first cell information indicating the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs. The first information may also include first cell indication information to indicate that the serving cell to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched, or is recommended to be switched. If the first information only includes the first cell information indicating the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and does not include the first cell indication information, it may indicate that the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs does not need to be switched, that is, the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs still provides services for the terminal device.
再例如,若第一信息中不包括第一小区指示信息,而是包括用于指示待切换波束所属小区的第一小区信息,则可以表示第一小区信息指示的小区需要被切换。换言之,若第一信息包括待切换波束所属小区的信息,则可以默认待切换波束所属小区需要被切换。For another example, if the first information does not include first cell indication information but includes first cell information indicating the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can be indicated that the cell indicated by the first cell information needs to be switched. In other words, if the first information includes information about the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can be assumed that the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched.
再例如,若第一信息中不包括第一小区指示信息,而是包括用于指示待切换波束所属小区的第一小区信息,则可以表示第一小区信息指示的小区不需要被切换。换言之,若第一信息包括待切换波束所属小区的信息,则可以默认待切换波束所属小区不需要被切换。For another example, if the first information does not include first cell indication information but includes first cell information indicating the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can be indicated that the cell indicated by the first cell information does not need to be switched. In other words, if the first information includes information about the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can be assumed that the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs does not need to be switched.
由上,待切换波束所属的小区可以是待切换小区(也即,需要被切换),也可以不是待切换小区(也即,不需要被切换)。在一种情况下,第一小区信息指示待切换波束所属的小区,且该待切换波束所属的小区需要被切换。From the above, the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs may be a cell to be switched (i.e., needs to be switched) or may not be a cell to be switched (i.e., does not need to be switched). In one case, the first cell information indicates the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched.
在另一种情况下,第一小区信息可以仅指示待切换波束所属的小区,并不指示待切换波束所属的小区是否需要被切换,需要进一步结合第一小区指示信息,若待切换波束所属的小区被第一小区指示信息所指示,则该待切换波束所属的小区为待切换小区,也即,需要被切换。若待切换波束所属的小区未被第一小区指示信息所指示,则该待切换波束所属的小区不是待切换小区,也即,不需要被切换。In another case, the first cell information may only indicate the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, but does not indicate whether the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched. This needs to be further combined with the first cell indication information. If the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs is indicated by the first cell indication information, then the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs is the cell to be switched, that is, it needs to be switched. If the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs is not indicated by the first cell indication information, then the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs is not the cell to be switched, that is, it does not need to be switched.
进一步地,第一小区组信息可以用于指示待切换波束所属小区组的信息。例如,用于指示待切换波束所属小区组的信息可以是待切换波束所属小区组的小区组信息。其中,待切换波束所属的小区组可以是指待切换波束所属的小区所属的小区组,或者,待切换波束所属的小区组可以是待切换小区所属的小区组。Furthermore, the first cell group information may be used to indicate information about the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs. For example, the information indicating the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs may be cell group information of the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs. The cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs may refer to the cell group to which the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs belongs, or the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs may be the cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs.
示例性的,若第一信息包括待切换波束所属小区组的信息,则可以表示待切换波束所属小区组为待切换小区组,也即,表示待切换波束所属小区组需要被切换。其中,待切换小区组是指需要被切换的小区组,或者,满足切换事件的小区组。Exemplarily, if the first information includes information about the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, it can indicate that the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs is the cell group to be switched, that is, it indicates that the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched. The cell group to be switched refers to a cell group that needs to be switched, or a cell group that satisfies a switching event.
进一步地,第一小区组指示信息可以用于指示需要被切换的小区组或者指示小区组需要被切换。示例性的,第一小区组指示信息可以是待切换小区组的小区组信息或者是待切换波束所属的小区组是否需要被切换的指示,也即,待切换波束所属的小区组是否为待切换小区组的指示。本文中,第一小区组指示信息也可以称之为待切换小区组的指示信息。Furthermore, the first cell group indication information can be used to indicate a cell group that needs to be switched or to indicate that a cell group needs to be switched. Exemplarily, the first cell group indication information can be cell group information of a cell group to be switched or an indication of whether a cell group to which a beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched, that is, an indication of whether the cell group to which a beam to be switched belongs is a cell group to be switched. Herein, the first cell group indication information can also be referred to as indication information of a cell group to be switched.
例如,若第一信息中不包括第一小区组指示信息,而是包括用于指示待切换波束所属小区组的第一小区组信息,则可以表示第一小区组信息指示的小区组需要被切换。换言之,若第一信息包括待切换波束所属小区组的信息,则可以默认待切换波束所属小区组需要被切换。For example, if the first information does not include first cell group indication information but includes first cell group information indicating the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, it may indicate that the cell group indicated by the first cell group information needs to be switched. In other words, if the first information includes information about the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, it may be assumed that the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched.
再例如,若第一信息中不包括第一小区组指示信息,而是包括用于指示待切换波束所属小区组的第一小区组信息,则可以表示第一小区组信息指示的小区组不需要被切换。换言之,若第一信息包括待切换波束所属小区组的信息,则可以默认待切换波束所属的小区组不需要被切换。若第一信息中包括用于指示待切换波束所属小区组的第一小区组信息和第一小区组指示信息,则可以表示第一小区组信息指示的小区组需要被切换。需要说明的是,本文中的“小区组信息”可以是以下至少一项:小区组索引、小区组标识、物理小区组标识、小区组关联的RS资源配置的标识信息、小区组关联的RS资源集的标识信息、小区组关联的RS资源的标识信息、小区组关联的报告配置的标识信息。For another example, if the first information does not include the first cell group indication information, but includes the first cell group information for indicating the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, it may indicate that the cell group indicated by the first cell group information does not need to be switched. In other words, if the first information includes the information of the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, it may be assumed that the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs does not need to be switched. If the first information includes the first cell group information for indicating the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs and the first cell group indication information, it may indicate that the cell group indicated by the first cell group information needs to be switched. It should be noted that the "cell group information" herein may be at least one of the following: cell group index, cell group identifier, physical cell group identifier, identification information of RS resource configuration associated with the cell group, identification information of RS resource set associated with the cell group, identification information of RS resources associated with the cell group, and identification information of report configuration associated with the cell group.
由上,待切换波束所属的小区组可以是待切换小区组(也即,需要被切换),也可以不是待切换小区组(也即,不需要被切换)。在一种情况下,第一小区组信息指示待切换波束所属的小区组,且该待切换波束所属的小区组需要被切换。From the above, the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs may be a cell group to be switched (i.e., needs to be switched) or may not be a cell group to be switched (i.e., does not need to be switched). In one case, the first cell group information indicates the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched.
在另一种情况下,第一小区组信息仅指示待切换波束所属的小区组,并不指示待切换波束所属的小区组是否需要被切换,需要进一步结合第一小区组指示信息,若待切换波束所属的小区组被第一小区组指示信息所指示,则该待切换波束所属的小区组为待切换小区组,也即,需要被切换。若待切换波束所属的小区组未被第一小区指示信息所指示,则该待切换波束所属的小区组不是待切换小区组,也即,不需要被切换。In another case, the first cell group information only indicates the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs, and does not indicate whether the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs needs to be switched. It is necessary to further combine the first cell group indication information. If the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs is indicated by the first cell group indication information, then the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs is the cell group to be switched, that is, it needs to be switched. If the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs is not indicated by the first cell indication information, then the cell group to which the beam to be switched belongs is not the cell group to be switched, that is, it does not need to be switched.
第二指示信息可以包括以下至少一项:第二波束信息、第二小区信息、第二小区指示信息、第二小区组信息和第二小区组指示信息。The second indication information may include at least one of the following: second beam information, second cell information, second cell indication information, second cell group information, and second cell group indication information.
其中,第二波束信息可以是新波束的指示信息(如新波束的波束信息),也就是说,第二波束信息可以用于指示一个或多个新波束。示例性的,第一信息可以包括:每个或全部待切换波束对应的第二波束信息,以指示待切换波束对应的新波束。The second beam information may be information indicating a new beam (e.g., beam information of a new beam), that is, the second beam information may be used to indicate one or more new beams. Exemplarily, the first information may include second beam information corresponding to each or all beams to be switched, to indicate the new beam corresponding to the beam to be switched.
进一步地,第二小区信息可以用于指示新波束所属小区的信息。例如,用于指示新波束所属小区的信息可以是新波束所属小区的小区信息。Furthermore, the second cell information may be used to indicate information about the cell to which the new beam belongs. For example, the information used to indicate the cell to which the new beam belongs may be cell information about the cell to which the new beam belongs.
示例性的,若待切换波束和新波束属于同一个小区,也就是说,在待切换波束所在的当前小区上找到对应的新波束,则用于指示新波束所属小区的信息可以省略,也可以不省略。若待切换波束和新波束属于不同的小区,也就是说,在待切换波束所在的当前小区以外的其他小区找到对应的新波束,则第二指示信息还可以包括用于指示新波束所属小区的信息,也即,新波束所属小区的信息不省略。Exemplarily, if the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to the same cell, that is, the corresponding new beam is found in the current cell where the beam to be switched is located, then the information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs may or may not be omitted. If the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to different cells, that is, the corresponding new beam is found in a cell other than the current cell where the beam to be switched is located, then the second indication information may further include information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs, that is, the information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs is not omitted.
示例性的,若第一信息包括新波束所属小区的第二小区信息,则可以表示建议切换至新波束所属的小区,也即,表示新波束所属的小区为新小区。Exemplarily, if the first information includes second cell information of the cell to which the new beam belongs, it may indicate that it is recommended to switch to the cell to which the new beam belongs, that is, it indicates that the cell to which the new beam belongs is a new cell.
进一步地,第二小区指示信息可以用于指示建议的新小区。终端设备可以向网络设备建议切换至第二小区指示信息所指示的小区。也即,第二小区指示信息可以用于指示建议切换到的新小区。示例性的,第二小区指示信息可以是新小区的小区信息或者是是否建议切换至新波束所属小区的指示,也即,新波束所属小区是否为新小区的指示。本文中,第二小区指示信息也可以称之为新小区的指示信息。Furthermore, the second cell indication information can be used to indicate a recommended new cell. The terminal device can recommend to the network device that it switch to the cell indicated by the second cell indication information. That is, the second cell indication information can be used to indicate the recommended new cell to switch to. Exemplarily, the second cell indication information can be cell information of the new cell or an indication of whether it is recommended to switch to the cell to which the new beam belongs, that is, an indication of whether the cell to which the new beam belongs is a new cell. Herein, the second cell indication information can also be referred to as indication information of the new cell.
例如,以一个新波束为例,第一信息可以包括用于指示该新波束所属小区的第二小区信息,第一信息还可以包括第二小区指示信息,以指示建议切换至该新波束所属的小区。若第一信息仅包括用于指示该新波束所属小区的第二小区信息,不包括第二小区指示信息,则可以表示不需要切换至该新波束所属的小区,仅应用该新波束即可。For example, taking a new beam as an example, the first information may include second cell information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs. The first information may also include second cell indication information to indicate a recommended handover to the cell to which the new beam belongs. If the first information only includes the second cell information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs, but does not include the second cell indication information, this may indicate that handover to the cell to which the new beam belongs is not required, and only the new beam is sufficient.
再例如,若第一信息中不包括第二小区指示信息,而是包括用于指示新波束所属小区的第二小区信息,则可以表示需要切换至第二小区信息指示的小区。换言之,若第一信息包括新波束所属小区的信息,则可以默认需要切换至新波束所属的小区。For another example, if the first information does not include second cell indication information but includes second cell information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs, then it may indicate that a handover to the cell indicated by the second cell information is required. In other words, if the first information includes information about the cell to which the new beam belongs, then a handover to the cell to which the new beam belongs may be required by default.
再例如,若第一信息中不包括第二小区指示信息,而是包括用于指示新波束所属小区的第二小区信息,则可以表示不需要切换至第二小区信息指示的小区,而是仅应用该新波束。换言之,若第一信息包括新波束所属小区的信息,则可以默认不需要切换至新波束所属的小区,而是仅应用新波束。For another example, if the first information does not include second cell indication information but includes second cell information indicating the cell to which the new beam belongs, this may indicate that handover to the cell indicated by the second cell information is not required, and only the new beam should be used. In other words, if the first information includes information about the cell to which the new beam belongs, this may be a default setting that handover to the cell to which the new beam belongs is not required, and only the new beam should be used.
由上,新波束所属的小区可以是新小区(也即,建议切换到的小区),也可以不是新小区(也即,不需要切换至该小区,仅应用该新波束)。在一种情况下,第二小区信息指示新波束所属的小区,且新波束所属的小区为新小区。From the above, the cell to which the new beam belongs can be a new cell (that is, the cell to which it is recommended to switch), or it may not be a new cell (that is, there is no need to switch to the cell, only the new beam is applied). In one case, the second cell information indicates the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the cell to which the new beam belongs is a new cell.
在另一种情况下,第二小区信息仅指示新波束所属的小区,并不指示新波束所属的小区是否为新小区,需要进一步结合第二小区指示信息,若新波束所属的小区被第二小区指示信息所指示,则该新波束所属的小区为新小区,也即,需要或建议切换至该新波束所属的小区。若新波束所属的小区未被第二小区指示信息所指示,则该新波束所属的小区不是新小区。In another case, the second cell information only indicates the cell to which the new beam belongs, but does not indicate whether the cell to which the new beam belongs is a new cell. This needs to be further combined with the second cell indication information. If the cell to which the new beam belongs is indicated by the second cell indication information, then the cell to which the new beam belongs is a new cell, meaning that a handover to the cell to which the new beam belongs is required or recommended. If the cell to which the new beam belongs is not indicated by the second cell indication information, then the cell to which the new beam belongs is not a new cell.
进一步地,第二小区组信息可以用于指示新波束所属小区组的信息。例如,用于指示新波束所属小区组的信息可以是新小区所属小区组的小区组信息。其中,新波束所属的小区组可以是指新波束所属的小区所属的小区组,或者,新波束所属的小区组可以是新小区所属的小区组。Furthermore, the second cell group information may be used to indicate information about the cell group to which the new beam belongs. For example, the information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs may be cell group information of the cell group to which the new cell belongs. The cell group to which the new beam belongs may refer to the cell group to which the cell to which the new beam belongs belongs, or the cell group to which the new beam belongs may be the cell group to which the new cell belongs.
示例性的,若待切换波束和新波束属于同一个小区组,也就是说,在待切换波束所在的当前小区组上找到对应的新波束,则用于指示新波束所属小区组的信息可以省略,也可以不省略。若待切换波束和新波束属于不同的小区组,也就是说,在待切换波束所在的当前小区组以外的其他小区组找到对应的新波束,则第二指示信息可以包括用于指示新波束所属小区组的信息,也即,第二小区组信息不省略。Exemplarily, if the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to the same cell group, that is, the corresponding new beam is found in the current cell group where the beam to be switched is located, then the information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs may or may not be omitted. If the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to different cell groups, that is, the corresponding new beam is found in a cell group other than the current cell group where the beam to be switched is located, then the second indication information may include information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs, that is, the second cell group information is not omitted.
示例性的,若第一信息包括新波束所属小区组的第二小区组信息,则可以表示建议切换至新波束所属的小区组,也即,表示新波束所属的小区组为新小区组。其中,新小区组是指建议切换到的小区组。Exemplarily, if the first information includes second cell group information of the cell group to which the new beam belongs, it may indicate that it is recommended to switch to the cell group to which the new beam belongs, that is, it indicates that the cell group to which the new beam belongs is the new cell group. The new cell group refers to the cell group to which it is recommended to switch.
进一步地,第二小区组指示信息可以用于指示建议的新小区组。终端设备可以向网络设备建议切换至第二小区组信息所指示的小区组。也即,第二小区组指示信息可以用于指示建议切换到的新小区组。示例性的,第二小区组指示信息可以是新小区组的小区组信息或者是是否建议切换到新波束所属小区组的指示,也即,新波束所属的小区组是否为新小区组的指示。本文中,第二小区组指示信息也可以称之为新小区组的指示信息。Furthermore, the second cell group indication information can be used to indicate a recommended new cell group. The terminal device can suggest to the network device to switch to the cell group indicated by the second cell group information. That is, the second cell group indication information can be used to indicate the new cell group recommended to switch to. Exemplarily, the second cell group indication information can be the cell group information of the new cell group or an indication of whether to recommend switching to the cell group to which the new beam belongs, that is, an indication of whether the cell group to which the new beam belongs is a new cell group. Herein, the second cell group indication information can also be referred to as indication information of the new cell group.
例如,以一个新波束为例,第一信息可以包括用于指示该新波束所属小区组的第二小区组信息,第一信息还可以包括第二小区组指示信息,以指示建议切换至该新波束所属的小区组。若第一信息仅包括用于指示该新波束所属小区组的第二小区组信息,不包括第二小区组指示信息,则可以表示不需要切换至该新波束所属的小区组,仅应用该新波束即可。For example, taking a new beam as an example, the first information may include second cell group information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs. The first information may also include second cell group indication information to indicate a recommendation to switch to the cell group to which the new beam belongs. If the first information only includes the second cell group information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs, but does not include the second cell group indication information, this may indicate that switching to the cell group to which the new beam belongs is not required, and only the new beam is sufficient.
再例如,若第一信息中不包括第二小区组指示信息,而是包括用于指示新波束所属小区组的第二小区组信息,则可以表示需要切换至第二小区组信息指示的小区组。换言之,若第一信息包括新波束所属小区组的信息,则可以默认需要切换至新波束所属的小区组。For another example, if the first information does not include second cell group indication information but includes second cell group information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs, then it may indicate that a handover to the cell group indicated by the second cell group information is required. In other words, if the first information includes information about the cell group to which the new beam belongs, then it may be assumed that a handover to the cell group to which the new beam belongs is required.
再例如,若第一信息中不包括第二小区组指示信息,而是包括用于指示新波束所属小区组的第二小区组信息,则可以表示不需要切换至第二小区组信息指示的小区组,而是仅应用该新波束。换言之,若第一信息包括新波束所属小区组的信息,则可以默认不需要切换至新波束所属的小区组,而是仅应用新波束。For another example, if the first information does not include second cell group indication information but includes second cell group information indicating the cell group to which the new beam belongs, this may indicate that switching to the cell group indicated by the second cell group information is not necessary, and only the new beam should be applied. In other words, if the first information includes information about the cell group to which the new beam belongs, this may be a default setting that switching to the cell group to which the new beam belongs is not necessary, and only the new beam should be applied.
由上,新波束所属的小区组可以是新小区组(也即,建议切换到的小区),也可以不是新小区组(也即,未建议切换至该小区组)。在一种情况下,第二小区组信息指示新波束所属的小区组,且建议切换至该新波束所属的小区组。From the above, the cell group to which the new beam belongs may be a new cell group (i.e., the cell to which switching is recommended) or may not be a new cell group (i.e., switching to the cell group is not recommended). In one case, the second cell group information indicates the cell group to which the new beam belongs, and it is recommended to switch to the cell group to which the new beam belongs.
在另一种情况下,第二小区组信息仅指示新波束所属的小区组,并不指示建议切换至新波束所属的小区组,需要进一步结合第二小区组指示信息,若新波束所属的小区组被第二小区组指示信息所指示,则该新波束所属的小区组为新小区组。若新波束所属的小区组未被第二小区指示信息所指示,则该新波束所属的小区组不是新小区组。在一种可能的实现方式中,新波束可以包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束。示例性的,第二波束信息可以包括:候选波束的波束信息和/或第一目标波束的波束信息。换言之,第一信息指示的新波束可以包括一个或多个候选波束。示例性的,候选波束可以理解为第一信息上报的新波束。由此,终端设备可以通过第一信息向网络设备告知满足切换事件的备选波束。In another case, the second cell group information only indicates the cell group to which the new beam belongs, and does not indicate that it is recommended to switch to the cell group to which the new beam belongs. It is necessary to further combine the second cell group indication information. If the cell group to which the new beam belongs is indicated by the second cell group indication information, then the cell group to which the new beam belongs is the new cell group. If the cell group to which the new beam belongs is not indicated by the second cell indication information, then the cell group to which the new beam belongs is not a new cell group. In one possible implementation, the new beam may include a candidate beam and/or a first target beam. Exemplarily, the second beam information may include: beam information of the candidate beam and/or beam information of the first target beam. In other words, the new beam indicated by the first information may include one or more candidate beams. Exemplarily, the candidate beam may be understood as the new beam reported by the first information. Thus, the terminal device may inform the network device of the alternative beam that satisfies the switching event through the first information.
目标波束是指终端设备所要切换到的新波束,第一目标波束可以是第一信息所指示的目标波束,或者,第一目标波束可以是指终端设备所建议的目标波束。网络设备可以获知终端设备所建议的目标波束或者终端设备将要切换到的目标波束。示例性的,第一目标波束可以是第一信息所指示的新波束或候选波束中波束质量最优的波束。又示例性的,第一目标波束可以是第一信息中第一目标指示信息所指示的波束。再示例性的,第一目标波束可以是第一信息所指示的新波束或候选波束中的默认波束。其中,默认波束可以是标识最小或最大的波束等,本实施例对此并不限制。The target beam refers to the new beam to which the terminal device is to switch. The first target beam may be the target beam indicated by the first information, or the first target beam may refer to the target beam recommended by the terminal device. The network device may be informed of the target beam recommended by the terminal device or the target beam to which the terminal device is to switch. Exemplarily, the first target beam may be the new beam indicated by the first information or the beam with the best beam quality among the candidate beams. Another exemplary embodiment, the first target beam may be the beam indicated by the first target indication information in the first information. Another exemplary embodiment, the first target beam may be the new beam indicated by the first information or the default beam among the candidate beams. Among them, the default beam may be a beam with the smallest or largest identifier, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment.
进一步地,第一信息可以包括以下至少一项:用于指示候选波束所属小区的指示信息、用于指示第一目标波束所属小区的指示信息。进一步地,第二小区指示信息所指示或建议的新小区可以包括候选波束所属的小区和/或第一目标波束所属的小区。Furthermore, the first information may include at least one of the following: indication information indicating the cell to which the candidate beam belongs, and indication information indicating the cell to which the first target beam belongs. Furthermore, the new cell indicated or suggested by the second cell indication information may include the cell to which the candidate beam belongs and/or the cell to which the first target beam belongs.
进一步地,第二小区组信息所指示或建议的新小区组可以包括候选波束所属小区所属的小区组和/或第一目标波束所属小区所属的小区组。Furthermore, the new cell group indicated or suggested by the second cell group information may include the cell group to which the cell to which the candidate beam belongs and/or the cell group to which the cell to which the first target beam belongs.
需要说明的是,关于候选波束的更多内容可以参照本文关于新波束的相关描述,以及关于第一目标波束的更多内容可以参照本文关于新波束的相关描述。换言之,本文中关于新波束的相关描述均可以适用于候选波束和第一目标波束。换言之,本文中的“新波束”也可以替换为“候选波束”、“目标波束”、“第一目标波束”等。本文中关于新波束所属小区的相关描述可以适用于候选波束所属的小区以及第一目标波束所属的小区。本文中关于新波束所属小区组的相关描述可以适用于候选波束所属的小区组以及第一目标波束所属的小区组。It should be noted that for more information about the candidate beam, please refer to the relevant description about the new beam in this article, and for more information about the first target beam, please refer to the relevant description about the new beam in this article. In other words, the relevant description about the new beam in this article can be applied to the candidate beam and the first target beam. In other words, the "new beam" in this article can also be replaced by "candidate beam", "target beam", "first target beam", etc. The relevant description about the cell to which the new beam belongs in this article can be applied to the cell to which the candidate beam belongs and the cell to which the first target beam belongs. The relevant description about the cell group to which the new beam belongs in this article can be applied to the cell group to which the candidate beam belongs and the cell group to which the first target beam belongs.
此外,本文中的“新小区”也可以替换为“目标小区”、“候选小区”、“第一目标小区”等,本文中的“新小区组”可以替换为“目标小区组”、“候选小区组”、“第一目标小区组”等。In addition, the "new cell" in this article can also be replaced by "target cell", "candidate cell", "first target cell", etc., and the "new cell group" in this article can be replaced by "target cell group", "candidate cell group", "first target cell group", etc.
可选的,第一信息还可以包括当前波束的指示信息。Optionally, the first information may also include indication information of the current beam.
在本申请实施例的方案中,第一信息的信令长度可以是固定长度,其中,固定长度可以由协议定义或者由网络设备配置。或者,第一信息的信令长度可以是可变长度。具体的,第一信息的信令长度可以取决于第一信息所包含的内容。示例性的,第一信息的信令长度可以小于或等于最大长度,其中,最大长度可以由网络设备配置或者可以由协议定义。In the embodiments of the present application, the signaling length of the first information may be a fixed length, where the fixed length may be defined by a protocol or configured by a network device. Alternatively, the signaling length of the first information may be a variable length. Specifically, the signaling length of the first information may depend on the content contained in the first information. Exemplarily, the signaling length of the first information may be less than or equal to a maximum length, where the maximum length may be configured by a network device or defined by a protocol.
下面对承载第一信息的上行资源进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of the uplink resources that carry the first information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息可以承载于物理上行控制信道(Physical Uplink Control Channel,PUCCH)。示例性的,第一信息可以承载于主小区的PUCCH中。In one possible implementation, the first information may be carried in a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH). For example, the first information may be carried in the PUCCH of a primary cell.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息可以承载于PUSCH。示例性的,终端设备可以通过最近可用且能够容纳第一信息的媒体访问控制-控制单元(medium access control-control element,MAC CE)信令发送第一信息。又示例性的,第一信息可以承载于最近可用的上行授权PUSCH中。In another possible implementation, the first information may be carried on a PUSCH. Exemplarily, the terminal device may send the first information via a recently available medium access control-control element (MAC CE) signaling that can accommodate the first information. Furthermore, exemplarily, the first information may be carried in a recently available uplink grant PUSCH.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,网络设备可以向终端设备预配置用于上报第一信息的上行资源(如PUCCH资源或PUSCH资源),则终端设备可以在预配置的上行资源上发送第一信息。In another possible implementation, the network device may pre-configure uplink resources (such as PUCCH resources or PUSCH resources) for reporting the first information to the terminal device, and the terminal device may send the first information on the pre-configured uplink resources.
下面对第一信息的接收方进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of the recipient of the first information.
在第一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息可以发送至当前的服务小区,和/或,发送至当前的服务小区所属的TRP或当前的服务小区所包括的TRP。In a first possible implementation, the first information may be sent to the current serving cell, and/or to the TRP to which the current serving cell belongs or the TRP included in the current serving cell.
在第二种可能的实现方式中,第一信息可以发送至待切换波束所属的小区和/或新波束所属的小区。In a second possible implementation manner, the first information may be sent to the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs and/or the cell to which the new beam belongs.
在第一种情况下,例如,在小区内的波束切换场景中,待切换波束和新波束属于同一个小区,则终端设备可以向该小区(也即,待切换波束和新波束所属的小区)发送第一信息。也就是说,终端设备可以在当前小区发送第一信息。In the first case, for example, in a beam switching scenario within a cell, if the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to the same cell, the terminal device can send the first information to the cell (i.e., the cell to which the beam to be switched and the new beam belong). In other words, the terminal device can send the first information in the current cell.
具体的,终端设备可以使用待切换波束对应的上行波束发送第一信息。或者,终端设备可以使用新波束对应的上行波束发送第一信息,但并不限于此。Specifically, the terminal device may use the uplink beam corresponding to the beam to be switched to send the first information. Alternatively, the terminal device may use the uplink beam corresponding to the new beam to send the first information, but is not limited thereto.
示例性的,在单TRP场景中,若待切换波束和新波束属于同一个TRP下的同一个小区,则终端设备可以向该TRP(也即,待切换波束和新波束所属的TRP)发送第一信息。也就是说,终端设备可以向当前TRP发送第一信息。其中,单TRP场景是指:对于单个终端设备,由单个TRP进行资源调度。For example, in a single TRP scenario, if the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to the same cell under the same TRP, the terminal device can send the first information to the TRP (that is, the TRP to which the beam to be switched and the new beam belong). In other words, the terminal device can send the first information to the current TRP. The single TRP scenario means that for a single terminal device, resource scheduling is performed by a single TRP.
又示例性的,在多TRP场景中,假设待切换波束和新波束属于同一个小区,但该小区隶属于多个TRP或该小区包括多个TRP,若待切换波束和新波束对应多个TRP中的同一个TRP(也即,待切换波束和新波束属于同一个TRP),则终端设备可以向待切换波束和新波束对应的同一个TRP发送第一信息。若待切换波束和新波束对应多个TRP中的不同TRP,则终端设备可以向待切换波束对应的TRP发送第一信息和/或向新波束对应的TRP发送第一信息。As another example, in a multi-TRP scenario, assuming that the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to the same cell, but the cell belongs to multiple TRPs or the cell includes multiple TRPs, if the beam to be switched and the new beam correspond to the same TRP in multiple TRPs (that is, the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to the same TRP), the terminal device can send the first information to the same TRP corresponding to the beam to be switched and the new beam. If the beam to be switched and the new beam correspond to different TRPs in multiple TRPs, the terminal device can send the first information to the TRP corresponding to the beam to be switched and/or send the first information to the TRP corresponding to the new beam.
在另一种情况下,例如,在小区间的波束切换场景中,待切换波束和新波束属于不同的小区,则终端设备可以向待切换波束所属的小区发送第一信息,和/或,向新波束所属的小区发送第一信息。其中,向待切换小区发送第一信息可以是使用待切换波束对应的上行波束发送第一信息。在新波束所属的小区发送第一信息可以是使用新波束对应的上行波束发送第一信息。In another case, for example, in an inter-cell beam switching scenario, the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to different cells. In this case, the terminal device may send the first information to the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and/or send the first information to the cell to which the new beam belongs. Sending the first information to the cell to be switched may include sending the first information using the uplink beam corresponding to the beam to be switched. Sending the first information in the cell to which the new beam belongs may include sending the first information using the uplink beam corresponding to the new beam.
示例性的,在单TRP场景中,若待切换波束和新波束属于同一个TRP下的不同小区(例如,待切换波束所属的小区和新波束所属的小区的频点不同),则终端设备可以向该TRP(也即,待切换波束和新波束所属的TRP)发送第一信息。也就是说,终端设备可以在当前TRP发送第一信息。或者,终端设备可以向待切换波束所属的小区发送第一信息,和/或,向新波束所属的小区发送第一信息。Exemplarily, in a single TRP scenario, if the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to different cells under the same TRP (for example, the frequency points of the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs and the cell to which the new beam belongs are different), the terminal device can send the first information to the TRP (that is, the TRP to which the beam to be switched and the new beam belong). That is, the terminal device can send the first information at the current TRP. Alternatively, the terminal device can send the first information to the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and/or send the first information to the cell to which the new beam belongs.
又示例性的,在多TRP场景中,假设待切换波束和新波束属于不同的小区,但待切换波束所属的小区和新波束所属的小区分别隶属于不同的TRP,或者,待切换波束所属的小区和新波束所属的小区分别包括不同的TRP,则终端设备可以向待切换波束对应的TRP发送第一信息,和/或,向新波束对应的TRP发送第一信息,和/或,向待切换波束所属的小区发送第一信息,和/或,向新波束所属的小区发送第一信息。As another example, in a multi-TRP scenario, assuming that the beam to be switched and the new beam belong to different cells, but the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs and the cell to which the new beam belongs belong to different TRPs, or the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs and the cell to which the new beam belongs include different TRPs, the terminal device can send the first information to the TRP corresponding to the beam to be switched, and/or send the first information to the TRP corresponding to the new beam, and/or send the first information to the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and/or send the first information to the cell to which the new beam belongs.
在第三种可能的实现方式中,第一信息可以发送至待切换小区和/或新小区。In a third possible implementation manner, the first information may be sent to the cell to be switched and/or the new cell.
需要说明的是,终端设备向多个小区和/或向多个TRP发送第一信息时,可以采用单频网(Single Frequency Network,SFN)传输、时分复用(Time Division Matpleig,TDM)传输、空分复用(Space Division Multiplexing,SDM)传输、频分复用(Frequency Division Multiplexing,FDM)传输中的一种或多种方式发送第一信息。It should be noted that when the terminal device sends the first information to multiple cells and/or to multiple TRPs, it can use one or more of single frequency network (SFN) transmission, time division multiplexing (TDM) transmission, space division multiplexing (SDM) transmission, and frequency division multiplexing (FDM) transmission to send the first information.
关于实施例五的更多内容可以参照本文关于其他实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For more details about the fifth embodiment, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments in this document, which will not be repeated here.
实施例六Example 6
参照图6,图6是本申请实施例中一种通信方法的流程示意图。图6示出的通信方法可以包括S61和S62。其中,S62是可选的步骤。6, which is a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application, may include steps S61 and S62, wherein S62 is an optional step.
S61,终端设备向网络设备发送第一信息。对应的,网络设备接收第一信息。S61: The terminal device sends first information to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the first information.
其中,第一信息可以是S51中发送的第一信息。The first information may be the first information sent in S51.
可选的,第一信息还可以包括以下至少一项:第三指示信息、概率信息、面板信息、第四指示信息、第五指示信息、第六指示信息、建议的统一TCI状态的类型、建议的统一TCI框架、建议的传输方案、建议第二信道采用的传输方案、建议的波束训练方式。Optionally, the first information may also include at least one of the following: third indication information, probability information, panel information, fourth indication information, fifth indication information, sixth indication information, the type of recommended unified TCI state, the recommended unified TCI framework, the recommended transmission scheme, the recommended transmission scheme for the second channel, and the recommended beam training method.
下面对第一信息的具体内容进行示例性的说明。The specific content of the first information is exemplarily described below.
(1)第三指示信息;(1) third indication information;
具体的,第三指示信息可以包括以下至少一项:Specifically, the third indication information may include at least one of the following:
a).第一信道适用的新波束;a). The new beam applicable to the first channel;
其中,第一信道可以是以下至少一项:PUSCH、物理上行控制(Physical Uplink Control Channel,PUCCH)、物理下行共享信道(physical downlink share channel,PDSCH)和PDCCH。也就是说,终端设备可以在第一信息中建议第一信道应用的新波束。The first channel may be at least one of the following: PUSCH, Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH), Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH), and PDCCH. In other words, the terminal device may suggest a new beam to be applied to the first channel in the first message.
更具体地,如上文所述,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束,对应的,第三指示信息可以包括:第一信道适用的候选波束,和/或,第一信道适用的第一目标波束。More specifically, as described above, the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam. Correspondingly, the third indication information may include: a candidate beam applicable to the first channel, and/or a first target beam applicable to the first channel.
在具体实施中,若第一信息包括多个小区上的新波束,第三指示信息可以包括各个小区上第一信道适用的新波束。In a specific implementation, if the first information includes new beams on multiple cells, the third indication information may include the new beam applicable to the first channel on each cell.
b)新波束适用的信道;b) the channel to which the new beam applies;
以一个新波束为例,第一信息可以包括建议应用该新波束的信道。Taking a new beam as an example, the first information may include a channel recommended for applying the new beam.
更具体地,如上文所述,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束,对应的,第一信息可以包括候选波束适用的信道和/或第一目标波束适用的信道。More specifically, as described above, the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam. Correspondingly, the first information may include a channel to which the candidate beam is applicable and/or a channel to which the first target beam is applicable.
c)新波束适用的RS;c) RS applicable to the new beam;
以一个新波束为例,第一信息可以包括建议应用该新波束的RS。Taking a new beam as an example, the first information may include an RS that recommends application of the new beam.
更具体地,如上文所述,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束,对应的,第一信息可以包括候选波束适用的RS和/或第一目标波束适用的RS。More specifically, as described above, the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam. Correspondingly, the first information may include an RS applicable to the candidate beam and/or an RS applicable to the first target beam.
d)新波束适用的CORESET;d) CORESET to which the new beam applies;
以一个新波束为例,第一信息可以包括建议应用该新波束的CORESET。Taking a new beam as an example, the first information may include a CORESET that recommends applying the new beam.
更具体地,如上文所述,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束,对应的,第一信息可以包括候选波束适用的CORESET和/或第一目标波束适用的CORESET。More specifically, as described above, the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam. Correspondingly, the first information may include a CORESET applicable to the candidate beam and/or a CORESET applicable to the first target beam.
f)新波束不适用的信道;f) Channels for which the new beam is not applicable;
以一个新波束为例,第一信息可以包括建议不适用该新波束的信道。Taking a new beam as an example, the first information may include a suggestion of channels that are not applicable to the new beam.
更具体地,如上文所述,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束,对应的,第一信息可以包括候选波束不适用的信道和/或第一目标波束不适用的信道。More specifically, as described above, the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam. Correspondingly, the first information may include channels for which the candidate beam is not applicable and/or channels for which the first target beam is not applicable.
g)新波束不适用的RS;g) RS for which the new beam is not applicable;
以一个新波束为例,第一信息可以包括建议不适用该新波束的RS。Taking a new beam as an example, the first information may include a recommendation that the RS not be applicable to the new beam.
更具体地,如上文所述,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束,对应的,第一信息可以包括候选波束不适用的RS和/或第一目标波束不适用的RS。More specifically, as described above, the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam. Correspondingly, the first information may include an RS for which the candidate beam is not applicable and/or an RS for which the first target beam is not applicable.
h)新波束不适用的CORESET;h) CORESET for which the new beam is not applicable;
以一个新波束为例,第一信息可以包括建议不适用该新波束的CORESET。Taking a new beam as an example, the first information may include a CORESET that recommends not applying the new beam.
更具体地,如上文所述,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束,对应的,第一信息可以包括候选波束不适用的CORESET和/或第一目标波束不适用的CORESET。也即,第一信息可以包括建议不应用新波束的CORESET;More specifically, as described above, the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam. Accordingly, the first information may include a CORESET to which the candidate beam is not applicable and/or a CORESET to which the first target beam is not applicable. That is, the first information may include a CORESET for which it is recommended not to apply the new beam.
更具体地,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束,对应的,More specifically, the new beam includes the candidate beam and/or the first target beam, and correspondingly,
下面以第一波束为例,对新波束不适用的信道、不适用的RS和不适用的CORESET进行示例性的说明。其中,第一波束可以是新波束中的一个波束。具体的,第一波束可以为当前的服务小区上的新波束,或者,第一波束可以是非服务小区(例如,可以是邻小区)上的新波束;或者第一波束可以是备选小区上的新波束。The following uses the first beam as an example to illustrate channels, RSs, and CORESETs that are not applicable to the new beam. The first beam may be one of the new beams. Specifically, the first beam may be a new beam on the current serving cell, or a new beam on a non-serving cell (e.g., a neighboring cell); or a new beam on an alternative cell.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一波束不适用于第一PDSCH和/或第一PUSCH,其中,调度第一PDSCH的PDCCH和第一PDSCH的传输时间间隔小于或等于第二十二门限值,第一PUSCH为DCI格式0_0指示或激活的PUSCH。换言之,第一波束所适用的信道不包括第一PDSCH以及第一PUSCH。In one possible implementation, the first beam is not applicable to the first PDSCH and/or the first PUSCH, wherein the transmission time interval between the PDCCH that schedules the first PDSCH and the first PDSCH is less than or equal to the twenty-second threshold, and the first PUSCH is a PUSCH indicated or activated by DCI format 0_0. In other words, the channels applicable to the first beam do not include the first PDSCH and the first PUSCH.
进一步,如果第一波束是非服务小区PCI的新波束,则第一波束不适用于上述第一PDSCH和/或第一PUSCH。进一步地,终端设备可以将第一PDSCH和/或第一PUSCH的波束切换为服务小区上的默认波束。如果第一波束是服务小区上的新波束,则第一波束可以适用于第一PDSCH和/或第一PUSCH。Furthermore, if the first beam is a new beam for a non-serving cell PCI, the first beam is not applicable to the first PDSCH and/or the first PUSCH. Furthermore, the terminal device may switch the beam for the first PDSCH and/or the first PUSCH to the default beam on the serving cell. If the first beam is a new beam on the serving cell, the first beam may be applicable to the first PDSCH and/or the first PUSCH.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,第一波束不适用于第一RS,第一RS不应用统一TCI状态。也就是说,第一波束不适用于不应用统一TCI状态的RS。换言之,第一波束可以适用于应用统一TCI状态的RS。In another possible implementation, the first beam is not applicable to the first RS, and the first RS does not apply a unified TCI state. In other words, the first beam is not applicable to RSs that do not apply a unified TCI state. In other words, the first beam can be applicable to RSs that apply a unified TCI state.
进一步,如果第一波束是非服务小区PCI的新波束,则第一波束不适用于上述第一RS。进一步地,终端设备可以将第一RS的波束切换为服务小区上的默认波束。如果第一波束是服务小区上的新波束,则第一波束可以适用于第一RS。Furthermore, if the first beam is a new beam of a non-serving cell PCI, the first beam is not applicable to the first RS. Furthermore, the terminal device may switch the beam of the first RS to the default beam on the serving cell. If the first beam is a new beam on the serving cell, the first beam may be applicable to the first RS.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,第一波束不适用于第二RS,其中,触发第二RS的PDCCH与第二RS之间的传输时间间隔小于或等于第二十三门限值。也就是说,若用于触发RS的PDCCH以及该PDCCH所触发的RS之间的传输时间间隔大于第二十三门限值,则该PDCCH所触发的RS可以应用第一波束。In another possible implementation, the first beam is not applicable to the second RS, where the transmission time interval between the PDCCH triggering the second RS and the second RS is less than or equal to a 23rd threshold value. In other words, if the transmission time interval between the PDCCH used to trigger the RS and the RS triggered by the PDCCH is greater than the 23rd threshold value, the first beam can be applied to the RS triggered by the PDCCH.
进一步,如果第一波束是非服务小区PCI的新波束,则第一波束不适用于上述第二RS。进一步地,终端设备可以将第二RS的波束切换为服务小区上的默认波束。如果第一波束是服务小区上的新波束,则第一波束可以适用于第二RS。Furthermore, if the first beam is a new beam of a non-serving cell PCI, the first beam is not applicable to the above-mentioned second RS. Furthermore, the terminal device can switch the beam of the second RS to the default beam on the serving cell. If the first beam is a new beam on the serving cell, the first beam can be applicable to the second RS.
在再一种可能的实现方式中,第一波束不适用于第一CORESET,第一CORESET关联的搜索空间(Search Space,SS)中的至少一个SS为公共搜索空间(Common Search Space,CSS)或者除类型3(Type3)以外的CSS。换言之,第一CORESET关联的SS包括CSS,和/或,第一CORESET关联的SS包括类型3的CSS。换言之,第一波束可以适用于不关联CSS且不关联类型3的CSS的CORESET。In another possible implementation, the first beam is not applicable to the first CORESET, and at least one of the search spaces (SSs) associated with the first CORESET is a common search space (CSS) or a CSS other than Type 3. In other words, the SS associated with the first CORESET includes a CSS, and/or the SS associated with the first CORESET includes a Type 3 CSS. In other words, the first beam may be applicable to a CORESET that is not associated with a CSS and is not associated with a Type 3 CSS.
进一步,如果第一波束是非服务小区PCI的新波束,则第一波束不适用于上述第一CORESET。进一步地,终端设备可以将第一CORESET的波束切换为服务小区上的默认波束。如果第一波束是服务小区上的新波束,则第一波束可以适用于第一CORESET。Furthermore, if the first beam is a new beam of a non-serving cell PCI, the first beam is not applicable to the first CORESET. Furthermore, the terminal device may switch the beam of the first CORESET to a default beam on the serving cell. If the first beam is a new beam on the serving cell, the first beam may be applicable to the first CORESET.
需要说明的是,上文中第一波束不适用的信道、RS、CORESET中的至少一项可以携带于第一信息中,或者,也可以由协议定义。It should be noted that at least one of the channel, RS, and CORESET to which the first beam is not applicable mentioned above can be carried in the first information, or can also be defined by the protocol.
进一步地,可以由网络配置或协议约定上述的第一PDSCH、第一PUSCH、第一RS、第二RS、第一CORESET中的至少一项总是不应用第一波束,或者由RRC信令配置上述的第一PDSCH、第一PUSCH、第一RS、第二RS、第一CORESET中的至少一项不应用第一波束。示例性的,如果RRC信令配置了第一PDSCH、第一PUSCH、第一RS、第二RS、第一CORESET中的至少一项应用第一波束,则RRC信令所配置的第一PDSCH、第一PUSCH、第一RS、第二RS、第一CORESET中的至少一项也可以应用第一波束。Furthermore, it may be configured by the network or agreed upon by the protocol that at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the second RS, and the first CORESET always does not apply the first beam, or it may be configured by RRC signaling that at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the second RS, and the first CORESET does not apply the first beam. For example, if RRC signaling configures at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the second RS, and the first CORESET to apply the first beam, then at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the second RS, and the first CORESET configured by RRC signaling may also apply the first beam.
进一步地,对于上文中第一PDSCH、第一PUSCH、第一RS、第一RS、第一CORESET中的至少一项所应用的波束为待切换波束,则可以不切换第一PDSCH、第一PUSCH、第一RS、第一RS、第一CORESET中的至少一项当前所应用的波束,或者,切换至当前服务小区上的默认波束。或者,若当前服务小区为待切换小区,则可以不切换当前服务小区上的第一PDSCH、第一PUSCH、第一RS、第一RS、第一CORESET中至少一项所使用的波束,或者,将当前服务小区上的第一PDSCH、第一PUSCH、第一RS、第一RS、第一CORESET中至少一项切换至当前服务小区上的默认波束。Furthermore, if the beam applied by at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the first RS, and the first CORESET in the above text is a beam to be switched, the beam currently applied by at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the first RS, and the first CORESET may not be switched, or the beam may be switched to the default beam on the current serving cell. Alternatively, if the current serving cell is the cell to be switched, the beam used by at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the first RS, and the first CORESET on the current serving cell may not be switched, or at least one of the first PDSCH, the first PUSCH, the first RS, the first RS, and the first CORESET on the current serving cell may be switched to the default beam on the current serving cell.
(2)概率信息(2) Probability information
具体的,概率信息可以包括以下至少一项:应用新波束的概率信息、切换至新小区的概率信息、切换至新小区组的概率信息。其中,概率信息可以是应用人工智能(Artificial Intelligence,AI)模型或机器学习(Machine Learning,ML)模型得到的。Specifically, the probability information may include at least one of the following: probability information of applying a new beam, probability information of switching to a new cell, and probability information of switching to a new cell group. The probability information may be obtained by applying an artificial intelligence (AI) model or a machine learning (ML) model.
更具体地,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束,对应的,概率信息可以包括以下至少一项:应用候选波束的概率信息;切换至候选波束所属小区的概率信息;切换至候选波束所属小区所属的小区组的概率信息;应用第一目标波束的概率信息;切换至第一目标波束所属小区的概率信息;切换至第一目标波束所属小区所属小区组的概率信息。More specifically, the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam. Accordingly, the probability information may include at least one of the following: probability information of applying the candidate beam; probability information of switching to the cell to which the candidate beam belongs; probability information of switching to the cell group to which the cell to which the candidate beam belongs; probability information of applying the first target beam; probability information of switching to the cell to which the first target beam belongs; probability information of switching to the cell group to which the cell to which the first target beam belongs.
(3)面板信息(3) Panel information
具体的,面板信息可以包括:待切换波束对应的面板信息和/或新波束对应的面板信息。Specifically, the panel information may include: panel information corresponding to the beam to be switched and/or panel information corresponding to the new beam.
更具体的,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束,面板信息可以包括:候选波束对应的面板信息,和/或,第一目标波束对应的面板信息。More specifically, the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam, and the panel information may include: panel information corresponding to the candidate beam and/or panel information corresponding to the first target beam.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例的方案中,面板信息可以是指以下至少一项:控制资源集、控制资源集池、控制资源集组、终端能力集信息、终端能力信息、TCI状态信息、TCI状态池信息、终端能力值信息、终端能力值集信息、参考信号资源信息、参考信号资源集信息、参考信号资源组信息、参考信号端口数信息、天线面板、天线阵列信息、天线子阵列信息、天线组信息、天线子组信息、天线集合信息、天线子集信息等。It should be noted that, in the scheme of the embodiments of the present application, the panel information may refer to at least one of the following: control resource set, control resource set pool, control resource set group, terminal capability set information, terminal capability information, TCI status information, TCI status pool information, terminal capability value information, terminal capability value set information, reference signal resource information, reference signal resource set information, reference signal resource group information, reference signal port number information, antenna panel, antenna array information, antenna subarray information, antenna group information, antenna subgroup information, antenna set information, antenna subset information, etc.
(4)第四指示信息;(4) fourth instruction information;
具体的,第一信息指示的新波束的数量可以为多个,多个新波束可以用于下行同时接收。Specifically, the number of new beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple new beams can be used for simultaneous downlink reception.
示例性的,第四指示信息可以包括以下至少一项:多个新波束用于下行同时接收的指示信息、用于下行同时接收的多个新波束的指示信息、用于下行同时接收的多个新波束的面板信息。例如,新波束包括波束1和波束2,第一信息可以包括波束1和波束2的波束信息,此外,第一信息还可以包括用于指示波束1和波束2用于下行同时接收的指示。又例如,第一信息的格式可以包括第一信元,第一信元用于承载用于下行同时接收的多个新波束的波束信息,假设新波束中波束1和波束2用于下行同时接收,则第一信元中承载波束1和波束2的波束信息,在这种情况下,无需额外再携带波束1和波束2用于下行同时接收的指示。Exemplarily, the fourth indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information that multiple new beams are used for simultaneous downlink reception, indication information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception, and panel information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception. For example, the new beam includes beam 1 and beam 2, and the first information may include beam information of beam 1 and beam 2. In addition, the first information may also include an indication for indicating that beam 1 and beam 2 are used for simultaneous downlink reception. For another example, the format of the first information may include a first information element, and the first information element is used to carry beam information of multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception. Assuming that beam 1 and beam 2 in the new beam are used for simultaneous downlink reception, the first information element carries beam information of beam 1 and beam 2. In this case, there is no need to additionally carry an indication that beam 1 and beam 2 are used for simultaneous downlink reception.
更具体的,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束。第一信息指示的候选波束的数量可以为多个,多个候选波束可以用于下行同时接收,和/或,第一信息指示的第一目标波束的数量可以为多个,多个第一目标波束可以用于下行同时接收。对应的,第四指示信息可以包括以下至少一项:多个候选波束用于下行同时接收的指示信息、用于下行同时接收的多个候选波束的指示信息、用于下行同时接收的多个候选波束对应的面板信息、多个第一目标波束用于下行同时接收的指示信息、用于下行同时接收的多个第一目标波束的指示信息、用于下行同时接收的多个第一目标波束对应的面板信息。More specifically, the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam. The number of candidate beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple candidate beams may be used for simultaneous downlink reception, and/or the number of first target beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple first target beams may be used for simultaneous downlink reception. Correspondingly, the fourth indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information of multiple candidate beams for simultaneous downlink reception, indication information of multiple candidate beams for simultaneous downlink reception, panel information corresponding to multiple candidate beams for simultaneous downlink reception, indication information of multiple first target beams for simultaneous downlink reception, indication information of multiple first target beams for simultaneous downlink reception, and panel information corresponding to multiple first target beams for simultaneous downlink reception.
(5)第五指示信息(5) Fifth instruction information
具体的,第一信息指示的新波束的数量可以为多个,多个新波束可以用于上行同时发送。Specifically, the number of new beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple new beams may be used for uplink transmission simultaneously.
示例性的,第五指示信息可以包括以下至少一项:多个新波束用于上行同时发送的指示信息、用于上行同时发送的多个新波束的指示信息、用于上行同时发送的多个新波束的面板信息。例如,新波束包括波束3和波束4,第一信息可以包括波束3和波束4的波束信息,此外,第一信息还可以包括用于指示波束3和波束4用于上行同时发送的指示。又例如,第一信息的格式可以包括第二信元,第二信元用于承载用于上行同时发送的多个新波束的波束信息,假设新波束中波束3和波束4用于上行同时发送,则第一信元中承载波束3和波束4的波束信息,在这种情况下,无需额外再携带波束3和波束4用于上行同时发送的指示。Exemplarily, the fifth indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information that multiple new beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission, indication information of multiple new beams used for simultaneous uplink transmission, and panel information of multiple new beams used for simultaneous uplink transmission. For example, the new beam includes beam 3 and beam 4, and the first information may include beam information of beam 3 and beam 4. In addition, the first information may also include an indication for indicating that beam 3 and beam 4 are used for simultaneous uplink transmission. For another example, the format of the first information may include a second information element, and the second information element is used to carry beam information of multiple new beams used for simultaneous uplink transmission. Assuming that beam 3 and beam 4 in the new beam are used for simultaneous uplink transmission, the first information element carries beam information of beam 3 and beam 4. In this case, there is no need to additionally carry an indication that beam 3 and beam 4 are used for simultaneous uplink transmission.
更具体的,新波束包括候选波束和/或第一目标波束。第一信息指示的候选波束的数量可以为多个,多个候选波束可以用于上行同时发送,和/或,第一信息指示的第一目标波束的数量可以为多个,多个第一目标波束可以用于上行同时发送。对应的,第五指示信息可以包括以下至少一项:多个候选波束用于上行同时发送的指示信息、用于上行同时发送的多个候选波束的指示信息、用于上行同时发送的多个候选波束对应的面板信息、多个第一目标波束用于上行同时发送的指示信息、用于上行同时发送的多个第一目标波束的指示信息、用于上行同时发送的多个第一目标波束对应的面板信息。More specifically, the new beam includes a candidate beam and/or a first target beam. The number of candidate beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple candidate beams may be used for simultaneous uplink transmission, and/or the number of first target beams indicated by the first information may be multiple, and multiple first target beams may be used for simultaneous uplink transmission. Correspondingly, the fifth indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information of multiple candidate beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, indication information of multiple candidate beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, panel information corresponding to multiple candidate beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, indication information of multiple first target beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, indication information of multiple first target beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, and panel information corresponding to multiple first target beams for simultaneous uplink transmission.
(6)建议的统一TCI状态的类型(6) Recommended unified TCI status types
具体的,建议的统一TCI状态的类型可以是联合(Joint)TCI状态,或者,可以是独立(separate)TCI状态。需要说明的是,统一TCI状态的类型也可以是指统一TCI状态的模式。其中,Joint TCI状态是指下行TCI状态和上行TCI状态对应相同波束,separate TCI状态是指下行TCI状态和上行TCI状态对应不同波束。Specifically, the recommended unified TCI state type can be a joint TCI state or a separate TCI state. It should be noted that the unified TCI state type can also refer to a unified TCI state mode. The joint TCI state means that the downlink TCI state and the uplink TCI state correspond to the same beam, while the separate TCI state means that the downlink TCI state and the uplink TCI state correspond to different beams.
例如,终端设备当前使用jointTCI状态,如果终端设备检测到切换事件,则终端设备可以建议继续使用jointTCI状态,并上报新波束。如果终端设备检测到切换事件且在新波束对应的方向上未检测到最大允许暴露(Maximum Permissible Exposure,MPE)事件(也就是说,因上行信号辐射人体达到一定程度而需要切换上行波束),则终端设备可以在第一信息中建议采用jointTCI状态。此时网络设备可以基于第一信息中建议的jointTCI状态,配置或指示波束训练和波束报告,并对终端设备进行波束指示,网络设备所指示的波束即为将上行波束和下行波束所切换至的新的jointTCI状态。For example, if the terminal device currently uses the jointTCI state and detects a switching event, the terminal device may suggest continuing to use the jointTCI state and report a new beam. If the terminal device detects a switching event and does not detect a Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) event in the direction corresponding to the new beam (that is, the uplink beam needs to be switched because the uplink signal radiates the human body to a certain extent), the terminal device may suggest using the jointTCI state in the first information. At this time, the network device can configure or instruct beam training and beam reporting based on the jointTCI state recommended in the first information, and perform beam indication on the terminal device. The beam indicated by the network device is the new jointTCI state to which the uplink beam and the downlink beam are switched.
如果终端设备在新波束对应的方向上检测到MPE事件,则终端设备可以在第一信息中建议采用separateTCI状态,此时网络设备可以基于第一信息中建议的separateTCI状态配置或指示波束训练和波束报告,并对终端设备进行波束指示,在这种情况下,网络设备所指示的波束仅为将下行波束所切换至的新的下行separateTCI状态。If the terminal device detects an MPE event in the direction corresponding to the new beam, the terminal device may suggest adopting the separateTCI state in the first information. At this time, the network device may configure or indicate beam training and beam reporting based on the separateTCI state suggested in the first information, and perform beam indication on the terminal device. In this case, the beam indicated by the network device is only the new downlink separateTCI state to which the downlink beam is switched.
(7)建议的统一TCI框架(7) Proposed unified TCI framework
具体的,建议的统一TCI框架为单TRP传输的统一TCI激活或指示方式,或者,建议的统一TCI框架为多TRP传输的统一TCI激活或指示方式。Specifically, the recommended unified TCI framework is a unified TCI activation or indication method for single TRP transmission, or the recommended unified TCI framework is a unified TCI activation or indication method for multiple TRP transmissions.
示例性的,建议的统一TCI框架可以是单TRP场景中采用统一TCI状态来指示或激活波束的方式。例如,建议的统一TCI框架可以是在单TRP场景中通过联合TCI状态或独立TCI状态激活或指示波束。For example, the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method of using a unified TCI state to indicate or activate a beam in a single TRP scenario. For example, the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method of activating or indicating a beam in a single TRP scenario using a joint TCI state or an independent TCI state.
又示例性的,建议的统一TCI框架可以是基于单下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI)(single DCI)的多TRP场景中采用统一TCI状态来指示或激活波束的方式。例如,建议的统一TCI框架可以是,在基于单DCI的多TRP场景中采用联合TCI状态或独立TCI状态激活或指示波束。As another example, the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method for using a unified TCI state to indicate or activate beams in a multi-TRP scenario based on a single downlink control information (DCI). For example, the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method for using a joint TCI state or an independent TCI state to activate or indicate beams in a multi-TRP scenario based on a single DCI.
再示例性的,建议的统一TCI框架可以是基于多DCI(multi-DCI)的多TRP场景中采用统一TCI状态来指示或激活波束的方式。例如,建议的统一TCI框架可以是,在基于多DCI的多TRP场景中采用联合TCI状态或独立TCI状态激活或指示波束。As another example, the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method of using a unified TCI state to indicate or activate a beam in a multi-TRP scenario based on multi-DCI. For example, the proposed unified TCI framework may be a method of using a joint TCI state or an independent TCI state to activate or indicate a beam in a multi-TRP scenario based on multi-DCI.
需要说明的是,基于单DCI的多TRP场景可以是指:多个TRP采用相同DCI调度终端设备的场景,基于多DCI的多TRP场景可以是指:多个TRP分别采用不同的DCI调度终端设备的场景。It should be noted that the multi-TRP scenario based on single DCI may refer to a scenario in which multiple TRPs use the same DCI to schedule terminal devices, and the multi-TRP scenario based on multiple DCIs may refer to a scenario in which multiple TRPs use different DCIs to schedule terminal devices.
(8)建议的传输方案(8) Recommended transmission scheme
建议的传输方案是指:终端设备向网络设备建议的传输方案,其中,传输方案为单TRP传输或多TRP传输。其中,单TRP传输是指在单TRP场景中终端设备与该TRP进行信道或信号的传输,多TRP传输是指在多TRP场景中终端设备与多个TRP进行信道或信号的传输。The recommended transmission scheme refers to the transmission scheme recommended by the terminal device to the network device, where the transmission scheme is single-TRP transmission or multi-TRP transmission. Single-TRP transmission refers to the transmission of channels or signals between the terminal device and the TRP in a single-TRP scenario, and multi-TRP transmission refers to the transmission of channels or signals between the terminal device and multiple TRPs in a multi-TRP scenario.
其中,多TRP传输包括以下至少一项:单频网(Single Frequency Network,SFN)传输、时分复用(Time Division Matpleig,TDM)传输、空分复用(Space Division Multiplexing,SDM)传输、频分复用(Frequency Division Multiplexing,FDM)传输。也即,终端设备可以采用SFN、TDM、SDM、FDM中的至少一种与多个TRP进行传输。Multiple TRP transmission includes at least one of the following: single frequency network (SFN) transmission, time division multiplexing (TDM) transmission, space division multiplexing (SDM) transmission, and frequency division multiplexing (FDM) transmission. That is, a terminal device can use at least one of SFN, TDM, SDM, and FDM to transmit with multiple TRPs.
其中,上述建议的传输方案可以适用于所有信道、或者,可以适用于PUSCH、PUCCH、PDSCH和PDCCH中一种或多种特定信道的传输,和/或,可以适用于任意一种或多种RS的传输。The above-mentioned recommended transmission scheme may be applicable to all channels, or may be applicable to the transmission of one or more specific channels among PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH and PDCCH, and/or may be applicable to the transmission of any one or more RSs.
关于单TRP传输的更多内容可以参照本文关于单TRP场景的相关描述,关于多TRP传输的更多内容可以参照本文关于多TRP场景的相关描述。For more information about single TRP transmission, please refer to the relevant description of the single TRP scenario in this article. For more information about multi-TRP transmission, please refer to the relevant description of the multi-TRP scenario in this article.
(9)建议第二信道采用的传输方案;(9) Recommend the transmission scheme to be adopted for the second channel;
具体的,终端设备可以在第一信息中建议特定信道(即第二信道)采用的传输方案。其中,第二信道可以是PUSCH、PUCCH、PDSCH和PDCCH中的至少一种。Specifically, the terminal device may suggest a transmission scheme for a specific channel (ie, a second channel) in the first information, wherein the second channel may be at least one of PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH.
例如,终端设备可以在第一信息中建议第二信道采用单TRP传输,或者,在第二信息中建议采用SFN、TDM、SDM、FDM中的至少一种与多个TRP传输第二信道。For example, the terminal device may suggest in the first information that the second channel adopts a single TRP transmission, or, in the second information, suggest that the second channel adopt at least one of SFN, TDM, SDM, and FDM and multiple TRPs to transmit the second channel.
关于传输方案的更多内容可以参照上文相关描述,在此不再赘述。For more information about the transmission scheme, please refer to the relevant description above and will not be repeated here.
(10)建议的波束训练方式(10) Recommended beam training method
其中,波束训练方式也可以称之为“波束训练策略”。换言之,第一信息可以包括:建议的波束训练参考信号配置信息中的参数repetition的取值。The beam training method may also be referred to as a “beam training strategy.” In other words, the first information may include: a value of a parameter “repetition” in the recommended beam training reference signal configuration information.
具体的,建议的波束训练方式可以是P2过程或P3过程。关于P2过程和P3过程的具体内容可以参照上文关于实施例一的相关描述,在此不在赘述。Specifically, the recommended beam training method may be the P2 process or the P3 process. Specific contents of the P2 process and the P3 process can be referred to the above description of the first embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
(11)质量信息(11) Quality information
具体的,第一信息可以包括新波束的波束质量。更具体地,第一信息还可以包括候选波束的波束质量和第一目标波束的波束质量。Specifically, the first information may include the beam quality of the new beam. More specifically, the first information may also include the beam quality of the candidate beam and the beam quality of the first target beam.
S62,网络设备向终端设备发送第一信息的响应。对应的,终端设备接收第一信息的响应。S62: The network device sends a response to the first information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the response to the first information.
示例性的,第一信息的响应可以承载于DCI中。Exemplarily, the response to the first information may be carried in the DCI.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息的响应可以用于确认以下至少一项或多项:波束切换、小区切换、小区组切换。In one possible implementation, the response to the first information may be used to confirm at least one or more of the following: beam switching, cell switching, and cell group switching.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息的响应可以用于触发以下至少一项:波束切换、小区切换、小区组切换。In another possible implementation, the response to the first information may be used to trigger at least one of the following: beam switching, cell switching, and cell group switching.
示例性的,第一信息可以包括新波束,第一信息的响应可以用于确认或触发切换至第一信息中的新波束。例如,第一信息可以包括第一目标波束,第一信息的响应可以包括波束确认信息,终端设备接收到响应之后,可以切换至第一目标波束。又例如,第一信息可以包括至少一个候选波束,第一信息的响应可以包括波束确认信息,终端设备接收到响应之后,可以切换至至少一个候选波束中的一个或多个。Exemplarily, the first information may include a new beam, and the response to the first information may be used to confirm or trigger switching to the new beam in the first information. For example, the first information may include a first target beam, and the response to the first information may include beam confirmation information. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the first target beam. For another example, the first information may include at least one candidate beam, and the response to the first information may include beam confirmation information. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to one or more of the at least one candidate beam.
或者,第一信息可以不包括新波束,例如,第一信息可以包括切换事件的信息和/或待切换波束,第一信息的响应可以包括新波束(如下文中的第二目标波束)的波束信息,终端设备接收到响应之后,可以切换至响应中的新波束。或者,第一信息指示了新波束,第一信息的响应也指示了新波束,终端设备接收到响应之后,可以切换至第一信息或第一信息的响应所指示的新波束,其中,响应所指示的新波束可以和第一信息指示的新波束相同或不同。Alternatively, the first information may not include a new beam. For example, the first information may include information about a switching event and/or a beam to be switched. The response to the first information may include beam information of a new beam (such as the second target beam described below). After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the new beam in the response. Alternatively, the first information indicates a new beam, and the response to the first information also indicates a new beam. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the new beam indicated by the first information or the response to the first information. The new beam indicated by the response may be the same as or different from the new beam indicated by the first information.
示例性的,第一信息的响应可以用于确认或触发切换至第一信息所指示的新小区。例如,第一信息可以包括第二小区信息或第二小区指示信息(如新小区的小区信息)以指示新小区,第一信息的响应可以包括小区确认信息,终端设备接收到响应之后,可以切换至第一信息所指示的新小区。Exemplarily, the response to the first information may be used to confirm or trigger switching to the new cell indicated by the first information. For example, the first information may include second cell information or second cell indication information (such as cell information of the new cell) to indicate the new cell, and the response to the first information may include cell confirmation information. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the new cell indicated by the first information.
或者,第一信息可以不指示新小区,第一信息的响应可以指示新小区,例如,新小区可以是第二目标波束所属的小区。终端设备接收到响应之后,可以切换至响应所指示的新小区。或者,第一信息指示了新小区,第一信息的响应也指示了新小区,终端设备接收到响应之后,可以切换至第一信息或第一信息的响应所指示的新小区。其中,响应所指示的新小区可以和第一信息指示的新小区相同或不同。Alternatively, the first information may not indicate a new cell, and the response to the first information may indicate a new cell. For example, the new cell may be the cell to which the second target beam belongs. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the new cell indicated by the response. Alternatively, the first information indicates a new cell, and the response to the first information also indicates a new cell. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the new cell indicated by the first information or the response to the first information. The new cell indicated by the response may be the same as or different from the new cell indicated by the first information.
示例性的,第一信息的响应可以用于确认或触发切换至第一信息所指示的新小区组。例如,第一信息可以包括第二小区组信息,以指示新小区组,第一信息的响应可以包括小区组确认信息,终端设备接收到响应之后,可以切换至第一信息所指示的新小区组。Exemplarily, the response to the first information may be used to confirm or trigger switching to the new cell group indicated by the first information. For example, the first information may include second cell group information to indicate the new cell group, and the response to the first information may include cell group confirmation information. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the new cell group indicated by the first information.
或者,第一信息可以不指示新小区组,第一信息的响应可以指示新小区组,例如,新小区组可以是第二目标波束所属小区所属的小区组。终端设备接收到响应之后,可以切换至响应指示的新小区组。或者,第一信息指示了新小区组,第一信息的响应也指示了新小区组,终端设备接收到响应之后,可以切换至第一信息或第一信息的响应所指示的新小区组。其中,响应所指示的新小区组可以和第一信息指示的新小区组相同或不同。Alternatively, the first information may not indicate a new cell group, and the response to the first information may indicate a new cell group. For example, the new cell group may be the cell group to which the cell to which the second target beam belongs. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the new cell group indicated by the response. Alternatively, the first information indicates a new cell group, and the response to the first information also indicates a new cell group. After receiving the response, the terminal device may switch to the new cell group indicated by the first information or the response to the first information. The new cell group indicated by the response may be the same as or different from the new cell group indicated by the first information.
具体的,第一信息的响应可以包括以下至少一项:Specifically, the response to the first information may include at least one of the following:
a’)第七指示信息,第七指示信息用于指示第二目标波束。例如,第七指示信息可以是第二目标波束的波束信息。其中,区别于第一目标波束,第二目标波束是指网络设备在第一信息的响应中指示的目标波束。第二目标波束可以选自第一信息中指示的新波束。例如,第二目标波束可以与第一目标波束相同,或者,第二目标波束可以是候选波束中的一个或多个。或者,第二目标波束可以是第一信息指示的新波束以外的其他波束,本文对此并不做限制。a’) The seventh indication information is used to indicate the second target beam. For example, the seventh indication information may be beam information of the second target beam. In particular, as distinguished from the first target beam, the second target beam refers to the target beam indicated by the network device in the response to the first information. The second target beam may be selected from the new beam indicated in the first information. For example, the second target beam may be the same as the first target beam, or the second target beam may be one or more of the candidate beams. Alternatively, the second target beam may be a beam other than the new beam indicated by the first information, which is not limited herein.
进一步地,第一信息的响应还可以包括用于指示第二目标波束所属小区的信息。例如,第一信息的响应可以包括第二目标波束所属小区的小区信息。Furthermore, the response to the first information may further include information indicating the cell to which the second target beam belongs. For example, the response to the first information may include cell information of the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
在具体实施中,第二目标波束所属的小区可以是新小区,也可以不是新小区。示例性的,若第一信息的响应包括第二目标波束所属小区的指示信息,则第二目标波束所属小区为新小区,终端设备可以切换至第二目标波束所属的小区。若第一信息的响应未包括第二目标波束所属小区的指示信息,则第二目标波束所属小区不是新小区,终端设备可以不切换至第二目标波束所属的小区。In a specific implementation, the cell to which the second target beam belongs may or may not be a new cell. For example, if the response to the first information includes information indicating the cell to which the second target beam belongs, the cell to which the second target beam belongs is a new cell, and the terminal device may switch to the cell to which the second target beam belongs. If the response to the first information does not include information indicating the cell to which the second target beam belongs, the cell to which the second target beam belongs is not a new cell, and the terminal device may not switch to the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
b’)第八指示信息,第八指示信息用于指示新小区。b’) Eighth indication information: the eighth indication information is used to indicate a new cell.
其中,第八指示信息所指示的新小区和第一信息所指示的新小区可以相同或不同。示例性的,响应中指示的新小区可以是第二目标波束所属的小区。The new cell indicated by the eighth indication information and the new cell indicated by the first indication information may be the same or different. Exemplarily, the new cell indicated in the response may be the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
若响应包括第八指示信息,则终端设备可以切换至第八指示信息所指示的小区。若响应未包括第八指示信息,则终端设备可以不执行小区切换。If the response includes the eighth indication information, the terminal device may switch to the cell indicated by the eighth indication information. If the response does not include the eighth indication information, the terminal device may not perform cell switching.
示例性的,第八指示信息可以用于指示第二目标波束所属的小区是否为新小区。例如,第一信息的响应可以包括第二目标波束所属小区的指示信息,若第八指示信息指示第二目标波束所属小区为新小区,或者第二目标波束所属小区被第八指示信息所指示,则第二目标波束所属小区为新小区。若第二目标波束所属小区的指示信息未被第八指示信息所指示,则第二目标波束所属小区不是新小区。Exemplarily, the eighth indication information may be used to indicate whether the cell to which the second target beam belongs is a new cell. For example, the response to the first information may include indication information of the cell to which the second target beam belongs. If the eighth indication information indicates that the cell to which the second target beam belongs is a new cell, or the cell to which the second target beam belongs is indicated by the eighth indication information, then the cell to which the second target beam belongs is a new cell. If the indication information of the cell to which the second target beam belongs is not indicated by the eighth indication information, then the cell to which the second target beam belongs is not a new cell.
c’)第九指示信息,第九指示信息用于指示新小区组,响应中指示的新小区可以是第二目标波束所属小区所属的小区组。c’) The ninth indication information is used to indicate a new cell group. The new cell indicated in the response may be the cell group to which the cell to which the second target beam belongs.
d’)第二目标波束适用的信道;也即,响应可以包括应用第二目标波束的信道。d’) The channels to which the second target beam is applicable; that is, the response may include the channels to which the second target beam is applied.
e’)第二目标波束适用的RS;也即,响应可以包括应用第二目标波束的RS。e’) RS to which the second target beam is applicable; that is, the response may include the RS to which the second target beam is applied.
f’)第二目标波束适用的CORESET;也即,响应可以包括应用第二目标波束的CORESET。f’) A CORESET to which the second target beam applies; that is, the response may include a CORESET to which the second target beam applies.
g’)第二目标波束不适用的信道;也即,响应可以包括不应用第二目标波束的信道。g’) Channels for which the second target beam is not applicable; that is, the response may include channels for which the second target beam is not applied.
h’)第二目标波束不适用的RS;也即,响应可以包括不应用第二目标波束的RS。h’) RS to which the second target beam is not applicable; that is, the response may include an RS to which the second target beam is not applied.
i’)第二目标波束不适用的CORESET;也即,响应可以包括不应用第二目标波束的CORESET。i') A CORESET to which the second target beam is not applicable; that is, the response may include a CORESET to which the second target beam is not applied.
j’)多个第二目标波束用于下行同时接收的指示信息;具体的,响应指示的第二目标波束的数量可以为多个,多个第二目标波束可以用于下行同时接收,网络设备可以在响应中进一步指示多个第二目标波束可以用于下行同时接收。j’) indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous downlink reception; specifically, the number of second target beams indicated in the response can be multiple, and multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous downlink reception. The network device can further indicate in the response that multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous downlink reception.
k’)用于下行同时接收的多个第二目标波束的指示信息;示例性的,响应的格式可以包括第三信元,第三信元用于承载用于下行同时接收的多个第二目标波束的波束信息,由此,终端设备可以获知多个第二目标波束可以用于下行同时接收。k’) indicates information of multiple second target beams for simultaneous downlink reception; exemplarily, the format of the response may include a third information element, and the third information element is used to carry beam information of multiple second target beams for simultaneous downlink reception, thereby, the terminal device can know that multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous downlink reception.
l’)多个第二目标波束用于上行同时发送的指示信息;具体的,响应指示的第二目标波束的数量可以为多个,多个第二目标波束可以用于上行同时发送,网络设备可以在响应中进一步指示多个第二目标波束可以用于上行同时发送。l’) Indication information that multiple second target beams are used for simultaneous uplink transmission; specifically, the number of second target beams indicated in the response can be multiple, and multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous uplink transmission. The network device can further indicate in the response that multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous uplink transmission.
m’)用于上行同时发送的多个第二目标波束的指示信息;示例性的,响应的格式可以包括第四信元,第四信元用于承载用于上行同时发送的多个第二目标波束的波束信息,由此,终端设备可以获知多个第二目标波束可以用于上行同时发送。m’) indicates information of multiple second target beams for simultaneous uplink transmission; exemplarily, the format of the response may include a fourth information element, and the fourth information element is used to carry beam information of multiple second target beams for simultaneous uplink transmission, thereby, the terminal device can know that multiple second target beams can be used for simultaneous uplink transmission.
n’)第三信道适用的第二目标波束;其中,第三信道可以是以下至少一项:PUSCH、PUCCH、PDSCH和PDCCH。也就是说,第一信道的响应可以包括特定信道所应用的目标波束。第三信道可以与第一信道相同或不同。n') A second target beam for a third channel; the third channel can be at least one of the following: PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH. That is, the response for the first channel can include the target beam for the specific channel. The third channel can be the same as or different from the first channel.
l’)统一TCI状态的类型;也即,网络设备可以在响应中向终端设备指示所采用的统一TCI状态的类型;1') unified TCI state type; that is, the network device may indicate the type of unified TCI state adopted to the terminal device in the response;
o’)统一TCI框架;也即,网络设备可以在响应中向终端设备指示所采用的统一TCI状态的框架;o') Unified TCI framework; that is, the network device can indicate the adopted unified TCI state framework to the terminal device in the response;
p’)传输方案;也即,网络设备可以在响应中向终端设备指示所采用的传输方案;p') transmission scheme; that is, the network device may indicate the adopted transmission scheme to the terminal device in the response;
q’)第四信道采用的传输方案;其中,第四信道可以是以下至少一项:PUSCH、PUCCH、PDSCH和PDCCH。也即,网络设备可以在响应中向终端设备指示特定信道所采用的传输方案;第四信道可以与第二信道相同或不同。q') The transmission scheme used by the fourth channel; the fourth channel can be at least one of the following: PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH. That is, the network device can indicate the transmission scheme used by a specific channel to the terminal device in the response; the fourth channel can be the same as or different from the second channel.
r’)波束训练方式,也即,波束训练参考信号配置信息中的参数repetition的取值。响应中指示的波束训练方式可以与第一信息中建议的波束训练方式相同或不同。也即,响应中指示的波束训练参考信号配置信息中的参数repetition的取值可以与第一信息中建议的取值相同或不同。r') beam training mode, that is, the value of the parameter repetition in the beam training reference signal configuration information. The beam training mode indicated in the response can be the same as or different from the beam training mode recommended in the first information. That is, the value of the parameter repetition in the beam training reference signal configuration information indicated in the response can be the same as or different from the value recommended in the first information.
下面对第一信息的响应的发送方进行示例性的描述。The following is an exemplary description of the sender of the response to the first information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息的响应可以来自当前的服务小区,和/或,来自当前的服务小区所属的TRP或当前的服务小区所包括的TRP。In one possible implementation, the response to the first information may come from the current serving cell, and/or from the TRP to which the current serving cell belongs or the TRP included in the current serving cell.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息的响应可以来自待切换波束所属的小区和/或新波束所属的小区。例如,响应可以来自第一信息指示的新波束所属的小区,和/或,响应可以来自响应指示的新波束所属的小区。In another possible implementation, the response to the first information may come from the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs and/or the cell to which the new beam belongs. For example, the response may come from the cell to which the new beam indicated by the first information belongs, and/or the response may come from the cell to which the new beam indicated by the response belongs.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息的响应可以来自待切换小区和/或新小区。例如,响应可以来自第一信息指示的新小区,和/或,响应可以来自响应指示的新小区。In another possible implementation, the response to the first information may come from the cell to be handed over and/or the new cell. For example, the response may come from the new cell indicated by the first information, and/or the response may come from the new cell indicated by the response.
在本申请的一实施例中,终端设备还可以接收第三配置信息,第三配置信息用于重配置PCI列表或备选小区列表。具体的,网络设备可以重配置PCI列表或备选小区列表,以更新可以为终端设备提供备选波束或新波束所属的备选小区(如邻小区)。In one embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may further receive third configuration information, where the third configuration information is used to reconfigure the PCI list or the candidate cell list. Specifically, the network device may reconfigure the PCI list or the candidate cell list to update the candidate cell (such as a neighboring cell) to which the alternative beam or the new beam can be provided for the terminal device.
进一步地,终端设备可以在发送第一信息之后执行第一操作,或者,终端设备可以在接收第一信息的响应之后执行第一操作,或者,终端设备可以在发送第一信息之前执行第一操作,或者,终端设备执行第一操作可以不依赖于第一信息或第一信息的响应。关于终端设备执行的第一操作的内容以及执行第一操作的时机可以参照本文关于其他实施例的相关描述。Furthermore, the terminal device may perform the first operation after sending the first information, or the terminal device may perform the first operation after receiving a response to the first information, or the terminal device may perform the first operation before sending the first information, or the terminal device may perform the first operation independently of the first information or the response to the first information. For details about the content of the first operation performed by the terminal device and the timing of performing the first operation, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments herein.
关于实施例六的更多内容可以参照本文关于其他实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For more details about the sixth embodiment, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments in this document, which will not be repeated here.
实施例七Example 7
参照图7,图7是本申请实施例中一种波束切换方法的流程示意图。图7示出的步骤可应用于终端设备。图7示出的通信方法可以包括S71和S72。7, which is a flow chart of a beam switching method according to an embodiment of the present application. The steps shown in FIG7 can be applied to a terminal device. The communication method shown in FIG7 may include S71 and S72.
S71,检测切换事件。S71: Detect a switching event.
关于S71的具体内容可以参照本文关于其他实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For the specific content of S71, please refer to the relevant description of other embodiments in this document, which will not be repeated here.
S72,执行第一操作。S72, execute the first operation.
在一种可能的实施方式中,响应于检测到一个或多个切换事件,终端设备发送第一信息以及执行第一操作。也就是说,如果终端设备检测到一个或多个切换事件,则终端设备可以向网络设备发送第一信息,并执行第一操作。In one possible implementation, in response to detecting one or more switching events, the terminal device sends first information and performs a first operation. That is, if the terminal device detects one or more switching events, the terminal device may send first information to the network device and perform a first operation.
其中,终端设备可以先发送第一信息,再执行第一操作。或者,终端设备可以先执行第一操作,再发送第一信息。或者,终端设备可以同时执行第一操作和发送第一信息。The terminal device may first send the first information and then perform the first operation. Alternatively, the terminal device may first perform the first operation and then send the first information. Alternatively, the terminal device may simultaneously perform the first operation and send the first information.
在另一种可能的实施方式中,响应于检测到一个或多个切换事件,终端设备执行第一操作。也就是说,区别于上一种实施方式,如果终端设备检测到一个或多个切换事件,终端设备可以直接执行第一操作,无需向网络设备发送第一信息。In another possible implementation, in response to detecting one or more switching events, the terminal device performs the first operation. That is, different from the previous implementation, if the terminal device detects one or more switching events, the terminal device can directly perform the first operation without sending the first information to the network device.
下面对第一操作的具体内容进行示例性的说明。The specific content of the first operation is exemplarily described below.
具体的,第一操作可以包括以下至少一项:Specifically, the first operation may include at least one of the following:
(1)激活新波束;(1) Activate the new beam;
其中,被激活的新波束可以是第一信息中所指示的新波束(如候选波束、第一目标波束)。或者,被激活的新波束也可以是第一信息的响应所指示的新波束。The activated new beam may be the new beam indicated in the first information (eg, a candidate beam, a first target beam), or the activated new beam may be the new beam indicated in a response to the first information.
在具体实施中,新波束可以是未被激活的波束。In a specific implementation, the new beam may be an inactive beam.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以仅激活新波束,但并未切换至新波束,终端设备可以等待网络设备的其他信令再切换至被激活的新波束。In one possible implementation, the terminal device may only activate the new beam but not switch to the new beam. The terminal device may wait for other signaling from the network device before switching to the activated new beam.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备在激活新波束之后即可切换至新波束(此时,新波束即为目标波束)。例如,终端设备可以无需依赖于网路设备的响应或确认就可以切换至新波束。In another possible implementation, the terminal device may switch to the new beam after activating the new beam (in this case, the new beam is the target beam). For example, the terminal device may switch to the new beam without relying on a response or confirmation from the network device.
(2)切换至目标波束。(2) Switch to the target beam.
在具体实施中,目标波束可以是新波束或候选波束中的最优波束。或者,目标波束可以是新波束或候选波束中的默认波束。其中,新波束可以是上文中第一信息所指示的新波束,或者,可以是第一信息的响应所指示的新波束。In a specific implementation, the target beam may be a new beam or an optimal beam among candidate beams. Alternatively, the target beam may be a new beam or a default beam among candidate beams. The new beam may be the new beam indicated by the first information above, or may be the new beam indicated by a response to the first information.
或者,目标波束可以是待切换波束所属小区上的默认波束,或者,目标波束可以是当前服务小区上的默认波束,或者,目标波束可以是新小区上的最优波束或默认波束。其中,新小区可以是第一信息所指示的新小区,或者,可以是第一信息的响应所指示的新小区。其中,默认波束可以是标识最小或最大的波束等,本实施例对此并不限制。Alternatively, the target beam may be the default beam of the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, or the target beam may be the default beam of the current serving cell, or the target beam may be the optimal beam or the default beam of the new cell. The new cell may be the new cell indicated by the first information, or the new cell indicated by the response to the first information. The default beam may be the beam with the smallest or largest identifier, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment.
或者,目标波束可以是默认小区上的默认波束或最优波束。其中,默认小区可以是当前服务小区。或者,默认小区可以是标识最大或标识最小或频率最大或频率最小的服务小区。Alternatively, the target beam may be a default beam or an optimal beam on a default cell. The default cell may be a current serving cell. Alternatively, the default cell may be a serving cell with the largest or smallest identifier or with the largest or smallest frequency.
其中,目标波束可以是第一目标波束,也可以是第二目标波束。本文关于目标波束的描述可以适用于第一目标波束,也可以适用于第二目标波束。关于第一目标波束和第二目标波束的更多内容可以参照本文关于目标波束的相关描述。The target beam may be either the first target beam or the second target beam. The description herein of the target beam may apply to both the first target beam and the second target beam. For more information regarding the first target beam and the second target beam, please refer to the description herein of the target beam.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息未指示新波束,例如,第一信息仅包括检测到的切换事件的信息和/或待切换波束,终端设备可以切换至默认波束。例如,终端设备可以切换至当前服务小区上的默认波束。In one possible implementation, the first information does not indicate a new beam, for example, the first information only includes information about a detected switching event and/or a beam to be switched, and the terminal device may switch to a default beam. For example, the terminal device may switch to a default beam on a current serving cell.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,若实施例六中的第一PDSCH所应用的波束为待切换波束,和/或,第一PUSCH所应用的波束为待切换波束,则可以将第一PDSCH和/或第一PUSCH的波束切换为第二波束,第二波束可以是当前服务小区上的默认波束。其中,第一PDSCH和/或第一PUSCH可以是当前服务小区上的PDSCH和/或PUSCH。In another possible implementation, if the beam used by the first PDSCH in Example 6 is a beam to be switched, and/or the beam used by the first PUSCH is a beam to be switched, the beam of the first PDSCH and/or the first PUSCH can be switched to a second beam, and the second beam can be a default beam on the current serving cell. The first PDSCH and/or the first PUSCH can be the PDSCH and/or PUSCH on the current serving cell.
若第一RS所应用的波束为待切换波束,则可以将第一RS的波束切换为第三波束,第三波束可以是当前服务小区上的默认波束。其中,第一RS可以是当前服务小区上的RS。If the beam used by the first RS is a beam to be switched, the beam of the first RS may be switched to a third beam, which may be a default beam on the current serving cell.
若第二RS所应用的波束为待切换波束,则可以将第二RS的波束切换为第四波束,第四波束可以是当前服务小区上的默认波束。其中,第二RS可以是当前服务小区上的RS。If the beam used by the second RS is a beam to be switched, the beam of the second RS may be switched to a fourth beam, which may be a default beam on the current serving cell.
若第一CORESET所应用的波束为待切换波束,则可以将第一CORESET的波束切换为第五波束,第五波束可以是当前服务小区上的默认波束。其中,第一CORESET可以是当前服务小区上的CORESET。If the beam used by the first CORESET is the beam to be switched, the beam of the first CORESET may be switched to the fifth beam, which may be the default beam on the current serving cell.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,对于非服务小区上的待切换波束,该待切换波束对应的目标波束可以是非服务小区(如该待切换波束所在的非服务小区)上的默认波束、当前服务小区上的默认波束和第一信息所指示的新波束中的一项或多项。In another possible implementation, for the beam to be switched on a non-service cell, the target beam corresponding to the beam to be switched can be one or more of the default beam on the non-service cell (such as the non-service cell where the beam to be switched is located), the default beam on the current service cell, and the new beam indicated by the first information.
以第一待切换波束为例,第一待切换波束为非服务小区的波束。终端设备可以将第一待切换波束切换至第六波束,其中,第六波束为第一信息指示的新波束,或者,第六波束可以是非服务小区的默认波束,或者,第六波束可以是当前服务小区的默认波束。Taking the first beam to be switched as an example, the first beam to be switched is a beam of a non-serving cell. The terminal device can switch the first beam to be switched to a sixth beam, where the sixth beam is a new beam indicated by the first information, or the sixth beam can be a default beam of a non-serving cell, or the sixth beam can be a default beam of a current serving cell.
在再一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以切换至用于下行同时接收的多个目标波束,和/或,终端设备可以切换至用于上行同时发送的多个目标波束。示例性的,第一信息所指示的多个新波束用于下行同时接收,则终端设备可以切换至用于下行同收的多个新波束。和/或,第一信息所指示的多个新波束用于上行同时发送,则终端设备可以切换至用于上行同时发送的多个新波束。示例性的,在切换之前,终端设备可以不应用多个波束进行下行同时接收和/或不应用多个波束进行上行同时发送。In another possible implementation, the terminal device may switch to multiple target beams for simultaneous downlink reception, and/or the terminal device may switch to multiple target beams for simultaneous uplink transmission. Exemplarily, the multiple new beams indicated by the first information are used for simultaneous downlink reception, and the terminal device may switch to multiple new beams for simultaneous downlink reception. And/or, the multiple new beams indicated by the first information are used for simultaneous uplink transmission, and the terminal device may switch to multiple new beams for simultaneous uplink transmission. Exemplarily, before switching, the terminal device may not apply multiple beams for simultaneous downlink reception and/or may not apply multiple beams for simultaneous uplink transmission.
(3)传输方案回退(3) Transmission plan fallback
具体的,终端设备可以将第五信道的传输方案从第一传输方案切换为第二传输方案。其中,第五信道可以是PUSCH、PUCCH、PDSCH和PDCCH中一种或多种特定信道,或者,也可以是PUSCH、PUCCH、PDSCH和PDCCH中任意一种或多种信道。示例性的,第五信道可以是第一信息中建议采用单TRP传输的信道(如第二信道),或者,第五信道可以是第一信息的响应中指示采用单TRP传输的信道(如第四信道),或者,第五信道可以是第一信息和/或第一信息的响应中未指示传输方案的信道,但并不限于此。Specifically, the terminal device can switch the transmission scheme of the fifth channel from the first transmission scheme to the second transmission scheme. The fifth channel can be one or more specific channels among PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH and PDCCH, or any one or more channels among PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH and PDCCH. Exemplarily, the fifth channel can be a channel (such as the second channel) that recommends single TRP transmission in the first information, or the fifth channel can be a channel (such as the fourth channel) that indicates single TRP transmission in the response to the first information, or the fifth channel can be a channel that does not indicate a transmission scheme in the first information and/or the response to the first information, but is not limited to this.
其中,第一传输方案为使用多个波束的传输方案或使用多TRP传输方案。其中,多个波束可以属于多个小区或多个TRP。例如,终端设备与多个TRP采用SFN、TDM、SDM、FDM中的至少一种传输第五信道。或者,多个波束也可以是同一个小区的波束。此外,第二传输方案为使用单个波束的传输方案或单个TRP的传输方案,也即,切换为第二传输方案之后,终端设备使用单个波束传输第五信道。其中,单个波束可以是上述的目标波束。Among them, the first transmission scheme is a transmission scheme using multiple beams or a transmission scheme using multiple TRPs. Among them, the multiple beams can belong to multiple cells or multiple TRPs. For example, the terminal device and multiple TRPs use at least one of SFN, TDM, SDM, and FDM to transmit the fifth channel. Alternatively, the multiple beams can also be beams of the same cell. In addition, the second transmission scheme is a transmission scheme using a single beam or a transmission scheme using a single TRP, that is, after switching to the second transmission scheme, the terminal device uses a single beam to transmit the fifth channel. Among them, the single beam can be the above-mentioned target beam.
(4)激活新小区和/或新波束所属的小区;(4) Activate the new cell and/or the cell to which the new beam belongs;
其中,被激活的小区可以是以下至少一项:第一信息中所指示的新小区、第一信息所指示的新波束所属的小区、第一信息的响应所指示的新小区、第一信息的响应所指示的新波束所属的小区。在这种情况下,终端设备仅激活新小区,但并未切换至新小区,终端设备可以等待网络设备的其他信令再切换至被激活的新小区。The activated cell may be at least one of the following: the new cell indicated in the first information, the cell to which the new beam indicated in the first information belongs, the new cell indicated in the response to the first information, and the cell to which the new beam indicated in the response to the first information belongs. In this case, the terminal device only activates the new cell but does not switch to the new cell. The terminal device can wait for other signaling from the network device before switching to the activated new cell.
(5)切换至目标小区;(5) Switch to the target cell;
具体的,终端设备可以执行小区切换,以切换至目标小区。Specifically, the terminal device may perform cell switching to switch to a target cell.
其中,目标小区可以是以下至少一项:目标波束所属的小区、第一信息中所指示的新小区、第一信息所指示的新波束所属的小区、第一信息的响应所指示的新小区、第一信息的响应所指示的新波束所属的小区、默认小区。其中,默认小区可以是当前的服务小区等,但并不限于此。The target cell may be at least one of the following: a cell to which the target beam belongs, a new cell indicated in the first information, a cell to which the new beam indicated in the first information belongs, a new cell indicated in a response to the first information, a cell to which the new beam indicated in a response to the first information belongs, or a default cell. The default cell may be, but is not limited to, a current serving cell.
(6)激活新小区组;(6) Activate the new cell group;
其中,被激活的小区组可以是以下至少一项:第一信息中所指示的新小区组、第一信息所指示的新波束所属小区所属的小区组、第一信息的响应所指示的新小区组、第一信息的响应所指示的新波束所属小区所属的小区组。在这种情况下,终端设备仅激活新小区组,但并未切换至新小区组,终端设备需要等待网络设备的其他信令再切换至被激活的新小区组。The activated cell group may be at least one of the following: the new cell group indicated in the first information, the cell group to which the new beam indicated in the first information belongs, the new cell group indicated in the response to the first information, and the cell group to which the new beam indicated in the response to the first information belongs. In this case, the terminal device only activates the new cell group but does not switch to the new cell group. The terminal device needs to wait for other signaling from the network device before switching to the activated new cell group.
(7)切换至目标小区组;(7) Switch to the target cell group;
具体的,终端设备可以执行小区组切换,以切换至目标小区组。Specifically, the terminal device may perform cell group switching to switch to the target cell group.
其中,目标小区组可以是以下至少一项:目标小区所属的小区组、第一信息中所指示的新小区组、第一信息所指示的新波束所属小区所属的小区组、第一信息的响应所指示的新小区组、第一信息的响应所指示的新波束所属小区所属的小区组。Among them, the target cell group can be at least one of the following: the cell group to which the target cell belongs, the new cell group indicated in the first information, the cell group to which the cell to which the new beam indicated in the first information belongs, the new cell group indicated in the response to the first information, and the cell group to which the cell to which the new beam indicated in the response to the first information belongs.
(8)小区去激活;(8) Cell deactivation;
其中,被去激活的小区可以包括以下至少一项:待切换波束所属的小区、待切换小区、第一信息中未指示的小区。Among them, the deactivated cells may include at least one of the following: the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, the cell to be switched, and the cell not indicated in the first information.
(9)小区组去激活;(9) Cell group deactivation;
其中,被去激活的小区组可以包括以下至少一项:待切换波束所属小区所属的小区组、待切换小区所属的小区组、第一信息中未指示的小区组。Among them, the deactivated cell group may include at least one of the following: the cell group to which the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs belongs, the cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs, and the cell group not indicated in the first information.
(10)切换统一TCI状态的类型;(10) Switch the type of unified TCI state;
具体的,可以切换为第一信息所建议的统一TCI状态的类型,或者,可以切换为响应中所指示的统一TCI状态的类型。Specifically, the type of unified TCI state may be switched to the type of unified TCI state suggested by the first information, or the type of unified TCI state indicated in the response.
(11)切换统一TCI框架;(11) Switch to a unified TCI framework;
具体的,可以切换为第一信息所建议的统一TCI状态的框架,或者,可以切换为响应中所指示的统一TCI状态的框架。Specifically, it can be switched to the framework of the unified TCI state suggested by the first information, or it can be switched to the framework of the unified TCI state indicated in the response.
(12)切换传输方案;(12) Switching transmission scheme;
具体的,可以切换为第一信息所建议的传输方案,或者,可以切换为响应中所指示的传输方案。Specifically, the transmission scheme may be switched to the transmission scheme suggested by the first information, or may be switched to the transmission scheme indicated in the response.
(13)切换第六信道的传输方案(13) Switching the transmission scheme of the sixth channel
示例性的,第六信道可以是第二信道,终端设备可以将第二信道的传输方案切换为第一信息所建议的第二信道采用的传输方案,或者,第一信息的响应所指示的传输方案。Exemplarily, the sixth channel may be the second channel, and the terminal device may switch the transmission scheme of the second channel to the transmission scheme adopted by the second channel suggested by the first information, or the transmission scheme indicated by the response to the first information.
示例性的,第六信道可以是第四信道,终端设备可以将第四信道的传输方案切换为第一信息的响应所指示的传输方案。Exemplarily, the sixth channel may be the fourth channel, and the terminal device may switch the transmission scheme of the fourth channel to the transmission scheme indicated by the response to the first information.
示例性的,第六信道可以是PUSCH、PUCCH、PDSCH和PDCCH中一种或多种特定信道,或者,第六信道可以是PUSCH、PUCCH、PDSCH和PDCCH中任意一种或多种信道。传输方案切换后,第六信道所采用的传输方案可以是单TRP传输,或者,可以是多TRP传输。Exemplarily, the sixth channel may be one or more specific channels among PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH, or the sixth channel may be any one or more channels among PUSCH, PUCCH, PDSCH, and PDCCH. After the transmission scheme is switched, the transmission scheme adopted by the sixth channel may be single TRP transmission, or may be multi-TRP transmission.
例如,执行第一操作之前,第六信道采用多TRP传输,若第一信息指示了多个新波束,则终端设备可以选择多个新波束中波束质量最优的多个新波束继续采用多TRP传输。For example, before performing the first operation, the sixth channel uses multiple TRP transmission. If the first information indicates multiple new beams, the terminal device can select multiple new beams with the best beam quality among the multiple new beams to continue using multiple TRP transmission.
又例如,执行第一操作之前,第六信道采用多TRP传输,若第一信息仅指示了一个新波束,则终端设备可以将第六信道的传输方案切换为单TRP传输。For another example, before executing the first operation, the sixth channel adopts multi-TRP transmission. If the first information only indicates a new beam, the terminal device can switch the transmission scheme of the sixth channel to single TRP transmission.
示例性的,第六信道可以是上文中的第五信道,关于切换第六信道的传输方案的更多内容也可以参照上文关于传输方案回退的相关描述。Exemplarily, the sixth channel may be the fifth channel mentioned above. For more information on the transmission scheme for switching the sixth channel, refer to the above description on transmission scheme fallback.
(14)将第七信道的波束切换至目标波束;(14) Switching the beam of the seventh channel to the target beam;
示例性的,第一信息指示了第七信道适用第一目标波束,在S72中,终端设备可以将第七信道的波束切换为第一目标波束。Exemplarily, the first information indicates that the seventh channel is applicable to the first target beam. In S72, the terminal device may switch the beam of the seventh channel to the first target beam.
(15)将第八信道的波束切换至目标波束;(15) Switching the beam of the eighth channel to the target beam;
示例性的,第一信息指示了第八信道适用新波束或候选波束或第一目标波束,在S72中,终端设备可以将第八信道切换至目标波束,第八信道所要切换到的目标波束可以上文中所述的一种或多种目标波束。例如,可以将第八信道切换为第一信息所指示的新波束中波束质量最优的波束,或者,可以将第八信道切换为默认波束。Illustratively, the first information indicates that the eighth channel is applicable to a new beam, a candidate beam, or the first target beam. In S72, the terminal device may switch the eighth channel to the target beam. The target beam to which the eighth channel is switched may be one or more of the target beams described above. For example, the eighth channel may be switched to the beam with the best beam quality among the new beams indicated by the first information, or the eighth channel may be switched to the default beam.
下面对第一操作的执行时机进行示例性的描述。其中,下文中的第一时间单元是指第一操作的执行时机。The following is an exemplary description of the execution timing of the first operation, wherein the first time unit hereinafter refers to the execution timing of the first operation.
在一些实施方式中,终端设备在接收到第一信息的响应的情况下,执行第一操作。In some implementations, the terminal device performs the first operation upon receiving a response to the first information.
在第一种可能的实现方式中,响应于在第二时间单元之前接收到第一信息的响应,在第一时间单元执行第一操作,其中,第一信息的传输时间单元和第一时间单元之间的时长为第一预设时长。其中,第一信息的传输时间单元或者第一预设时长的起始时间单元可以是指承载第一信息的信道资源所占用的符号(如承载第一信息的信道资源占用的最后一个符号)。In a first possible implementation, in response to receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the duration between the transmission time unit of the first information and the first time unit is a first preset duration. The transmission time unit of the first information or the starting time unit of the first preset duration may refer to a symbol occupied by a channel resource carrying the first information (e.g., the last symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the first information).
也就是说,在第一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备在发送第一信息之后,如果在响应时间窗内接收到响应,则终端设备可以在发送第一信息之后的一段时间之后执行第一操作。That is, in a first possible implementation manner, after the terminal device sends the first information, if the terminal device receives a response within a response time window, the terminal device may perform the first operation a period of time after sending the first information.
示例性的,终端设备发送第一信息的时间单元为t1,如果终端设备在第二时间单元之前接收到第一信息的响应,则终端设备可以在时间单元(t1+T1)执行第一操作,T1表示第一预设时长。其中,第二时间单元可以是响应时间窗的结束时刻。响应时间窗的起始时刻可以是第一信息的传输时间单元。Exemplarily, the time unit for a terminal device to send a first message is t1. If the terminal device receives a response to the first message before a second time unit, the terminal device may perform the first operation at time unit (t1+T1), where T1 represents a first preset duration. The second time unit may be the end time of a response time window. The start time of the response time window may be the transmission time unit of the first message.
在第二种实施方式中,响应于在第二时间单元之前接收到第一信息的响应,在第一时间单元执行第一操作,其中,响应的传输时间单元和第一时间单元之间的时长为第二预设时长。其中,响应的传输时间单元或者第二预设时长的起始时间单元可以是指承载响应的信道资源所占用的符号(如承载响应的信道资源占用的最后一个符号)。In a second embodiment, in response to receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the duration between the transmission time unit of the response and the first time unit is a second preset duration. The transmission time unit of the response or the starting time unit of the second preset duration may refer to a symbol occupied by a channel resource carrying the response (e.g., the last symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the response).
也就是说,在第二种实施方式中,终端设备在发送第一信息之后,如果在响应时间窗内接收到响应,则终端设备可以在接收到响应后的一段时间后执行第一操作。That is, in the second embodiment, after the terminal device sends the first information, if it receives a response within the response time window, the terminal device may perform the first operation some time after receiving the response.
示例性的,终端设备发送第一信息的时间单元为t1,如果终端设备在第二时间单元之前接收到第一信息的响应,则终端设备可以在时间单元(t2+T2)执行第一操作。其中,t2表示第一信息的响应的传输时间单元,T2表示第二预设时长。其中,第二时间单元可以是响应时间窗的结束时刻。响应时间窗的起始时刻可以是第一信息的传输时间单元。Exemplarily, the time unit in which the terminal device sends the first information is t1. If the terminal device receives a response to the first information before the second time unit, the terminal device may perform the first operation at the time unit (t2 + T2). Here, t2 represents the transmission time unit of the response to the first information, and T2 represents the second preset duration. The second time unit may be the end time of the response time window. The start time of the response time window may be the transmission time unit of the first information.
在第三种实施方式中,响应于在第二时间单元之前接收到第一信息的响应,在第一时间单元执行第一操作,其中,第二时间单元和第一时间单元之间的时长为第三预设时长。In a third embodiment, in response to receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the duration between the second time unit and the first time unit is a third preset duration.
也就是说,在第三种实施方式中,终端设备在发送第一信息之后,如果在响应时间窗内接收到响应,则终端设备可以在响应时间窗结束后的第二预设时长后执行第一操作。That is, in the third embodiment, after the terminal device sends the first information, if it receives a response within the response time window, the terminal device may perform the first operation after a second preset time period after the end of the response time window.
示例性的,终端设备发送第一信息的时间单元为t1,如果终端设备在第二时间单元之前接收到第一信息的响应,则终端设备可以在时间单元(t3+T3)执行第一操作。其中,t3表示第二时间单元,T3表示第三预设时长。其中,第二时间单元可以是响应时间窗的结束时刻。响应时间窗的起始时刻可以是第一信息的传输时间单元。Exemplarily, the time unit in which the terminal device sends the first information is t1. If the terminal device receives a response to the first information before the second time unit, the terminal device may perform the first operation at the time unit (t3 + T3). Here, t3 represents the second time unit, and T3 represents the third preset duration. The second time unit may be the end time of the response time window. The start time of the response time window may be the transmission time unit of the first information.
在一些实施方式中,终端设备在未接收到第一信息的响应的情况下,执行第一操作。示例性的,未接收到第一信息的响应,可以表示网络设备确认第一信息,或确认启动波束管理或波束切换。In some implementations, the terminal device performs the first operation when not receiving a response to the first information. Exemplarily, not receiving a response to the first information may indicate that the network device confirms the first information, or confirms starting beam management or beam switching.
在第四种实施方式中,响应于在第二时间单元之前未接收到第一信息的响应,在第一时间单元执行所述第一操作,其中,第一信息的传输时间单元和第一时间单元之间的时长为第四预设时长。其中,第一信息的传输时间单元或者第四预设时长的起始时间单元可以是指承载第一信息的信道资源所占用的符号(如承载第一信息的信道资源占用的最后一个符号)。In a fourth embodiment, in response to not receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the duration between the transmission time unit of the first information and the first time unit is a fourth preset duration. The transmission time unit of the first information or the starting time unit of the fourth preset duration may refer to a symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the first information (e.g., the last symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the first information).
也就是说,在第四种可能的实现方式中,终端设备在发送第一信息之后,如果在响应时间窗内未接收到响应,则终端设备可以在发送第一信息之后的一段时间之后执行第一操作。That is, in the fourth possible implementation, after the terminal device sends the first information, if no response is received within the response time window, the terminal device may perform the first operation a period of time after sending the first information.
示例性的,终端设备发送第一信息的时间单元为t1,如果终端设备在第二时间单元之前未接收到第一信息的响应,则终端设备可以在时间单元(t1+T4)执行第一操作,T4表示第四预设时长。其中,第二时间单元可以是响应时间窗的结束时刻。响应时间窗的起始时刻可以是终端设备发送第一信息的时间单元。Exemplarily, the time unit for the terminal device to send the first information is t1. If the terminal device does not receive a response to the first information before the second time unit, the terminal device may perform the first operation at the time unit (t1+T4), where T4 represents a fourth preset duration. The second time unit may be the end time of the response time window. The start time of the response time window may be the time unit for the terminal device to send the first information.
在第五种实施方式中,响应于在第二时间单元之前未接收到第一信息的响应,在第一时间单元执行第一操作,其中,第二时间单元和第一时间单元之间的时长为第五预设时长。In a fifth embodiment, in response to not receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the duration between the second time unit and the first time unit is a fifth preset duration.
也就是说,在第五种实施方式中,终端设备在发送第一信息之后,如果在响应时间窗内未接收到响应,则终端设备可以在响应时间窗结束的一段时间后执行第一操作。That is, in the fifth embodiment, after the terminal device sends the first information, if no response is received within the response time window, the terminal device may perform the first operation some time after the end of the response time window.
示例性的,终端设备发送第一信息的时间单元为t1,如果终端设备在第二时间单元之前未接收到第一信息的响应,则终端设备可以在时间单元(t3+T5)执行第一操作。其中,t3表示第二时间单元,T5表示第五预设时长。其中,第二时间单元可以是响应时间窗的结束时刻。响应时间窗的起始时刻可以是第一信息的传输时间单元。在第六种实施方式中,响应于在第二时间单元之前未接收到第一信息的响应,在第一时间单元执行第一操作,其中,第一时间单元为第二时间单元。Exemplarily, the time unit in which the terminal device sends the first information is t1. If the terminal device does not receive a response to the first information before the second time unit, the terminal device may perform the first operation in the time unit (t3+T5). t3 represents the second time unit, and T5 represents the fifth preset duration. The second time unit may be the end moment of the response time window. The starting moment of the response time window may be the transmission time unit of the first information. In a sixth embodiment, in response to not receiving a response to the first information before the second time unit, the first operation is performed in the first time unit, wherein the first time unit is the second time unit.
也就是说,在第六种实施方式中,终端设备在发送第一信息之后,如果在响应时间窗内未接收到响应,则终端设备可以在响应时间窗结束时执行第一操作。That is, in the sixth embodiment, after the terminal device sends the first information, if no response is received within the response time window, the terminal device may perform the first operation at the end of the response time window.
示例性的,终端设备发送第一信息的时间单元为t1,如果终端设备在第二时间单元之前未接收到第一信息的响应,则终端设备可以在时间单元t3执行第一操作。其中,t3表示第二时间单元。其中,第二时间单元可以是响应时间窗的结束时刻。For example, the terminal device sends the first information at time t1. If the terminal device does not receive a response to the first information before the second time, the terminal device may perform the first operation at time t3. t3 represents the second time. The second time may be the end of the response time window.
在第七种实施方式中,在第一时间单元执行第一操作,第一信息的传输时间单元和第一时间单元之间的时长为第六预设时长。也即,第一信息的传输时间单元或第六预设时长的起始时间单元为承载第一信息的信道资源所占用的符号(如承载第一信息的信道资源占用的最后一个符号)。其中,第一时间单元可以晚于第一信息的传输时间单元。In a seventh embodiment, the first operation is performed in a first time unit, and the duration between the transmission time unit of the first information and the first time unit is a sixth preset duration. That is, the transmission time unit of the first information or the starting time unit of the sixth preset duration is the symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the first information (e.g., the last symbol occupied by the channel resource carrying the first information). The first time unit may be later than the transmission time unit of the first information.
也就是说,在第七种实施方式中,终端设备执行第一操作不依赖于第一信息的响应。That is, in the seventh implementation, the terminal device performs the first operation independently of the response to the first information.
示例性的,终端设备发送第一信息的时间单元为t1,终端设备可以在时间单元(t1+T6)执行第一操作。其中,T6表示第六预设时长。Exemplarily, the time unit for the terminal device to send the first information is t1, and the terminal device may perform the first operation in the time unit (t1+T6), where T6 represents the sixth preset time length.
需要说明的是,本文中的时间单元可以是指符号(symbol)、时隙(slot)、帧、子帧等,但并不限于此。It should be noted that the time unit in this article may refer to a symbol, a time slot, a frame, a subframe, etc., but is not limited thereto.
还需要说明的是,本文对于上述的响应时间窗的时长、第一预设时长、第二预设时长、第三预设时长、第四预设时长、第五预设时长和第六预设时长的长度并不限制,响应时间窗的时长、第一预设时长、第二预设时长、第三预设时长、第四预设时长、第五预设时长和第六预设时长中的至少一项可以由网络设备配置和/或可以由协议定义。It should also be noted that this document does not limit the length of the above-mentioned response time window, the first preset time window, the second preset time window, the third preset time window, the fourth preset time window, the fifth preset time window and the sixth preset time window. At least one of the length of the response time window, the first preset time window, the second preset time window, the third preset time window, the fourth preset time window, the fifth preset time window and the sixth preset time window can be configured by the network device and/or can be defined by the protocol.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在CA场景下,多个CC可以采用统一TCI框架下,也即,多个CC可以使用相同的一个或多个波束。若多个CC所使用的相同波束为待切换波束,则终端设备可以在待切换波束对应的多个CC上进行波束切换。在这种情况下,预设时长可以是根据待切换波束对应的多个CC的所有带宽部分(Bandwidth Part,BWP)的子载波间隔(SubCarrier Spacing,SCS)中的最小值确定,或者,预设时长可以是根据待切换波束对应的多个CC的当前激活BWP的SCS中的最小值确定。其中,预设时长可以是第一预设时长、第二预设时长、第三预设时长、第四预设时长、第五预设时长和第六预设时长中的至少一项。In a possible implementation, in a CA scenario, multiple CCs may adopt a unified TCI framework, that is, multiple CCs may use the same one or more beams. If the same beam used by multiple CCs is the beam to be switched, the terminal device may perform beam switching on multiple CCs corresponding to the beam to be switched. In this case, the preset duration may be determined based on the minimum value of the subcarrier spacing (SCS) of all bandwidth parts (Bandwidth Part, BWP) of the multiple CCs corresponding to the beam to be switched, or the preset duration may be determined based on the minimum value of the SCS of the currently activated BWP of the multiple CCs corresponding to the beam to be switched. The preset duration may be at least one of the first preset duration, the second preset duration, the third preset duration, the fourth preset duration, the fifth preset duration, and the sixth preset duration.
在另一种可能的实施方式中,在CA场景下,多个CC可以采用统一TCI框架下,也即,多个CC可以使用相同的一个或多个波束。若多个CC所要切换到的目标波束为相同的一个或多个波束,也即,目标波束可以应用于多个CC,在这种情况下,预设时长可以是根据目标波束应用到的多个CC的所有BWP的SCS中的最小值确定,或者,预设时长可以是根据目标波束应用到的多个CC的当前激活BWP的SCS中的最小值确定。In another possible implementation, in a CA scenario, multiple CCs may adopt a unified TCI framework, that is, multiple CCs may use the same one or more beams. If the target beams to which multiple CCs are switched are the same one or more beams, that is, the target beam can be applied to multiple CCs, in this case, the preset duration may be determined based on the minimum value of the SCS of all BWPs of the multiple CCs to which the target beam is applied, or the preset duration may be determined based on the minimum value of the SCS of the currently activated BWPs of the multiple CCs to which the target beam is applied.
由上文可知,第一操作可以包括波束切换。在执行波束切换的场景中,上文中的预设时长可以是称之为波束应用时长(Beam Application Time,BAT)。在执行小区切换的场景中,预设时长也可以称之为小区切换时间。As can be seen from the above, the first operation may include beam switching. In the scenario of performing beam switching, the preset duration mentioned above may be referred to as beam application time (BAT). In the scenario of performing cell switching, the preset duration may also be referred to as cell switching time.
示例性的,目标波束的BAT可以包括以下至少一项:Exemplarily, the BAT of the target beam may include at least one of the following:
1)切换至目标波束所属小区所需的小区切换时长;也即,终端设备执行小区间的波束切换,且不仅切换至目标波束,还切换至目标波束所属的小区,在这种情况下,目标波束的BAT需要包括小区切换时长。1) The cell switching duration required to switch to the cell to which the target beam belongs; that is, the terminal device performs beam switching between cells, and switches not only to the target beam, but also to the cell to which the target beam belongs. In this case, the BAT of the target beam needs to include the cell switching duration.
2)目标波束所属小区的配置生效时长;2) The duration of the configuration of the cell to which the target beam belongs;
其中,配置生效时长可以包括:目标波束所属小区的RRC预配置所在的配置信令的传输时长和/或目标波束所属小区的RRC预配置的生效时长。Among them, the configuration validity period may include: the transmission duration of the configuration signaling containing the RRC pre-configuration of the cell to which the target beam belongs and/or the validity period of the RRC pre-configuration of the cell to which the target beam belongs.
具体的,终端设备执行小区间的波束切换,且不仅切换至目标波束,还切换至目标波束所属的小区。在这种情况下,还需要考虑:目标波束所属小区的RRC预配置所在的配置信令的传输时长和/或目标波束所属小区的RRC预配置的生效时长。Specifically, the terminal device performs inter-cell beam switching, and switches not only to the target beam, but also to the cell to which the target beam belongs. In this case, it is also necessary to consider: the transmission duration of the configuration signaling containing the RRC pre-configuration of the cell to which the target beam belongs and/or the validity duration of the RRC pre-configuration of the cell to which the target beam belongs.
在一个例子中,在接收第一信息之后,网络设备可以基于第一信息确定目标波束以及确定终端设备切换至目标波束所属的小区,由此,网络设备可以向终端设备发送目标波束所属小区的RRC预配置信息,相较于在接收第一信息之前发送多个小区的RRC预配置信息,采用这样的方案,网络设备仅需配置所要切换到的小区的RRC预配置信息,有利于降低信令开销。In one example, after receiving the first information, the network device can determine the target beam based on the first information and determine that the terminal device switches to the cell to which the target beam belongs. Thus, the network device can send the RRC preconfiguration information of the cell to which the target beam belongs to the terminal device. Compared with sending the RRC preconfiguration information of multiple cells before receiving the first information, with such a solution, the network device only needs to configure the RRC preconfiguration information of the cell to be switched to, which is conducive to reducing signaling overhead.
3)射频调谐时长;3) RF tuning time;
4)目标波束所属小区的激活时长;4) The activation duration of the cell to which the target beam belongs;
在S72中,终端设备不仅切换至目标波束,还需激活目标波束所属的小区,在这种情况下,目标波束的BAT可以包括目标波束所属小区的激活时长。In S72, the terminal device not only switches to the target beam, but also activates the cell to which the target beam belongs. In this case, the BAT of the target beam may include the activation duration of the cell to which the target beam belongs.
5)辅小区激活时长;5) Secondary cell activation duration;
具体的,若目标波束为辅小区的波束,且该辅小区处于去激活状态,这种情况下,目标波束的BAT可以包括目标波束所属的辅小区的激活时长。Specifically, if the target beam is a beam of a secondary cell and the secondary cell is in a deactivated state, in this case, the BAT of the target beam may include the activation duration of the secondary cell to which the target beam belongs.
6)目标波束对应的TCI状态的激活时长;6) The activation duration of the TCI state corresponding to the target beam;
具体的,在波束切换之前,如果目标波束对应的TCI状态处于去激活状态,则目标波束的BAT可以包括目标波束对应的TCI状态的激活时长。Specifically, before beam switching, if the TCI state corresponding to the target beam is in a deactivated state, the BAT of the target beam may include the activation duration of the TCI state corresponding to the target beam.
7)当前激活的TCI状态的去激活时长;7) Deactivation duration of the currently activated TCI state;
具体的,在应用目标波束之前,终端设备可以将当前激活的TCI状态(如待切换波束对应的TCI状态)进行去激活,为此,目标波束的BAT可以包括当前激活的TCI状态的去激活时长。Specifically, before applying the target beam, the terminal device may deactivate the currently activated TCI state (such as the TCI state corresponding to the beam to be switched). To this end, the BAT of the target beam may include the deactivation duration of the currently activated TCI state.
8)当前激活的TCI状态中除目标波束对应的TCI状态之外的其它激活TCI状态的去激活时长;8) The deactivation duration of all currently activated TCI states except the TCI state corresponding to the target beam;
具体的,在应用目标波束之前,激活的TCI状态可以包括目标波束对应的TCI状态,还可以包括除目标波束以外的其他波束对应的TCI状态,在这种情况下,终端设备在应用目标波束之前可以将当前激活的TCI状态中除目标波束对应的TCI状态之外的其它激活TCI状态进行去激活。为此,目标波束的BAT可以包括当前激活的TCI状态中除目标波束对应的TCI状态之外的其它激活TCI状态的去激活时长。Specifically, before applying the target beam, the activated TCI state may include the TCI state corresponding to the target beam, and may also include TCI states corresponding to beams other than the target beam. In this case, the terminal device may deactivate other activated TCI states in the currently activated TCI state except the TCI state corresponding to the target beam before applying the target beam. To this end, the BAT of the target beam may include the deactivation duration of other activated TCI states in the currently activated TCI state except the TCI state corresponding to the target beam.
9)当前小区的去激活时长;9) The deactivation duration of the current cell;
具体的,在第一操作包括小区切换的情况下,在应用目标波束之前,可以先将当前小区去激活。为此,目标波束的BAT可以包括当前小区的去激活时长。Specifically, when the first operation includes cell switching, the current cell may be deactivated before applying the target beam. To this end, the BAT of the target beam may include the deactivation duration of the current cell.
10)备选小区中除目标波束所属的小区之外的其它备选小区的去激活时长。10) The deactivation duration of other candidate cells except the cell to which the target beam belongs.
具体的,在应用目标波束之前,终端设备可以将未提供目标波束的备选小区去激活。为此,为此,目标波束的BAT可以包括备选小区中除目标波束所属的小区之外的其它备选小区的去激活时长。Specifically, before applying the target beam, the terminal device may deactivate the candidate cells that do not provide the target beam. To this end, the BAT of the target beam may include the deactivation duration of other candidate cells in the candidate cells except the cell to which the target beam belongs.
关于实施例七的更多内容可以参照本文关于其他实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For more details about the seventh embodiment, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments in this document, which will not be repeated here.
实施例八Example 8
参照图8,图8是本申请实施例中第四种通信方法的流程示意图。图8示出的步骤可应用于终端设备。图8示出的通信方法可以包括S81。8 is a flow chart of a fourth communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. The steps shown in FIG8 can be applied to a terminal device. The communication method shown in FIG8 can include S81.
S81,发送第一信息,第一信息包括以下至少一项:检测到的切换事件的信息,切换事件用于波束管理或波束切换;第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示待切换波束和/或待切换小区和/或待切换小区组,待切换小区为待切换波束所属的小区,待切换小区组为待切换小区所属的小区组;第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示新波束和/或新小区和/或新小区组,新小区为新波束所属的小区,新小区组为新小区所属的小区组。S81, send first information, the first information includes at least one of the following: information about a detected switching event, the switching event is used for beam management or beam switching; first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the beam to be switched and/or the cell to be switched and/or the cell group to be switched, the cell to be switched is the cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched is the cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs; second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell is the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group is the cell group to which the new cell belongs.
在一种情况下,网络设备可以预先配置波束之间的关联关系。In one case, the network device may pre-configure the association relationship between beams.
示例性的,第一信息可以包括新波束的指示信息,但不包括待切换波束的指示信息,网络设备可以根据新波束以及波束之间的关联关系,确定新波束关联的待切换波束。Exemplarily, the first information may include indication information of the new beam, but does not include indication information of the beam to be switched. The network device may determine the beam to be switched associated with the new beam based on the new beam and the association relationship between the beams.
又示例性的,第一信息可以包括待切换波束的指示信息,但不包括新波束的指示信息,网络设备可以根据待切换波束以及波束之间的关联关系,确定待切换波束关联的新波束。As another example, the first information may include indication information of the beam to be switched, but does not include indication information of the new beam. The network device may determine the new beam associated with the beam to be switched based on the beam to be switched and the association relationship between the beams.
再示例性的,第一信息可以包括待切换波束的指示信息和新波束的指示信息。进一步地,第一信息还可以指示待切换波束和新波束之间关联关系,待切换波束和新波束之间的关联关系可以采用显式或隐式地方式来指示。As another example, the first information may include indication information of the beam to be switched and indication information of the new beam. Furthermore, the first information may also indicate an association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam, and the association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam may be indicated explicitly or implicitly.
作为一种可能的实现方式,第一信息可以包括关联指示信息,关联指示信息可以用于指示以下至少一项:待切换波束和新波束之间的关联关系、待切换小区和新小区之间的关联关系、待切换小区组和新小区组之间的关联。其中,待切换波束和新波束之间的关联关系是指从待切换波束切换至关联的新波束,待切换小区和新小区之间的关联关系是指从待切换小区切换至关联的新小区,待切换小区组和新小区组之间的关联关系是指从待切换小区组切换至关联的新小区组。As a possible implementation manner, the first information may include association indication information, and the association indication information may be used to indicate at least one of the following: an association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam, an association relationship between the cell to be switched and the new cell, and an association relationship between the cell group to be switched and the new cell group. The association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam refers to switching from the beam to be switched to the associated new beam, the association relationship between the cell to be switched and the new cell refers to switching from the cell to be switched to the associated new cell, and the association relationship between the cell group to be switched and the new cell group refers to switching from the cell group to be switched to the associated new cell group.
作为另一种可能的实现方式,第一信息通过隐式方式指示以下至少一项:待切换波束和新波束之间的关联关系、待切换小区和新小区之间的关联关系、待切换小区组和新小区组之间的关联。所述隐式方式可以是将相互具有关联关系的信息根据预设顺序和位置在第一信息中承载。As another possible implementation, the first information implicitly indicates at least one of the following: an association relationship between the beam to be switched and the new beam, an association relationship between the cell to be switched and the new cell, and an association relationship between the cell group to be switched and the new cell group. The implicit method may be to carry the mutually associated information in the first information according to a preset order and position.
由上可知,在一些实施例中,新波束和待切换波束之间可以具有关联关系。或者说,新波束和当前波束之间可以具有关联关系。As can be seen from the above, in some embodiments, the new beam and the beam to be switched may be associated with each other. In other words, the new beam and the current beam may be associated with each other.
进一步地,终端设备可以切换至新波束。具体的,终端设备可以切换至待切换波束所关联的新波束或当前波束所关联的新波束。例如,若波束1为待切换波束,波束1关联波束2,且波束2为新波束,则终端设备可以从波束1切换至波束2。Furthermore, the terminal device can switch to a new beam. Specifically, the terminal device can switch to a new beam associated with the beam to be switched or a new beam associated with the current beam. For example, if beam 1 is the beam to be switched, beam 1 is associated with beam 2, and beam 2 is a new beam, the terminal device can switch from beam 1 to beam 2.
或者,终端设备可以不再使用新波束关联的全部当前波束或者新波束关联的待切换波束。例如,波束1为新波束,波束1关联的波束2和波束3为当前波束,其中,波束2为待切换波束,波束3不是待切换波束。终端设备可以将波束2切换为波束1。此外,终端设备可以不将波束3切换为波束1,或者,也可以将波束3切换为波束1。Alternatively, the terminal device may no longer use all current beams associated with the new beam or the beam to be switched associated with the new beam. For example, Beam 1 is the new beam, and Beam 2 and Beam 3 associated with Beam 1 are the current beams. Beam 2 is the beam to be switched, and Beam 3 is not. The terminal device may switch Beam 2 to Beam 1. Furthermore, the terminal device may not switch Beam 3 to Beam 1, or it may switch Beam 3 to Beam 1.
在具体实施中,网络设备可以配置RS传输参数之间的关联关系,以配置波束之间的关联关系。In a specific implementation, the network device can configure the association relationship between RS transmission parameters to configure the association relationship between beams.
具体的,资源配置信息可以包括第一RS传输参数的配置信息和第二RS传输参数的配置信息,其中,第一RS传输参数与当前波束关联,第二RS传输参数与备选波束关联,且第一RS传输参数和第二RS传输参数关联。其中,第一RS传输参数可以是以下至少一项:第一RS资源、第一RS资源集、第一RS资源配置,第二RS传输参数可以是以下至少一项:第二RS资源、第二RS资源集、第二RS资源配置。RS传输参数可以通过RS传输参数的索引或标识来表征。Specifically, the resource configuration information may include configuration information of a first RS transmission parameter and configuration information of a second RS transmission parameter, wherein the first RS transmission parameter is associated with the current beam, the second RS transmission parameter is associated with the alternative beam, and the first RS transmission parameter and the second RS transmission parameter are associated. The first RS transmission parameter may be at least one of the following: a first RS resource, a first RS resource set, or a first RS resource configuration, and the second RS transmission parameter may be at least one of the following: a second RS resource, a second RS resource set, or a second RS resource configuration. The RS transmission parameter may be represented by an index or identifier of the RS transmission parameter.
在具体实施中,第一RS传输参数和第二RS传输参数可以通过以下至少一种方式相关联:第一RS传输参数的配置信息包括第二RS传输参数的配置信息、第二RS传输参数的配置信息包括第一RS传输参数的配置信息、网络设备通过信令指示第一RS传输参数和第二RS传输参数之间的关联关系。In a specific implementation, the first RS transmission parameter and the second RS transmission parameter can be associated in at least one of the following ways: the configuration information of the first RS transmission parameter includes the configuration information of the second RS transmission parameter, the configuration information of the second RS transmission parameter includes the configuration information of the first RS transmission parameter, and the network device indicates the association relationship between the first RS transmission parameter and the second RS transmission parameter through signaling.
进一步地,若第一RS传输参数关联的当前波束为待切换波束,则终端设备可以将第二RS传输参数关联的备选波束作为待切换波束对应的新波束,或者,终端设备可以测量第二RS传输参数,以确定待切换波束对应的新波束。Furthermore, if the current beam associated with the first RS transmission parameter is the beam to be switched, the terminal device can use the alternative beam associated with the second RS transmission parameter as the new beam corresponding to the beam to be switched, or the terminal device can measure the second RS transmission parameter to determine the new beam corresponding to the beam to be switched.
在第一个示例中,一个RS资源可以关联另一个RS资源。In the first example, one RS resource can be associated with another RS resource.
例如,若终端设备通过测量RS资源1确定波束1为待切换波束,则可以测量RS资源1关联的RS资源2,以判断波束2是否为对应的新波束。For example, if the terminal device determines that beam 1 is the beam to be switched by measuring RS resource 1, it can measure RS resource 2 associated with RS resource 1 to determine whether beam 2 is the corresponding new beam.
在第二个示例中,一个RS资源可以关联多个RS资源。例如,一个RS资源可以关联一个RS资源集,从而与该RS资源集中的RS资源关联。又例如,一个RS资源可以关联一个RS资源配置,从而与该RS资源配置中的RS资源关联。In the second example, an RS resource can be associated with multiple RS resources. For example, an RS resource can be associated with an RS resource set, thereby being associated with the RS resources in the RS resource set. For another example, an RS resource can be associated with an RS resource configuration, thereby being associated with the RS resources in the RS resource configuration.
例如,若终端设备通过测量RS资源1确定波束1为待切换波束,则可以测量RS资源1关联的RS资源2和RS资源3,以判断RS资源2对应的波束2和RS资源3对应的波束3是否为对应的新波束。For example, if the terminal device determines that beam 1 is the beam to be switched by measuring RS resource 1, it can measure RS resource 2 and RS resource 3 associated with RS resource 1 to determine whether beam 2 corresponding to RS resource 2 and beam 3 corresponding to RS resource 3 are corresponding new beams.
在第三个示例中,多个RS资源可以关联多个RS资源。例如,一个RS资源集可以关联另一个RS资源集。又例如,一个RS资源集可以关联一个RS资源配置。又例如,一个RS资源配置可以关联另一个RS资源配置。再例如,一个RS资源配置可以关联一个RS资源集。In a third example, multiple RS resources can be associated with multiple RS resources. For example, an RS resource set can be associated with another RS resource set. For another example, an RS resource set can be associated with an RS resource configuration. For another example, an RS resource configuration can be associated with another RS resource configuration. For another example, an RS resource configuration can be associated with an RS resource set.
例如,若终端设备通过测量RS资源1确定波束1为待切换波束,RS资源1所属的RS资源集1和RS资源集2关联,则终端设备可以测量RS资源集2中的RS资源以确定新波束。For example, if the terminal device determines that beam 1 is the beam to be switched by measuring RS resource 1, and RS resource set 1 and RS resource set 2 to which RS resource 1 belongs are associated, the terminal device can measure the RS resources in RS resource set 2 to determine the new beam.
需要说明的是,网络设备也可以不配置波束之间的关联关系。示例性的,网络设备在接收到第一信息之后,可以启动波束训练过程等。It should be noted that the network device may not configure the association relationship between beams. For example, after receiving the first information, the network device may start a beam training process.
关于实施例八的更多内容可以参照本文其他实施例的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For more details about the eighth embodiment, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments in this document, which will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,本文提供的各个实施例、各种可能的实现方式、各个示例、各个例子、各种情况下的方案等可以单独使用,也可以相互结合使用,以实现不同的技术效果。It should be noted that the various embodiments, various possible implementation methods, various examples, various cases, solutions, etc. provided in this document can be used alone or in combination with each other to achieve different technical effects.
可以理解的是,在具体实施中,上述方法可以采用软件程序的方式实现,该软件程序运行于芯片或芯片模组内部集成的处理器中;或者,该方法可以采用硬件或者软硬结合的方式来实现,例如用专用的芯片或芯片模组来实现,或者,用专用的芯片或芯片模组结合软件程序来实现。It can be understood that, in a specific implementation, the above method can be implemented in the form of a software program, which runs in a processor integrated inside a chip or chip module; or, the method can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and software, for example, using a dedicated chip or chip module, or using a dedicated chip or chip module in combination with a software program.
参照图9,图9是本申请实施例中一种通信装置的结构示意图,图9示出的通信装置可以部署于终端设备。图9示出的装置可以包括:Referring to Figure 9, Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device in an embodiment of the present application. The communication device shown in Figure 9 can be deployed in a terminal device. The device shown in Figure 9 may include:
发送模块91,用于发送第一信息,所述第一信息包括以下至少一项:The sending module 91 is configured to send first information, where the first information includes at least one of the following:
检测到的切换事件的信息,所述切换事件用于波束管理或波束切换;Information about a detected switching event, the switching event being used for beam management or beam switching;
第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示待切换波束和/或待切换小区和/或待切换小区组,所述待切换小区为所述待切换波束所属的小区,所述待切换小区组为所述待切换小区所属的小区组;First indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a beam to be switched and/or a cell to be switched and/or a cell group to be switched, where the cell to be switched is a cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched is a cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs;
第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示新波束和/或新小区和/或新小区组,所述新小区为所述新波束所属的小区,所述新小区组为所述新小区所属的小区组。Second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell is the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group is the cell group to which the new cell belongs.
可选的,发送模块91可以是通信接口、收发器等。Optionally, the sending module 91 may be a communication interface, a transceiver, etc.
在具体实施中,图9示出的通信装置可以对应于终端设备中具有通信功能的芯片;或者对应于终端设备中包括具有通信功能的芯片或芯片模组,或者对应于终端设备。In a specific implementation, the communication device shown in Figure 9 may correspond to a chip with communication function in a terminal device; or correspond to a chip or chip module with communication function in a terminal device, or correspond to a terminal device.
参照图10,图10是本申请实施例中另一种通信装置的结构示意图,图10示出的通信装置可以部署于网络设备。图10示出的装置可以包括:Referring to Figure 10, Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of the structure of another communication device in an embodiment of the present application. The communication device shown in Figure 10 can be deployed in a network device. The device shown in Figure 10 may include:
接收模块101,用于接收第一信息,所述第一信息包括以下至少一项:The receiving module 101 is configured to receive first information, where the first information includes at least one of the following:
检测到的切换事件的信息,所述切换事件用于波束管理或波束切换;Information about a detected switching event, the switching event being used for beam management or beam switching;
第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示待切换波束和/或待切换小区和/或待切换小区组,所述待切换小区为所述待切换波束所属的小区,所述待切换小区组为所述待切换小区所属的小区组;First indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate a beam to be switched and/or a cell to be switched and/or a cell group to be switched, where the cell to be switched is a cell to which the beam to be switched belongs, and the cell group to be switched is a cell group to which the cell to be switched belongs;
第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示新波束和/或新小区和/或新小区组,所述新小区为所述新波束所属的小区,所述新小区组为所述新小区所属的小区组。Second indication information, the second indication information is used to indicate a new beam and/or a new cell and/or a new cell group, the new cell is the cell to which the new beam belongs, and the new cell group is the cell group to which the new cell belongs.
可选的,接收模块101可以是通信接口、收发器等。Optionally, the receiving module 101 may be a communication interface, a transceiver, etc.
在具体实施中,图10示出的通信装置可以对应于网络设备中具有通信功能的芯片;或者对应于网络设备中包括具有通信功能的芯片或芯片模组,或者对应于网络设备。In a specific implementation, the communication device shown in FIG10 may correspond to a chip with a communication function in a network device; or correspond to a chip or chip module with a communication function in a network device, or correspond to a network device.
关于本申请实施例中的通信装置的工作原理、工作方法和有益效果等更多内容,可以参照上文关于方法的相关描述,在此不再赘述。For more information about the working principle, working method, beneficial effects, etc. of the communication device in the embodiment of the present application, please refer to the relevant description of the method above and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被计算机运行时,上述的方法被执行。所述存储介质可以包括只读存储器(read-only memory,简称ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,简称RAM)、磁盘或光盘等。所述存储介质还可以包括非挥发性存储器(non-volatile)或者非瞬态(non-transitory)存储器等。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium having a computer program stored thereon. When the computer program is executed by a computer, the above method is executed. The storage medium may include a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk. The storage medium may also include a non-volatile memory or a non-transitory memory.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,包括存储器和处理器,所述存储器上存储有可在所述处理器上运行的计算机程序,所述处理器运行所述计算机程序时执行上述的方法的步骤。所述通信装置可以是终端设备,或者,可以是网络设备,其中,终端设备可以是手机、计算机、平板电脑、车载终端和穿戴式设备等,但并不限于此。An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device comprising a memory and a processor, wherein the memory stores a computer program executable on the processor, and the processor executes the steps of the above method when executing the computer program. The communication device may be a terminal device or a network device, wherein the terminal device may be, but is not limited to, a mobile phone, a computer, a tablet computer, an in-vehicle terminal, or a wearable device.
参照图11,图11是本申请实施例中一种通信装置的硬件结构示意图。图11示出的通信装置可以是上述的终端设备,也可以是上述的网络设备。图11示出的通信装置包括存储器111、处理器112和收发器113,处理器112和存储器111、收发器113耦合,存储器111可以位于通信装置内,也可以位于通信装置外。存储器111、处理器112和收发器113可以通过通信总线连接。收发器113用于与其他设备通信。Referring to Figure 11, Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a communication device in an embodiment of the present application. The communication device shown in Figure 11 can be the above-mentioned terminal device or the above-mentioned network device. The communication device shown in Figure 11 includes a memory 111, a processor 112 and a transceiver 113. The processor 112 is coupled to the memory 111 and the transceiver 113. The memory 111 can be located inside the communication device or outside the communication device. The memory 111, the processor 112 and the transceiver 113 can be connected via a communication bus. The transceiver 113 is used to communicate with other devices.
可选的,收发器113可以为发射机或接收机。所述存储器111上存储有可在所述处理器112上运行的计算机程序,所述处理器112运行所述计算机程序时收发器113执行上述实施例所提供的方法中的步骤,和/或,所述处理器112运行所述计算机程序时收发器113执行上述实施例所提供的方法中的步骤。Optionally, the transceiver 113 may be a transmitter or a receiver. The memory 111 stores a computer program that can be executed on the processor 112. When the processor 112 executes the computer program, the transceiver 113 executes the steps of the method provided in the above embodiment, and/or when the processor 112 executes the computer program, the transceiver 113 executes the steps of the method provided in the above embodiment.
应理解,本申请实施例中,所述处理器可以为中央处理单元(central processing unit,简称CPU),该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,简称DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,简称ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,简称FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that in the embodiments of the present application, the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), or may be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), application-specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field-programmable gate arrays (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
还应理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是ROM、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,简称PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,简称EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,简称EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,简称RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,简称SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,简称SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(doubledata rate SDRAM,简称DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,简称ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,简称SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,简称DR RAM)。It should also be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory may be ROM, programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as static RAM (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (SLDRAM), and direct rambus RAM (DR RAM).
上述实施例,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行所述计算机指令或计算机程序时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机程序可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机程序可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。The above embodiments can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination. When implemented using software, the above embodiments can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instructions or computer program are loaded or executed on a computer, the process or function described in the embodiment of the present application is generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer program can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer program can be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired or wireless means.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the serial numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的方法、装置和系统,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的;例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式;例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed methods, devices, and systems can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely schematic; for example, the division of the units is merely a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation; for example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed across multiple network units. Some or all of these units may be selected to achieve the purpose of this embodiment according to actual needs.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理包括,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用硬件加软件功能单元的形式实现。例如,对于应用于或集成于芯片的各个装置、产品,其包含的各个模块/单元可以都采用电路等硬件的方式实现,或者,至少部分模块/单元可以采用软件程序的方式实现,该软件程序运行于芯片内部集成的处理器,剩余的(如果有)部分模块/单元可以采用电路等硬件方式实现;对于应用于或集成于芯片模组的各个装置、产品,其包含的各个模块/单元可以都采用电路等硬件的方式实现,不同的模块/单元可以位于芯片模组的同一组件(例如芯片、电路模块等)或者不同组件中,或者,至少部分模块/单元可以采用软件程序的方式实现,该软件程序运行于芯片模组内部集成的处理器,剩余的(如果有)部分模块/单元可以采用电路等硬件方式实现;对于应用于或集成于终端的各个装置、产品,其包含的各个模块/单元可以都采用电路等硬件的方式实现,不同的模块/单元可以位于终端内同一组件(例如,芯片、电路模块等)或者不同组件中,或者,至少部分模块/单元可以采用软件程序的方式实现,该软件程序运行于终端内部集成的处理器,剩余的(如果有)部分模块/单元可以采用电路等硬件方式实现。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may be physically included separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of hardware plus software functional units. For example, for various devices and products applied to or integrated into a chip, the various modules/units contained therein may all be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits, or at least some of the modules/units may be implemented in the form of software programs, which run on the processor integrated inside the chip, and the remaining (if any) modules/units may be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits; for various devices and products applied to or integrated into a chip module, the various modules/units contained therein may all be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits, and different modules/units may be located in the same component (such as a chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components of the chip module, or at least some of the modules/units may be located in the same component (such as a chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components of the chip module, or at least some of the modules/units may be located in the same component (such as a chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components of the chip module. The element can be implemented in the form of a software program, which runs on the processor integrated inside the chip module, and the remaining (if any) modules/units can be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits; for various devices and products applied to or integrated in the terminal, the various modules/units contained therein can be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits, and different modules/units can be located in the same component (for example, chip, circuit module, etc.) or different components in the terminal, or, at least some modules/units can be implemented in the form of a software program, which runs on the processor integrated inside the terminal, and the remaining (if any) modules/units can be implemented in the form of hardware such as circuits.
上述以软件功能单元的形式实现的集成的单元,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。上述软件功能单元存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、ROM、随机存取存储器RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The above-mentioned integrated unit implemented in the form of a software functional unit can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. The above-mentioned software functional unit is stored in a storage medium and includes a number of instructions for causing a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform some steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, ROM, random access memory RAM, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, etc., various media that can store program code.
应理解,本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should be understood that the term "and/or" as used herein simply describes an association between related objects, indicating that three possible relationships exist. For example, "A and/or B" can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, or B exists alone. Furthermore, the character "/" as used herein indicates that the related objects are in an "or" relationship.
本申请实施例中出现的“多个”是指两个或两个以上。The term "plurality" used in the embodiments of the present application refers to two or more.
本申请中“等于”可以与“小于”连用,也可以与“大于”连用,但不同时与“小于”和“大于”连用。当“等于”与“小于”连用时,适用于“小于”所采用的技术方案。当“等于”与“大于”连用时,适用于“大于”所采用的技术方案。In this application, "equal to" can be used in conjunction with "less than" or "greater than", but not with both "less than" and "greater than". When "equal to" is used in conjunction with "less than", the technical solution used for "less than" applies. When "equal to" is used in conjunction with "greater than", the technical solution used for "greater than" applies.
本申请实施例中出现的第一、第二等描述,仅作示意与区分描述对象之用,没有次序之分,也不表示本申请实施例中对设备个数的特别限定,不能构成对本申请实施例的任何限制。The first, second, etc. descriptions appearing in the embodiments of this application are only for illustration and distinction of the description objects. There is no order, nor does it indicate any special limitation on the number of devices in the embodiments of this application, and cannot constitute any limitation on the embodiments of this application.
虽然本申请披露如上,但本申请并非限定于此。任何本领域技术人员,在不脱离本申请的精神和范围内,均可作各种更动与修改,因此本申请的保护范围应当以权利要求所限定的范围为准。Although the present application is disclosed as above, the present application is not limited thereto. Any person skilled in the art may make various changes and modifications without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. Therefore, the scope of protection of the present application shall be based on the scope defined by the claims.
Claims (25)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN202410178154.3 | 2024-02-08 | ||
| CN202410178154.3A CN120499693A (en) | 2024-02-08 | 2024-02-08 | Communication method, communication device, and computer-readable storage medium |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025167872A1 true WO2025167872A1 (en) | 2025-08-14 |
Family
ID=96673901
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2025/075715 Pending WO2025167872A1 (en) | 2024-02-08 | 2025-02-05 | Communication method, communication apparatus and computer-readable storage medium |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (1) | CN120499693A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2025167872A1 (en) |
Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN113574807A (en) * | 2019-03-11 | 2021-10-29 | Lg电子株式会社 | Method for transmitting beam information by user equipment in wireless communication system and user equipment and base station supporting the same |
| CN115150903A (en) * | 2021-03-30 | 2022-10-04 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Beam switching method, device and storage medium |
| US20230171788A1 (en) * | 2021-09-13 | 2023-06-01 | Asustek Computer Inc. | Method and apparatus for beam selection and reporting in a wireless communication system |
| US20240007872A1 (en) * | 2021-03-25 | 2024-01-04 | Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. | Method for beam configuration information, terminal device, and network device |
-
2024
- 2024-02-08 CN CN202410178154.3A patent/CN120499693A/en active Pending
-
2025
- 2025-02-05 WO PCT/CN2025/075715 patent/WO2025167872A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN113574807A (en) * | 2019-03-11 | 2021-10-29 | Lg电子株式会社 | Method for transmitting beam information by user equipment in wireless communication system and user equipment and base station supporting the same |
| US20240007872A1 (en) * | 2021-03-25 | 2024-01-04 | Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. | Method for beam configuration information, terminal device, and network device |
| CN115150903A (en) * | 2021-03-30 | 2022-10-04 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Beam switching method, device and storage medium |
| US20230171788A1 (en) * | 2021-09-13 | 2023-06-01 | Asustek Computer Inc. | Method and apparatus for beam selection and reporting in a wireless communication system |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN120499693A (en) | 2025-08-15 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| EP3583803B1 (en) | Method and user equipment for performing initial beam alignment during random access (rach) procedure | |
| TWI732416B (en) | Beam failure recovery method, terminal, base station and computer readable storage medium | |
| EP3539320B1 (en) | Inter-frequency measurements on fs3 scells | |
| JP2023139103A (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting lte waveform in shared spectrum by carrier sensing | |
| US10694392B2 (en) | Terminal device, base station device, and method | |
| CN113498583A (en) | Beam management using channel state information prediction | |
| US20230121925A1 (en) | Cell Quality Derivation Configuration | |
| CN115280829A (en) | Method and apparatus for beam management reporting | |
| EP3432678B1 (en) | Device and method of configuring a secondary node and reporting in dual connectivity | |
| JPWO2016072221A1 (en) | User terminal, radio base station, and radio communication method | |
| JPWO2016182046A1 (en) | User terminal and wireless communication method | |
| CN112399461A (en) | Method and apparatus for measuring cell quality | |
| US12470961B2 (en) | Enhanced procedure for early measurement reporting | |
| US20230081073A1 (en) | Resource determining method and apparatus | |
| JP2017228815A (en) | Base station apparatus, terminal apparatus and method | |
| US20250097790A1 (en) | Communication system | |
| WO2025167872A1 (en) | Communication method, communication apparatus and computer-readable storage medium | |
| WO2025167874A1 (en) | Communication method, communication apparatus, and computer-readable storage medium | |
| CN120499686A (en) | Beam switching method, communication device and storage medium | |
| CN120512683A (en) | Communication method, communication device, and computer-readable storage medium | |
| WO2023273935A1 (en) | Method for receiving downlink control information, method for sending information and related apparatus | |
| GB2632155A (en) | Declaration of sidelink radio link failure in sidelink carrier aggregation | |
| CN120825784A (en) | Communication method, communication device, and computer-readable storage medium | |
| KR20170042318A (en) | Use of blank subframes for d2d |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 25751472 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |